manual autodesk impression 3

Autodesk Impression 3

User’s Guide

March 2009

© 2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not bereproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. TrademarksThe following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December,3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCADLearning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, AutodeskInsight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch,AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner,Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next>(design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio,Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF,Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax,Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, InventorLT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox,MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall,Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ,Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo),SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, VisualLandscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries:Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA(design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. DisclaimerTHIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMSALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY ORFITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Published by:Autodesk, Inc.111 Mclnnis ParkwaySan Rafael, CA 94903, USA

Contents

Chapter 1 What is Impression? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Chapter 2 How Impression Works with Other Products . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Chapter 3 System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Chapter 4 Resources to Help You Learn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Resource Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15How to Use Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Procedures: How to Use Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Chapter 5 Communicate with Autodesk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Send Feedback and Get Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Use the Communication Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Procedures: Use the Communication Center . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Chapter 6 Install Impression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Procedures: Install Impression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Chapter 7 Remove Impression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

iii

Procedures: Remove Impression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Chapter 8 Open, Import, and Save Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Tips for Preparing Drawings for Impression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Prepare Drawings Created in Revit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Open a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Procedures: Open a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Import Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Procedures: Import Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51How Data Changes in Impression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

About Object Clipping and Masking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Procedures: About Object Clipping and Masking . . . . . . 57

File Format Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Content Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Save an Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Procedures: Save an Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Chapter 9 Sketches, Layers, and Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75How Sketches, Layers, and Objects Interact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Define Sketches and Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Procedures: Define Sketches and Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Organize with Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Create Layers and Layer Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Procedures: Create Layers and Layer Groups . . . . . . . . . 86

Use Layer Sequence to Control Draw Order . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Procedures: Use Layer Sequence to Control Draw

Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Use Auto Layer to Consolidate Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Procedures: Use Auto Layer to Consolidate Styles . . . . . . 95Pack Layers to Improve Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Procedures: Pack Layers to Improve Performance . . . . . . 101

Chapter 10 Select Geometry and Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Select and Display Layers and Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Procedures: Select and Display Layers and Sketches . . . . . . . 108Select Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Procedures: Select Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Chapter 11 Navigate the Canvas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Pan to Shift the Canvas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Procedures: Pan to Shift the Canvas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Zoom to Change Magnification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Procedures: Zoom to Change Magnification . . . . . . . . . . . 121

iv | Contents

Chapter 12 Display Information About Your Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Procedures: Display Information About Your Drawing . . . . . . . . . 127

Chapter 13 Apply Appearance Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129How Style Sets Are Organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Procedures: How Style Sets Are Organized . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Apply an Appearance Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Procedures: Apply an Appearance Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Change Strokes Simultaneously . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Procedures: Change Strokes Simultaneously . . . . . . . . . . . 147Match Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Procedures: Match Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Work with Style Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Procedures: Work with Style Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Import Styles and Style Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Procedures: Import Styles and Style Elements . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Chapter 14 Create and Modify Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Construct Custom Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Create a Custom Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Procedures: Create a Custom Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Set Stroke Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Overview: Types of Stroke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Create and Modify Strokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Set Fill Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Overview: Types of Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Create and Modify Standard Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Create and Modify Compound Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Set Effect Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Overview: Effect Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Add and Modify Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

How Complex Styles Affect Program Performance . . . . . . . . 195Build Styles in the Style Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Use the Style Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Procedures: Use the Style Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Apply and Modify Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Procedures: Apply and Modify Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Adjust the Style Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Procedures: Adjust the Style Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Chapter 15 Retain and Share Stylizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Update CAD Geometry When the Source Changes . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Overview: How CAD Update Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Update the CAD Geometry in Your Illustration . . . . . . . . . . 220

Contents | v

Procedures: Update Your Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . 223Review Updates to CAD Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Procedures: Review Updates to CAD Geometry . . . . . . . 227Share Styles with Other Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Procedures: Share Styles with Other Drawings . . . . . . . . . . 230

Chapter 16 Draw Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Draw Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Tips on Drawing Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Draw a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Procedures: Draw a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Draw a Rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Procedures: Draw a Rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235Draw an Ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Procedures: Draw an Ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Draw a Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Procedures: Draw a Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240Draw Splines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

About Splines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Draw a Spline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Procedures: Draw a Spline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Change the Shape of a Spline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Procedures: Change the Shape of a Spline . . . . . . . . . 252Draw Freehand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Draw a Freehand Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Procedures: Draw a Freehand Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Modify a Freehand Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258Procedures: Modify a Freehand Path . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Chapter 17 Add Fill to Closed Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263About Area Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263Insert Area Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Procedures: Insert Area Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Modify Area Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Procedures: Modify Area Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Work with Area Fill Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Procedures: Work with Area Fill Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Chapter 18 Add Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291Create Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Procedures: Create Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292Import and Paste Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Procedures: Import and Paste Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295Modify Text Content and Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

vi | Contents

Procedures: Modify Text Content and Format . . . . . . . . . . 298Scale Text and Reset Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Procedures: Scale Text and Reset Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Chapter 19 Reposition and Resize Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305Move Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Procedures: Move Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306Rotate Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Procedures: Rotate Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309Scale Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Procedures: Scale Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311Align Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Align an Object to a Point or Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Procedures: Align a Single Object to a Point or Axis . . . . 313

Align a Set of Objects in a Row or Column . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Procedures: Align a Set of Objects Along an Axis . . . . . . 317

Distribute Geometry Evenly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318Procedures: Distribute Geometry Evenly . . . . . . . . . . 320

Adjoin Edges of Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322Procedures: Adjoin Edges of Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Chapter 20 Copy, Cut, and Paste Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Copy, Cut, and Paste within Impression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Procedures: Copy, Cut, and Paste within Impression . . . . . . . 328Paste to and from Other Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Procedures: Paste to and from Other Applications . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 21 Make Corrections and Deletions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331Procedures: Make Corrections and Deletions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

Chapter 22 Work with Blocks and Grouped Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333About Blocks and Object Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333Save and Reuse Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

About Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334How Block Sets Are Organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Procedures: How Block Sets Are Organized . . . . . . . . . 341Insert and Remove Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Procedures: Insert and Remove Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . 344Create Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Procedures: Create Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348Move, Resize, and Redefine Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

Procedures: Move, Resize, and Redefine Blocks . . . . . . . 352Edit Block Geometry and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Procedures: Edit Block Geometry and Styles . . . . . . . . 362

Contents | vii

Substitute Block References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365Procedures: Substitute Block References . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Share Block Libraries and Substitution Maps . . . . . . . . . . . 370Procedures: Share Block Libraries and Substitution

Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372Create Object Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

Procedures: Create Object Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Chapter 23 Prepare Your Layout and Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377Adjust Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

Procedures: Adjust Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378Scale and Position the Printed Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

Procedures: Scale and Position the Printed Image . . . . . . . . . 379Print Your Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

Procedures: Print Your Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

Chapter 24 Share Files and Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383Convert to Another Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

Procedures: Convert to Another Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

Chapter 25 Set the Document Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387Set Canvas Size and Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

Procedures: Set Canvas Size and Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . 388Set Default Unit Type and Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

Procedures: Set Default Unit Type and Scale . . . . . . . . . . . 389

Chapter 26 Use Snaps, Shortcuts, and Other Drawing Aids . . . . . . . . . 391Snap to Points on Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

Procedures: Snap to Points on Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394Constrain Cursor Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

Procedures: Constrain Cursor Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395Assign Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

Procedures: Assign Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396Set Rollover Highlighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

Procedures: Set Rollover Highlighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399Turn Off and Restore Information Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

Procedures: Turn Off and Restore Information DialogBoxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

Chapter 27 Work with Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403Set Palette Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

Procedures: Set Palette Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405Modify Content Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

viii | Contents

Procedures: Modify Content Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408Resize and Hide Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

Procedures: Resize and Hide Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411Organize Content in Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

Procedures: Organize Content in Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414

Chapter 28 Improve Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417Drawing Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417Hide Elements to Quicken Program Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

Procedures: Hide Elements to Quicken Program Response . . . . 424Tune the Interface for Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

Procedures: Tune the Interface for Performance . . . . . . . . . 426

Chapter 29 Troubleshoot Impression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

Chapter 30 Align and Distribute Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

Chapter 31 Block Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447Block Layers Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

Block Layer Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457Block Layer Group Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459

Chapter 32 Block Substitution Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462Block Substitution Conflicts Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463

Chapter 33 Blocks Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465Block Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474Delete Block Confirmation Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479Redefine Block Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480Search Blocks Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481Export Blocks Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483Import Blocks/ Open Libraries Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486Block Properties Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488

Chapter 34 Color Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493New Color Book Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497Rename Color Book Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498Delete Color Book Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499Import Color Book Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499Export Color Book Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502

Contents | ix

Chapter 35 Communication Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506Communication Center: Initial Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506Communication Center: Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 507

Chapter 36 Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511

Chapter 37 Document Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515

Chapter 38 Drawing Performance Tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519Pack Layers (Drawing Performance Tuner) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520Optimize Style Display (Drawing Performance Tuner) . . . . . . . . . 523

Chapter 39 Global Stroke Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527

Chapter 40 Import Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529

Chapter 41 Layers Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533Sketch Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540Layer Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541Layer Group Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542Custom Scale Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543

Chapter 42 New Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545

Chapter 43 Open Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549DWF Import Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552

Import Options (DWF Import Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554Mapping Options (DWF Import Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555File Clean-up (DWF Import Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557One-Layer Drawings (DWF Import Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . 559Pack Layers (DWF Import Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561

DWG Import Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563What to Open (DWG Import Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566

Custom Canvas Size Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569Style Assignments (DWG Import Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571Import Options (DWG Import Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573

3D Import Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575Mapping Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577

File Clean-up (DWG Import Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579

x | Contents

Pack Layers (DWG Import Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581DWF Password Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583Select a Viewport Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583

Chapter 44 Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585General (Options Dialog Box) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586Files (Options Dialog Box) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589Paths (Options Dialog Box) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591Keyboard Shortcuts (Options Dialog Box) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

Shortcuts (Options Dialog Box) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594Sticky Keys (Options Dialog Box) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596

Object Snap Settings (Options Dialog Box) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598Auto Layer Settings (Options Dialog Box) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

Chapter 45 Print Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605Print Preview Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606

Chapter 46 Properties Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607

Chapter 47 Save As Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611

Chapter 48 Style Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619Fill Properties (Style Editor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627Stroke Properties (Style Editor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647Outline Stroke Properties (Style Editor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657Effect Properties (Style Editor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662Create New Stroke Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666Create New Fill Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669Create New Compound Fill Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671Create New Outline Stroke Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673Add Effect Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676Resize Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678Modify Style Color Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681Rotate Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682Save Style Element Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684

Chapter 49 Styles Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687

Contents | xi

Search Styles Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698Export Styles Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701Import Styles/Open Libraries Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703Style Library Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707

Introduction (Style Library Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708Starting Style (Style Library Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710Color Modification Rules (Style Library Wizard) . . . . . . . . . 714Name and Location (Style Library Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . 717

Chapter 50 Text Properties Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719

Chapter 51 Toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723Align Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724Area Fill Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727Ellipse Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733Freehand Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734Layer Selection Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736Line Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741Match Properties Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742Object Selection Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744Pan Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748Polygon Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749Power Fill Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750Rectangle Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756Spline Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757Text Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761Zoom Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763

Chapter 52 Transform Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767

Chapter 53 Update CAD Geometry Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771CAD Update Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793

xii | Contents

What is Impression?

Autodesk Impression software converts precision drawings into eye-catching design illustrationsby applying appearance styles that simulate everything from pencil-drawn sketches tohand-colored renderings.

1

1

Open or Import DWG Files

Starting with a DWG file (such as an AutoCAD drawing) or a DWF file, you can open theImpression illustration with a pencil or marker stroke already applied. Then, in Impression,apply the styles to layers or apply strokes and fills to individual objects and areas.

You can even import and stylize 3D views.

2 | Chapter 1 What is Impression?

Stylize the Drawing

Achieve variety by using the preset styles provided with Impression. Once you becomecomfortable, you can develop your own style sets. Vary the appearance by changing suchsettings as stroke width, color, and overshoot. Specify outline strokes or create fill stylesthat include strokes, textures, or gradients.

Add effects such as roughened edges.

| 3

Use the layer style to stylize all objects on a layer with the same appearance style or insertarea fill within the boundaries of closed areas.


Insert area fill using several methods:

■ Use the Area Fill tool to insert the fill style you select into closed areas. This option givesyou a preview of the areas that can be filled.

■ Drag a style swatch from the Styles palette to a closed area in your illustration for quickerfilling of large areas.

■ Use the Power Fill tool to simultaneously fill multiple areas based on such criteria asshape, layer, CAD color, and lineweight.

| 5

Create Geometry and Text

Insert text, draw your own shapes, and add drop shadows.

Use Blocks to Save Time

Create and insert new blocks, or quickly substitute inserted blocks by dragging stylizedentourage onto blocks that have already been inserted.

Modify block appearance by updating the block styles stored in the Styles palette.


To quickly update both block geometry and styles, open the Block Editor. In the Block Editorworkspace, you can use the same tools that are available in the standard interface to modifythe block definition. Update all block insertions by saving the block.

Share the Results

When you are finished, share your illustration by saving it in a variety of standard formats.

| 7

How Impression Workswith Other Products

Impression applies the hand-drawn look to drawings created in other products. Once you aresatisfied with the results, you can save your Impression drawing in a variety of formats.

2

9

Supported Formats from Other Products

Impression can open 2D DWF™ files and DWG files created with the following products.

Product

AutoCAD® 2010 (including prior releases)

AutoCAD LT® 2010 (including prior releases)

AutoCAD® Architecture 2010 (including prior releases)

Revit® Architecture 2010 and the Revit family of products (includ-ing prior releases)

AutoCAD® Civil 3D® 2010 (including prior releases)

AutoCAD®Map 3D 2010 (including prior releases)

Autodesk MapGuide® Enterprise 2010 and Autodesk MapGuide®

Studio 2010 (including prior releases)

Autodesk® Inventor™ 2010 and the Inventor family of products(including prior releases)

AutoCAD® Mechanical 2010 (including prior releases)

File Formats That Can Be SavedYou can save Impression drawings in the following file formats.

File ExtensionFile Format

BMP, DIBBasic Multilingual Plane

DWFDesign Web Format

EPSEncapsulated Postscript

IRFImpression Rendering Format

JPEG, JPGJoint Photographic Experts Group

PDFPortable Document Format

10 | Chapter 2 How Impression Works with Other Products

File ExtensionFile Format

PNGPortable Network Graphics

PSDPhotoShop

| 11

System Requirements

The following requirements are recommended for effective use of Autodesk® Impression 3.

Minimum System Requirements

NotesRequirementHard-ware/Soft-ware

For more inform-ation on Mi-

OperatingSystem

■ Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business SP1

■ Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise SP1crosoft Windows

■ Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium SP1 XP SP3 versions,see http://mi-■ Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate SP1crosoft.com/win-

■ Microsoft Windows XP Home SP2 dows/products/win-■ Microsoft Windows XP Home SP3 dowsxp/sp3/de-

fault.mspx.■ Microsoft Windows XP Professional SP2

For more inform-ation on Mi-■ Microsoft Windows XP Professional SP3crosoft WindowsVista versions, seehttp://mi-crosoft.com/win-dowsvista/ver-sions.

Processor ■ Intel® Pentium® 4 processor, 3.0 GHz or higher(recommended)

■ Laptop computers: Intel or AMD® processor1.7 GHz or greater

2+ GBRAM

More space is re-quired for installa-tion.

2+ GB or greaterHard diskspace

3

13

http://microsoft.com/windows/products/windowsxp/sp3/default.mspx





http://microsoft.com/windowsvista/versions




NotesRequirementHard-ware/Soft-ware

1280 x 1024 32-bit color video display adapter(true color)

Video

To ensure optim-al performance

128+ MB DirectX® 9.0c application programminginterface capable graphics card supporting pixelshader 2.0 or greater.Recommended cards include:

Graphicscard

with Impression,download thelatest video driver■ NVIDIA Quadro® FX mobile solutionsfrom the website

■ NVIDIA GeForce® FX 5, 6 and 7 graphics pro-cessor families (for example, 6600 and 7800)

of the card manu-facturer.

■ ATI Radeon™ X series graphics cards (for ex-ample, x300, x600, x1300)

■ ATI Radeon 9500 and later

■ ATI FireGL™ V3600, V5600, V7600, V8600, andV8650 or newer

SP1 or greaterMicrosoft® Internet Explorer® 6.0Web browser

NOTE Adobe Flash Player is not installed by default. If a suitable version of Flash is notcurrently installed on your system, a message requests that you download it fromAdobe’s website. Flash is required to view the Quick Start Guide.

14 | Chapter 3 System Requirements

Resources to Help YouLearn

How do you get information about Impression? Several online resources are available to helpyou get up to speed quickly.

Resource OverviewWhether you are just learning Impression or are ready for more in-depthinformation, it is helpful to understand which resources provide the informationyou need.

Jump Start Tour

The first time you opened Impression the Jump Start Tour panel is displayed atthe bottom of the screen.

4

15

If you have not already done so, take a few minutes to step through theexamples and learn the basics. Review quick animations, or follow theon-screen instructions to try it out for yourself. You can also revisit the JumpStart Tour later.

Help menu ➤ Jump Start Tour

Quick Start Guide

To get a first look at Impression features, step through Quick Start: Impression.

16 | Chapter 4 Resources to Help You Learn

For a quick overview, click through the animated graphics that demonstratehow to give your precision drawings the hand-drawn look.

Help menu ➤ Quick Start Guide

You can also open Quick Start topics from the Help system. Look for topicswhose names start with “Quick Start.”

Impression Help System

Once you have a basic familiarity with Impression, the Help system is usefulfor obtaining more detailed information. Become familiar with how Help isorganized so you can quickly find general descriptions, procedures, detailsabout dialog boxes and palettes, or definitions of terms. For more informationabout finding information in Help, see How to Use Help.

Help menu ➤ Help

Readme

Readme contains late-breaking information about the product. Review it quicklybefore you start using Impression to see what information applies to you.

Resource Overview | 17

Information on the Web

For an index to frequently asked questions and information about productsupport, go to http://www.autodesk.com/impression.

Prompts on the Status Bar

The status bar at the bottom of the Impression window displays informationabout how to use the tools in the Toolbox. Other information displayed onthe status bar includes the current style, layer, and zoom level. For moreinformation, see Display Information About Your Drawing.

Sample Files and Other Web Resources

You can download and study sample Impression files, available on the Web.New content is added to this site periodically:

http://impression.autodesk.com/content/

To communicate with other Impression users, go to the Impression Communitysite:

http://impression.autodesk.com/impression-community

Printable User Guide

A printable version of the Help system in PDF format is available in theImpression Help folder.

How to Use HelpLearn to find information quickly in the Help system.


http://www.autodesk.com/impression

http://impression.autodesk.com/content/

http://impression.autodesk.com/impression-community

How Information is Organized

The Help system has the following types of information:

■ Quick Start topics. Provides links to Quick Start: Impression from relatedareas of Help.

■ Quick Links. Displays a list with links to related topics, procedures, anddialog boxes.To see the list, click the expansion triangle.

The expanded list shows where to find additional information pertainingto the current topic.

How to Use Help | 19

■ General description of features. Describes Impression features and howthey work.

■ Procedures topics. Gives step-by-step instructions for accomplishing varioustasks.

■ Interface Reference. Provides detailed descriptions about options, buttons,and shortcut menus that are available in palettes, dialog boxes, and otherinterface features.

■ Glossary. Defines Impression terms.

Search for Information

Use the Contents and Search tabs to find the information you need.

■ Contents tab. Serves as the “table of contents” that shows theorganizational structure of the Help topics. If you find a topic by using theSearch tab and want to browse related topics, click the Contents tab.

■ Index tab. Displays an alphabetical list of keywords related to topics inHelp.

■ Search tab. Finds topics that contain the keywords you enter.


You can narrow your search by entering your question using the followingguidelines

Ways to Narrow Your Information Search

ExampleTo findUse this method

“Style Editor”The exact phrase as writtenin the quotes.

Phrase written in“quotes”

style AND editorTopics that have both of thekeywords.

AND

style OR editorTopics that have either of thekeywords.

OR

style NEAR editorTopics in which one word isclose to the other word.

NEAR

style NOT editorTopics that contain the firstword, but not the second

NOT

.

How to Use Help | 21

Get Information about a Palette or Dialog Box

If you are working in a palette or dialog box and want detailed informationabout what the options are and how to use them, you can

■ Press F1 to open a related topic.

■ Press the Info button in the title bar or within the palette or dialog box.

Procedures: How to Use Help

To search for topics in Help

1 Click Help menu ➤ Help.

2 If the navigation pane (with the Contents and Search tabs) is not visible,click Show.

3 Click the Search tab.

4 In the text box, enter one or more keywords and press ENTER. You canfilter the search by entering the following operators between words:

■ AND. Both words are in the topic.

■ OR. Either of the words are in the topic.

■ NEAR. The words are near each other in the topic.

■ NOT. The first word is in the topic, but the second word is not in thetopic.

A list of topics is displayed.

NOTE If you do not find a relevant topic, try entering different keywords.

5 Click a list item to display the topic.

Alternate procedure: Press F1.


To learn about palettes and dialog boxes

1 In the palette or dialog box, take one of the following actions:

■ Press F1.

■ Click the Information button (if available) in the palette or dialogbox.

The Help system opens with information about the current palette ordialog box.

2 To find shortcuts to more information about that interface element, clickthe expansion triangle next to Quick Links: Tell Me More.

Procedures: How to Use Help | 23

Communicate withAutodesk

If you have a question, problem, or comment regarding Impression, you can communicatewith Autodesk in several ways.

Send Feedback and Get SupportIf the program encounters a problem and closes unexpectedly, you can send anerror report to help Autodesk diagnose problems with the software.

Report Errors

An error report form is displayed automatically when an unexpected terminationoccurs. It includes information about the state of your system at the time theerror occurred.

You can add more information, such as what you were doing at the time of theerror. This detailed information from you helps Autodesk pinpoint and fix thecause of the problem.

For information about the Autodesk privacy policy, seehttp://www.autodesk.com/privacy.

Submit Ideas for Documentation

Send Autodesk comments about what you like and dislike about thedocumentation. Click the Please Send Us Your Comment About This Page linkat the end of most topics to make suggestions about the topic. Although thislink does not provide technical support, Autodesk appreciates your ideas abouthow to help you learn.

5

25

http://www.autodesk.com/privacy

Send Feedback About Impression

Your ideas are important. To forward your suggestions for future versions ofthe product, use the Send Feedback option on the Help menu. The feedbackform is also available at http://www.autodesk.com/impression-feedback.

Help menu ➤ Send Feedback

Participate in the Customer Involvement Program

The Customer Involvement Program (CIP) helps the Impression team analyzehow customers use Impression. It works by capturing anonymous informationabout system configuration and the program commands and options that youuse. Knowing the most frequently accessed parts of the program guidesdevelopment of new features and points to problem areas.

When the Customer Involvement Program is turned on, it becomes active forany Autodesk CIP-enabled products on your computer.

Help menu ➤ Customer Involvement Program

Use the Communication CenterThe Communication Center provides up-to-date product information, softwareupdates, product support announcements, and other product-relatedannouncements. You can also use it to send comments to Autodesk.

Quick Links: Tell me more…

How To: ■ Procedures: Use the CommunicationCenter

Related Informa-tion:

■ Communicate with Autodesk

Interface Refer-ence:

■ Communication Center

Information Provided by Communication Center

The radar button at the right end of the Impression status bar is your link tothe Communication Center.

26 | Chapter 5 Communicate with Autodesk

http://www.autodesk.com/impression-feedback

It provides the following information:

■ General information about Autodesk and its products

■ A forum for providing feedback to Autodesk

■ Product support bulletins

■ Subscription information

■ Notification when articles and tips about using the product have beenposted

When new information is available, an exclamation mark (!) is displayed onthe Communication Center button. A balloon message also communicatesthe presence of new information. If you do not want to receive thesenotifications, you can turn off the notification.

You specify your country or region, set the frequency of communication, andindicate the type of information you want to receive. The type of informationyou receive also depends on whether you have a fully licensed version ofImpression or the trial product.

You can also send comments to Autodesk from the Communication Center.

For information about the Autodesk privacy policy, seehttp://www.autodesk.com/privacy.

Procedures: Use the Communication Center

To set up the Communication Center for the first time

1 Click the Communication Center icon located in the tray on the rightside of the status bar.

2 In the Communication Center, click Settings.

3 Under Country/Region, click the country in which your product islicensed.

NOTE If you do not want to receive Communication Center notifications,clear the Enable Balloon Notification for New Announcements check box.

Procedures: Use the Communication Center | 27

http://www.autodesk.com/privacy

4 Under Check for New Content, select one of the following options toindicate how often you want to receive notifications:

■ Daily

■ Weekly

■ Monthly

■ On Demand

5 Click Apply.

Impression status bar:

To display Communication Center information


2 Click Refresh Content.


To set the frequency of messages from Communication Center



3 Under Check for New Content, select one of the following options toindicate how often you want to receive notifications:

■ Daily

■ Weekly

■ Monthly

■ On Demand

4 Click Apply.


28 | Chapter 5 Communicate with Autodesk

To customize Communication Center options



3 In the Configuration Settings dialog box, choose the settings and optionsthat you want to use. Click Apply.

4 Click OK to close the Configuration Settings dialog box. Then, close theCommunication Center window.


Procedures: Use the Communication Center | 29

Install Impression

Impression is quick and easy to install.

Prepare to Install

Impression is available as a stand-alone (individual version) program only. The installationprocess is relatively quick. Before you start, however, ask yourself the following questions:

■ Does your computer meet the system requirements? See the Impression Readme for a listof minimum hardware and software requirements. Make sure that your computer canhandle the high-quality graphics by Impression.The listed disk space requirements account for certain programs such as .NET or ManagedDirectX, which might already be on your computer. If you are unsure of your currentcapabilities, click the Disk Cost button during installation.

■ Do you have administrative permissions to the computer where you are installingImpression? You need these permissions to install the program, but not to run the programafter it has been installed.

■ Have you reviewed the Readme file? You have the option of reviewing Readme immediatelyafter you install the program.

Download Impression

The limited-time trial version makes it convenient for you to experiment with Impressionbefore you buy it. Three hours in advance, you receive a warning that the trial is about toexpire.

When your time runs out, you receive online notification. To learn more about how to obtaina full license of Autodesk Impression 3, visit the Impression product page on the Autodeskwebsite for your locale.

Install the Product

Impression is installed as a stand-alone application for both trial and permanent installations.A wizard walks you through the installation.

6

31

When the installation is complete, you can immediately review the Readme file forlate-breaking product information.

You can start the program by clicking the Impression icon on the desktop.

NOTE In order to install Impression, you must have administrative permissions for the computer.

You can cancel an installation at any point by clicking the Cancel button on the screen. Allsettings and updated files are restored to their original state.

Procedures: Install ImpressionTo download Impression from the Web

1 Access the download site.

2 Click the Download button.

The installation EXE file is copied to the location you specify.

3 See the following procedure to install the program: To install Impressionfrom a downloaded file.

To install Impression from a downloaded file

1 Make sure that your computer complies with the system requirementsdescribed in Readme.

2 Uninstall any previous versions of Impression (including alpha or betaversions). See To uninstall Impression.

3 Close all other open applications.

4 Find the folder that contains the download file and double-clickImpression3_Install.exe.

5 Follow the instructions in the Setup wizard.

When the product has been successfully installed, you can review theReadme file immediately.

32 | Chapter 6 Install Impression

To install Impression from the CD

1 Make sure that your computer complies with the system requirementsdescribed in Readme.

2 Close all other open applications.

3 Uninstall any previous versions of Impression (such as alpha or betaversions). See To uninstall Impression.

4 Insert the Impression CD into the computer CD-ROM drive.

5 Follow the on-screen instructions in the Setup wizard.

When the product has been successfully installed, you can choose toreview the Readme file.

To use ImpressionStart Impression using one of the following methods:

■ Double-click the Autodesk Impression 3 icon on your computer desktop.

■ Click Start menu ➤ Programs ➤ Autodesk ➤ Autodesk Impression 3.

■ Click the Start button ➤ All Programs ➤ Autodesk ➤ AutodeskImpression 3.

Procedures: Install Impression | 33

Remove Impression

Follow standard Microsoft Windows® operating system procedures to remove Impressionfrom your computer.

When you uninstall Impression, its components are removed from your computer. Illustrationsyou have created using Impression are not removed.

Procedures: Remove ImpressionTo uninstall Impression

1 In the Windows Control Panel, double-click Add/Remove Programs.

2 In the Add/Remove Programs window, select Autodesk Impression 3. ClickRemove.

3 In the message box that is displayed, click Yes.

7

35

Open, Import, and SaveContent

You start most Impression illustrations by opening or importing a drawing from anotherapplication. Then you can save your stylized design illustration in a variety of formats.

Tips for Preparing Drawings for ImpressionYou can take several steps to prepare the original drawing for rendering inImpression.

Your stylized Impression illustration usually has a different purpose than themore precise drawing from which it is derived. Suppose that dimensions anddetails from the original drawing are not required for your presentation version.To make the best transition from the original drawing to Impression, considerthe following guidelines:

■ Turn off or freeze all layers that contain unneeded detail, such as dimensionsor text. You can set up a layout that contains viewports set up for the viewsyou plan to import into Impression.

■ Position viewports as you want them to appear in the Impression illustration.When opened in Impression, each view and viewport is converted to a sketch.Place the viewports in the same relative location that you want thecorresponding sketch to occupy in the Impression illustration.

8

37

Viewport 1 retains its position when opened inImpression

■ Assign properties, such as color and lineweight by layer instead of byobject. Impression tracks the styles applied to each layer. If your originaldrawing changes, assigning color, lineweight, and linetype by layer savesyou time when you update changes in Impression.

■ Use plot styles or set up your source file so it works well with your standardCTB or STB files. Then select that plot style when you import or open thedrawing in Impression. This practice helps ensure that the linetypes,lineweights, and colors for the imported geometry are preserved inImpression.

■ With block insertions that require some variation, consider placing multipleinsertions of the same block. Then use the multiblock feature in Impressionto enable random variation of the inserted image. For example, this methodis useful for site plans that have a variety of trees and shrubbery. Membersof a multiblock that contains several types of vegetation randomly replacethe original block insertions.

38 | Chapter 8 Open, Import, and Save Content

■ For AutoCAD® Architecture files, use the Display Manager to hide surfacehatching of elevations and sections. You can also use theEXPORTTOAUTOCAD or the AECTOACAD command to convert objectsto a form that can be opened in Impression.

■ For drawings published to DWF format, turn on PUBLISHHATCH. Thissystem variable is available in products such as AutoCAD. It treats hatchpattern components as a single object instead of as individual lines. Thisvariable only affects drawings that are published to DWF format. It doesnot affect drawings that you print to DWF format.

Prepare Drawings Created in RevitYou can prepare drawings created with Revit-based products such as Revit®

Architecture 2009 to ensure that you get the results that you expect.

A three-dimensional Revit drawing is converted to a two-dimensional planewhen it is opened in Impression. You can then stylize the drawing to give ita hand-drawn look.

Prepare the Revit Drawing

The basic steps for preparing a Revit drawing are as follows:

1 Make a copy of the Revit file. Save the file locally to prevent accidentalmodification of the source drawing.

Prepare Drawings Created in Revit | 39

2 In that copy, prepare the view you want to stylize.

■ Create a view if necessary.

■ Delete any geometry that is not required for the illustration.

■ Set the rotation or viewpoint of the objects in the view.

3 Add the view to a new sheet.

4 Export the sheet to a DWG (preferred) or DWF format. This activitycreates three files:

■ Large DWG file representing the 3D model.

■ Smaller DWG file representing the view.

■ PCP file containing the plotter configuration files.

Open and Stylize the Revit Drawing in Impression

After you have exported your Revit file, as described in the previous section,open and stylize the view in Impression.

1 Open the smaller DWG or DWF file that contains the view.

NOTE Specify a plot style as the file is opened in order to preserve informationabout how the original drawing was rendered.

2 Edit block styles, or explode blocks in order to apply styles directly. Manymaterial textures are converted to blocks in Impression. To applystylizations, do one or more of the following

■ In the Styles palette, under Block Styles, select the block style. Thenedit its settings in the Style Editor.

■ Explode the block. Then set the resulting objects to be bylayer (toinherit the layer style) or apply the style as an object override.

3 Edit textures that are imported as hatch fills. Some materials are importedas hatch fills, which can be edited just as you would edit any other hatchstyle.

4 Apply styles and area fills to finish the drawing. See Apply AppearanceStyles and Add Fill to Closed Areas.


NOTE When Impression imports 3D views, “hidden” objects are deleted orclipped. To remove objects in the foreground, you can update the originaldrawing and then update the CAD geometry.

Open a DrawingThe drawings you open in Impression usually originate in other applications.You can also start a drawing from scratch using an Impression template andthen import additional content.

Overview: The Design Illustration Workflow

The basic workflow for opening and stylizing an Impression drawing is asfollows:

1 Open the drawing in Impression using one of the following methods:

■ Open or import a DWG or DWF file. In the import wizard, specify theview, stroke type, scale ratio, and other settings.

■ Use the Export to Impression feature, available in someAutoCAD-based products. Specify the view and stroke type.

2 In Impression, use the Global Stroke dialog box to adjust the stroke typeand stroke weight as needed. This feature affects all saved styles andblocks.

3 Apply styles to the geometry.

4 If the source drawing changes, update CAD geometry to update thosechanges in Impression.

Open a 2D Drawing from Another Source

When you open a two-dimensional (2D) drawing created in another source,its contents undergo a conversion, as described in Content Conversions.

NOTE You cannot open more than one drawing in the same Impression session.To open two drawings at the same time, first double-click the Impression icon onthe desktop to open a second instance of Impression. Then open the seconddrawing.

Start by specifying a view, layout, viewport, or DWF page to convert to anImpression sketch. Upon opening or importing a drawing, you also specify

Open a Drawing | 41

how to apply appearance styles to the geometry. In the DWG Import Wizard,the following options work together to set the initial formatting of the objects:

■ Set the initial appearance. Retain plot style settings, specify a stroke style,or use a combination of settings.Specify plot style table settings. If a source DWG file uses a plot style, youcan retain the color, lineweight, and linetype settings in Impression. Choosebetween CTB and STB files. CTB files are color-dependent plot style tablesin which color assignments map to output colors, lineweights, andlinetypes. STB files are named plot style tables that assign properties directlyto objects and layers.

Set a stroke type. Apply a specified stroke to all incoming geometry. Thismethod is the quickest way to achieve a consistent, hand-drawn lookwithout doing additional work.

Specify both a stroke and a plot style table to apply a stroke style (such aspencil) while retaining lineweight and linetype from the original drawing.

■ Set the drawing unit display type. In the source drawing, the unit ofmeasurement represents the real-world value of each drawing unit (suchas an inch). As you open a drawing, you can change this measurement


type. The displayed measurements are recalculated to reflect the equivalentvalue in the new unit type.

■ Exclude or include layers that are frozen, turned off, or excluded fromplotting. By default, layers that were frozen, turned off, or have plottingturned off in the source drawing are excluded. This feature improvesperformance and keeps you from dealing with details that are unnecessaryfor your presentation illustration. If you do not have access to the originaldrawing, however, you can import frozen and turned off layers.

■ Exclude or include certain object types. If you do not need dimensions,leaders, or text objects in your design illustration, you can discard themas you open the drawing. You can also exclude hatches and replace themwith Impression fill styles.

■ Pack layers to improve performance. You can pack objects withcharacteristics such as the same style and consecutive draw order into asingle object to improve program performance. Unpack packed layers byclicking the Packed Layer icon on the Layers palette. For more information,see Pack Layers to Improve Performance.

Open a 3D Drawing with Hidden Lines Removed

When you open or import a three-dimensional (3D) or perspective drawing,Impression by default removes hidden lines. Except for perspective views, youcan alternatively open the drawing to show the wireframe lines.

You also have the option of hiding the edges where the 3D objects intersect.

Original object (left) and imported objects in Impression

A side-effect of selecting hidden line removal is that blocks, dimensions, andtables are exploded into their component parts and text is converted to outlinetext geometry.

Open a Drawing | 43

Three-dimensional objects such as solids or extrusions are treated as a single,connected object in Impression. When you select any segment of the imported3D object, the entire object is selected.

Solid object remains one 2Dobject in Impression

Impression discards any objects that are hidden, or obscured, by other 3Dobjects. However, partially hidden objects are clipped. That is, geometricobjects—including outline text and the components of exploded blocks, tables,and dimensions—are “broken” at the point where they pass behind othergeometry. The obscured sections are removed.

Source DWG: Text and 3D object


Impression: Imported text and 3Dobject

Impression: Clipped text (convertedto outline text) is moved

NOTE Object clipping also occurs when the original geometry extends beyondthe viewport in the original drawing. See About Object Clipping and Masking

Open a 3D Drawing to Display Wireframe Objects

You can also choose to open or import most 3D views with the objectsdisplayed as wireframe. (Perspective views are only opened with hidden linesremoved, however.) By setting the number of contour lines, you can adjustthe display of rounded objects.

Remove Hidden Lines off, with 2, 4, and 10 contourlines

When Remove Hidden Lines is off, blocks, text, and other complex objectsare not exploded, clipped, or masked.

Open a Drawing | 45

Open a New Drawing Using a Template

When you first set up an Impression illustration, you name the new drawing,specify the paper size, and set the unit of measurement and scale.

Most settings for new Impression drawings are based on the default template.This template is an “empty” Impression drawing. It contains standardgeometry, libraries of frequently used blocks and styles, and unit settings thatreflect the real-world scale of your drawing. Whenever you open a newdrawing, the drawing template is opened with a read-only status. Save it undera different name to save any changes made to your illustration.

By default, the drawing template is located in the Templates folder. Impressionprovides two templates for your use:

■ The startup_imperial.irf file provides unit settings in feet and inches.

■ The startup_metric.irf file provides unit settings in metric values.

You can modify either template or create additional templates. You specify adifferent default template in the Files area of the Options dialog box.

To open any drawing as a template without changing the default, use theOpen as Template option on the File menu. If you make changes, you areprompted to save the file under a different name.

Procedures: Open a Drawing

To open Impression

Do one of the following:

■ On the computer desktop, double-click the Autodesk Impression 3 icon.

■ In Windows Explorer, navigate to the Impression.exe file and double-clickit. By default, it is located at C: \Program Files\Autodesk Impression3\Impression.exe.

To open an Impression drawing

1 Click File menu ➤ Open.


2 In the Open dialog box, find and select a file with the .irf extension. ClickOpen.

NOTE The icons on the left side of the dialog box provide quick access tocommonly used files and their locations.

Alternate procedure: Press CTRL+O.

To open a recently opened Impression drawing

■ Click File menu ➤ Open Recent Files. Click the name of the file youwant to open.

NOTE You can change the number of files displayed on the Open RecentFiles list in the Options dialog box.

To open a drawing from Windows Explorer

1 Open Impression by double-clicking its icon on the desktop.

2 In Windows Explorer, find the file you want to open. Drag it onto theImpression canvas.

To open a DWG file in Impression


2 In the Open dialog box, find and select a file with the DWG extension.Click Open.

3 In the DWG Import Wizard, click Next to proceed through all the panels,or click the navigation list on the left to change specific settings.

4 Specify which layout, viewport, or model space view you want to open.

5 Specify how to assign styles when the drawing opens in Impression:

■ To match styles as closely as possible to a plot style table in theoriginal drawing: Select a file from the Plot Style Table list.

■ To specify a default stroke for all geometry: Select a stroke from theSet Stroke Type list.

■ To blend plot style settings with a default stroke: Select both a plotstyle and a default stroke.

Procedures: Open a Drawing | 47

6 If the Impression unit type differs from the unit type in the sourcedrawing, select a new unit type from the 1 Imported Unit = 1 list.

7 Specify other options to simplify the opened drawing and improveperformance.

8 Click Finish to open the drawing.


To open a DWF file in Impression


2 In the Open dialog box, find and select a file with the DWF extension.Click Open.

3 In the DWF Import Wizard, click Next to proceed through all the panels,or click the navigation list on the left to change specific settings.

4 For multiple-sheet DWF files only, select a sheet.

5 Select a stroke style (such as pencil).

6 Specify other options to simplify the opened DWF file and improveperformance.

7 If the DWF file is password-protected, the DWF Password dialog box isdisplayed. Enter the password and click OK.



To open a new Impression drawing

1 Click File menu ➤ New.

2 In the New dialog box, enter a name for the new drawing and specifythe canvas size, orientation, and output quality.

3 Click OK.

Alternate procedure: Press CTRL+N.

To modify the default template



2 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the Autodesk Impression 3\Templatesfolder. Click the template file you want to modify and click Open.

NOTE The default templates provided with impression includestartup_imperial.irf and startup_metric.irf.

3 Modify the template as needed. For example, you can include styles andblocks that you use frequently.

NOTE You can designate style or block sets to be displayed as libraries in theStyles and Blocks palettes. See To include a library in all new documents.

4 Click File menu ➤ Save As.

5 In the Save As dialog box, enter a new template name, if needed.

6 Click Save.

NOTE You can save any Impression file as a drawing template. For bestresults, save all templates to the Templates folder to make them easier tolocate.


To set a different default template

1 Click Edit menu ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog box, click Files.

3 In the Default Template box, enter the name of the Impression file youwant to use or click the Browse button to find and select it.

4 Click Apply or OK to save the changes.

To open a new drawing with a non-default template

1 Click File menu ➤ Open as Template.

2 In the Open dialog box, find and select a drawing to use as the drawingtemplate. Click Open.

3 Modify the drawing and click File ➤ Save As to save the changes.

4 In the Save As dialog box, enter a new name for the file and click OK.

Procedures: Open a Drawing | 49

To set the number of recently opened files displayed on the File menu



3 In the Number of Files Displayed box, enter the number of recently usedfiles to list on the File menu, up to 20.

4 In the Keep Files in History For box, enter the number of days that youwant to retain the list, up to 365.

5 Click Apply to save the changes.

To close an Impression drawing


■ Click File menu ➤ Exit.

■ Click the X at the top right corner of the application window.

Import ContentYou can import content contained in viewports, layouts, and DWF pages intoan open Impression drawing.

Import Drawings

When you import geometry from applications such as AutoCAD, the objectsare placed on Impression layers that correspond to the layers in the sourcedrawing. If no layers have the same name, Impression creates a new layer.

When you open or import a DWG file, you specify layouts, viewports, ormodel space views. (You cannot import named views.) If the drawing unitsin the imported drawing do not match the units in Impression, you cansynchronize them as you import.

If the imported drawing contains external references (xrefs), the Layers paletteindicates the name of the referenced drawing in brackets. For example, thenew Impression layer called <Carriage> DIM contains the objects that were onthe DIM layer in the externally referenced carriage.dwg drawing.

Import Other Types of Content

You can also import images, such as raster images and entourage, includingseveral types of file formats: IRF (Impression), DWF, BMP, GIF, JPG, PCX,


DCX, PSD, PNG, TGA, and TIF. Impression adds the imported images to theobjects on the current layer of the Impression drawing.

You can also import the following content into an Impression drawing:

■ Styles. See Import Styles and Style Elements.

■ Style maps. See Share Styles with Other Drawings.

■ Blocks and block substitution maps. See Share Block Libraries andSubstitution Maps

Work with External Files

If you import a file that references other drawings, images, or textures, youcan set up folders to contain the content. Then specify default search paths.These paths, set up in the Paths panel of the Options dialog box, improve theefficiency with which Impression finds the files.

When searching for externally referenced files, Impression searches in thefollowing order:

■ Current folder and one level of nested folders

■ Search paths defined in the Options dialog box

■ Folders specified by Microsoft® Windows®

Procedures: Import Content

To import an Impression file

1 Click File menu ➤ Import.

2 In the Import dialog box, find and select an .irf file that you want toimport.

NOTE The icons on the left side of the dialog box provide quick access tocommonly used files and their locations.

3 Click OK.

Alternate procedure: Press CTRL+I

Procedures: Import Content | 51

To import a drawing (DWG) file


2 In the Import dialog box, find and select a DWG file that you want toimport.

3 In the DWG Import Wizard, click Next to proceed through all the panels,or click the list on the left to change specific settings.

4 On the What to Open pane, specify which layout, viewport, or modelspace view you want to open.

5 On the Style Assignments pane, specify the initial style assignments:

■ To match styles as closely as possible to a plot style table in theoriginal drawing: Select a file from the Plot Style Table list.

■ To specify a default stroke for all geometry: Select a stroke from theSet Stroke Type list.

■ To blend plot style settings with a default stroke: Select both a plotstyle and a default stroke.

6 On the Import Options pane, specify unit type and style map preferences.

■ If the Impression unit type differs from the source drawing unit type:Select a new unit type from the 1 Imported Unit = 1 list.

■ To import a style map, a block substitution map, or objects on frozenor turned off layers: Click the expansion arrow and specify whichoptions you want to import or change.

7 On the File Clean-up and Pack Layers panes, specify other options tosimplify the opened drawing and improve performance.


Placement of the objects depends on whether you selected a layout, aviewport, or model space in the import wizard:

■ Layout. Each viewport in the layout becomes an Impression sketch,which retains its original scale. The paper space view becomes aseparate sketch.

■ Viewport. The viewport and its contents become an Impression sketch,which retains its original scale.

■ Model space view. The model space view becomes an Impressionsketch that is scaled to fit the page.


Alternate procedure: Press CTRL+I.

To import a DWF file

1 In the Layers palette, select a layer to contain the imported content.


3 In the Import dialog box, find and select a DWF file with the contentyou want to import.

4 In the DWF Import Wizard, click Next to proceed through all the panels,or click the navigation list on the left to change specific settings.

5 On the Import Options pane, specify a sheet to open (multiple-sheetDWF files only) and whether to apply a stroke style (such as pencil).

6 On the File Clean-up, One-Layer Drawings, and Pack Layers panes, specifyother options to simplify the imported file and improve performance.

7 Click Finish.

All objects are placed on the current layer.

Alternate procedure: Press CTRL+I.

How Data Changes in ImpressionWhen you open or import content from other applications, Impressionmaintains the integrity of most geometry, but some adjustments occur.

About Object Clipping and MaskingWhen you import a viewport, Impression clips or masks any objects that crossthe viewport boundaries.

Clipped Objects

Object clipping occurs when you import overlapping 3D geometry with hiddenlines removed. See Open a 3D Drawing with Hidden Lines Removed.

In addition, most objects that do not lie wholly within a viewport are clippedwhen they are opened or imported into Impression. Impression “breaks”objects at the viewport boundary and discards the portions that fall outsidethe boundary.

How Data Changes in Impression | 53

Source DWG: Viewport to beopened or imported

Impression sketch: Shaded area illustrates discardedobjects

Impression sketch: Objectsretained in illustration

If you open or import a portion of a closed polyline that is broken by theoriginal viewport boundaries, Impression closes the broken shape using theboundary path to define the new segment.


As a result, you can apply a fill style to a closed polyline that you import oropen, even if the object is clipped by the sketch. (You do not get the sameresult if the original object was not closed.)

You cannot restore the discarded parts of a clipped object. Three-dimensionalobjects that are opened with using hidden line removal are also clipped.

Masked Objects

Impression masks some imported or opened objects—including blocks, text,images, and gradients—that fall outside the original viewport boundaries. Foreach sketch the mask follows the shape of the original viewports, not theobject itself.

To move or rotate masked objects, make sure to select all the objects. If youmove some of the objects so that they extend into the mask, they becomemasked. If you move some of the masked objects so that they no longer extendinto the mask, the previously masked portions become visible. Notice howthe hatch area is clipped at the viewport boundary.

About Object Clipping and Masking | 55

Gradient, text, and hatchimported into Impression

Imported image moved to theleft

Although the mask itself surrounds the boundaries of the imported viewport,you can turn off Mask by Sketch to remove masking for each objectindividually. Turning off object masking displays the object fully. In thefollowing example, masking is off for the text and gradient objects.

Masking off for text and gradientfills

You can restore the mask by clicking the shortcut menu option again.

NOTE If the text extends beyond the viewport, and Remove Hidden Lines is offin the DWG Import Wizard, Impression might not import the text object. If youdo not plan to edit the text in Impression, you can open the drawing with RemoveHidden Lines selected. The text is then imported as geometry. This option alsoexplodes the geometry in all blocks and converts text to geometry.

Masking for DWF viewports is like masking for DWG files. However, importedDWG files have only one mask per sketch. DWF sheets sometimes contain


multiple masks. When you import a DWF sheet into Impression, it is convertedinto a single sketch. A DWF sheet with multiple viewports results in anImpression sketch with multiple masks.

As with masks produced by DWG files, you can turn off masking for individualobjects that originated in DWF files. If you move or rotate objects with thistype of masking, be sure to select all of the objects in the imported viewportto retain the masking.

Objects with Clipping Boundaries

Some source drawings contain a block or an xref with a clipping boundary(created using XCLIP). Impression removes or masks clipped geometry thatextends beyond the boundaries. This handling follows the same rules usedfor imported objects that extend beyond viewports. That is, Impression clipsor discards most objects. However, Impression masks blocks, text, images, andgradients.

You can turn xclip masking on or off from the shortcut menu. This option isavailable only if the original object extended beyond the clipping boundaries.

If XCLIPFRAME is on in the original drawing, Impression imports the clippingboundaries. They inherit the layer style of their xref or block.

Imported Wipeout Objects

In programs such as AutoCAD, a wipeout area is a polygonal area that masksunderlying objects with the current background color. Wipeout areas areimported as white fill with a stroke for the boundary. Because layer orderdetermines draw order in Impression, the appearance of illustrations withwipeout areas can differ from the original drawings. For example, if the layerthat contains the wipeout object follows the layer that contains the maskedobjects, the masking does not occur.

Solve this problem by moving the wipeout object to a layer that is higher inthe Layers palette hierarchy. You can also move up the layer that containsthe wipeout.

Procedures: About Object Clipping and Masking

To remove or restore object masking

1 Import or open a viewport in which a block, text, or gradient fill extendbeyond the viewport boundary.

About Object Clipping and Masking | 57

2 On the canvas, select the object whose masking status you want to change.

3 Right-click and do one of the following:

■ For masks produced by DWG files: Click Masked by Sketch.

■ For masks produced by DWF files: Click Viewport Mask.

A check mark next to the option indicates that masking is on. Thegeometry on the canvas reflects the new status.

To remove or restore xclip masking

1 Import or open a drawing with an xref or block that extends beyond theclipping boundaries.

2 On the canvas, select a block, text, image, or gradient that extends beyondthe clipping boundary.

3 Right-click. Click Xclip Mask.

A check mark next to the option indicates that masking is on. Thegeometry on the canvas reflects the new status.

File Format ConversionsHow content from other applications behaves in Impression depends uponthe origin.

How Formats Are ConvertedThe following table gives a high-level overview of the how Impression convertsthe content you import or open.

If OpenedFile Type

Raster images (suchas BMP, GIF, JPG, PDF,PNG, and PSD)

■ Centers image on the canvas as an image object (not re-formatted).

■ 32-bit BMP images are imported as 24-bit BMP images(with alpha channels ignored). For best results with 32-bitBMP images, convert them to PNG format before importingthem

AutoCAD-baseddrawings (DWG)

■ Opens selected model space, layouts, or viewports, retain-ing page size and drawing unit settings.


If OpenedFile Type

■ Imported or opened views are known as sketches.

■ External references become Impression geometry.

■ See Content Conversions.

■ For imported views, drawing unit differences are reconciled.

Converts files as follows:Autodesk DesignWeb Format-2D only(DWF)

■ Layers ➤ Impression Layers

■ Geometry ➤ Bezier Splines

■ Text ➤ Single-line Text

■ Images ➤ Images

■ Drawing unit differences are reconciled for imported files.

See DWF Files.

NOTE The appearance of geometry and text opened from aDWF file can change somewhat in Impression. The origin ofthe DWF file affects object conversion.

Content ConversionsContent brought into Impression from other applications retains geometryand many original properties. However, some components are converted todifferent Impression formats.

How Objects Are Converted

The following tables describe how objects change when you import or openthem in Impression.

Blocks

Converted toOriginal compon-ent

Block geometry is retained as a block. Attribute text is convertedto Impression text and grouped with the geometry as part ofan object group.

Attributes

Content Conversions | 59


Impression blocks are added to the Saved Blocks list of the Blockspalette. Block layers are added to the Layers palette. Block stylesare added to the Block Styles list in the Blocks palette.

NOTE Objects that were saved as blocks in Autodesk® VIZ arenot opened as blocks in Impression. DWF blocks are not suppor-ted.

Block definitions

Geometry inherits Impression layer properties.Block geometry onlayer 0 (zero)

If you specify a plot style table on import, geometry retains ori-ginal color, lineweight, and linetype properties.

Block geometry onother layers

Impression styles. This conversion depends on the plot style andstroke options selected when you open the file.

Color, lineweight

One Impression block for each dynamic block.Dynamic blocks

Bezier splines.Geometry

Impression stroke. Appearance varies, depending on stroke set-tings specified when you open the drawing.

Linetype

Inserted as an object group.Multiple block inser-tions (MINSERT)

Single-line text.Text: Multiline

Single-line text.Text: Single-line

Dimensions


Appearance style.Color and linetype

Single-line text.Dimension text

Appearance style and strokes.Extension lines



Symbols are not displayed properly.Tolerances

DWF Files


Not supported. To retain blocks, import DWG files.Blocks

Bezier splines.3D solids plotted to DWF format are imported as images. Ex-truded objects that are plotted to DWF format with lines hidden

Geometry

retain visible geometry, converted to a 2D plane. This processloses layer differentiation.

Displayed as gray fills.Gradient fills

Individual lines.Hatch patterns

Images.Images

Impression layers. Layer order is determined by the display orderof the objects in the original file. The object with the highestdisplay order determines the hierarchy for that layer.Layers with text are displayed on top.

Layers

Not retained on import. Dashed line becomes a series of shortlines.

Linetype

Vector objects.SHX fonts

Single-line text. The appearance can differ somewhat from theoriginal.

Text

Objects clipped by DWF viewports (usually gradients and text)are masked. If the original drawing is in DWF format, the Impres-sion drawing can have more than one viewport mask.

Viewport clipping


Geometry (2D)


Bezier splines. Wide polylines with varying widths use the startingwidth of the first segment only.

Geometry (2D)

Result differs depending on choices made in the DWG ImportWizard, where you can set a default stroke and retain aspects

Color, lineweight,and linetype.

of the original plot style. The appearance of dashed lines candiffer.

Not supported for DWG files. To use these objects in Impression,Publish the original file to DWF format, or explode the objectsbefore saving the original file.

Express tools objects

Supports the presence of wipeout objects and the on or offsetting for their frames.

Wipeout objects

Geometry (3D)


If Remove Hidden Lines is on, Impression clips portions of 2Dgeometry hidden by 3D objects and deletes the obscured sec-tions.If Remove Hidden Lines is off, Impression retains all objectswithin the view.

Geometry (2D)

3D geometry (as shown in the selected view) is converted toBezier splines in a 2D plane. Impression clips portions of 2D

Geometry (3D)s

geometry hidden by 3D objects, and deletes the obscured sec-tions.

If Remove Hidden Lines is selected: Opens as 2D geometry, buthides portions of geometry that would be hidden in a 3D view.If Remove Hidden Lines is not selected: Opens as 2D geometry,but displays wireframe vectors.

Geometry and SHXtext with thickness

Text becomes a geometry object.



Result differs depending on choices made in the DWG ImportWizard, where you can set a default stroke and retain aspectsof the original plot style.

Color, lineweight,and linetype

For perspective views, Impression places the line that defineswhere the ground and sky meet on a “horizon” layer at the end

Horizon line

of the layer list. Objects on higher layers sometimes obscuresections of the horizon.

Gradient Fill


Impression gradient fill (gradient fill with an empty stroke appliedas style override on the layer that contains the boundary).

Gradient pattern

Gradient colors can differ somewhat. Impression supports linear,centered, and spherical patterns. Parabolic, non-centeredspherical patterns, and 3D gradients are imported as radialgradients.

Bezier splines.Gradient fill boundary

Hatch Fill


Hatch fill styles. Elements of the hatch inherit layer stroke styles.If the hatch is imported to a layer with a fill style, it retains the

Hatch segments, pat-terns

appearance of the original linetype. Hatches created in products

based on AutoCAD® Release 14 or earlier are imported as blocks.

NOTE The shape of the hatch pattern fill can change somewhatwhen you open the hatch in Impression. The appearance ofhatches with origin points far from the 0,0 origin might be dif-ferent than expected.

Retained.Insertion angle, ori-gin, draw order



Not supported. Area fill anchors provide a way to refreshboundaries, however. See Work with Area Fill Anchors.

Hatch type, associativ-ity with boundaries,FILLMODE setting

One hatch fill style for each insertion scale.Scale

Before opening drawings that use custom hatches, move thehatch pattern files to the Impression Support folder.

Custom hatch pat-terns

Impression hatch fill styles.AutoCAD® Architec-ture (formerlyAutodesk® Architec-tural Desktop)hatches

Images


Image (no change).Not supported: Mapped and indexed images and pasted images.

Inserted images suchas images in PNG orJPG format

Layer


Result differs depending on choices made in the DWG ImportWizard, where you can set a default stroke and retain aspectsof the original plot style.

Color, lineweight,linetype properties

By default, Impression does not import frozen and locked layers,or layers with plotting turned off. However, you can choose toinclude them in the DWG Import Wizard.

Frozen, turned off, orwith plotting turnedoff

Impression does not import empty layers.

Impression layer of the same name.Layer names

Layer draw order.Object draw order


Layout Views


Impression sketches (multiple).Layout

Impression layers.Layers in each view-port

Impression sketch at same scale.Layout viewport

Retained.Page size

Drawing units.Units of measurement(as displayed)

Leaders


Imported as separate, grouped objects.Multiple leader lines

Imported as separate, grouped objects.Collected multilead-ers

Linetypes


Stroke width (in appearance style) retained.Width

Dashed stroke properties.

NOTE Unsupported linetype styles become a continuous line-type. If a dashed linetype is defined by the plot style, the scalemight be incorrect.

Dashed properties

Retains the current appearance, regardless of the PSLTSCALEsetting.

Scale


Model Space Views


Impression sketch.Model space view

Retained.Page size

Retained.Units of measurement(as displayed)

If opened: Scaled to fit default paper size.If imported: Scaled to fit current paper size.

Scale

If the original geometry is far from the drawing origin (0,0), theImpression origin point is repositioned to be closer to the centerof the drawing extents.

Drawing origin

Plot Styles


Retained if you select an STB or CTB plot style upon import oropen. The stroke type setting you specify also affects the appear-ance. See Open a Drawing.

NOTE If a dashed linetype is defined by the plot style, the scalemight be incorrect.

Color, grayscale, line-type, lineweight, andmost line end andline join styles

Not supported.Dither, pen numbers,virtual pen numbers,diamond end andjoin styles

Revision Clouds


Bezier splines.Arcs

Appearance style (stroke properties).Color, lineweight



Appearance style (stroke properties).Linetype

Tables


Appearance style.Color, lineweight,linetype

Bezier spline (grouped objects).Table grid

Single-line text (grouped with spline that forms grid).Text

Text


Generally supported, but might differ under some circumstances.Alignment and spa-cing

Not supported.Annotative objects

Text is placed on block layer 0. Color property is based on thecolor assigned to the layer that contains the text. Text has ByInsert Layer style. Text is black in the Block Editor.

Block text: Color as-signed by insert layer(text on Layer 0)

Text properties match the color assigned to the layer that con-tains the block.

Block text: Color as-signed by layer or byblock

Text properties match the color assigned to the layer that con-tains the block. Color is set to be By Insert Layer.

Block text: Color as-signed BYBLOCK(blocks)

Not supported.Bounding box (multil-ine text)

Impression text objects. See Fonts.Characters



Text properties match the color of the layer style.Color assigned bylayer

Text properties match the color assigned to original text (as astyle override).

Color assigned to ob-jects

Impression stores the path to the font folder for the sourcedrawing. If fonts have the same name as fonts in the Impression

Fonts: TrueType,SHX, and Big FontSHX folder, the Impression font gets priority. Priority for other source

applications depends on the order of installation.Impression converts fonts that it does not support to the defaultfont type, which you can set in the import wizard. Someformatting can be lost.The Text Properties palette displays Big Fonts (used for Asianlanguages) in the following format: SHX_font_name.shx, @big-font.shx. The rotation is maintained in Impression.SHX fonts retain a lineweight property that can be modified inthe Text Properties dialog box. By default the lineweight is setto 0.71 points.

Default font type.Fonts: Postscript

Line breaks match text wrapping.Line wrapping(Mtext)

Text properties (Text Properties palette).Properties (multilinetext): Font size, under-line, boldface, italic,numbering, bullets,leading, justification,stacking, and widthfactor

Not supported.Properties (multilinetext): All-cap styles,margins, overlines,oblique angles, mir-roring, and tracking



Text properties (Text Properties palette).Properties (single-linetext): Format, widthfactor, and vertical

Not supported.Properties (single-linetext): Upside-down,backwards, obliqueangle, and mirroring

SHX fonts: alignment retained.TrueType fonts (including Big Fonts preceded by @): Westernfonts rotated 90 degrees.

Properties: Verticalalignment

Not supported. However, you can explode these Express Toolsobjects in the original drawing. The resulting MTEXT objectscan then be imported into Impression.

RText (reactive textobjects)

Viewports


Bezier spline, placed on a layer within the same Impressionsketch as the content it encloses.

Viewport border

A different Impression sketch for each viewport, with name andscale retained. Nonrectangular viewports are retained.

Viewports

Xlines (Construction Lines)


Not supported.Xlines and rays


Xrefs (External References)

Converted toOriginal compon-ents

Geometry and its properties incorporated into the Impressionfile. The xref name is appended to the Impression layer name.Example: The name of the layer that contains a converted xrefnamed Trees.dwg becomes Trees Layer 1. If the file has more

External references

than one instance of the xref, the layers are sequentiallynumbered (Trees Layer 2, Trees Layer 3, and so on).

Retained in Impression. Impression masks objects outside theclipping area. Some objects are clipped and discarded. SeeAbout Object Clipping and Masking.If IMAGECLIP is 1, image frames are imported as geometry onthe same layer as the image.

Xclipping

Invert clip is supported. Clipdepth is not supported.

Blocks with an xclip mask are exploded and geometry outsidethe mask is clipped.

3D Blocks

Save an IllustrationSave your illustration in its native format (IRF, or Impression Rendering Format)or in a variety of other formats, including BMP, JPG, PNG, and DWF. You canalso set up automatic backups at regular intervals.

Options for Saving

It is good practice to save your illustration frequently as you work. TheImpression Rendering Format (IRF) uses the following icon:

You can also set Impression to create backup copies automatically at frequentintervals. If the program terminates unexpectedly, you can open the backupcopy.

The File menu offers the following options for saving:

■ Save a new drawing. Save your illustration and assign it a name as soonas possible after you start it.


■ Save an existing drawing. Save your illustration frequently to preventlosing your work due to unexpected events. When you use the Saveoption, you continue working in the original drawing after you saveit.

■ Save and rename a copy of the current illustration. When you use SaveAs to copy and rename the current illustration, the original drawingcloses and the newly named drawing becomes current.

■ Save a version of the current drawing. When you use the Save a Copyoption, a copy is saved and you continue working in the originaldrawing. Use this method to preserve different versions of theillustration as you experiment.

■ Save selected objects. Save only the objects in a selection set.

■ Save to a different format. For more information about saving to otherfile formats, see Share Files and Formats.

The options that are available to you in the Save As dialog box depend on theformat to which you are saving. Impression preserves changes made to theseoptions from session to session.

Drawing Recovery

By setting the Auto Save option, you automatically create a backup copynamed <filename>.ibak.

The location of the saved file depends on how it was created. The Auto Savefiles for new files that have never been saved are added to c:\Documents andSettiungs\<user_name>\Local Settings\Temp folder. Impression saves the AutoSave files in the same directory as the current file.

By default, a copy is saved every 10 minutes. You can change this interval inthe Files area of the Options dialog box.

If an illustration has closed improperly, you can choose to open the auto savecopy after first changing its extension to .irf. If you open the Auto Save version,that version overwrites the original file, retaining the original name.Optionally, you can open the last-saved version.

Save an Illustration | 71

Procedures: Save an Illustration

To save a new drawing

1 Click File menu ➤ Save.

2 In the Save dialog box, Save In list, find and select the folder where youwant to save your design illustration.

3 In the File Name box, enter a name for the illustration.

4 In the Files of Type box, select the .irf file extension.

5 Click Save.

You can continue working in the current illustration.

Alternate procedure: Press CTRL+S.

To save and work in a copy of the drawing


2 In the Save As dialog box, Save In list, find and select the folder whereyou want to save your design illustration.

3 In the File Name box, enter a new name for the copy of your illustration.

4 Click Save.

The original drawing closes and the newly named drawing becomescurrent.

Alternate procedure: Press CTRL+SHIFT+S.

To save a copy of a drawing as you continue to work in the original drawing

1 Click File menu ➤ Save a Copy.

2 In the Save As dialog box, Save In list, find and select the folder whereyou want to save a copy of your design illustration.

3 In the File Name box, enter a name for the copy of your illustration.

4 Click Save.

The original drawing remains open and Impression saves the newly nameddrawing to the location you specified.


To save a drawing as a template


2 In the Save As dialog box, Save In list, find and select the Templates folder.

3 In the File Name box, enter a name for the template.

4 In the Files of Type box, select Autodesk Impression (*.irf).

5 Click Save.

Impression saves the template with the .irf format.

Alternate procedure: Press CTRL+SHIFT+S.

To save selected objects

1 On the canvas, press CTRL and select the objects you want to save.

2 Click File menu ➤ Save Selection As.

3 In the Save As dialog box, Save In list, find and select the folder whereyou want to save the new file.

4 In the File Name box, enter a name for the new file.

5 Click Save.

Impression saves the selected objects as a separate illustration.

To save automatically at intervals



3 Select Auto Save.

4 In the Auto Save Every box, click the Arrow keys or enter the number ofminutes that represent the interval for automatically saving a file.

5 Click OK.

To open an auto save file

1 In Windows Explorer, right-click the .ibak file. Click Rename.

2 In the text box, change the file extension to .irf.

3 In Impression, click File ➤ Open. Select the renamed file.

Procedures: Save an Illustration | 73

Sketches, Layers, andObjects

If you work with other Autodesk products, you are already familiar with views, layers, andobjects. However, in Impression, these drawing components are transformed in significantways.

How Sketches, Layers, and Objects InteractSketches, layers, and objects combine to form the basic infrastructure of everyImpression drawing.

Sketches

A sketch is a collection of layers and layer groups, including the geometry andappearance styles that belong to them. Sketches are at the highest level in theorganizational hierarchy in Impression and determine the scale of the layersthey contain.

9

75

When Impression opens a drawing that was created in an application such asAutoCAD, each viewport in the layout is converted to a separate Impressionsketch. Each sketch has its own set of layers, even if the original viewportsshared the same geometric model.

Suppose you open a layout in which the original drawing had two viewports:one with a plan view of the entire house, and the other with a magnifieddetail of the kitchen. In the original drawing, the two viewports representedtwo views of the same model.

76 | Chapter 9 Sketches, Layers, and Objects

However, in Impression, these two views become sketches with distinct setsof geometric objects and distinct sets of layers. Changing the geometry in onesketch does not change geometry in other sketches, including geometry thatwas derived from the same model. With some exceptions, geometry that isoutside the boundaries of the original viewport is not brought into Impressionsketches.

NOTE The views you open or import into Impression include the objects that arevisible in the viewport, layout, or model space view you specify. Objects that arewholly outside the visible area in the original drawing are excluded from Impressionsketches. Most objects that cross a viewport border are clipped so that portionsof objects outside the viewport are deleted. Some objects, such as text and imagesare masked. For more information, see About Object Clipping and Masking.

Layers and sketches are organized in the Layers palette, which is part of thedashboard.

How Sketches, Layers, and Objects Interact | 77

Layers and Layer Groups

Each layer consists of a set of objects, such as geometry and text, and acollection of appearance styles that have been applied to those objects. Whenyou open a drawing from another source, the layers and many of theirproperties are retained.

Appearance styles applied to a layer generally affect all objects on that layer.Exceptions include:

■ Style exceptions. Applying an appearance style to individual objects canresult in an object style exception, or override. A Style Exception Alertappears to the left of the layer style name in the Style Editor to identifystyle exceptions for a highlighted layer.

From this list, you can select all objects that have a style exception andreset them to use the layer style. (You can avoid creating style exceptionsby turning on Auto Layer.)

■ Blocks. Imported blocks retain their individual styles, except for geometrycreated on Layer 0 (zero) in the original application. Those objects inheritthe layer style.

■ Imported images. The layer style does not affect images in other formats,such as PNG or BMP.

■ Area fill. Fill inserted into closed areas (and not as part of the layer style),can create a style override Style overrides are unaffected by layer stylechanges. To prevent overrides, turn on Auto Layer.

You can also create layer groups. Layer groups do not have associated appearancestyles. However, you can use them as an organizational method for selectingand applying styles to multiple layers.


The Block Editor workspace, used to edit block geometry, also uses layers toassign styles and draw order. The Block Layers palette is organized by blockinstead of sketch, and has most of the same capabilities.

The Layers Drop-Down List

The Layers drop-down list on the Impression toolbar displays informationabout the current layer or about the layer that contains selected objects.

If objects from different layers are selected, the box displays “varies.” If theobject uses the layer style (and not a style override), the style is listed as“bylayer.”

You can quickly change the current layer by expanding the list and makinganother selection.

Any objects that are selected when you select another layer from the list areassigned to the new layer.

Objects

Objects are the geometry, images, and text that form the basic, visiblecomponents of a design illustration.

How Sketches, Layers, and Objects Interact | 79

Objects have three possible origins:

■ Geometry and text that is opened, imported, or pasted from anotherapplication.

■ Geometry and text that is created with Impression drawing tools.

■ Area fill inserted or dragged into closed areas.

You can use the tools in the Toolbox to edit or create objects in Impression,regardless of their origin. You can also stylize most objects, except for graphicimages and text.

A Layers palette flyout displays a small image preview of the objects in a layer,layer group, or sketch. To see it, move the cursor over the preview triangle atthe inside end of the layer row.

Define Sketches and ScaleImpression sketches are discrete collections of layers, their associatedappearance styles, and the objects they contain.


Sketches in Impression

Illustrations derived from sources such as AutoCAD inherit the layers andobjects belonging to a model space or layout view, a viewport, or a DWF page.In Impression, these views are converted to sketches.

All layers within a sketch share a common scale. Imported model space viewsare scaled to fit the Impression canvas. If the model space had been split intomultiple viewports, only the current viewport is opened.

Imported viewports, including viewports imported with layouts, retain theiroriginal scale. For example, a viewport scaled at 1:48 in AutoCAD, retains the1:48 scale ratio in Impression. If you open or import a layout, its paper spaceview is imported at a 1:1 scale ratio.

You can also create new sketches in Impression. Until you rename them, newsketches are assigned default names of Sketch 1, Sketch 2, and so on. Theyuse the default scale set up in the Document Setup dialog box.

Define Sketches and Scale | 81

Units and Scale

The views you import or open in Impression retain the scale that had beenset in the original drawing. In order to understand scale, become familiar withthe following terms:

■ Drawing units. In your drawing, geometry is measured in drawing units,also known as real-world units. One unit can equal 1 inch, 1 mm, 1 meter,or 1 mile. You decide what a unit represents, and then draw using aone-to-one scale.

■ Canvas units. In your Impression work space, the canvas represents thepaper, or printable area. Canvas units refer to the size of the objects whenthey are printed at 100%.

■ Units of measurement. In the original application or in Impression, youassign a unit of measurement format, such as inches, feet, or centimeters,to drawing and canvas units. This setting specifies the default for how themeasurement is displayed in dialog boxes and palettes.

■ Scale. Scale represents the ratio of canvas units to drawing units. Scalinga sketch does not resize individual objects. Instead, it resets the relativemagnification of all the objects in the sketch.

Scale for Sketches and Output

There are two reasons to set the scale of your drawing.

■ To set the scale of the sketch compared to printed output.

■ To set the size of the canvas compared to printed output.

The interaction of the sketch scale and print scale settings determines thefinal scale of objects in the printed illustration.

■ Sketch scale (Sketch Properties dialog box) sets the scale based on a ratioof the size of the printed objects (canvas units) to their real-world size(drawing units). For example, with a 1:2 scale ratio, one Impression printedunit equals two drawing units. (This ratio assumes that the print scale is100%.)If a precise scale is important in your final design illustration, you can lockthe scale in your Impression sketches so they cannot be easily changed.

■ Printed scale (Print dialog box) sets the scale of all sketches in yourillustration when they are printed. The percentage you enter representsthe size of the object boundaries compared to the extents of the printed


page. Setting this percentage to a value other than 100% further scales theimages in the final output. Therefore, setting the print scale to 50% reducesscale ratio of 1:2 for the illustration to 1:4 on the printed page.

Procedures: Define Sketches and Scale

To define a new sketch

➤ In the Layers palette, right-click the sketch in the row below the locationfor the new sketch. Click New ➤ Sketch.

The new sketch inherits the scale set up in the Document Setup dialogbox.

Layers palette:

To set sketch scale

1 In the Layers palette, right-click the name of the sketch. Click Properties.

2 In the Sketch Properties dialog box, click the Scale arrow and select ascale from the list.

3 To set a custom scale, click Custom and enter the ratio in the CustomScale dialog box.

Procedures: Define Sketches and Scale | 83

To lock or unlock sketch scale

1 In the Layers palette, right-click the name of a sketch. Click Properties.

2 In the Sketch Properties dialog box, in the Scale drop-down list, clickLock Scale or Unlock Scale.

To rename a sketch

1 In the Layers palette, double-click the name of the sketch you want torename.

2 In the edit box, enter the new name and press ENTER.

Alternate procedure: Right-click the sketch name. Click Properties toopen the Sketch Properties dialog box.

To hide or lock a sketch

1 In the Layers palette, right-click the name of a sketch. Click Properties.

2 In the Sketch Properties dialog box, change the following settings:

■ Show. Turns the sketch in the illustration on and off.

■ Lock. Turns the ability to modify the objects in the sketch on and off.

Alternate procedure: On the sketch row, click the light bulb and lock

icons.

Organize with LayersThe Layers palette is your key to managing layers and their associated objectsand appearance styles.

Create Layers and Layer GroupsCreate new layers and layer groups to organize objects that share commonstyles.

Styles Assigned to New Layers

If a layer row is selected when you create the layer, the new layer inherits thesame style as the selected layer. If no layer is selected, the default style isassigned to the new layer.


There are several ways to set the appearance style for layers. For moreinformation, see Apply an Appearance Style.

How Layers Display Style Overrides

When the Auto Layer status is on, a special type of layer, called an auto layer,is automatically created to contain new objects whose style differs from thecurrent style. For more information, see Use Auto Layer to Consolidate Styles.

If different styles are applied to objects on the same layer, a Style ExceptionWarning is displayed in the Style Editor when that layer is selected.

Click the warning to select all objects with style exceptions, or overrides, onthe selected layer. You can reset these objects to inherit the style of the layer.Use this option to apply the layer style to all objects with style overrides onthe selected layer.

To reset a single object to use the layer style, select the object and chooseBylayer in the Style drop-down list on the toolbar.

Use Layer Groups to Organize Related Layers

If your illustration has a large number of layers, you can combine layers intolayer groups. This organization helps you apply styles and set the draw orderfor layer groupings, instead of for individual layers.

Once you have created a group, you can easily change its contents by dragginglayers into or out of it.

You can also nest layer groups within other layer groups.

Create Layers and Layer Groups | 85

Duplicate a Layer and its Geometry

Layer duplication—available from the shortcut menu—exactly replicates theselected layer and its geometry. The new layer is inserted above the originallayer on the Layers palette. To work with objects on the new layer, turn offvisibility for the original layer and then move or modify the new objects.

Procedures: Create Layers and Layer Groups

To create a layer

1 In the Layers palette, right-click the layer row below the location for thenew layer. Click New ➤ Layer.

The new layer is added to the Layers palette. Its style is added to the Stylespalette.

2 While the Layer Name text box is active, enter a name for the layer.

NOTE You can create additional layers quickly by entering a comma afterthe name and then entering another name. For example, enter sky, ground,foliage to name the current layer “sky” and add two more layers called“ground” and “foliage.”

Layers palette:


To apply appearance styles to objects on layers

■ For information about applying appearance styles, see Apply an AppearanceStyle

To remove a layer

In the Layers palette, do one of the following:

■ Right-click the layer you want to remove. Click Delete.

■ Click the layer you want to remove. Press DELETE.

■ Click the layer you want to remove. Click the Delete button.

Layers palette:

To turn a selected object’s layers off

1 On the canvas, select objects whose layers you want to turn off.

2 In the Layer Tools drop-down list, select Turn Layer Off.

NOTE The Layer Tools drop-down list is only available when no layer is selectedin the Layers palette.

Alternate procedure: In the Layer Tools drop-down list, select Turn Layer Off.In special selection mode, on the canvas, select an object whose layer youwant to turn off.

To make the layer of a selected object the current layer

1 Select an object on the layer you want to make current.

2 In the Layer Tools drop-down list, select Make Object’s Layer Current.

Alternate procedure: In the Layer Tools drop-down list, select Make Object’sLayer Current. In special selection mode, on the canvas, select an object whoselayer you want as the current layer.

To hide all layers except those of the selected objects

1 On the canvas, select the objects on the layers which you want to isolate.

2 In the Layer Tools drop-down list, select Isolate Layer.


Alternate procedure: In the Layer tools drop-down list, select Isolate Layer.In special selection mode, on the canvas, select objects on the layers you wantto isolate. Press ENTER or, from the shortcut menu, select ENTER (confirmselection).

To restore layers hidden by the Isolate Layer option

➤ In the Layer Tools drop-down list, select Unisolate Layer.

To filter the layers

1 In the Layers palette, select the layers you want to add to the filter.

2 Click the Filter Selected Layers button .

NOTE The Selection Filter is only available if one or more layers are selected inthe Layers palette.

To remove layer filter

➤ In the Layers palette, click the Remove Layer Filter button to clear the

layer filter .

To create a layer group

1 In the Layers palette, press CTRL+click to select the layers to include inthe layer group.

2 Right-click the selection. Click Group Highlighted Layers.

The layer group row is added above the top-most layer in the selection.

3 To add another layer to the layer group, drag it over the group row. Whenthe large triangles are displayed at each end of the row, release the mousebutton.

Arrows indicate drop location


To remove layers from a group

■ In the Layers palette, drag a grouped layer to a position outside of the layergroup.

To rename a layer

1 In the Layers palette, right-click the name of the layer you want to rename.Click Properties.

2 In the Layer Properties dialog box, enter the new name.

3 Click OK.

Alternate procedure: Double-click the layer name to display the edit box.Enter a new name and press ENTER.

To search for layers

1 In the Layers palette, click the layer search box.

2 Enter search criteria.

In the Layers palette, layers automatically updated based on the criteriayou enter.

To set layer and layer group properties

1 In the Layers palette, right-click the row whose properties you want toreset. Click Properties. In the Layer Properties dialog box, change thefollowing settings:

■ Name. Displays and sets the name of the layer group.

■ Color. Sets the default color used for selection indicators and thepreview image arrow, and for highlighting new layers in a layer group.

■ Show. Turns the display of the objects in the layer on and off.

■ Lock. Turns the ability to modify the objects on the layer on and off.

2 Click OK.

To modify a style from the Layers palette

1 In the Layers palette, click the layer whose style you want to modify.

2 In the Style Editor, Click Edit.


3 Change settings as needed.

To duplicate a layer and its geometry

1 In the Layers palette, right-click the layer you want to duplicate. ClickDuplicate.

A new layer, with the same style assignment and geometry, is insertedin the row above the original layer.

2 To modify the geometry on the new layer, turn off the original layer byclicking the light bulb icon. Then select and modify objects on the newlayer.

Use Layer Sequence to Control Draw OrderDraw order is the order in which the appearance styles display and print inthe illustration.

In Impression, the hierarchy of the rows in the Layers palette determines draworder, as shown in the following example. Suppose you want to be sure thatthe burgundy layer (Layer 4) always prints over the objects on the other layers.You can set the opacity of the burgundy layer to be more opaque than theopacity of the other layers. You can also make sure that the burgundy layeris always printed over the other layers by dragging it to the top of the layerslist.

Layer draw order: Yellow layer on top


Layer draw order: Burgundy layer on top

You can easily drag layers within their own layer group, move them betweendifferent layer groups, or use the shortcut menu to achieve the same results.

Procedures: Use Layer Sequence to Control DrawOrder

To change the draw order of layers

■ In the Layers palette, drag the layer to a different position in the list. Placeit above the layers that contain objects that should be behind it.

Arrows indicate new location oflayer

To change the draw order of geometry

■ In the Layers palette, drag the layer for the geometry whose draw order ischanging to a different position in the list. Place it above the layers to bedrawn behind it.

■ To display specific objects in front of others, right-click the object andchoose one of the following options:

■ Arrange Selection ➤ Bring to Front of Layer.Displays selected objectson top of all other objects on the layer.

Use Layer Sequence to Control Draw Order | 91

■ Arrange Selection ➤ Bring Forward in Layer.Moves selected objects upa level in the display order.

■ To display specific objects in back of others, right-click the object andchoose one of the following options:

■ Arrange Selection ➤ Send Backward in Layer. Moves selected objectsdown one level in the display order.

■ Arrange Selection ➤ Send to Back of Layer. Displays selected objectsbehind all other objects on the layer.

To change the draw order of layer groups

■ In the Layers palette, drag the layer group whose draw order is changingto a different position in the list. Place it above the layers to be drawnbehind it.

To change layer draw order using the shortcut menu

■ In the Layers palette, right-click the layers whose draw order is changing.Click one of the following options:

■ Arrange ➤ Move Forward. Moves selected rows up one step.

■ Arrange ➤ Move Backward. Moves selected rows down one step.

■ Arrange ➤ Bring to Front of Group. Moves selected rows to the topof their current layer group.

■ Arrange ➤ Send to Back of Group. Moves selected rows to the bottomof their current layer group.

■ Arrange ➤ Bring to Front of Sketch. Moves selected rows to the top(front) of the current sketch.

■ Arrange ➤ Send to Back of Sketch. Moves selected rows to the back(bottom) of the current sketch.

Use Auto Layer to Consolidate StylesTurn on Auto Layer to provide an automatic way to organize styles on separatelayers.


What is Auto Layer?

The Auto Layer function creates a special type of layer, known as an auto layer,that accepts all new objects of a particular style. When Auto Layer is on, newobjects whose style differs from the current layer are placed on an auto layerwith the same style assignment. If no such auto layer exists, a new one iscreated automatically.

Closed rectangles on Layers 1 and 2 are filled. Within each sketch, areafills with differing styles are placed on separate auto layers (Auto 1-6).

Auto Layer provides an automatic way to segregate objects with differentstyles—such as area fill objects—onto unique layers. As a result, you can quicklyupdate styles without having to worry about individual style overrides. AutoLayer is available in both the Layers palette and the Block Layers palette.

How Auto Layer Works

Layers function as auto layers only if the Auto Layer option is turned on, eitherin the Auto Layer Settings pane of the Options dialog box, or on the statusbar. Turning on the Auto Layer option has the following effect:

■ New objects whose styles differ from the current layer style are placed onan auto layer. The Auto Layer function has no effect on existing objects(including fill objects) that are given a differing style.

Use Auto Layer to Consolidate Styles | 93

■ New auto layers are created if there are no other auto layers with thesame style. If the current sketch does not contain an auto layer that hasthe same style, a new layer is added just below the current layer. It is labeledAuto 1, Auto 2, and so on.

■ Existing auto layers only accept new objects with the same style. If anauto layer has already been created for that style, the new object is placedon the existing auto layer.

■ Auto layers only accept objects created within the same sketch hierarchy.Different sketches can have auto layers with the same style assignmentbut no two auto layers can have the same style within a sketch.

■ If no other layers in the sketch have the same style, you can convert any

layer to an auto layer. A small star icon identifies the auto layer ( ).

■ Auto layers can be modified in the same way as other layers. You canrename, hide, lock, and pack them. You can change their draw order andopacity.

■ Creating an object on a layer that has no other objects does not createan auto layer. Instead, the layer acquires the style of the new object.

Reasons for Using Auto Layers

Applying area fill can easily result in numerous, unwanted style overrideswhen Auto Layer status is off. For example, upon insertion, area fill objectsare treated in one of two ways:

■ If Auto Layer status is off: The area fill object is placed on the current layerand its style is treated as a style override. When the layer is selected, thefollowing indicator is displayed in the Style Editor:

Styleoverrideindicator

If you reset the object style overrides to use the layer style, all objects,including area fill objects, revert to the assigned layer style. Any updatesto the fill styles for those objects must be done individually.

■ If Auto Layer status is on: The area fill object and its style are placed on anew auto layer.


Auto layer indicator (Layers palette)

If an auto layer with the same style assignment exists, the new area fillobject is placed on that auto layer. This method makes changing ormodifying fill styles easier by consolidating objects with the same styleson the same layers. To change the style of the area fill object, simply draga new style to the auto layer.

Ways to Create Auto Layers

Auto layers can be created under several circumstances, depending on theoptions you select in the Auto Layer Settings pane of the Options dialog box.

■ Drag an area fill onto the canvas when a layer of a different style is current.

■ Click the Area Fill tool or the Power Fill tool, click a style swatch on theStyles palette, and click within a closed area on the canvas.

■ Click a geometry creation tool such as the Rectangle tool, click a styleswatch, and draw the shape on the canvas.

Auto layers are not created when you create an object style override by selectingan object and changing its style.

Procedures: Use Auto Layer to Consolidate Styles

To turn on the Auto Layer function


2 In the Options dialog box, click Auto Layer Settings.

3 On the Auto Layer Settings pane of the Options dialog box, click AutoLayer On.

Alternate procedures:.

■ On the Impression status bar, click the Auto Layerbutton. The blue color indicates that it is on.

Use Auto Layer to Consolidate Styles | 95

■ On the Impression status bar, right-click Auto Layer ➤ On.

To convert a layer to an auto layer

■ To convert a layer to an auto layer: (Available only when the Auto Layerfunction is on.) In the Layers palette, move the cursor in front of the layername until the Auto Layer icon (a small star) is displayed. Click it.

■ To convert an auto layer to a layer: On the Layers palette, click the AutoLayer icon so that the star is not displayed.

To change Auto Layer settings


2 In the Options dialog box, click Auto Layer Settings.


4 Under Create Auto Layers For, select the options you want to use:

■ Area Fills. Places area fills whose style differs from the current styleon an auto layer.

■ New Shapes. Places new objects whose style differs from the currentlayer style on a new layer.

5 Click OK.

Alternate procedure: On the status bar, right-click Auto Layer ➤ Settings.

To create an auto layer

1 On the status bar, right-click Auto Layer ➤ Settings.


3 Under Create Auto Layers For, select the options you want to use:

■ Area Fills. Places area fills whose style differs from the current styleon an auto layer.


■ New Shapes. Places new objects whose style differs from the currentlayer style on a new layer.

4 Click OK.

5 Insert a fill object or create an object whose style differs from the currentlayer using one of the following methods:

■ Click the Area Fill or the Power Fill tool, click a style swatch on theStyles palette, and click within a closed area on the canvas.

■ Drag a style swatch from the Styles palette into a closed area on thecanvas.

■ Click an object creation tool (such as the Line tool), click a style swatchon the Styles palette, and draw the object on the canvas.

The results vary depending on the settings selected in the Auto LayerSettings pane.

Pack Layers to Improve PerformancePacking layers combines objects with the same Impression style and withsequential draw order into a single object in order to improve program speed.

About Packed Layers

When you open or import a drawing in Impression, you can pack the objectson incoming layers. By combining, or packing, the objects in a complexdrawing, you can quicken the response time as you work.

Packing combines objects on a layer into a single object. You can apply stylesto packed objects, but you cannot modify them individually. Depending onthe number of styles and the draw order of the objects, a layer can have oneor several objects after it is packed. When you select a packed object, the cursordisplays the packed layer icon:

To be packed, objects must meet the following criteria:

■ Same layer.

Pack Layers to Improve Performance | 97

■ Same Impression style, set to the same style scale. When you open orimport a DWG file, objects are packed according to the Impression stylethat is assigned to the imported geometry.

■ Sequential draw order.

■ Contained in the same set of grouped objects (if grouped).

■ Same scale factor (that is, they have not been resized).

■ Same object type, as described in Types of Objects.

■ Same clipping boundaries (often as a result of opening a drawing withxclip boundaries). In addition, the Masked by Sketch and Xclip Masksettings must match for these objects.

Blocks, images, and objects that do not meet these criteria are not packed andcontinue to be treated as separate objects. You cannot pack block layers onthe Block Layers palette.

In the following example, objects 1-6 are on the same layer. Their draw orderis sequential. That is, object 1 is at the bottom of the draw order and object6 is at the top. Object A has the same style as 3 and 4, but is on a separatelayer.

Objects before packing

When the layer is packed, six objects are combined into three packed units:

■ Objects 1 and 2: same style and sequential draw order.


■ Objects 3 and 4: same style and sequential draw order. They form a separateunit because their style differs from 1 and 2.

■ Objects 5 and 6: same style and sequential order. They are not part of thesame unit as 1 and 2 because objects 3 and 4 are in the middle of the draworder sequence.

Although it has the same style as objects 3 and 4, object A is not packed becauseit is on a different layer.

Object selection after packing

On the Layers palette, the packed and unpacked icons identify the layerpacking status.

How Packing Affects Objects on a Layer

What happens when a layer is packed?

■ Program speed improves. Impression can process fewer objects.


■ Modifying one modifies all. You can apply styles, move, copy, and resizepacked objects, just as you can modify any other object. However, theobjects within the unit are selected and treated as a single object. To modifyindividual components of the packed unit, first unpack the unit. Unpackingany components in a packed layer, unpacks the layer.

■ Draw order changes are not allowed within packed units. You can changethe draw order of packed units within a layer, but you cannot reorder theobjects within the packed unit.

■ Moving an object to another layer does not change its packing status. Ifan unpacked object is moved to a packed layer, the layer stays packed, andthe object stays unpacked.

■ Moving layers can change their packing status. Unpacked layers movedto a packed sketch or layer group become packed. Packed layers moved toan unpacked sketch or layer group remain packed.

■ The packed state of each layer is retained after an update. If you use CADupdate to refresh your illustration after the source drawing changes, thepacking status of each layer is retained. However, individually unpackedobjects on packed layers become packed.

Where to Pack and Unpack Layers

You can pack or unpack layers in several locations:

■ As you open or import a drawing.

■ By clicking the icon on the Layers palette. To pack or unpack all the layersin a sketch or layer group, click the icon for the sketch or group row.

■ From the Layers palette shortcut menu.

■ By double-clicking a packed unit (unpacking only).

■ On the Pack Layers tab of the Drawing Performance Tuner.

New objects created on packed layers are not automatically packed. If youpack a sketch, all layers it contains are automatically packed. To unpack anindividual layer, first unpack the sketch.


Procedures: Pack Layers to Improve Performance

To pack layers as you open a drawing

1 Click File ➤ Open.

2 In the DWG Import Wizard or the DWF Import Wizard, click Pack Layers.

3 In the Pack Layers panel, select Pack All Layers.

4 Select other settings as needed. See To open an Impression drawing.

5 Click OK.

To unpack a packed object

1 Click the Object Selection tool and select or move the cursor over a packedobject.

The cursor displays the packed cursor symbol when it is over a packed

object.

2 Double-click the packed object.

The objects on the layer are unpacked.

To pack a layer from the Layers palette


■ To pack a single layer: On the Layers palette, click the layer unpacked icon

.

■ To pack selected layers: On the Layers palette, CTRL+click the layers youwant to pack. Right-click the selection ➤ Pack/Unpack ➤ Pack Selected.

■ To pack unselected layers: On the Layers palette, CTRL+click the layersyou do not want packed. Right-click the selection ➤ Pack/Unpack ➤ PackUnselected.

■ To pack all layers: On the Layers palette, right-click ➤ Pack/Unpack ➤ PackAll.


To unpack a layer from the Layers palette


NOTE If the sketch is packed, unpack the sketch before you unpack the individuallayer.

■ To unpack an individual layer: On the Layers palette, click the layer packed

icon .

■ To unpack selected layers: On the Layers palette, CTRL+click the layersyou want to unpack. Right-click the selection ➤ Pack/Unpack ➤ UnpackSelected.

■ To unpack all layers: On the Layers palette,right-click ➤ Pack/Unpack ➤ Unpack All.

To pack and unpack layers in the Drawing Performance Tuner

1 Click File menu ➤ Performance Tuner.

2 Click the Pack Layers tab on the Drawing Performance Tuner.

3 Do one of the following:

■ To unpack an individual layer: In the Pack/Unpack column, click a

layer that displays a Layer Unpacked icon .The value in the Objects column changes to indicate the number ofobjects on the layer.

■ To pack selected layers: In the Pack/Unpack column, click a layer that

displays a Layer Packed icon .The value in the Objects column changes to indicate the number ofpacked objects on the layer/total number of objects.

■ To pack all layers: In the Pack All box, click Pack All Layers. Click thePack button.

4 To pack specific types of layers: In the Pack All box, click Pack Layersfrom CAD or Pack All Locked Layers. Click the Pack button.

Alternate procedure: On the status bar, click the Open PerformanceTuning Dialog button:


Select Geometry andLayers

In order to get the results you expect, learn how to select geometry and how to make layerscurrent.

Select and Display Layers and SketchesUse the Layers palette to make layers current, to reorder them, to apply styles,and to limit the display and editing availability of their objects.

Current Layers

As a general rule, new and pasted objects are placed on the current layer. If youplan to create new geometry, set the current layer to ensure that the new objectsinherit the desired appearance style.

If Auto Layer is turned on, this rule is modified. In this case, new area fill objectsand/or shapes whose style differs from the layer style are automatically placedon their own unique auto layers. You can make auto layers current and creategeometry on them, just like any other layer.

When a layer is current, a green check mark precedes its name in the Layerspalette.

To make the target layer current, click the layer.

Only one layer at a time can be current. A layer remains current until you clickanother layer.

10

105

Selected Layers or Sketches

A layer can be both current and selected at the same time. A selected orhighlighted layer or sketch row has blue highlighting.

Multiple layers are often selected as part of the grouping process.

When a layer is selected, its style is displayed in the Style Editor, under SelectedLayer’s Style. (If multiple layers with differing styles are selected, the style islisted as “Style Varies” and an asterisk is displayed.)

To reassign the style of a selected layer, click a different style on the StyleEditor drop-down list, under Selected Layer’s Style.

NOTE Only saved styles are listed in the Style Editor drop-down list. To assign astyle from a style library, drag the style from the Styles palette.

106 | Chapter 10 Select Geometry and Layers

When you select a sketch in the Layers palette, all the layers that belong tothat sketch are also selected. The layer rows are highlighted to indicate whichlayers are included. If you change the style when a sketch is selected, the styleis applied to all layers in the sketch.

Press CTRL and click to select multiple layers. Select all the objects on a layerby activating the Layer Selection tool and clicking any object on the canvasthat belongs to that layer. If you select all objects on a layer and assign a newstyle, the layer style is automatically updated.

Layer Display and Availability

The light bulb and lock icons indicate whether the objects on the row arehidden or locked for selection and editing.

These settings are especially useful for hiding or locking sections of complexdrawings so you can concentrate on specific areas. Changing the status of asketch or layer group modifies all the associated layers. Therefore, changingthe display or availability of a sketch affects all the layers and layer groups inthat sketch.

Select and Display Layers and Sketches | 107

The following table shows how changing the Display or Availability iconsaffects other layer components.

Effect of Changes to Display or Availability Icons

Items AffectedSelected Row

Sketch, layer group, layerSketch

Layer group, layerLayer group

LayerLayer

Procedures: Select and Display Layers and Sketches

To make a layer current

■ In the Layers palette, click the layer name.A green check mark indicates that the layer is current.

To set display and availability of a layer or sketch

1 In the Layers palette, select a layer or sketch.

2 Click the following icons to change the status.

■ On/Off. Turns the display of the objects in the layer or sketch on andoff. The names of hidden layers are italicized in the Layers palette.

■ Lock/Unlock. Turns the ability to select and modify the objects in alayer or sketch on and off. The names of locked layers and sketchesare shaded in the Layers palette.

Alternate procedures:

■ Right-click a layer ➤ Show/Hide.

■ Right-click a layer ➤ Lock/Unlock.


To set display and availability for multiple layers

1 In the Layers palette, right-click a layer row.

2 To show or hide all layers, click one of these options:

■ Show/Hide ➤ Show All. Turns on the display of all layers.

■ Show/Hide ➤ Hide All Layers. Turns off the display of all layers.

3 To show or hide selected layers, click one of these options:

■ Show/Hide ➤ Show Selected. Turns on the display of all selectedlayers.

■ Show/Hide ➤ Hide Selected. Turns off the display of all selectedlayers.

4 To show or hide all layers above or below the selection, click one of theseoptions:

■ Show/Hide ➤ Hide All Above. Turns off the display of all layers abovethe selected layer.

■ Show/Hide ➤ Hide All Below. Turns off the display of all layers belowthe selected layer.

NOTE Option availability depends on the current workspace.

To lock or unlock layers from the shortcut menu

1 In the Layers palette, right-click a layer row.

2 To lock or unlock all layers, click one of these options:

■ Lock/Unlock ➤ Lock All. Prevents all layers from being edited orselected.

■ Lock/Unlock ➤ Unlock All. Makes all layers available for editing.

3 To lock or unlock selected layers, click one of these options:

■ Lock/Unlock ➤ Lock Selected. Prevents selected layers from beingselected or edited.

■ Lock/Unlock ➤ Unlock Selected. Makes selected layers available forediting.

Procedures: Select and Display Layers and Sketches | 109

4 To lock or unlock all layers above or below the selection, click one ofthese options:

■ Lock/Unlock ➤ Lock All Above. Prevents all layers above the selectedlayer from being selected or edited.

■ Lock/Unlock ➤ Lock All Below. Prevents all layers below the selectedlayer from being edited.

NOTE Option availability depends on the current workspace.

Select ObjectsVarious methods provide a quick way to select objects.

About Object Selection

The Toolbox provides two selection tools.

■ Layer Selection tool. Selects all objects on a layer. Another way to selectall objects on the layer is to click the triangle on the right or left end ofthe Layer palette row.

■ Object Selection tool. Selects objects and object groups.

NOTE If you are unable to select a visible object, verify that the lock icon isnot locked.

On the canvas, selected objects are identified in the following ways:

■ Bounding box. Identifies the extents of the selection. If you have createdan object group, these extents form a rectangular area that encloses theouter extents of the objects. By dragging the grips on this box, you canmove, resize, and rotate the entire selection set.Red highlighting on the selected objects helps differentiate selected objectsfrom unselected objects that are nearby or overlapping.


■ Bounding box grip. Identifies nodes that can be dragged to move, resize,and rotate objects or object groups. The cursor shape indicates the actionsyou can take.

■ Spline control point. Defines editing points along the vector path of anobject. Click these points to display adjacent direction handles that canbe dragged to change the shape of the object.

When you click an object with the Layer Selection tool active, the first clickselects all objects on the layer. However, if you click the object repeatedly,you select its object group (if applicable), and then the bounding box of theobject itself. When the bounding box is displayed, you can use its grips tomove, resize, or rotate the objects at any of these selection stages. If youcontinue to click, you can select the object segments, which are defined byspline control points.

When the Object Selection tool is active, you click a single object on the canvasto edit it directly. If the object is part of an object group, the group is selectedfirst. Subsequent clicks make successively smaller components of the objectgroup available for editing. You can also press CTRL while any other tool isactive to accomplish the same results.

Select Objects | 111

To remove selection from objects, click an empty area of the canvas or pressESC one or more times to back out of a selection. If multiple objects areselected, press SHIFT and click a selected object to remove it from the selectionset.

The color of the selection triangles on the Layers palette indicates which layerscontain the selected objects, and whether all objects on the layer are selected.

Window and Crossing Object Selection

You can select one or more objects by dragging across them with the cursor.The dragging motion creates a temporary, rectangular boundary box thatidentifies the selection area.

Both selection tools have properties that set the default method for dragselection.

■ Window selection. Selects only objects that the solid-line boundary boxencloses.

■ Crossing selection. Selects all objects that the dashed-line boundary boxencloses or crosses.

■ Window/Crossing selection (default). Determines the selection methodbased on the direction of the drag. Dragging left to right creates a windowselection. Dragging right to left creates a crossing selection.


Selection Availability

If you cannot find or select an object, check the display and lock settings. Tochange the settings, click the icons on the right end of each layer row.

Sketches, layers, or styles with 100% opacity are also unavailable.

Sometimes objects are hidden because they are drawn in back of anotherobject or because their layer is lower on the layer list. If an object is behindanother object, you can select it by choosing Select Geometry Behind or SelectBottom Object. These options are on the shortcut menu that is available wheneither selection tool is active.

Select Objects | 113

If layers in your illustration have any packed layers, the cursor changes as itmoves over packed objects:

To select an object that has been packed, double-click it to unpack it. Thenselect it.

Rollover Highlighting Display

With either selection tool, you can move the cursor over an object on thecanvas to highlight the selectable vector path that defines its shape. (Thishighlighting does not find 100% transparent pixels or objects on locked layers.)

You can set the rollover highlight color or turn it on and off in the Optionsdialog box.

Procedures: Select Objects

To select one object

1 In the Toolbox, click the Object Selection tool.

2 On the canvas, click the object to display the bounding box for thatobject or object group.


3 Click the object again, if necessary, to access the control points for thatobject.

Toolbox:

To select several objects

1 In the Toolbox, click the Object Selection tool.

2 On the canvas, drag across the objects you want to select. How the objectsare selected depends on the properties that have been set in the propertiesflyout pane of the Object Selection tool.

■ Window selection. Selects objects that the solid-line boundary boxencloses.

■ Crossing selection. Selects objects that the dashed-line boundary boxencloses or crosses.

■ Window/Crossing selection (default). Determines the selection methodbased on the direction of the drag. Dragging left to right creates awindow selection. Dragging right to left creates a crossing selection.

Toolbox:

To invert a selection

■ With objects on the canvas selected, click Edit menu ➤ Invert Selection.On the canvas, selection is removed from objects that are selected, andobjects that are not selected become selected.

To set the object selection method

1 In the Toolbox, click the Layer Selection tool or the Object Selection tool.

2 Click the properties flyout arrow to open the selection tool propertiesflyout.

3 From the Mode list, select one of the following options:

■ Window selection. Selects only objects that the solid-line boundarybox encloses.

Procedures: Select Objects | 115

■ Crossing selection. Selects all objects that the dashed-line boundarybox encloses or crosses.

■ Window/Crossing selection (default). Determines the selection methodbased on the direction of the drag. Dragging left to right creates awindow selection. Dragging right to left creates a crossing selection.

Toolbox:

To clear object selection

■ Press ESC or click the canvas in an area that has no objects.

To select all objects on a layer or sketch

■ In the Layers palette, click the layer selection triangle at the inside end ofthe layer row. (The triangle is on the right or left end of the row, dependingon the location of the dashboard.)Alternate procedure: Press V and select an object or use the Layer Selectiontool.

To select hidden objects

1 In the Toolbox, click the Layer Selection tool or the Object Selection tool.

2 Select the objects on the canvas.

3 Right-click and click one of the following options:

■ Select Object Behind. Selects the object directly beneath the top-mostobject in the selection set.

■ Select Bottom Object. Selects the object whose draw order is the lowestin the selection set.

■ Select Layer Behind. Selects all objects on the layer whose draw orderis directly beneath the top-most object in the selection set.

■ Select Bottom Layer. Selects all objects on the layer whose draw orderis the lowest in the selection set.

To determine which layer contains specific objects

1 Using the Layer Selection tool or the Object Selection tool, click an object.


2 In the Layers palette, click the layer selection triangle (located at theinside end of the layer row). The triangle changes color to indicate theselection status.

■ Solid triangle: All objects on the layer are selected.

■ Hollow triangle: Some objects on the layer are selected.

To change the layer of an object

■ Do one of the following:

■ Right-click the object ➤ Send to Layer ➤ sketch_name ➤ layer_name.

■ Select the object. Above the canvas, select the new layer on the Layersdrop-down list.

■ On the properties flyout panel of the Match Properties tool, select Layer.On the canvas, click an object on the destination layer. Click the objectwhose layer you want to change.

■ Click Palettes menu ➤ Properties. In the Properties palette, click thename of the layer. Click the layer name arrow and select a differentlayer.

NOTE Views and viewports imported into Impression might have differentscales and 0,0 origin points. Dragging a layer to a different sketch can causethe layer objects to shift and be resized on the canvas.

Procedures: Select Objects | 117

Navigate the Canvas

Pan to reposition the canvas or zoom to get a closer or more distant display of the objects inyour illustration.

Pan to Shift the CanvasDrag the Impression canvas to a different position on the screen.

Panning shifts the position of the canvas, not the objects within the canvas. Byusing the Pan tool in combination with the Zoom tool, you can position yourwork area to display exactly the detail you need.

Temporarily activate the Pan tool while other tools are active by holding downthe SPACEBAR. You can also press the middle mouse button as you drag (ifavailable).

Procedures: Pan to Shift the Canvas

To pan the canvas

1 Click Display ➤ Pan.

2 Press the left mouse button and drag to reposition the canvas on the screen.

Toolbox:

11

119

Alternate procedure: Press SPACEBAR and drag the canvas.

Zoom to Change MagnificationAs you work, zoom in closer to the objects in your illustration, or zoom outto get an overview.

Several zoom options are available either from a menu, or by using shortcutkeys when the Zoom tool is active.

■ Zoom incrementally. Click the canvas to zoom in by the zoom factorpercentage. Press ALT+click to zoom out.

■ Zoom to a specific percentage. On the left end of the program status bar,click the percentage list and select another zoom value.

■ Window zoom. Drag to create a rectangular window that defines the extentsof the new zoomed area.

■ Zoom Previous. Restore the previous zoom level. Repeated use of ZoomPrevious steps back through a succession of zoom levels.

■ Actual Size. (Not available in the Block Editor.) Resets the zoom factor to100%.

■ Zoom Extents. Zooms to display all the objects in the illustration.

■ Zoom to Selection. Zooms to show all selected objects, centered on thescreen.

■ Zoom Preset. Restores up to ten zoom levels that you have previouslysaved. Zoom presets are assigned a number from 0 to 9. You can pressALT+n (where n is the number of the saved zoom level) to set the zoompreset. CTRL+n is an alternate way to restore the zoom level.

You can also set the Zoom tool properties to provide a gradual transition(animated window zoom) or as a more abrupt level replacement.

120 | Chapter 11 Navigate the Canvas

If your mouse has a scroll wheel, you can also roll the wheel forward andbackward to zoom in and out.

NOTE Zoom percentages do not affect the overall output scale in Impression.These scales are set in the Layers palette (for each sketch) and in the Print dialogbox.

Procedures: Zoom to Change Magnification

To zoom incrementally

1 Click Display menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom.

2 To zoom closer, click the point on the canvas that you want to be centeredin the screen display.

3 To zoom out, press ALT+click the point on the canvas that you want tobe the center of the screen display.

Toolbox:

Alternate procedure: Roll the scroll wheel on your mouse.

To zoom by a specific percentage

■ On the left end of the program status bar (below the canvas), click thepercentage list and select another zoom value.

To zoom to a specific area


2 On the canvas, drag to create a temporary window around the area ofthe drawing to which you want to zoom.

When you release the mouse button, the display changes so the areawithin the temporary window fills the screen.

Toolbox:

Procedures: Zoom to Change Magnification | 121

To zoom to the previous zoom level

1 Click Display menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom Previous.

The previous zoom level is restored.

2 Repeat step 1 to restore a succession of previous zoom displays.

Alternate procedure: Press CTRL+SHIFT+Z.

To zoom to printed size

■ Click Display menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom Actual Size.The objects are displayed at 100% of their printed size.

NOTE This option is not available in the Block Editor.

Alternate procedure: Press ALT+SHIFT+Z.

To zoom drawing extents

■ Click Display menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom Extents.The display is resized so the extents, or outer limits, of all objects in theillustration fill the screen.

Alternate procedure: Press ALT+Z.

To zoom selected geometry

1 Click Tools ➤ Select Objects.

2 Select the object you want to zoom to.

3 Click Display menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Selection.

The display is resized so that all selected objects are displayed on thescreen.

Alternate procedure: Press SHIFT+Z.

To save and reuse zoom settings


2 Set the illustration at the zoom setting you want to save.

3 With any tool active, hold down the ALT key and press a number from0 to 9.

The setting is stored with that number.

122 | Chapter 11 Navigate the Canvas

4 When you want to restore a saved zoom level, click Display menu ➤

Zoom ➤ Zoom Preset ➤ n, where n is the number of the saved zoomlevel.

Alternate procedure: Press the CTRL+n at any time.

To set how the zoom is displayed

1 In the Toolbox, click the Zoom tool properties flyout arrow to expandthe properties pane.

2 Select Animated Window Zoom if you want the zoom to be displayed asa gradual transition. Clear the selection if you want the zoom transitionto be a single change.

Toolbox:

Procedures: Zoom to Change Magnification | 123

Display Information AboutYour Drawing

You can quickly find information about the objects in your drawing on the status bar or bydisplaying the Properties palette.

Drawing Coordinates

Impression uses a Cartesian coordinate system to identify the location of objects on the canvas.The location values are expressed as X,Y coordinates, where X is the vertical distance from theorigin and Y is the horizontal distance from the origin.

12

125

In Impression, the origin, or 0,0 point, is located at the lower-left corner of the canvas,regardless of how you resize or reorient the canvas. The cursor location on the canvas isdisplayed in the lower-left corner of the status bar, at the bottom of the Impression window.

The coordinate values represent the canvas size, as set in the Document Setup dialog box.Therefore, the coordinates for the points indicated in the following illustration, would beas follows:

■ Lower-left corner of the rectangle: 0,0

■ Lower-right corner of the rectangle: 0,5

■ Upper-right corner of rectangle: 4,5

■ Upper-left corner of the rectangle: 0,4

A 3D coordinate system is not supported in Impression. (A 3D coordinate system uses a Zvalue to represent a point that is extruded in a perpendicular direction from the planedefined by the X,Y coordinates.)

Although coordinates are not as important in Impression as they are in an application suchas AutoCAD, they provide a way to set relative distances. You can verify the current locationof the cursor in the status bar as you work.

Information About Layers and Appearance Styles

Information about the current layer and appearance styles is available in the followingplaces:

■ Impression stationary toolbar.Displays the current layer and appearance style to theright of the Toolbox.

■ Properties palette. Displays and modifies the layer and appearance style of selectedobjects.

126 | Chapter 12 Display Information About Your Drawing

■ Layers palette. Provides access to all layers and appearance styles.

You can use a combination of these methods, depending on whether you are changingvalues or verifying information.

Properties of the Current Selection

The Properties palette provides a quick way to display and change information about objectsyou have selected. The following common properties are displayed for most objects:

■ Layer name

■ Appearance style assigned to the object

■ Style scale

■ Height and Width of the selection, expressed in the unit of measurement specified inthe Document Setup dialog box.

If you select a block, additional information is displayed:

■ Block definition dimensions

■ Insertion scale (if it has been resized on the canvas)

■ Block insertion dimensions

If you select text, the Text Properties palette is automatically displayed. There you can setsuch properties as font, type size, formatting, and alignment.

Procedures: Display Information About YourDrawing

To display or hide the status bar

■ Click Display menu ➤ Status Bar.

To display the cursor coordinates

■ If the status bar is not visible at the bottom of the Impression window,click Display menu ➤ Status Bar.

Procedures: Display Information About Your Drawing | 127

The current location of the cursor is indicated in the lower-left corner ofthe Impression window. The format is in X,Y format. For more information,see Display Information About Your Drawing.

To display the current layer and appearance style

■ If the toolbar is not visible at the top of the Impression window, clickPalettes menu ➤ Toolbar.The Layer and Style drop-down lists are displayed to the right of thetoolbox. The displayed values pertain to either the selected object or (ifno object is selected) to the current layer.

To display the style of a selected object

1 On the canvas, select the object you want to change.

2 Click Palettes menu ➤ Properties.

3 On the canvas, select an object.

In the Properties palette, the Style box displays the style of the object.

4 To change the style, click the box and choose another option from thelist.

To display the layer of a selected object


2 On the canvas, select an object.

In the Properties palette, the Layer box displays the layer of the object.

To display and change properties of selected objects

1 On the canvas, select the objects whose properties you want to display.


The properties for the current selection are displayed in the Propertiespalette. If you selected more than one object, only the properties that arethe same for all objects are displayed.

3 To change a setting, click its text box and select or enter a new value.

128 | Chapter 12 Display Information About Your Drawing

Apply Appearance Styles

Apply existing styles to layers and objects, and import styles from other projects.

How Style Sets Are OrganizedThe Styles palette contains a variety of styles that can be used to stylize yourillustration.

Use the Styles Palette

Appearance styles are stored in the Styles palette, and modified in the StyleEditor. Both of these palettes, which are components of the dashboard, interactwith the Layers palette, which controls the overall organization of yourillustration.

The Styles palette is also available on the Block Editor workspace.

13

129

Your illustration can contain any of the following types of appearance styles,which are saved on the Styles palette.

■ Libraries

■ In Use Styles (under Search Filters)

■ Saved Styles (under Search Filters)

■ Custom Style Sets (Under Search Filters)

■ Block Styles

If the navigation plane is closed, you can access the various styles sets from adrop-down list at the top of the palette.

130 | Chapter 13 Apply Appearance Styles

As you create work in the Styles palette, you can easily duplicate, rename, andremove styles and style elements using the shortcut menu. You can also purgeall saved styles that are not in use.

Libraries

Style libraries are links to saved style sets in other Impression illustrations.Saving, editing, or using a library style copies it to the Saved Styles list in thecurrent document. The original library style is unaffected. Style sets in theAutodesk Impression 3\Libraries\Styles folder can be used as library links in anyImpression drawing.

If a style in the linked-to document is modified, its library reference is updatedthe next time you open the linked illustration. These changes do not alterlibrary styles that have been saved or inserted. To apply the changes, save thelibrary style again and overwrite the saved style. If a file that is used as a libraryset is moved or deleted, its link becomes unavailable in illustrations thatreference it in their libraries.

You can export the saved styles you use most frequently to a blank file usedspecifically to store files. You can then import them as libraries and includethem on the Styles palettes of all new Impression illustrations. Specify a newtitle for the libraries tab in the Document Setup dialog box.

How Style Sets Are Organized | 131

In Use Styles

Styles that have been assigned to a layer or object are listed on the In Use listof the Styles palette navigation pane. In Use styles are also displayed in theSaved Styles list.

Saved Styles

Saved styles include new, in-use, or saved library styles. When you create ormodify a saved style, you do not have to do anything special to save it. Theupdates are automatically saved. You can save a library style by applying it toa layer or object, or from the shortcut menu of a selected style swatch.

A check mark displayed on the lower-right corner of the saved style swatchindicates that the style has been assigned to a layer or object.

In the standard workspace, styles that you create, duplicate, or save from alibrary are placed on the Saved Styles list. In the Block Editor workspace, theseactions place the style with the other styles for the current block.

Custom Style Sets

You can set up your own groups for the styles you use most frequently. Filterstyles by name, media, or style type. For example, you can create a group thatincludes a specific type of stroke.

Icons on the lower-right corner of the style swatch indicate whether the styleis in use, saved, or stored in a library.

Block Styles

Block styles include styles belonging to any blocks that have been inserted inthe drawing. These styles are listed for each block name.

All styles except styles derived from Layer 0 (zero) in the original drawing canbe applied to other objects. Block geometry created on Layer 0 inherits thestyle of the layer that contains the block insertion. These styles can only beedited by editing the layer style. Blocks derived from Layer 0 use the followingicon:


Editing a block style affects both block definitions and block references. Whena block is exploded, its styles are moved to the Saved Styles list.

Original block and its styles

Updated block styles for the same block

You can modify block styles in both the standard workspace and the BlockEditor workspace.

Procedures: How Style Sets Are Organized

To create a style set based on a custom search filter

1 In the Styles palette, navigation pane, right-click Search Filters. ClickCreate New Filter.

2 In the Search Styles dialog box, specify the criteria for the custom searchfilter.

Procedures: How Style Sets Are Organized | 133

3 If you plan to use the filter frequently, select Keep New Filter in StylesPalette Filter List Until I Delete It. Leave the check box blank to use thefilter only once.

4 Click OK.

Styles palette:

To duplicate a style (Styles palette)

1 In the Styles palette navigation pane, click a saved style, a block style, ora custom search filter.

NOTE If the navigation pane is closed, you can select a style set from thedrop-down list.

2 In the preview pane, right-click the style you want to duplicate. ClickDuplicate.

By default, a numeric increment is added to the end of the style name(style_name 1, stye_name 2, style_name 3, and so on).

3 Overwrite the old name with the new one and click outside the edit box.

In the standard workspace, the style is added to the Saved Styles list. Inthe Block Editor, the style is added to the style list for the current block.

Alternate procedure: In the Style Editor, click the Copy the Stylebutton.

To rename a style

1 In the Styles palette navigation pane, click Saved Styles, a block style, ora custom search filter.


2 In the preview pane, right-click the style you want to rename. ClickRename.

3 In the edit box, enter a new name. Click outside the edit box to dismissit.


To remove an appearance style

1 In the Styles palette navigation pane, click a saved style or a custom searchfilter.


2 In the preview pane, select the style you want to remove and take oneof the following steps:

■ Right-click the style image. Click Delete.

■ Click the Delete icon (the trash can) in the lower-right corner of thepalette.

■ Press DELETE.

3 If the style is in use, you can select all style instances on the canvas (andchange the style) or you can cancel the deletion.

Styles palette:

To purge saved styles that are not in use

In the Styles palette, do one of the following:

■ In the navigation pane or drop-down list, click Saved Styles. Right-clickanywhere in the preview pane and click Purge Unused Styles.

■ In the navigation pane or drop-down list, click a custom filter. Right-clickanywhere in the preview pane and click Purge Unused Saved Styles.

NOTE You cannot purge all the styles in an illustration. At least one style alwaysremains.

To save a style from a library

1 In the Styles palette, navigation pane, under Libraries, click the librarythat has the style you want to save.


Procedures: How Style Sets Are Organized | 135

2 In the preview pane, right-click the style. Click Add to Saved Styles.

3 If the name of the style is the same as a style on the Saved Styles list, theConfirm Style Replace dialog box is displayed. Specify whether you wantto

■ Replace the file on the Saved Styles list with the in-use style.

■ Rename the in-use style.

4 Click OK.

In the standard workspace, the style is added to the Saved Styles list. Inthe Block Editor, the style is added to the style list for the current block.

Apply an Appearance StyleApply styles to layers or objects using several methods.

Ways to Apply Styles

You can apply appearance styles in the following ways:

■ Apply area fill to closed areas. Shades areas within boundaries created bythe same or different objects. See Add Fill to Closed Areas.

■ Apply styles to layers. Applies a style to all objects on the layer.

■ Apply styles directly to individual objects. Applies a style to the entireobject.

■ Apply a global stroke. Update stroke elements in all saved styles and blocksby selecting a new stroke type or changing the stroke weight. See ChangeStrokes Simultaneously.

■ Match the properties of one object to another. Copy the style and layerof one object to the next object that you select. See Match Styles.

Styles Applied to Layers

Most objects have an appearance style based on the layer to which they belong.You apply styles to a layer in several ways.

■ Drag the style from the Styles palette to a layer in the Layers palette.


■ Highlight layers in the Layers palette, right-click, and click Assign Style.Then click the name of the style. Only saved styles are available on thislist. (If you are in the Block Editor, this list displays the styles for the currentblock.)

■ Highlight layers in the Layers palette. In the Style Editor, under SelectedLayer’s Style, click a style in the drop-down list. Only saved styles areavailable on this list.

Apply an Appearance Style | 137

■ Click the layer selection triangle at the inside end of the layer row to selectthe objects on the layer. In the Styles drop-down list in the stationarytoolbar, click a style.

■ Click the layer selection triangle and double-click any style in the Stylespalette. All styles, including library and search filter styles, are availablewhen you use this option.

Styles Applied to Individual Objects

Styles applied to an object affect the entire object. This method is appropriatefor most stroke styles. For fill styles, this method works best if the object isclosed—that is, it has no gaps or open ends.

If Auto Layer is off, these instances, called style overrides or style exceptions,are unaffected when the layer style changes. If the original drawing is modifiedand you update CAD geometry or apply a style map, you need to reapplyindividual object styles manually.

You can apply styles to selected objects in the following ways.

■ Drag a style from the Styles palette onto the object. You do not need toselect the object first to use this option.


■ Double-click the style in the Styles palette.

■ Select a new style in the Properties palette.

■ Right-click the object and click Assign Style to Selection.

■ Select a new style from the Styles drop-down list (on the stationary toolbar).

When a layer containing style overrides is selected, the Style Editor displaysa Style Exception Alert.

Style overrides can quickly be reset to match the style of their layer.

Apply an Appearance Style | 139

Reset Object Style Overrides to Use Layer Styles

You can reset objects with style overrides to use the layer style (also knownas bylayer) using the following methods:

■ Specific objects. Select the objects and click Bylayer in the Styles drop-downlist on the toolbar.

■ All objects on a selected layer. Click the Style Exception Alert in the StyleEditor. Click Reset Style Exception.

Adjust Style Scale Based on Object Scale

If you resize an object or change the scale of the sketch that contains it, stylesettings such as stroke weight or overshoot might no longer be appropriate.By setting the Scale Styles option in the status bar, Transform palette, or inthe Layer Selection and Object Selection tools, you can automatically adjustthe scale settings to fit the size of the modified object. The Properties palettealso displays and controls the style scale settings. See Adjust the Style Size.

Set Opacity

Opacity defines the transparency of objects.

You can set opacity in the following locations:

■ Style Editor. Define opacity in the Stroke or Fill Properties panes.

■ Layers palette. Set opacity values for sketches, layers, and layer groups inthe lower-left corner of the palette.


Multiple opacity settings in the Style Editor and the Layers palette arecumulative. For example, if you assign a style containing a stroke elementwith 50% opacity to a layer with 50% opacity, the cumulative opacity is 25%.

Procedures: Apply an Appearance Style

To apply an appearance style to a layer

1 In the Layers palette, click the layer row to highlight it.

2 In the Style Editor, under Selected Layer’s Style, select a saved style fromthe list.

The style is assigned to the layer and applied to all objects on the layerexcept for objects with existing style overrides.


■ Drag a style from the Styles palette to a layer row in the Layers palette.(With this method, you can also assign library styles.)

■ In the Layers palette, right-click the style swatch on the layer row.Click Assign Style ➤ the name of the style you want to use. (Thelisted styles represent saved styles in the standard workspace and stylesassociated with the current block in the Block Editor workspace.)

To apply an appearance style to an object

1 On the canvas, press CTRL and select objects whose style you want tochange.

2 In the Styles palette, double-click a style.

The style is applied as a style override to the selected object. The StyleExceptions Alert drop-down list (Style Editor) indicates how many objectson a highlighted layer do not use the default layer style.


■ Select an object and change its style in the Properties palette.

■ Right-click a selected object. Click Assign Style to Selection ➤ thename of the style you want to use. (The listed styles represent savedstyles in the standard workspace and styles associated with the currentblock in the Block Editor workspace.)

Procedures: Apply an Appearance Style | 141

■ Drag a style from the Styles palette directly onto an object on thecanvas.

■ Select an object. In the Styles drop-down list on the toolbar, click astyle.

To remove all style overrides from a layer

1 In the Layers palette, select the layer that contains style overrides.

2 In the Style Editor, click the Style Exception Alert.

3 On the Style Exception Alert list, click Reset Style Exceptions.

All objects with style overrides inherit the style assigned to the layer.

To remove a style override from an object

1 On the canvas, press CTRL and select the object.

2 On the Styles drop-down list (stationary toolbar), click Bylayer.

The object inherits the style of the layer.

To change the draw order of layers

In the Layers palette, do one of the following:

■ To make objects in one layer display on top of objects on another layer,drag a layer upwards in the list.

■ To make objects in one layer display behind objects on other layers, dragthe layer below the other layerAlternate procedure: Right-click a layer row. Click Arrange ➤ the optionyou want.

To set opacity for sketches, layers, or layer groups

1 In the Layers palette, select a sketch, layer, or layer group.

2 In the Opacity box at the lower end of the Layers palette, enter the opacitypercentage for the layer.

NOTE Opacity values are cumulative. If a layer has 50% opacity and anelement in the style has 50% opacity, the overall object opacity is 25%.


Change Strokes SimultaneouslyQuickly change the appearance of your illustration by assigning an updatedstroke element to all saved styles and blocks.

About Global Strokes

Sometimes you open or import a drawing and discover that the stroke typeis wrong, or the lineweight scale is not appropriate. You can quickly updateall strokes that are in use or saved in your drawing—including strokescontained in blocks. In the Global Stroke dialog box, select a different stroke,scale the stroke lineweights, or do both.

Global stroke: Different stroke types

Global stroke: Different stroke scales

Changing the stroke weight also proportionately scales the overshoot value.

Setting a global stroke affects nested strokes, such as strokes used in strokedfill styles. Only the stroke elements—not the fill elements—are affected. Thefollowing examples show the effect of applying a wiggle stroke to a drawingthat uses an overlap stroke element in a stroked fill.

Change Strokes Simultaneously | 143

Before: Overlap stroked fill

After: Stroke elements convertedto a wiggle stroke

If you apply the global stroke to stylized illustrations, you might get unexpectedresults. In the following examples, the strokes in stroked fills provide most ofthe color, and textured fills are used to color the windows and wall hanging.


Before: Color provided by strokedfill and texture fill

After: New global stroke replacescolor except for texture fill

You can often improve the results by setting Set New Stroke Type to None.When you then scale the stroke, the color and stroke type remain the same.Only the scale is modified.

Change Strokes Simultaneously | 145

Global Style and Blocks

Assigning a global stroke automatically affects saved blocks, including allinserted blocks.

Blocks: Before global strokeassignment

Blocks: After global strokeassignment

Global strokes do not affect blocks created using images, such as PNG or JPGimages.


Procedures: Change Strokes Simultaneously

To change all saved stroke styles

1 On toolbar, click the Global Stroke button.

2 In the Global Stroke dialog box, modify the saved stroke elements asfollows:

■ Change the type of stroke. In the Set New Stroke Type box, clickanother stroke. If you want to change the width, or weight, of thestrokes without changing the type, click None.

■ Change the weight of the stroke. In the Scale Stroke Weights box, setthe percentage of change. This setting also affects the Overshootsetting.

Strokes in saved styles and blocks are updated.

Toolbar:

Match StylesCopy the style of one object or style swatch to another object.

With the Match Properties tool, you can copy a style from one object, includingarea fill, and assign it to a different object. You can also copy text formats toanother text object. The settings you select determine whether the activityalso moves the target object onto the same layer as the original object.

How Match Properties Works

Select the Match Properties tool before or after you select the copied object.If you select the tool before you select a style, the swatch next to theeyedropper cursor is empty.

Procedures: Change Strokes Simultaneously | 147

When you select the source object or a swatch on the Styles palette, the cursorchanges to a paint brush, and the swatch reflects the style. The highlightingthat identifies the source remains until you dismiss the tool or select a differentsource.

To apply the copied style, click an object. The object can be any geometricobject, including an area fill object.

Impression transfers all style properties, including scale and variation, to thereceiving objects. Because variation is based on a random calculation,appearance styles such as stroked fills vary somewhat from the appearance ofthe original style.

As you match styles, remember that some objects extend beyond theirgeometric intersections. Therefore, the boundaries of the style applicationmight be different than expected. The following example illustrates an attemptto fill the blank rectangular area to the left of the cursor. Instead, the redgradient fill style shades the entire object and accidentally supersedes thewhite gradient fill applied to the areas above and below it.


You cannot apply the style to an empty area composed of the boundaries ofdifferent objects. For that activity, you need the Area Fill tool.

Change Layers as You Match Properties

If you select the Layer option of the Match Properties tool, Impression movesthe target objects to the same layer as the source. Keeping objects with thesame styles on the same layers prevents style overrides and makes stylemodification more predictable later.

If you clear the Layer option, the copied style is handled in one of two ways.If the copied style differs from the layer style, it becomes a style override. Ifthe copied style is the same as the layer style, it becomes a bylayer style.

If you clear the Style option, the cursor changes to display a layer image insteadof a style swatch. Changing the layer of an object can still change its style.

An exception to this rule occurs when the target object uses an object style(or style override) instead of a layer style. That case creates a style override onthe layer of the source object.

You cannot move an object between sketches using the Match Properties tool.An error message offers the option of copying the properties without changinglayers, or of canceling the operation.

Match Styles | 149

Match Text Formatting

You can also copy formatting from one text object to another. If the firstobject you select is text, you can only select another text object. If the sourcetext object has mixed formatting, Impression applies the formatting of thefirst character to the target text.

Procedures: Match Styles

To apply the style of one object to another object

1 On the Match Properties tool flyout panel, make sure that the Style optionis selected.

2 Click Tools menu ➤ Modify ➤ Match Properties.

3 On the canvas, click the object whose style you want to match.

You can select any geometric object, a block, or an image. You can alsoselect a style swatch on the Styles palette.

4 Click a geometric object to receive the style. You can drag the cursoracross objects to select multiple objects. Impression applies the style tothe selected objects. If Layer is selected on the Match Properties tool flyoutpanel, the objects move to the layer of the source object.

5 To continue, do one of the following:

■ To apply the current style: Select more objects.

■ To match a different style: Click a different style swatch in the Stylespalette. You can also press ENTER or press ESC once and select a newsource object.

6 Press ESC twice to dismiss the tool.

Toolbox:



■ Press M.

■ Select the source object before you select the Match Properties tool.

To copy formatting from one text object to another

1 On the Match Properties tool flyout panel, make sure that the Text optionis selected.

2 Click Tools menu ➤ Modify ➤ Match Properties.

3 On the canvas, click the text whose style you want to match.

4 Click a different text object to receive the style. You can drag the cursoracross text objects to select multiple objects.

Impression applies the formatting to the selected objects. If Layer isselected on the Match Properties tool flyout panel, the objects move tothe layer of the source object.

5 To continue, do one of the following:

■ To apply the current style: Select more objects.

■ To match a different style: Click a different style swatch in the StyleEditor or press ESC once and select a new source object.


Toolbox:


■ Press M.

■ Select the source text before you select the Match Properties tool.

To change an object to another layer by matching properties

1 On the Match Properties tool flyout panel, select the Layer Option.

2 On the canvas, click the object whose layer you want to match.

3 Click a different object. You can drag the cursor across objects to selectmultiple objects.

Procedures: Match Styles | 151

Impression changes the selected objects to the layer of the first objectyou selected.


Toolbox:

To undo match properties actions one at a time

Do one of the following immediately after using the Match Properties tool:

■ Right-click the canvas ➤ Undo.

■ Click Edit menu ➤ Undo.

NOTE In most cases, pressing CTRL+Z applies the undo operation to all matchproperties actions in the current session of the Match Properties tool. Do not useCTRL+Z to undo a single action.

To change Match Properties settings

1 On the Toolbox, click the Match Properties tool expansion arrow todisplay the properties pane.

2 Under Include the Following Properties, click one or all options:

■ Layer. Moves the target object to the layer of the source object.

■ Style. (Not available for text.) Changes the style of the target objectto match the style of the source object.

■ Text. (Available only for text objects.) Changes the properties of thetarget text to match the properties of the source text. If the sourcetext has more than one set of properties, Impression uses the propertiesof the first character.

Toolbox:


Work with Style ElementsImpression styles are built from style elements: the saved strokes, fills, andeffects that you can use repeatedly. You can also create and save custom styleelements.

Assign Style Elements

An easy way to stylize the objects on a layer is to assign a different style tothe layer. You can also update the assigned style using existing style elements.

Styles are stored in the Styles palette. Several sets of styles, which can be setas library links, can be found in the Autodesk Impression 3\Libraries\Styles folder.These styles become embedded in your current drawing as soon as you saveor assign them to an object or layer.

All styles consist of one or more style element components—strokes, fills, andeffects. Style elements are available in the Saved Elements lists that aredisplayed when you add new elements to a style using the Style Editor. Youcan customize all style elements by changing properties such as color, opacity,and so on.

NOTE To improve program speed as you work, you can turn off certain styleelements. The Fast Display button on the status bar toggles the visibility of suchelements as hatched and stroked fills, drop shadows, dashed lines, and rougheneffects. This setting does not affect the printed illustration. For more information,see Hide Elements to Quicken Program Response.

Save and Reuse Style Elements

Click the properties flyout arrow in the style tree area of the Style Editor todisplay settings for the element.

Work with Style Elements | 153

If you want to save a single element to use in another style, click the SaveStyle Element button. The element then becomes available the next time youadd that type of style element to any style. For example, if you save a strokestyle, it becomes available in the Create New Stroke dialog box for thatillustration

Procedures: Work with Style Elements

To add a saved style element to an appearance style

1 If the style tree is not visible, in the Style Editor, click Edit.

2 Click the Create New Style Element button. Click one of the followingoptions:

■ Create New Stroke. The Create New Stroke dialog box is displayed.

■ Create New Fill. The Create New Fill dialog box is displayed.

■ Create New Stroked Fill. The Create New Compound Fill dialog boxis displayed.

■ Create New Hatch Fill. The Create New Compound Fill dialog box isdisplayed.

■ Create New Outline Stroke. The Create New Outline Stroke dialogbox is displayed.


3 In the dialog box, click a saved element to use as a basis for the new styleelement. Click OK.

The element is added to the style tree for the current style.

To save a style element


2 To modify the element settings, in the style tree, click the propertiesflyout arrow at the inside end of the element row.

3 Update the settings in the properties flyout. For details about modifyingstyle elements, see

■ Set Stroke Styles

■ Set Fill Styles

■ Set Effect Styles

4 To save your changes to the style element settings, click the Save StyleElement button at the bottom of the properties flyout. In the Save StyleElement dialog box, enter the element style name and click OK.

The style is added to the Saved Elements list that is available when youadd a new style element.

Import Styles and Style ElementsIf you want to reuse styles and style elements created for other designillustrations, you can import and export them.

Import Styles

You can import a style from another Impression drawing by opening a linkto its style library and then using the style.

For example, you can click the Import Styles/Open Libraries button in theStyles palette to find and open the style library of another Impression drawing.The styles on the Saved Styles list of the external illustration are then listedunder Libraries in the Styles palette of the current drawing.

Each style group listed under Libraries represents a read-only link to theexternal styles. However, as soon as you use a style from the library, a copyof that style is added to the Saved Styles list. Alternatively, you can use theshortcut menu to save individual library styles to the Saved Styles list.

Import Styles and Style Elements | 155

For library styles that you intend to use repeatedly, you can specify whichlibraries to include in the Styles palettes of all future Impression files. If a stylein the original document is modified, the change is updated in the library thenext time you open the linked illustration.

Export Styles

If you create a set of styles that you want to use as a library, you can exportthem to a blank Impression file. This file can then be linked to otherillustrations, or you can include it automatically in the Libraries list for allnew files.

Import Style Elements

When you import stroke and fill elements, they are added to the SavedElements list in dialog boxes such as the Create New Stroke dialog box. Theelements from the drawing you select can then be used as style components.

If there are duplicate names, a number is appended to the imported style. Forexample, Blue Pencil becomes Blue Pencil (1).


Procedures: Import Styles and Style Elements

To import styles

1 In the Styles palette, click the Open Library button.

2 In the Import Styles/Open Libraries dialog box, find and select theImpression file that contains the styles you want to import.


■ To add individual styles to the Saved Styles list: Select the styles inthe Preview area and click the Copy Selected Styles to Palette button.

■ To save the styles as a library in your current Impression illustration:Click the Open File as External Library button. Because the dialog boxstays open, use this option to import more than one set of styles.

■ To save styles and close the dialog box: Select the file or select anindividual style and go to step 4.

4 Click OK.

Styles palette:

To import style elements








3 In the Create New… dialog box, click the Link to Styles Library button.

Procedures: Import Styles and Style Elements | 157

4 In the Import Styles/Open Libraries dialog box, find and select thedocument with the style elements you want to import. Click OK.

The equivalent style elements from the other document are added to theSaved Elements list in the current document.

Create New… dialog box toolbar:

Alternate procedure: In the Create New…dialog box, right-click in theSaved Elements list. Click Import Style Elements.

To export a set of styles

1 In the Styles palette navigation pane, click any type of style.



■ To export a library, right-click the library. Click Export Library.

■ To export a set of block styles, saved styles, or custom search filters,right-click the name of the style set. Click Export Styles.

■ To export specific styles (and not the entire set), right-click a style inthe preview pane. Click Export Styles.

3 In the Export Styles dialog box, specify a name and location for the file.Click Save.

Styles palette:

To include a library in all new documents

■ In the Styles palette navigation pane, under Libraries, right-click a library.Click Always Keep this Library Open.


The library is included on the Styles palette whenever you open a new file.


To save library styles

1 In the Styles palette navigation pane, under Libraries, click the librarythat contains the styles you want to save.


2 In the preview pane, select the styles. (Press CTRL+click to add more thanone style.)

3 Right-click the selection. Click Save Styles (in the standard workspace)or Saves As Current Block Style (in the Block Editor).

4 If the name of the style is the same as an existing style, the Confirm StyleReplace dialog box is displayed. Specify whether you want to



5 Click OK.

The style is added to the Saved Styles list (in the standard workspace) orthe list for the current block (in the Block Editor).

Styles palette:

To save all styles in a library

1 In the Styles palette navigation pane, under Libraries, right-click thelibrary that contains the styles you want to save. Click Save All LibraryContent.

The styles are copied to the Saved Styles list.

2 If the name of the style is the same as a style on the Saved Styles list, theConfirm Style Replace dialog box is displayed. Specify whether you wantto



3 Click OK.

Procedures: Import Styles and Style Elements | 159

All the styles in the library are added to the Saved Styles list (in thestandard workspace) or the style list for the current block (in the BlockEditor).


Create and Modify Styles

Construct custom appearance styles by combining various style elements, by changing theirdraw order and visibility, and by updating their properties.

Construct Custom StylesYou can build an endless variety of styles in the Style Editor and see the changeson the screen as you edit.

Create a Custom StyleThe Style Editor provides tools for creating custom appearance styles.

About Appearance Styles and Style Elements

An appearance style consists of one or more style elements: strokes, fills, andeffects. Simple styles might have just one stroke or fill. Complex styles, such asoutline strokes or stroked fills, can include several nested elements. For example,a stroked fill might have multiple stroke, fill, and effect elements, as displayedin the style tree of the Style Editor.

14

161

An understanding of how a style is used helps you construct it using theappropriate elements.

The following example shows three appearance styles: one with a single strokeelement, the second with a single uniform fill element, and the third withboth stroke and fill elements.

■ Stroke. The linear path or vectors. Strokes define geometric shapes andcan be assigned as elements in a stroked fill style.A standard stroke is a line of uniform thickness, filled with a solid color.

An outline stroke can be empty, or it can contain fill that gives it texture,gradient coloring, or perhaps the appearance of being shaded with otherstrokes.

162 | Chapter 14 Create and Modify Styles

■ Fill. The colors, textures, and patterns that provide shading and colorization.When assigned to a layer, fill styles provide shading within closed geometrysuch as circles. In open geometry, the shading fills the gap between thestart and end points. Fill styles can also be applied as area fill to areasenclosed by separate objects.

Standard fill uses color, color gradations, or a tiled bitmap that imitates acommon texture, such as roofing

.

Standard fill can be modified to have a noise effect (which applies blotches,or mottling), or a watercolor effect (which combines noise with roughenededges).

Compound fill includes one of two types: stroked fill or hatch fill.

Stroked fill consists of a filled area that appears to be created using a seriesof parallel strokes.

Hatch fill is a repeating pattern of strokes, which are not necessarily parallel.

Create a Custom Style | 163

■ Effect. An effect adds drop shadows or roughened edges to strokes or fills.

An effect applied to a single style element modifies only that stroke or fillelement. In the style tree hierarchy, this element is nested beneath theelement it modifies.

An effect can also be set to affect every element in the style. These effectsare displayed at the bottom of the style tree.

Element Properties

In the Style Editor, you build a style by combining the stroke, fill, and effectelements. You modify the element settings in the Element Properties flyoutthat is displayed whenever your cursor hovers over a properties flyout arrowin the style tree.


The properties flyout arrow is on either the left or right end of the row,depending on the location and docking status of the Style Editor.

Draw Order of Style Elements

The visibility of elements within a style depends on their hierarchical orderwithin the style tree. To control draw order, move the element groupings toa different position in the style tree. This method also sets the appearance ofelements within an outline stroke or stroked fill group.

Order of style elements changed (complex style)

The order of the layers in the Layers palette determines the draw order of thegeometry on the canvas.


Layer order changed

Procedures: Create a Custom Style

To create an appearance style








3 In the dialog box, click a saved element to use it as a component in thestyle. Click OK.


4 In the style tree, change the draw order of each element in the appearancestyle by dragging it up or down in the list.

The Style Preview changes to reflect the adjustments.

5 To remove any unneeded style elements, select the element row and pressDELETE.

The style changes are automatically saved to the Saved Styles list in theStyles palette.

To select a style for editing

1 Display a style in the Style Editor using one of the following methods:

■ In the Styles palette, click a style swatch.

■ In the Layers palette, click a layer.

■ On the canvas, select an object.

NOTE Selected layers or objects inherit any changes you make in the StyleEditor.


To modify an existing style element

1 Select a style for editing. See To select a style for editing.


3 Update the settings in the Properties flyout. For details about modifyingstyle elements, see


■ Set Fill Styles


4 To save your changes to the style element settings, click the Save StyleElement button at the bottom of the Properties flyout. In the Save StyleElement dialog box, enter the element style name and click OK.

The style is added to the Saved Elements list that is available when youadd a new style element.


To turn style elements on or off


2 In the Style Editor, style tree area, click the light bulb next to the styleelement that you are changing.

The icon is gray when the element is off and yellow when the elementis on.

Alternate procedure: At the bottom of the properties flyout, click TurnStyle Element On or Turn Style Element Off.

To remove a style element from the style tree


2 In the Style Editor, style tree area, do one of the following:

■ Click the element you want to remove and press DELETE.

■ Right-click the style element you want to remove. Click Remove

■ Click the properties flyout arrow at the inside end of the layer row.At the bottom of the Element Properties flyout, click the Delete StyleElement button.

To set the opacity of a style element



3 In the properties flyout, select or enter the percentage of opacity that youwant the style element to have. Use a lower percentage to make theelement more transparent.

NOTE You can also change the opacity of objects by setting the opacity oflayers in the Layers palette. See To set opacity for sketches, layers, or layergroups.

To change the draw order of style elements within a style



2 In the Style Editor, style tree area, drag the style element you want tomodify to a different position in the list. Elements are displayed on topof the elements that are below them in the layer list.

To delete a saved style element


NOTE For this procedure, you can select any style.

2 Click Add Style Element. On the list, click the option that correspondsto the type of style element you want to remove. For example, if youwant to remove an outline stroke, click Create New Outline Stroke.

3 In the dialog box, click the style element you want to remove.


■ Right-click the style. Click Delete.

■ Press DELETE.

■ Click the Delete Selected Style Elements button.

The style is removed from the Saved Effects list and is no longer availablein the dialog box.

Set Stroke StylesStroke styles adhere to linear paths or vectors that form the geometric shapesin your drawing.

Overview: Types of StrokeThe types of strokes you can set in Impression range from the simpler, standardstrokes to the more complex outline strokes.

You can define stroke media that simulate the various types of drawinginstruments, including pencil and marker.

Set Stroke Styles | 169

Simple strokes can have a single, uniform color. Outline strokes have a stroke,a fill, or both. You can achieve variety with outline strokes by using strokedfills.

Both standard and outline strokes have modifiable properties such as weight,overshoot, and gaps, which define their overall appearance as they followtheir respective paths.

You can also add drop shadow and roughen effects to any stroke style.

Create and Modify StrokesUse standard stroke elements or customize the stroke settings in the StrokeProperties flyout of the Style Editor.



How To: ■ Procedures: Create and Modify Strokes


■ Apply an Appearance Style

■ Create and Modify Strokes

■ Set Fill Styles


■ Build Styles in the Style Editor


■ Stroke Properties (Style Editor)

■ Outline Stroke Properties (Style Editor)

■ Create New Stroke Dialog Box

■ Create New Outline Stroke Dialog Box

■ Styles Palette

General Stroke Properties

All strokes share certain properties such as color, opacity, weight, media,endcaps, and dashed settings. Many of these properties, in turn, have theirown unique properties.

A standard stroke is a line of uniform thickness, filled with a single color. Itcan have gaps (dashed or random) or be assigned a roughen effect or dropshadow.


Outline Strokes

An outline stroke can be empty, or it can contain fill, which gives it textureor the appearance of being shaded with other strokes.

An outline stroke consists of the following basic elements:

■ Outline stroke element. The settings that define the overall weight,overshoot, endcap type, and whether the style has gaps.

■ Fill element (optional). (Nested within the outline stroke element.) Thefill that shades the interior of the outline stroke.

■ Stroke element (optional). (Nested within the outline stroke element.)The stroke that defines the edges of the outline stroke.

An outline stroke element can have dashed-line and endcap properties, justlike any other stroke. Its fill can be any type of uniform, gradient, stroked, ortextured fill.


To create an outline stroke with a stroked fill that fits entirely within theoutline, set Overshoot and variance settings to 0.

Dashed-Line Strokes

You can create dashed-line strokes by setting them to have gaps, or spaces,between line segments. You specify the length, variation, and randomness ofthese gaps.

The following examples show, top to bottom, a dashed stroke, random gappedstroke, and an outline stroke with a random gap.

NOTE Setting an Overshoot value for dashed-line strokes sometimes results in acontinuous line.

Procedures: Create and Modify Strokes

To define a new stroke for an appearance style


2 Below the style tree, click the Create New Stroke button.

3 In the Create New Stroke dialog box, do the following:

■ Stroke Media Type. Click Standard, Pencil, or Marker.

■ Saved Elements. Click the element you want to add to the style.

■ Click OK.

A new stroke element is added to the style tree.



5 In the Stroke Properties flyout pane, customize the stroke appearance bychanging the settings.

6 To remove any unneeded style elements, select the element row and pressDELETE.

7 To set the draw order of the stroke in the appearance style, drag it up ordown in the style tree.

The style preview changes to reflect the adjustments you make.

Style Editor toolbar (style tree area):

To create an outline stroke


2 Below the style tree, click the Create New Stroke button.

3 In the Create New Outline Stroke dialog box, do the following:

■ Outline Stroke Options. Click Stroke & Fill, Stroke Only, or Fill Only.


■ Click OK.

In the style tree, up to two new rows are nested under an outline strokeelement: a stroke and a fill.

4 To modify the element settings, in the style tree, click the propertiesflyout arrow at the inside end of the element row. You can modify theoutline stroke element and either of its nested stroke or fill elements.

5 Customize the stroke appearance in any of the following ElementProperties flyouts:

■ Outline Stroke Properties

■ Stroke Properties

■ Fill Properties

To modify existing stroke element properties




3 In the Stroke Properties flyout, customize the stroke appearance.

4 To save the element so that you can reuse it, click the Save Style Elementbutton at the bottom of the flyout.

The style element is added to the Saved Elements list in the Create NewStroke dialog box.

Set Fill StylesIn an appearance style, fill provides color, gradient, or texture. There are manyways to vary the appearance of your design illustration by applying andmodifying the fill styles.

Overview: Types of FillYou can create simple fill styles and complex compound fill styles that areshaded by strokes or hatch patterns.

Fill styles provide colors, gradients, hatch patterns, and textures that shade aclosed area—that is, an area whose boundary has no gaps.

Fill styles also shade the virtual closed areas between the starting point andendpoint of an open object such as a spline.

Set Fill Styles | 175

To avoid surprises when applying area fill, understand the difference betweenassigning fill styles to layers and inserting area fill objects into closedboundaries:

■ A fill style assigned to a layer shades closed objects on that layer. Thismethod works best when the original drawing adheres to layer standards,and its geometry consists of closed polylines, circles, or other closed objects.However, if the drawing has one layer, or if you are shading areas whoseboundaries include different objects, area fill provides the best method forshading.

■ Area fill inserts a new fill object within almost any closed boundary. Theboundaries can be formed from different objects on different layers. Thismethod is often the best way to apply a fill style, since you can previewthe area to be shaded and detect unwanted leaks. If Auto Layer is turnedon, the area fill objects can be automatically placed on unique layers whosestyle can be modified later. For more information, see About Area Fill.

Fill elements can be combined with a stroke to form the shading within anoutline stroke.

Create and Modify Standard FillStandard fill provides color, color gradients, or a tiled bitmap that imitates acommon texture, such as grass.


You can add any saved fill element from the Create New Fill Dialog Box. Usethe fill without changing it, or give your design illustration a variety of looksby modifying the settings in the Fill Properties flyout of the Style Editor.

Uniform Fill

Specify uniform fill to shade an area with a solid color. You can modify thecolor using RGB sliders or the Color dialog box to set the exact tone.

You can also decrease the opacity to make the fill more transparent.

To provide a blotchy, mottled look without applying a textured fill, adjustthe fill property (Effect) to have a noise setting.


You can also change the Effect setting to Watercolor, which adds Edge settingsto the noise effect. When combined with a roughen element, the watercolorfill style simulates hand-colored watercolor washes.

Gradient Fill

Gradient fill incorporates two or more colors that blend in a linear or radialdirection.


You can make adjustments by dragging a set of color and blend flags along agradient ramp, which gives an instant visual representation of the outcome.

Textured Fill

Textured fill incorporates an image such as grass, brick, or concrete. Almostany BMP, GIF, JPG, PNG, PCX, TIF, or TGA image can be used to create texture.

You can also do the following:

■ Set the number of tiled repetitions for each fill area.

■ Set the pattern to mirror alternating repetitions.


■ Set the fill to maintain its proportions, no matter how you resize thegeometry that encloses it.

Procedures: Create and Modify Standard Fill

To add a new fill element to a style


2 Below the style tree, click the Add Style Element button ➤ Create NewFill.

3 In the Create New Fill dialog box, do the following:

■ Fill Type. Click Uniform Fill, Gradient Fill, or Texture Fill.


■ Click OK.


5 In the Fill Properties flyout, update the settings to customize the fillappearance.

6 Set the draw order of the fill in the appearance style by dragging it up ordown in the style tree.

The style preview changes to reflect the adjustments you make.



To create and modify uniform fill elements




■ Fill Type. Click Uniform Fill.


■ Click OK.

A new fill element row is added to the style tree.


5 In the Fill Properties flyout, update the settings to customize the fillappearance.

6 Change other settings, such as color or opacity, as needed.


To create and modify gradient fill elements




■ Fill Type. Click Gradient Fill.


■ Click OK.




The Gradient Properties flyout is displayed, including the gradient ramp.

5 In the Fill Properties flyout, update the settings to customize the fillappearance, including color or opacity, as needed. Refer to the previewarea for visual feedback on the changes you make.

6 Use the gradient ramp to adjust the appearance of the gradient fill style.

■ To adjust the color: Click the flag at the color location you want tochange. Then adjust the RGB (red, green, blue) sliders under FlagProperties or double-click the flag to open the Color dialog box.

■ To add a new color or blend flag between other flags: Click thegradient ramp or click the Add Flag button.

■ To remove a color flag: Drag the flag from the ramp or select the flagand click the Remove Flag button.

■ To adjust the location of color or blend flags: Drag the flag on thegradient ramp or select the flag and set a new value in the Locationbox.


To create watercolor fill

1 Select a style for editing and delete any unneeded elements. See To selecta style for editing.



■ Fill Type. Click Uniform Fill or Gradient Fill.


■ Click OK.


4 Click the Add Style Element button ➤ Add Effect.

5 In the Add Effect dialog box, do the following:

■ Choose Effect: Click Roughen.

■ Options: Click Apply to Entire Style.


■ Saved Effects: Click the element you want to add to the style.

■ Click OK.

A new roughen element is added to the style tree.

6 To modify the element settings, in the style tree, click the propertiesflyout arrow at the inside end of the fill element row.

7 In the Fill Properties flyout, under Effect, click Watercolor

8 Scroll down to the Watercolor and Advanced Watercolor sections of theflyout and adjust the settings.

9 In the General Fill Properties area, update the settings to customize thefill appearance, including color or opacity, as needed. Refer to the previewarea for visual feedback on the changes you make.


Alternate procedure: Preset watercolor styles can be added to the Stylespalette by linking to styles available in the Autodesk Impression3\Libraries\Styles folder.

To set texture fill properties




■ Fill Type. Click Texture Fill.


■ Click OK.



5 In the Fill Properties flyout, Texture area, click Browse to locate a differenttexture. You can use almost any image saved in BMP, GIF, JPG, PNG,PCX, TIF, or TGA format.


6 Specify the mapping type for the texture pattern.

■ Scaled. Uses a real-world scale to determine the scale of the texture.The scale is based on the height and width values you enter.

■ Tiled. Scales the texture to fit the number of horizontal and verticalrepetitions you specify. If this option is set, you can also click Mirroredto flip alternating repetitions of the image.

7 In the Origin box, select a point on the image to serve as the origin ofthe pattern. The image to the right of the Origin box reflects yourselection.

8 Change other settings as needed. Refer to the preview area for visualfeedback on the changes you make.


Create and Modify Compound FillCompound fill produces filled areas that appear to be created using a seriesof strokes or hatch patterns.

Two types of compound fill are available:

■ Stroked fill

■ Hatch fill

You can select either type of compound fill style from the Create NewCompound Fill dialog box. Once you have added a compound fill to the style,you can use it without modification, or change the fill properties in the FillProperties flyout.

Stroked Fill

Stroked fill contains a series of parallel strokes.


You can set stroked fill to be mirrored, and control the angle, overshoot, arc,and spacing of the stroke components. To give the stroke components arandom, hand-drawn, appearance, set a variance percentage for the properties.

Hatch Fill

Impression imports and reuses AutoCAD-format hatch patterns but convertsthem to Impression styles.


You can modify any hatch fill style by updating the stroke, adding dropshadows or roughen effects, or by adding a fill.

Procedures: Create and Modify Compound Fill

To create a stroked fill style


2 Below the style tree, click the Add Style Element button ➤ Create NewStroked Fill.

3 In the Create New Compound Fill dialog box, do the following:

■ Compound Fill Type. Click Stroked Fill.


■ Click OK.

In the style tree, a compound fill element and a nested stroke elementare added.


■ Click the properties flyout arrow next to the compound fill elementto set the angle, arc, overhang, and spacing of the stroked fill. To givethe strokes a random appearance, set a variance percentage for eachproperty.

■ Click the properties flyout arrow next to the stroke element to changethe settings of the parallel strokes that shade the style.


Refer to the preview area for visual feedback on the changes you make.


Alternate procedure: In the Style Editor, style tree area, right-click therow below the location of the new element. Click Create New StrokedFill.

To create a stroked fill with a mirrored stroke


2 Below the style tree, click the Add Style Element button ➤ Create NewStroked Fill.


■ Compound Fill Type. Click Stroked Fill.


■ Click OK.

In the style tree, a compound fill element and a nested stroke elementare added.

4 Click the properties flyout arrow on the Compound Fill row.

5 In the Fill Properties flyout, under Stroked, click Mirror.


Alternate procedure: In the Style Editor, style tree area, right-click therow below the location of the new element. Click Create New StrokedFill.

To create and modify a hatch fill style


2 Below the style tree, click the Add Style Element button ➤ Create NewHatch Fill.


■ Compound Fill Type. Click Hatch Fill.



■ Click OK.

In the style tree, a hatch fill element and a nested stroke element areadded.


5 In the Fill properties flyout, update the hatch properties as needed.

6 Refer to the preview area for visual feedback on the changes you make.


Alternate procedure: In the Style Editor, style tree area, right-click therow below the location of the new element. Click Create New Hatch Fill.

Set Effect StylesEffect elements, such as drop shadow and roughen, are used to enhance strokeand fill elements.

Overview: Effect ElementsAdd drop shadows to simulate depth or a roughen effect to add ragged edgesto the outer boundaries of geometric shapes and fills.

Two types of effects are available for Impression appearance styles.

■ Drop shadows create an offset shadow behind or within geometry. Theoriginal geometry and the offset are treated as one object.

■ Roughen makes the edges of strokes or fills jagged.


You can apply drop shadow or roughen effects to the entire style, or to anindividual stroke or fill element. If you apply effects to the entire style, allelements in that style inherit the effect. However, if you apply the effect toindividual elements within the style, the effect is applied only to the selectedstroke or fill element.

Roughen effect applied to style, to stroke only,and to fill only

Drop shadow effect applied to style, to strokeonly, to fill only (Internal and Cast Shadowoptions off)

Add and Modify EffectsYou can use default effects or give your illustration a variety of looks bychanging the settings in the Style Editor.

The modifications you make to a drop shadow or roughen effect can be savedand reused in other styles.

Drop Shadow Effect

Use the drop shadow effect to imply that your two-dimensional geometry hasdepth.

Set Effect Styles | 189

Drop shadow with fill style

Drop shadow with stroke style

You set the angle and size of the shadow, as well as the distance at which itstarts to fade.


Drop shadow properties - fillstyle

Drop shadow properties - strokestyle

You can set variations of the drop shadow effect. For example, in a fill style,you can specify an internal shadow that has the appearance of an inset orhole. (For stroke styles, the change is often minimal.)


You can also specify a cast shadow that connects the shading to the cornersof the original geometry. This option simulates a shadow cast by a solid object.

The default fill for the shadow is gray, with a 50% opacity. You can modifythe color and opacity in the Element Properties flyout.

Roughen Effect

The roughen effect gives a random, jagged look to both strokes and fill. Youcontrol the roughness by changing the depth and frequency of the zigzagsections.

Higher values for treble height and frequency result in a jagged stroke or fillappearance. Set lower values to flatten, or smooth, the jitter aspects of thestyle.


Higher values for bass height and frequency distorts the overall curvature ofthe objects. Set lower values to adhere more closely to the original shape ofthe object.

NOTE Applying the roughen effect to a stroked fill can affect program speed. Toachieve a similar effect, you can set an Overshoot variance for the strokedproperties.

Procedures: Create and Modify Effects

To add a drop shadow effect


2 Below the style tree, click the Add Style Element button ➤ Add Effect.



■ Choose Effect. Click Drop shadow.

■ Saved Effects. Click an element.

■ Options. Specify how the new drop shadow is applied:

■ Apply to Entire Style. Applies the drop shadow effect to all strokeand fill styles.

■ Apply to Highlighted Style Element Only. Applies the drop shadowonly to the selected element.

The style tree displays a new effect element.


5 In the Effect Properties flyout, update the properties as needed:

■ Set the location of the drop shadow by entering the angle and distance.

■ Set the shading transparency by specifying the percentage of opacityand the distance of the fade from the outer edge of the shadow.

6 Specify the positioning of the drop shadow.

■ Internal. Draws the drop shadow on top of and inside the specifiedgeometry. (This option works best with fill styles.)

■ Cast Shadow. Connects the endpoints of the drop shadow to thecorners of the original geometry and fills the enclosed area withshadow. This option is unavailable when Internal is selected.


Alternate procedure: In the Style Editor, style tree area, right-click therow below the location of the new element. Click Add Effect.

To roughen geometry or fill


2 Below the style tree, click the Add Effect button.


■ Choose Effect. Click Roughen.


■ Saved Effects. Click an element.

■ Options. Specify how the new roughen effect is applied:

■ Apply to Entire Style. Applies the roughen effect to all stroke andfill styles.

■ Apply to Highlighted Style Element Only. Applies the rougheneffect only to the selected element.

The style tree displays a new effect element.


5 In the Effect Properties flyout, update the roughen properties as needed.Refer to the preview area for visual feedback on the changes you make.

■ Bass Height and Frequency. Set the height and number of curves forthe underlying curvature of the roughen effect.

■ Treble Height and Frequency. Set the height and number of zigzagsfor the smaller jitter aspect of the roughen effect.


Alternate procedure: In the Style Editor, style tree area, right-click therow below the location of the new element. Click Add Effect.

How Complex Styles Affect Program PerformanceComplex styles come at a cost. Learn what you can do to manage programperformance as you develop unique styles.

With Impression, you can create an infinite number of beautiful styles.However, some styles are more expensive than others in terms of programperformance. As you work, understand how the complexity of the style affectshow quickly you can work.

Style Elements That Affect Performance

The following elements can affect program processing speed.

■ High density stroked fills.

How Complex Styles Affect Program Performance | 195

You can replace closely spaced pencil or marker strokes with more widelyspaced, heavier, standard strokes with high fade property settings. Thisstrategy decreases the stroke count while providing more canvas coverage.Stroked fill created with standard strokes uses fewer resources than strokedfill with pencil or marker strokes.

■ High-density hatch fills.

Hatch fills contain many small strokes. In some cases, you can create araster version of the hatch pattern that can be inserted as a texture fill. Forexample, you can take a screenshot of the pattern and save it in JPG, BMP,GIF, PNG, PCX, TIF, or TGA format. Then, in the Fill Properties flyout ofthe Style Editor, browse to find the pattern.

■ Roughen and drop shadow effects in a stroked fill.

Roughen and drop shadow effects add complexity and can thereforeinfluence program speed, especially when they are elements of a strokedfill.


■ Roughen, drop shadows, dashed-line strokes, hatch fills, stroked fills, andtransparency.

Some of the best styles are expensive in terms of performance. You do nothave to give up using them, however. Instead, turn on Fast Display in theOptimize Style Display tab of the Drawing Performance Tuner to hide themas you work. You can set which types of properties are turned off. FastDisplay does not affect the printed output. However, be sure to verifywhether Fast Display is on to avoid applying additional fills to an area thathas already been stylized.

■ Colors achieved by setting opacity.

You can achieve a specific color in several ways, including adjusting thestyle or layer opacity. However, if transparency is not required, try adjustingthe color values in the Color dialog box.

How Complex Styles Affect Program Performance | 197

■ Layers that have more than 1,000 objects.Stylizing layers that contain many objects can take time. To speed thisprocess, click the Layer Unpacked icon on the Layers palette to treat objectswith the same style as a single object. Alternatively, you can move someof the objects to other layers.

Build Styles in the Style EditorThe Style Editor serves as a work space where you can build appearance stylesand see the results dynamically as you experiment.

Use the Style EditorThink of the Style Editor as a construction site for styles. As you add andmodify the various style elements, the preview image instantly shows theresults.

The Current Selection

The title of the Style Editor changes to indicate the current or selected layer,object, or style selection.

This title reflects what changes when you edit the style.


The Style Tree

The style tree area of the Style Editor displays the individual stroke, fill, andeffect elements that combine to make an appearance style. This area is thekey to understanding how the various style elements and styles relate to oneanother.

Each row of the style tree represents one aspect of the style. A style can consistof a single stroke or a single fill, or it can be more complex. The order of therows and the opacity settings for each element determine the overall visibilityof each element within the style.

Use the Style Editor | 199

In the style tree, the plus (+) and minus (-) boxes on the left side of each styleelement row indicate the complexity of the element. Click the plus signs toexpand the rows so that you can see any nested elements. Click the minussigns to collapse the rows when you need more space.

Each element row displays a light bulb that you can click to display and hidethe element in the style. In complex styles with several element rows, clickthe light bulb to turn off the style element row temporarily. Refer to the stylepreview to see how the style is changed.

Saved Style Elements

You build the style by adding saved style elements to the style tree. To addthese elements to an existing style, click the Create New Style button orright-click the style tree. You can then move your mouse over the propertiesflyout indicator to expand the properties flyout, where you can modify theelement settings.

After you modify the settings, click Save Style Elements at the bottom of theflyout to use the element in other styles. The next time you create a styleelement, it is available on the Saved Elements list.

Style Properties

Moving the mouse over the properties flyout arrow on the style tree displaysa flyout with settings related to the element type on that row. The panel opensto the left or to the right, depending on the position of the Style Editor.


To keep the flyout open, click the properties flyout arrow or click within theflyout panel. To close the flyout, click anywhere outside the panel.

NOTE The flyout stays open when you press the SPACEBAR to activate panning.Therefore, you can realign your canvas as you change style settings.

The changes you make are instantly displayed in the preview image and onany objects on the canvas that use the current style.

Style Preview

As you adjust an appearance style, the Style Editor preview image gives you adynamic preview of your changes. Refer to the preview image frequently asyou work to see how your changes affect the style. The image shows the endcapstyle as well as the draw order of the various style elements.

If the style has already been applied to a layer or to an object, the changes arevisible on the canvas.

A check mark in the corner of the preview image indicates that the style hasbeen applied to objects in the drawing.

Use the Style Editor | 201

A quick way to find all instances of the style on your canvas is to click the InUse Check Mark button.

Procedures: Use the Style Editor

To duplicate the current style

1 In the Style Editor, verify that the current style settings are correct.

2 Click the Copy This Style in the Style Editor button to the right of theStyle name (at the top of the palette).

Style Editor:

To determine whether a style is in use

Display one of the following:

■ In the Style Editor: If the style is in use, a check mark is displayed thelower-right corner of the style preview.

■ In the Styles palette: In the In Use list, the style is displayed. In the SavedStyles list, a check mark is displayed in the lower-right corner of the styleswatch.

To find all instances of an in-use style

1 In the Styles palette, right-click the preview swatch for the style you wantto find. Click Select All Instances.

On the canvas, all objects using the style are set off by a red outline. Ifthe Object Selection tool is active, a bounding box also defines the objects.

2 To see which layers contain those objects, open the Layers palette andlook for the selection triangles on the end of the layer row.

■ Hollow triangle: Some objects on that layer are selected.

■ Solid triangle: All objects on that layer are selected.

■ White triangle: No objects on that layer are selected.


Alternate procedure: In the Style Editor, click the In Use Check Mark inthe style preview image.

Apply and Modify ColorsYou assign color to stroke and fill style elements based on a color wheel or astandard color book.

Color settings are accessed by clicking the color preview image, available inseveral locations such as the Element Properties flyout in the Style Editor andthe Text Properties Palette. The Color dialog box has the following tabs:

■ Color Wheel tab. Sets color based on RGB (Red, Green, Blue) or HSL (Hue,Saturation, Luminance) values.

■ Color Books tab. Sets color from an array of standard PANTONE® colors,or from custom colors you have saved.

Color Wheel

The color wheel provides visual feedback that helps you assign the color youneed.

Apply and Modify Colors | 203

By dragging color indicators around the wheel and triangle, you can set hue,saturation, and luminance. The newly created color is displayed at the top ofthe preview color image in the upper-right corner of the dialog box.

You can quickly set the current color's complement, or opposite, by clickingthe Select Color Complement button. In addition, you can use an “eyedropper”to duplicate a color that is already in your drawing.

The Preview in Canvas option displays the changes on the canvas and on thestyle swatches as you make them. The changes are not permanent unless youclick OK, however.

Color Book

When you use a color book, you select a color from a set of preview images.

NOTE Autodesk Impression 3 includes updated PANTONRE color books. Somecolor formulas have changed and there are several new color books. RAL colorbooks have also been added.


A PANTONE® color collection is provided with Impression. The collectionincludes several color themes.

Only a few colors are displayed at once. However, you can use the Color Booknavigator to move to a different color range sequence quickly.

Custom Color Books

You can create custom color books with a color collection tailored to yourneeds.

The Color Wheel and Color Book tabs have an Add to Color Book button forsaving the current color to a custom color book. You can start with a blankbook or import and adapt an existing one. Unlike the standard PANTONE®

color book, you can rename color books and remove books you no longerneed.

You can also export a custom color book to other drawings. Exported booksare saved with the .cbk file extension.


Procedures: Apply and Modify Colors

To copy a color from the screen with the eyedropper



3 In the Style Editor, Properties flyout, click the Color button.

4 In the Color dialog box, Color Wheel tab, click the Select Color fromScreen button.

The dialog box closes temporarily and the cursor changes to aneyedropper.

5 Click the color you want to reuse.

The Color dialog box reopens, with the color you clicked displayed.

To set a color complement



3 In the Style Editor, element properties flyout, click the Color button.

4 In the Color dialog box, Color Wheel tab, click the Select ColorComplement button.

The complementary color of the previous setting becomes the currentcolor. That is, the setting changes to the color on the opposite side of thecolor wheel.

5 Click OK.


To set gradient fill colors

■ To set gradient fill properties within a style, see To create and modifygradient fill elements.

To preview color changes as you make them



3 In the Style Editor, element properties flyout, click the Color button.

4 In the Color dialog box, select Preview in Canvas.

As you change the color settings, the new color is reflected on the canvasand in the color swatch on the Styles palette.

5 Click OK to accept the changes. Click Cancel to restore the original color.

To assign a color using the color wheel




4 In the Color dialog box, Color Wheel tab, set the color using one of thefollowing methods:

■ In the color wheel and color triangle, drag the color indicator untilthe color preview image in the top-right corner is correct.

■ Change the HSL (Hue, Saturation, Luminance) settings.

■ Change the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) settings.

5 Click OK.

To assign a PANTONE color





4 In the Color dialog box, Color Books tab, select the PANTONE® colorbook you want to use from the Book list.

5 In the Color Book navigator, click the colors to display the color rangeyou want to use.

6 Click a color image on the left to select it.

7 Click OK.

To create a custom color book




4 In the Color dialog box, Color Books tab, click the Book arrow to displaythe list. Click New Color Book.

5 In the New Color Book dialog box, enter the name of the book.

6 If you want to start with the colors from an existing color book, selectthe book from the Source list. To start with a blank book, select Empty.

7 Click OK.

The new book is saved with a .cbk extension and added to the Book liston the Color tab.

To add a color to a custom color book




4 In the Color dialog box (either tab), select a color that you want to addto the custom color book.

5 Click Add to Color Book. In the list, click the name of the color book youwant to update.

The color is saved in the custom color book you selected.


To remove a color from a custom color book



3 In the Style Editor, Properties area, click the Color button.

4 In the Color dialog box, Color Books tab, click the Book arrow to displaythe list. Click the name of a custom color book.

5 In the color samples area, click the color you want to delete.

6 Click the Delete Color button.

The color is removed from the custom color book.

To import a custom color book



3 In the Style Editor, Properties area, click the Color button.

4 In the Color dialog box, Color Books tab, click the Book arrow to displaythe list. Click Import Color Book.

5 In the Import Color Book dialog box, find a color book you want toimport. Color books have a .cbk extension.

NOTE You cannot import AutoCAD color book files (.acb extension) intoImpression.

6 Click Open.

To rename a custom color book



3 In the Style Editor, Properties area, double-click the color preview image.


4 In the Color dialog box, Color Books tab, click the Book arrow to displaythe list. Select the custom color book you want to rename.

5 Click the Book arrow again. Select Rename Color Book.

6 In the Rename Color Book dialog box, enter the new name.

7 Click OK.

To remove a custom color book




4 In the Color dialog box, Color Books tab, click the Book arrow to displaythe list. Select Delete Color Book.

5 In the Delete Color Book dialog box, select the custom color book youwant to remove.

6 Click OK

To export a custom color book




4 In the Color dialog box, Color Books tab, click the Book arrow to displaythe list. Select Export Current Color Book.

5 In the Export Color Book dialog box, specify a path and file name for theexported color book.

6 Click Save.

The book is saved with the .cbk file extension.


Adjust the Style SizeAdjust all size-related settings in a style by a percentage that you specify, orset an object style to resize proportionately when the object is resized.

Resize Style Settings Simultaneously

What happens when you have created a style, but the stroke weight, overhang,and other settings are out of proportion for the geometry? You can adjust theindividual settings in the properties flyout for each element. However, to makethose adjustments simultaneously, you can open the Resize Style Dialog Boxand set a percentage for all size-related settings.

Adjusting this percentage modifies specific style settings. Since most stylesettings have an allowable range of values, any adjustments that are outsidethat range are limited to the nearest value within the range.

Resizing a style in the Style Editor modifies the current style and applies thechanges to all layers and geometry that use that style.

Adjust Style Scale Based on Object Scale

You can also set an object style to resize proportionately when the object isresized. Suppose you reduce the scale of a sketch that contains blocks by 50%,and notice that the weight and overshoot settings are too large.

Scale Styles off

If you turn on Scale Styles before making the adjustment, the object style isscaled appropriately.

Adjust the Style Size | 211

Scale Styles on

You turn on Scale Styles in the following locations:

■ Status bar

■ Transform palette

■ Layer Selection tool

■ Object Selection tool

Once Scale Styles is turned on, styles are scaled when the following operationsoccur:

■ Objects are resized in the Transform palette.

■ Objects are resized by dragging the grips on their bounding boxes.

■ Objects are transferred to a sketch that has a different scale.

■ The scale of the sketch that contains the objects is modified.

■ The Style Scale values in the Properties dialog box are modified for selectedobjects.

The style scaling remains in effect until you turn it off.

This type of adjustment does not change the settings in the style, create astyle, or create style overrides. Instead, it sets an object-based scale propertythat can be displayed and further modified in the Properties palette. Stylescaling affects all styles, including styles applied by layer, as object overrides,and as area fill.


Procedures: Adjust the Style Size

To resize style settings simultaneously (Style Editor)

1 In the Styles palette, find and select the style you want to modify.

2 In the Style Editor, click Edit to display the style tree.

3 Move the cursor over the properties flyout to the right or left of the stylepreview image.

The Resize Style flyout is displayed

4 Click Resize Style.

5 In the Resize Style dialog box, next to Resize Style, enter the percentageby which you want to scale the size-related settings in the style.

6 If you want to see the changes on the canvas as you change thepercentage, click Preview in Canvas.

7 Click OK.

The size-related settings in the style are adjusted according to thepercentage you set.

To scale the style when you scale an object (status bar)

1 In the status bar, click Scale Style (so that the button is highlighted).

2 Drag the grips on the object bounding box to resize it.

The style scale changes in proportion to the object scale.

To scale the style when you scale an object (selection tools)

1 In the Toolbox, click the properties flyout arrow beneath the LayerSelection or Object Selection tool.

2 Click Scale Styles to display the check mark.

The styles applied to any objects that you later resize are proportionatelyrescaled.

To scale the style when you scale an object (Transform palette)

1 On the canvas, select the object you want to scale.

2 Click Palettes menu ➤ Transform.

Procedures: Adjust the Style Size | 213

3 In the Transform palette, click Scale Styles.

The styles applied to any objects that you later resize are proportionatelyrescaled.

To scale the style of a specific object (Properties palette)

1 On the canvas, select the object whose style you want to scale.


3 In the Properties palette, in the Style Scale box, enter a new percentage.

The style settings of the selected object are proportionately rescaled.

To scale the style when the sketch scale changes

1 On the status bar, click Scale Styles. (The check mark is displayed.)


■ Move objects to a sketch with a different scale. Select one or moreobjects. Right-click the objects. Click Send To Layer ➤ name_of_sketch ➤ name_of_layer.

■ Change the scale of the sketch that contains the objects. In the Layerspalette, right-click the name of the sketch. Click Properties. In theScale list, click a new scale.

The style settings are updated proportionately to match the new sketchscale.


Retain and ShareStylizations

What happens when the CAD drawing that your illustration is based on changes? You donot have to start over. Just use CAD geometry update or style maps to reapply the styles.

Update CAD Geometry When the Source ChangesWhen the geometry in the source drawing changes, update your Impressiondrawing while retaining most of the stylizations you have added.

Overview: How CAD Update WorksThe CAD geometry process updates objects on a layer or sketch, retaining objectsthat you changed in Impression, if specified.

How Impression Changes Affect the Source Drawing

In most cases, your work in Impression consists of applying appearance stylesand area fill to geometry brought in from another source. You can also add textand other objects to enhance your illustration. The changes you make togeometry or text using Impression do not affect the source drawing. Similarly,changes made to the source drawing are not automatically reflected in yourImpression illustration.

What is CAD Update?

The CAD update process re-imports drawing geometry into an illustration thatyou have already stylized. With some exceptions, the appearance styles thatyou have already applied are retained.

15

215

Source drawing and stylized illustration

Updated source and updated illustration

You can choose whether to update sketches, layers, or both. You can alsospecify whether the update includes modified block definitions. The optionsyou select determine which changes in the source drawing are updated inImpression.

216 | Chapter 15 Retain and Share Stylizations

NOTE Objects you have added in Impression, including blocks and area fill, areretained after the update. Area fill objects remain where they were before youupdated the illustration, based on the location of the area fill anchor. If the originalboundaries of area fill have been moved, rotated, or resized, you can move theanchors or reapply the area fill in the updated illustration. See Work with Area FillAnchors.

Types of Objects

The CAD geometry update process differentiates between three types of objects:

■ CAD Object. A CAD object is an object from a DWG file whose shape,orientation, or location has not been modified in Impression. Objectswhose appearance style has changed are still treated as CAD objects.

■ Modified CAD object. An object that has been resized, reshaped, moved,or rotated in Impression is identified as modified. If you do not want to loseyour Impression modifications after the update process, you can chooseto retain a modified object. The updated illustration contains both theobjects modified in the CAD program and the objects that you modifiedin Impression before initiating the CAD update process. As a result, youmight need to delete the duplicate objects.

■ Impression object. Any object, including blocks and area fill, created inImpression.

Overview: How CAD Update Works | 217

Drawing opened in Impression and altered

Original drawing modified and updated inImpression

Duplicate object manually deleted fromImpression


The following table gives a quick overview of how different types of objectsare defined.

Overview: Types of Objects

CAD objects ■ Imported DWG objects that have not been modified,that is, resized, reshaped, moved, or rotated.

■ Unmodified imported DWG objects with an appearancestyle.

■ Unmodified block definitions and block references (in-serted in an illustration).

Modified CAD objects ■ CAD objects that have been resized, reshaped, moved,or rotated in Impression.

■ CAD objects that have been moved to another Impres-sion layer.

Impression object ■ Objects or blocks created in Impression.

■ Copies of CAD objects.

CAD Update Process

All layers and sketches that are opened or imported into Impression areassigned an update path. Impression sketches are also assigned a path to theoriginal viewport.

When you initiate a CAD update process from the Update CAD Geometrydialog box, you specify whether you are updating viewports or layers.Impression does the following:

■ Analyzes the types of objects in your illustration.

■ Determines whether the file path to the original drawing is still valid. (Youcan browse to find a new path, if necessary, or choose to ignore the missingpaths.)

■ Removes all CAD objects in the specified sketches or layers.

■ Retains all Impression objects and all objects on sketches or layers thatwere not selected for the CAD update process.

■ Retains modified CAD objects (if you specified this option in the UpdateCAD Geometry dialog box).

Overview: How CAD Update Works | 219

■ Imports all objects from the selected sketches or layers in the DWG file.

■ If a sketch is selected, imports any new layers and updates pan, zoom, andviewpoint changes.

■ Most objects, including objects with style overrides, inherit the stylesassigned to the layers that contain them. Area fill objects are regeneratedto extend to the boundaries that enclose their area fill anchors.

■ Displays the CAD Update Report (if you requested it).

Property Handling for CAD Update

As updated in ImpressionIn source drawing

Impression organization and style namesare retained.

Layer organization

Retained.Appearance styles set by layer

Added to Impression layer structure.New layers

Updated to reflect changes.Geometry

Retained in Impression based on the loca-tion of the area fill anchors. If boundaries

Area fill applied in Impression

have changed, you can reapply the areafill, or move the area fill anchor.

Not retained. The object inherits the styleof its layer.

Style overrides on CAD objects or modifiedCAD objects

Retained if the sketch is updated. Not re-tained if only layers are selected.

Changes due to zoom, pan, viewpointchanges, or viewport resizing

Update the CAD Geometry in Your IllustrationUpdate geometry that changes in the original drawing, including blocks.

When you specify a sketch or layer to update, only the objects on thecorresponding viewports or layers are updated in the Impression drawing.Objects on other viewports or layers remain unchanged. You can ignore certaintypes of changes, such as updates to blocks or fills.


Update a 2D View

Updating a sketch derived from a two-dimensional (2D) view results in thefollowing updates to your Impression illustration:

■ Removes all CAD objects on the layers in that sketch and re-imports CADobjects from the source drawing. See Update Geometry on a Layer.

■ Modifies the new sketch to reflect any source changes resulting from pan,zoom, or viewing angle.

■ Updates the Impression sketch to reflect changes to the viewport, such aslayers that have been turned off or on and viewport size.

Update a 3D View

Sketches derived from a view with three-dimensional (3D) perspective areupdated in the same way that 2D views are updated.

Some additional rules include the following:

■ You cannot use the CAD update process to switch between wireframe andhidden-line display. If the original view uses hidden-line display, obscuredlines are removed or hidden in the Impression sketch.

■ You cannot update individual layers in sketches with hidden lines removed.

■ If a top or bottom view becomes a perspective, isometric, or side view,hidden line removal is turned on and the ISO line number is set to 4.

Update Geometry on a Layer

To update only the geometry changes and not the viewport changes such aspanning, zooming, or viewpoint adjustments, select one or more layers. Objectsthat were included as external references (xrefs) are updated in the same wayas objects on other layers.

Updating a layer results in the following updates to your Impressionillustration:

■ Removes CAD objects on that layer and re-imports all CAD objects fromthe source drawing.

■ If specified, retains CAD objects that have been modified in the Impressionillustration.

■ Applies layer styles to all updated objects, new objects, and CAD objectswith a style override (applied either in the source or in Impression).

Update the CAD Geometry in Your Illustration | 221

■ Retains area fill created in Impression, based on the location of the areafill anchors. You can drag the anchors to a new location, depending onwhether the boundary geometry has been realigned. In some cases, youmight need to delete and insert the area fill again.

■ Restores an Impression layer name that was changed in Impression.

■ Discards object groups that contain CAD objects. Retains layer groups.

■ Retains draw order for existing layers. Adds any new layers at the top oftheir respective sketches.

Update Blocks

Choosing to update blocks results in the following updates to your Impressionillustration:

■ Redefines block definition geometry according to any new CAD blockdefinitions.

■ Replaces block references inserted into Impression, but retains any sizeand rotation updates made when they were inserted.

■ Retains style overrides for the blocks.

■ Updates any changes to the block viewing angle if a sketch that containsa 3D block is updated.

■ Explodes 3D blocks in sketches in which hidden lines were removed duringthe original DWG import.

Additional Update Guidelines

The update process follows these additional guidelines:

■ Renaming an Impression layer or sketch that has an update path does notaffect the update path. If you update the layer, the objects from the originalCAD layer are re-imported, but retain the revised layer name in Impression.

■ If the original layer was renamed or deleted, the Impression layer isretained, but contains no objects.

■ If you duplicate a layer in Impression, the objects on the original layercontinue to be treated as CAD objects. However, the objects on theduplicate layer are treated as Impression objects, which are retained butnot updated.


■ Impression layers that are moved to different sketches lose their updatepaths and cannot be updated.

■ Rectangular viewports that are changed to nonrectangular viewports inthe source lose their update paths and cannot be updated.

■ When imported or opened, a model space view is scaled to fit theImpression canvas. If you update a model space view whose overalldimensions have changed, the original import scale is retained. If theextents of the model space objects have increased, portions of the geometrycan extend beyond the canvas borders.

Before and after update: Original model space extents increased

Procedures: Update Your Illustration

To update sketches

1 Click File menu ➤ Update CAD Geometry ➤ Sketches.

2 In the Update CAD Geometry dialog box, under Select Sketches or Layersto Update, click the check box of the sketches you want to update.

A check mark indicates which sketches are selected.

3 If the original drawing has been moved, renamed, or deleted, the UpdateFrom area displays “None.” Under Select Sketches or Layers to Update,select a sketch. Click the Browse button to display the Open dialog box,where you can find and select the source file. In the Select a Viewportdialog box, click the sketch you want to use. Click OK.

NOTE If the drawing has multiple sketches, you must select each sketchbefore you browse to find its new location.


4 Specify whether you want to use a plot style and apply a default stroke.

5 Click Update.

All new and updated objects and view settings for the selected view arere-imported. See Update a 2D View for information about how thesechanges are handled.

To update layers

1 Click File menu ➤ Update CAD Geometry ➤ Layers.

2 In the Update CAD Geometry dialog box, under Select Sketches or Layersto Update, click the check box of the layers you want to update.

A check mark indicates which layers are selected.




5 Click Update.

All new and updated objects for the selected layer are re-imported. SeeUpdate Geometry on a Layer for information about how these changesare handled.

To update blocks

1 Click File menu ➤ Update CAD Geometry. Click one of the followingoptions:

■ Entire file

■ Sketches

■ Layers

2 In the Update CAD Geometry dialog box, under Select Sketches or Layersto Update, click the check box of the layers or sketches you want toupdate.


A check mark indicates what sketches or layers are selected.



4 Click Update Blocks.


6 Click Update.

All new and updated objects for the selected layer or sketch, includingblocks, are re-imported. See Update Blocks for information about howthese changes are handled.

To retain and compare modified CAD geometry

1 Click File menu ➤ Update CAD Geometry.


A check mark indicates which sketches or layers are selected.



4 Under Modified Objects, select Retain CAD Objects Modified inImpression.


6 Click Update.


The updated Impression illustration contains two versions of any modifiedCAD objects.

7 On the canvas, verify which version of the geometry you want to retainand delete the other version.

To retain area fill during a CAD update



A check mark indicates which sketches or layers are selected.



4 Under Special Objects, select Update Area Fill Objects.


6 Click Update.

The updated Impression illustration contains two versions of any modifiedCAD objects.

7 On the canvas, verify which version of the geometry you want to retainand delete the other version.

Review Updates to CAD GeometryDisplay a report that describes the effect of the CAD update operation.

If you want to display information about a CAD update operation, you canselect Show Report After Update in the Update CAD Geometry dialog box.


When the update process is complete, the CAD Update Report displays thefollowing information:

■ Names of updated sketches and their paths.

■ The number of updated, new, and missing layers. Click the expansionarrows to display the layer names.

■ The number of updated blocks. Click the expansion arrows to display theblock names.

Procedures: Review Updates to CAD Geometry

To display a report on update status



A check mark indicates which layers and sketches are selected.

3 If the original drawing has been moved, renamed, or deleted, the UpdateFrom area displays a “Missing source file” notice. Under Select Sketchesor Layers to Update, click a sketch. Click the Browse button to displaythe Open dialog box, where you can find and select the source file. Clearthe Sketch check box.

4 Click Show Report After Update.


6 Click Update.

When the update process is complete, the CAD Update Report is displayed.

Share Styles with Other DrawingsStyle maps provide a quick way to share a set of appearance styles with similarImpression illustrations.

Share Styles with Other Drawings | 227

Methods for Sharing Styles

There are several reasons for sharing styles with another drawing:

■ When you stylize illustrations derived from the same source drawings.

■ If your company has strict standards for layer naming and styles.

■ When you have created some useful styles for another drawing and do notwant to recreate them.

■ When you re-import the changes from the original drawing after it hasbeen modified.

The following table describes the various methods for reusing styles.

Style-sharing Methods

UsageAccessMethod

Reuse strokes, fills, and effects saved inother illustrations.

Style Editor ➤ Add Style Ele-

ment ➤ Create New…

Import ele-ments

Gain access to appearance styles savedin other illustrations.

Styles paletteLink tostyles lib-rary

Automatically apply styles from anotherdrawing to layers with the same name.

File menu ➤ Import Maps

➤ Import Style Maps

Import stylemaps

Update the objects that have changedin the source drawing and automaticallyapply styles to mapped layers.

File menu ➤ Update CADGeometry

CAD up-date

Use Style Maps to Share Styles with Similar Illustrations

Style maps are the settings associated with any Impression files that containstyle definitions, layers, and their associated styles. These style maps, orsettings, can be imported into drawings that use similar or identical layerstructures.

When you import a style map, all layers with the same name as the layers inthe source file receive the imported appearance style. All styles in the SavedStyles library of the source file are added to the Styles palette of the target file,even when a layer mapping does not exist.


The following table shows the basic guidelines that Impression follows whenit maps styles.

Style Mapping Rules

ResultTarget File MappingSource File

No mapping (all cases).Layers with different namesOriginal layer

Styles are mapped to match-ing layers within all sketches.

Layers with same namesSingle sketch

Styles are mapped to match-ing layers within matchingsketches.

Same sketch names, same lay-er names

Multiple sketches

No mapping.Same sketch names, differentlayer names

Multiple sketches

Styles are mapped accordingto the sketch draw order. Lay-

Different sketches, same layernames

Multiple sketches

er assignments in the sourcesketch with the highest draworder are mapped to the layerassignments in the targetsketch with the highest draworder.

Where possible, the draw order of the layers in the file that contains the stylemap is transferred to the layers in the target file. As a result, the layer ordermight be rearranged. Unmapped layers move to the end of the layers list inthe Layers palette. Layer groups might not be retained.

When you import a style map, you also import block style mappings. Althoughthe mapping guidelines are the same, the styles themselves are not related.See Share Block Libraries and Substitution Maps.

NOTE You are not required to do anything special to create style maps. Theycannot be displayed or viewed. Style maps are essentially the layer and style settingsassociated with every Impression illustration—so they are automatically part ofevery illustration. When you import a style map, you are importing the layer andstyle settings from another illustration.

Share Styles with Other Drawings | 229

If your drawings do not have the same layer structure, you can share stylesby importing style elements or linking to style libraries. See Import Styles andStyle Elements.

Procedures: Share Styles with Other Drawings

To import a style map

1 Click File ➤ Import Maps ➤ Import Style Map.

2 In the Import Style Map dialog box, find and select a file with the .irfextension. Click Open.

The style mappings and styles are imported into the current file.

NOTE You can import style maps and block substitution maps at the sametime by clicking File ➤ Import Maps ➤ Import Style and Block SubstitutionMap.

To import styles or style elements

■ See To import styles or To import style elements.


Draw Geometry

In addition to working with geometry created in other applications, you can draw simpleshapes, draw and modify splines, and even create freehand paths.

Draw ShapesYou can draw simple shapes, such as lines, rectangles, ellipses, and polygons.

Tips on Drawing ShapesFour basic shapes are available in the Toolbox or from the Tools menu: lines,rectangles, ellipses, and polygons.

Shapes are drawn on the current layer and automatically inherit the layer style.

NOTE If nothing seems to happen as you draw, verify on the Layers palette whetherthe current layer has been turned off (the gray light bulb).

16

231

Once created, all shapes are simple spline objects, which can be modified inthe same way that you modify any other spline.

Press the ALT and SHIFT keys as you draw to constrain the cursor to orthogonalangles. This method also forces uniform scaling to obtain shapes such as circlesand squares.

The following table shows how these keys are used.

Keyboard Shortcuts: Draw Shapes

ResultShapeKey

Draws shapes orthogonally (45 de-grees).

Line, polygonSHIFT

Draws squares.RectangleSHIFT

Draws circles.EllipseSHIFT

Draws shapes from center (not the end-point). This key does not apply to poly-gons.

All shapesALT

Temporarily activates Object Selectiontool.

All shapesCTRL

Exits active tool.All shapesESC

One-letter “sticky keys” make it easy for you to quickly activate a tool withoutusing the Toolbox. For example, enter L to make the Line tool active.

Keyboard Shortcuts: Activate Drawing Tools

CursorActivatedTool

Key

FreehandF

SplineS

232 | Chapter 16 Draw Geometry

CursorActivatedTool

Key

LineL

RectangleR

EllipseC

PolygonY

Draw a LineThe Line tool draws straight line segments, created by clicking points on thecanvas.

When you create successive lines, the endpoint of one line segment serves asthe start point for the next. By default, these segments are individual objects.However, by selecting the Connect Line Segments option in the Line toolproperties pane, you can create these segments as part of a single spline object.

Draw a Line | 233

Procedures: Draw a Line

To draw a line

1 Click Tools menu ➤ Geometry ➤ Line.

2 On the canvas, click the start point for the line. Click another point toend the segment.

3 Repeat step 2 to add line segments.

4 Press ESC or right-click to exit the tool.

Toolbox:

Alternate procedure: Press L.

To set line segments to be a single, continuous object

1 In the Toolbox, click the Line tool properties flyout arrow to expand thetool properties pane.

2 Select Connect Line Segments.

Sequentially created line segments are treated as a single spline.

Toolbox:

Draw a RectangleThe Rectangle tool draws rectangular and square shapes.


The segments of the rectangle are treated as a single object. You can changethe Rectangle tool properties to give the rectangles rounded corners, to specifya consistent aspect ratio, or set a specific size.

Rounded corners

Fixed size

Fixed aspect ratio

Procedures: Draw a Rectangle

To draw a rectangle

1 In the Toolbox, click the Rectangle tool properties flyout arrow to expandthe properties pane. Verify that the settings are correct.

2 On the canvas, click the start point for the first corner of the rectangle.Click another point to place the opposite corner of the rectangle.

To draw the rectangle from the center, press ALT+click to specify points.

NOTE If the properties are set to a fixed size (Fix and Size are selected in theproperties pane), click only one time.

3 Repeat step 2 to add rectangles.

Draw a Rectangle | 235


Toolbox:


■ Click Tools menu ➤ Geometry ➤ Rectangle.

■ Press R.

To draw a square

1 Click Tools menu ➤ Geometry ➤ Rectangle.

2 On the canvas, click to place the first corner of the square. PressSHIFT+click to place the opposite corner of the square.

3 Repeat step 2 to add squares.


Toolbox:

To set the Rectangle tool to draw squares

1 In the Toolbox, click the Rectangle tool properties expansion arrow todisplay the properties pane.

2 Select the Fix check box.

3 In the Fix drop-down list, select Aspect Ratio.

4 In the Height and Width boxes, enter 1.

Any rectangles you later draw are squares.

Toolbox:

Alternate procedure: In the Polygon tool properties, set Sides to 4.


To set rounded corners for rectangles

1 In the Toolbox, click the properties expansion arrow to display theproperties pane.

2 Select Rounded Corners.

3 In the Radius box, enter a radius value, in drawing units.

Any rectangles you later draw have rounded corners.

Toolbox:

To set an aspect ratio for rectangles



3 In the Fix drop-down list, select Aspect Ratio.

4 In the Height and Width boxes, enter values representing the ratio ofheight to width. For example, set height as 2 and width as 1 if you wantthe rectangles you draw to be twice as high as they are wide.

Any rectangles you later draw use the aspect ratio you set.

Toolbox:

To set a fixed size for rectangles



3 In the Fix drop-down list, select Size.

4 In the Height and Width boxes, enter values representing the height andwidth, in drawing units, for the rectangles you create.

Any rectangles you later draw use the size you set.

Draw a Rectangle | 237

Toolbox:

Draw an EllipseThe Ellipse tool draws elliptical shapes, including circles.

Ellipse tools have no extra settings. However, you can create a circle by pressingSHIFT as you draw.

Procedures: Draw an Ellipse

To draw an ellipse

1 Click Tools menu ➤ Geometry ➤ Ellipse.


2 On the canvas, click start point for the ellipse. Click again to place theopposite end of the ellipse.

NOTE Press ALT as you drag to draw the ellipse from the center.

3 Repeat step 2 to add ellipses.


Toolbox:

Alternate procedure: Press C.

To draw a circle

1 Click Tools menu ➤ Geometry ➤ Ellipse.

2 On the canvas, hold SHIFT and click a start point for the circle. Drag andclick to place the opposite end of the circle.

NOTE Hold SHIFT+ALT as you drag to draw the circle from the center.

3 Repeat step 2 to add circles.


Toolbox:

Draw a PolygonDraw equilateral polygons by dragging from one point on the canvas to theother.

Draw a Polygon | 239

The segments of the shape are treated as a single spline object. You can changethe Polygon tool properties to set the number of sides, to give polygonsrounded corners, or to specify a size.

Polygons are always drawn from the center.

Procedures: Draw a Polygon

To draw a polygon using the current settings

1 Click Tools menu ➤ Geometry ➤ Polygon.

2 On the canvas, click the start point of the polygon. Drag and click to setthe size and orientation of the polygon.

The cursor image reflects the number of sides currently set for polygons.You can increase or decrease the number of sides by pressing the Arrowkeys as you drag the cursor.

NOTE Press SHIFT as you drag to constrain the point selection to 45-degreeincrements.

3 Repeat step 2 to add polygons.


Toolbox:

Alternate procedure: Press Y.


To set the number of sides for a polygon

1 In the Toolbox, click the Polygon tool properties expansion arrow todisplay the properties pane.

2 In the Sides box, enter the number of sides for polygons.

NOTE As you draw, you can also increase or decrease the number of sidesby pressing the Arrow keys after you place the first point.

Any polygons you later draw are drawn with the number of sides youset.

Toolbox:

To set rounded corners for polygons

1 In the Toolbox, click the Polygon tool properties expansion arrow todisplay the properties pane.

2 Select Rounded Corners.

3 In the Radius list, enter the arc radius, in drawing units, for the roundedcorners.

Toolbox:

Draw SplinesMost geometric objects in Impression, including objects you import and objectsyou create, are Bezier splines. Once they are created, you can modify theirshapes by modifying their spline control points or bounding box grips.

About SplinesBezier splines are curves or vectors that pass through two or more points. Theyare created by clicking along a path, or by clicking and dragging along a path.

Draw Splines | 241

Types of Splines

In Impression, you can use the Spline tool to create splines using two methods.

■ Simple spline (default). Creates smooth, symmetrical curves that aregenerated automatically, based on the direction in which you draw. Dragand click to change the direction of a smooth spline segment, which isarticulated at the click point. Press ALT as you click to create corneredsegments.

■ Advanced spline. Creates smooth curves when you press the mouse anddrag between clicks, and creates corners when you click two points.Advanced splines are set in the Spline tool properties flyout. A majordifference from simple splines is the way successive spline segments affectprevious segments. With advanced splines, the length and direction of thedrag conversely affects the length and angle of the previous spline curve.When you press the mouse button and drag the cursor, the articulation(or change in direction) does not always occur at the click point. Instead,the click point acts as an anchor. As you drag away from the click point,the length of the previous curve is extended in the opposite direction.


Bezier splines can be edited using bounding box grips, spline control points,and direction handles.

Bounding Box Grips

Bounding box grips are a type of control point that can be dragged to move,resize, or rotate one or more selected objects. A bounding box identifies theextents of the selection. If you have created an object group, these extentsenclose a rectangular area defined by the outer limits of the objects.

Spline Control Points

Spline control points, sometimes called knots, are the start points, endpoints,and points along the spline that define the direction and curve of the segment.To display them, select a spline whose bounding box is already displayed.

Spline control points are displayed at each click point along the spline path.They represent the points at which the spline can be modified using thedirection handles. When the extended spline editing is active, you add acontrol point to a selected object by clicking a spline segment. You remove acontrol point from a selected object by pressing DELETE.

Impression splines have the following types of control points:

■ Smooth control points. A continuous curve through a control point. Forsimple curves, the control point is at the apex of the curve. For advancedcurves, the control point is offset from the apex. To create a smooth spline,

About Splines | 243

simply click (for simple splines), or hold down the mouse button as youdrag the cursor (for advanced splines).

■ Corner control points. An angle between two straight segments, two curvedsegments, or a straight and a curved segment. To create corners, press ALTand click (for simple splines) or simply click (for advanced splines).

Direction Handles

Direction handles are lines that are tangent to control points. They aredisplayed when you click a spline control point. These handles control theappearance of the spline as follows:

■ The angle of the handle determines the slope of the curve.

■ The length of the handle determines the height of the curve.

When the spline control points are visible (after clicking the object twice withthe Object Selection tool, for example), you can drag the endpoints of a handleto change the length and shape of the spline.


Draw a SplineYou create both types of splines by clicking and holding down the mousebutton as you drag. Use keys such as ALT and SHIFT to control the curvatureof the lines and to set whether control points are smoothed or cornered.

The shape of the spline depends on which drawing method you use. You cando the following:

■ Click to create spline control points.

■ Drag (by holding down the left mouse button as you move the cursor) andthen click.

The direction of the spline curvature is different depending on whether youhave selected the Advanced Spline property for the Spline tool, or are usingthe simpler method. The best way to become familiar with these methods isto experiment.

You can close splines as you create them by clicking the start point. In theextended spline-edit mode, you can close an existing open-ended spline byusing the shortcut menu.

If you want to remove control points that you have just created, pressBACKSPACE to remove the segments one at a time.

Draw a Spline | 245

Procedures: Draw a Spline

To draw straight spline segments (advanced splines)

1 In the Toolbox, click the Spline tool properties expansion arrow to displaythe properties pane.

2 Select Advanced Spline.

3 On the canvas, click the first point.

4 Continue clicking points on the canvas to add spline segments.

5 To close the spline, click the first control point.

To finish the spline and leave it open, click the last point. Then pressESC or right-click anywhere.

Toolbox:

Alternate procedure: For simple splines, ALT+click.

To draw a curved spline segment (simple splines)


2 Clear the Advanced Spline check box.

3 On the canvas, click the start point and move the cursor towards theapex of the curve you are creating.

4 Click again at the point where you want to change direction.

5 Continue to click and drag to create segments. If you make a mistake,press BACKSPACE repeatedly to undo previous segments.

NOTE You can switch between smooth and corner control points by pressingALT before you click.




Toolbox:

Alternate procedure: Press S.

To draw a curved line segment (advanced splines)

1 Click Tools menu ➤ Geometry ➤ Spline.

2 Hold down the left mouse button at the start point and drag the cursortowards the apex of the curve you are creating.

3 Influence the curve in one of the following ways:

■ At the point where you want to bend the vector, release the mousebutton and continue to move the cursor. The first part of the curvatureretains the initial direction you set, and the second part curves tofollow the cursor. Click or click and drag to start the next splinesegment.

■ Click and drag at a location to be used as an anchor for creating thenext spline segment. As you drag, the previous spline segment is bentin opposition to the direction and distance that you move the cursor.Release the mouse button, click, or click and drag when the curvatureof the previous segment is correct.

4 Continue creating segments using either of the methods described instep 3. If you make a mistake, press BACKSPACE repeatedly to undoprevious segments.

NOTE You can switch between smooth and corner control points by clickinginstead of dragging.



Toolbox:


Draw a Spline | 247

To draw spline corners


2 On the canvas, click the first point.

3 If Advanced Spline is not selected in the Spline tool properties pane, pressALT+click additional points to create straight line segments joined atcorners.

If Advanced Spline is selected, click points to create corners.



Toolbox:


To close splines automatically


2 Select Close Curve.

Change the Shape of a SplineIn addition to stretching and rotating a spline by modifying its bounding box,you can manipulate control points to alter its shape.

About Spline-Edit Modes

Most geometry, whether imported into or created by Impression, is treated asa spline and can be edited by manipulating control points and directionhandles. There are two levels of edit, which are accessed in different ways.

■ Basic spline editing. Click an object twice when the Object Selection toolis active. The second click displays control points and direction handles,which you can drag to reshape the object.

■ Extended spline editing. Activate the Spline tool, press CTRL, and clickthe object once. Use this method to access basic spline editing. You can


also add and remove control points (or knots), switch between smoothand cornered control points, and close an open spline.

Use Direction Handles to Change Spline Shapes

Direction handles appear when you access either of the spline-edit modes.You can drag the direction handles to manipulate the spline in the followingways:

■ Rotate the ends of the direction handles to change the angle and shape ofthe spline curve.

■ Move to the ends of the direction handles to lengthen or shorten themand affect the length of the curve segment.

■ Move the control point in the middle of the direction handles to relocatethat portion of the spline path.

Change the Shape of a Spline | 249

Add Control Points

If the extended spline-edit mode is active, you can add a new control pointby clicking a spline segment between the control points. When the segmentis eligible to accept a control point, the cursor image changes to a plus sign.

You can also append an open spline by right-clicking a selected endpoint andclicking Append to Spline.

Remove Control Points

In the extended spline-edit mode, the Delete Knot option on the shortcutmenu removes the selected control point. The two adjacent control pointsare connected by a new segment. You can also select the control point andpress DELETE.


Close an Open Spline

In the extended spline-edit mode, the shortcut menu provides two optionsfor closing a selected, open-ended spline. Select Close Spline (Straight) to adda straight-line spline between the two endpoints. Select Close Spline (Smooth)to connect the two ends of the spline with a smooth, curved segment.

Switch Between Smooth and Corner Spline Control Points

Pressing ALT as you create splines switches the tool to create cornered orsmooth control points, depending on whether the Advanced Spline propertyis selected.

After the spline is created, you can convert from one type of control point tothe other. In the extended spline-edit mode, you can right-click control pointsto access a shortcut menu that offers conversion options. The followingexample shows how the corner control points in the first star can be smoothedfor different effects.

When a control point is eligible for conversion to a different type (corneredor smooth), the cursor icon changes to an angle.


Procedures: Change the Shape of a Spline

To add spline control points


2 Press CTRL and click the spline you want to modify.

When you release the mouse button, the green control points aredisplayed.

3 Move the cursor over the spline segment between the control points untilthe plus sign is displayed. Then click the segment.

A control point is added to the spline.

Toolbox:

To remove spline control points





■ Press DELETE.

■ Right-click the control point. Click Delete Knot.

The control point is removed from the spline, and the adjacent controlpoints are reconnected with a new spline segment.

Toolbox:

To close open splines





3 Right-click an open spline. Click one of the following:

■ Close Spline (Straight). Connects the spline endpoints with a straightline.

■ Close Spline (Smooth). Connects the spline endpoints with a smoothcurve.

NOTE You can set the Spline tool properties to close all splinesautomatically.

Toolbox:

To make a smooth spline control point cornered




3 Press ALT and click a smooth control point on a spline.

The control point becomes a corner.

Toolbox:

Alternate procedure: In extended-edit mode, right-click the control point.Click Make Knot Corner.

To make a corner spline control point smooth




3 Right-click the control point. Click Make Knot Smooth.

The control point becomes smooth.


Toolbox:

To change the shape of a smooth spline curve




3 Drag a smooth control point on a spline.

The angle and shape of the spline segment are modified.

Toolbox:

To flatten a curved spline segment




3 Right-click the curved spline segment. Click Make Segment Flat.

The segment between control points converts from a curved to a straightsegment.

Toolbox:

To add curvature to a straight spline segment




3 Right-click the curved spline segment. Click Make Segment Smooth.


The angle and shape of the spline segment are modified.

Toolbox:

Draw FreehandThe Freehand tool draws or modifies a freeform path that closely follows yourcursor movements.

Draw a Freehand PathThe spline path drawn by the Freehand tool closely matches the path drawnby your cursor.

The loose, freehand drawings you make can be used to create objects, or as aquick way to add shadows.

The length and complexity of the path and the settings in the Freehand toolproperties pane determine the number of control points. Control pointsrepresent directional shifts, and can be adjusted later, using normalspline-editing methods.

Draw Freehand | 255

You can create a freehand path by dragging to create a vector path on thecanvas. You can change property settings to smooth the path when you havecreated it, or to make it more accurate. You can also set the tool to close allopen-ended freehand splines automatically.


Procedures: Draw a Freehand Path

To draw a freehand path

1 Click Tools menu ➤ Geometry ➤ Freehand.

2 On the canvas, draw a freehand path using one of the following methods:

■ Click the start point. Move the cursor along the path. Click theendpoint.

■ Hold the left mouse button. Move the cursor along the path. Releasethe mouse button.

You can click the endpoint of an existing freehand path to continue it.

Toolbox:

Alternate procedure: Press F.

To set smoothness and precision of freehand paths

1 In the Toolbox, click the Freehand tool properties expansion arrow todisplay the properties pane.

2 Click one of the following options:

■ Smooth. Sets the amount of smoothing to be applied to the path.Higher numbers result in smoother paths.

■ Precision. Sets the relationship between the distance that the mouseis moved and the location of the control points. Lower values resultin paths that adhere more closely to the movement of the cursor.

Toolbox:

To close a freehand path automatically

1 In the Toolbox, click the Freehand tool properties expansion arrow todisplay the properties pane.

2 Select the Close Spline check box.

Draw a Freehand Path | 257

Toolbox:

Alternate procedure: Right-click an open-ended freehand spline and clickClose Curve.

Modify a Freehand PathYou can append or redirect a freehand path in the extended freehand editingmode.

Extended freehand editing offers additional capabilities for editing bothfreehand objects and other geometry.

Append a Freehand Path

You can select an open freehand path (so the control points are displayed),and then start a new path at either end. The endpoint of the newly drawnpath replaces the original endpoint.


You can also edit freehand objects using the same methods used for splines.See Change the Shape of a Spline.

Redirect a Freehand Path

You can draw a new freehand path that starts and ends on some segment ofa closed freehand path. The segment between the start and endpoints of thenew path is removed, and the path deviates to include the new segments.

Modify a Freehand Path | 259

NOTE You can use the Freehand tool to modify splines and shapes such as ellipses.

Procedures: Modify a Freehand Path

To extend an open path


2 Press CTRL and click the object that you want to modify. You can selectany geometric object.

When you release the mouse button, the control points are displayed.

3 Click the endpoint of the freehand path that you want to extend anddrag the mouse.

The new path is added to the existing object.

4 Press ESC to exit the Freehand tool.


Toolbox:

To redirect a freehand path


2 Press CTRL and click the object you want to modify.

When you release the mouse button, the control points are displayed.

3 Click a control point on the freehand path where you want to start themodification and drag to create a freehand path.

■ If the new path forms a loop that ends at another point on the path:The segment between the start and the end point of the new path isremoved. The path is rerouted to follow the new segment.

■ If the new path crosses over and beyond an original, open-ended path:The freehand path is redrawn to follow the new segment. The shortersegment of the old path is removed.

■ If the new path starts on an existing closed path (such as a circle),and ends somewhere off the path: A new, separate freehand path iscreated. The original path is not redirected.

4 Press ESC to exit the Freehand tool.

Toolbox:

Modify a Freehand Path | 261

Add Fill to Closed Areas

Add color or texture to closed areas by applying the appearance style of the current layer toan enclosed area.

About Area FillFill styles typically work only with single closed objects. However, with the areafill tools, you can fill areas enclosed by the boundaries of separate objects.

Fill Styles Applied to Layers Versus Area Fill

Appearance styles applied to layers can contain both stroke and fill elements.Stroke styles follow the vectors of the geometry, and the fill styles shade an areabounded by geometry. In order for a layer fill style to work properly, thegeometry must be a single, closed object such as an ellipse or polygon.

17

263

However, separate, intersecting objects often form the boundaries of the areasyou want to fill. To shade that type of area, you can insert area fill.

The following example shows how a line drawing of a dormer window (left)changes depending on how the style was applied. In the middle image, thedormer is on a layer with a uniform fill style. In the rightmost image, a gradientarea fill is inserted into each of the window panes.

The original drawing consists of a series of lines, polylines, and arcs. Whenyou assign a fill style to a layer, the shading extends to fill interior areas ofcurved objects, essentially closing them. Therefore, using a fill style to shadeobjects on a layer is sometimes unpredictable. The middle example shows theunintended closed loop resulting from the arc of the curved window. Becauseseparate lines form the window panes, the panes are empty.

The shading in the example on the right is applied using the Area Fill tool.This method fills the closed areas within the intersecting lines that form eachwindow pane. For drawings with areas formed by multiple objects, applyingarea fill provides the most predictable results.

How Fill Boundaries Are Defined

Adding area fill creates a fill object whose boundaries correspond to the bordersof the specified area. Except for text, raster images, and other area fill objects,you can use most objects—including blocks—as boundaries.

264 | Chapter 17 Add Fill to Closed Areas

You cannot fill closed objects that extend beyond the edge of the canvas.However, you can fill closed areas formed by the intersection of objects anda mask formed by the boundaries of an imported viewport.

When you add area fill, Impression retains the original intersecting objectsthat form the bounding area. The area you select for filling can be a closedobject or a closed area between separate, intersecting objects. The underlyingvector geometry—not by the displayed length or width of stylized geometrywith weight or overshoot properties—forms the intersections.

Inserting area fill inserts area fill anchors, which at the points where you clickor drag to insert the fill. A setting in the Layer Selection Tool and ObjectSelection Tool determines whether these modifiable anchors are visible whenyou select objects. The display is different, depending on how you created thearea fill.

About Area Fill | 265

Types of area fill anchors (area fill objectsselected)

Set Gap Tolerance to Close Open Boundaries

If the areas you want to fill do not intersect, you can set the Area Fill toolproperties to have a gap tolerance. This value represents the maximum gapthat is ignored for objects that are used as fill boundaries. When you set a gaptolerance, a temporary red line representing the tolerance extends from theendpoints of the open geometry. The gap tolerance extensions form newclosed areas that you can fill.

Gap tolerance extensions (in red)

Although these gap tolerance lines are only visible when you select the areafill tools, they remain in effect for all methods of inserting area fill. Rememberthat gap tolerance values can create closed areas where you do not expect


them. Be sure to restore the Area Fill properties setting to 0 (zero) when youno longer need the tolerance.

Insert Area FillYou can add area fill to your drawing using several methods.

Area Fill Methods

The way you insert area fill depends on many factors. Are the areas contiguous?Are you filling a few areas and then doing something else? Are you fillingmany objects of the same type, such as window panes? You can use one or acombination of methods:

■ Drag a style directly from the Styles palette.

■ Use the various options of the Area Fill tool to click or drag across the areasyou want to fill.

■ Use the Power Fill tool to fill areas based on characteristics such as shapeor layer.

Drag Area Fill from the Styles Palette

Dragging a fill style from the Styles palette to a closed area in your drawingis a good method for quick rendering of large areas. You can also drag a styleonto an object. Make sure you position the cursor directly over the emptyspace before you release the mouse button. The cursor displays a paint bucketand plus sign (+) when it is over an eligible closed area.

Style dragged to an area

When the cursor is over an object, it changes to display a curved arrow.Releasing the mouse button over an object replaces the style for that object,

Insert Area Fill | 267

creating a style override. In the following example, notice that the entireobject is shaded and that the stroke defining the object border no longer exists.

Style dragged to an object

If you drag a style over a block or image that cannot be stylized, an icon atthe cursor indicates that you cannot apply the style.

Area cannot be filled

If you make a mistake, you can undo it and try again.

Insert Fill using the Area Fill Tool

The Area Fill tool offers several options for adding fill objects one at a time orsequentially.

■ Area Fill tool—Point option. Click within a closed area that you want tofill.


This method is good for filling complex areas that are not contiguous.

You can set the Area Fill tool to display a temporary gray fill that givesvisual feedback about the extents of the area to be filled. This feedback canhelp you identify gaps that can cause the fill to “leak” in unexpected ways.

Temporary gray fill

When the Area Fill tool is active, you can press ALT+click to remove areasyou have filled in the current or previous fill session.

■ Area Fill tool—Line option. Drag a line across the outer boundaries of closedareas you want to fill.


■ Area Fill tool—Window option, enclosure. Draw a rectangular windowfrom left to right to fill closed areas that fall entirely within the window.

■ Area Fill tool—Window option, crossing. Draw a rectangular window fromright to left to fill closed areas whose outer boundaries the window crosses.

■ Area Fill tool—Freehand option. Draw a freeform path to fill closed areaswhose outer boundaries the cursor crosses.


Fill Multiple Areas Simultaneously (Power Fill)

Using the Power Fill tool, you can quickly apply the same fill style to dispersedfill areas simply by clicking one area.


Three dormers before Power Fill

Gray highlighting shows areas to be filled

Dormers after fill insertion

Objects created with power fill are the same as area fill objects, and share manyof the same properties, such as gap tolerance and precision. However, you canalso set additional criteria for fill creation. For example, you can specify thatthe areas share these properties:

■ Same shape within a variable tolerance that you can set

■ Boundaries on the same layer

■ Boundaries derived from CAD objects that have the same colorassignment—not including Impression objects, which automatically fallwithin a single color designation.

■ Boundaries with the same stroke weight


Immediately after inserting power fill, you can press ALT+click to remove anindividual fill area. Press CTRL+ALT+click to remove the entire fill set.

Removal of individual areas within the fill set

When the Power Fill tool is active, the Power Fill toolbar is displayed to providequick access to settings as you work.

The toolbar disappears when you change to another tool.

Insert Separate Area Fills as a Single Object

By default, successively created area fill objects are treated as separate objects.This behavior does not affect the appearance of uniform fill styles. However,for complex gradient, compound, or textured styles, you can insert area fillas a single object for a more contiguous appearance.

In the following example, each set of dormer window panes uses the stylerepresented by the style swatch on the left. The fill for the windows in thefirst dormer is inserted by clicking within each window pane. The fill for thewindows in the second dormer is inserted as a single object. To use thismethod, clear the Create Individual Area Fills check box for the Area Fill orthe Power Fill tool.


Fill areas can be treated as a single object, even if they are unconnected.However, you must add the fill in a single session.

Procedures: Insert Area Fill

To fill an area by dragging the style to the canvas

1 In the Styles palette, find the style you want to use as area fill.

2 Drag the style to a closed area on the canvas (an area whose boundarieshave no gaps).

NOTE If the closed area already contains fill, the new style replaces theexisting style.

Release the mouse button to fill the area.

To fill an area by clicking within closed boundaries

1 In the Layers palette, click a layer to make it current.

2 In the Toolbox, click the Area Fill tool and select these settings:

■ Point option

■ Show Highlighting (optional)

3 In the Styles palette, find and click the fill style you want to insert.

The style is displayed in the Style Editor, under Selected Style.

NOTE If the current layer has a fill style, you can skip this step.


4 On the canvas, click within the closed areas that you want to fill.

■ If the fill style is the same as the current layer style, Impression insertsthe fill object on the layer.

■ If the fill style differs from current layer style, Impression inserts thearea fill in one of two ways. If Auto Layer is off, the fill becomes astyle override on the same layer. If Auto Layer is on, the fill is placedon a new layer.

5 Continue to add fill:

■ To create a single object out of separate area fills, hold SHIFT as youclick successive areas. This method creates a single fill object andresults in the appearance of a contiguous pattern for texture, gradient,and compound fills.

■ To remove fill from an area, press ALT and click the area.

6 To switch to another fill style, click a style in the Styles palette.

The areas you later fill use the new style.

7 Press ESC to dismiss the Area Fill tool.

Toolbox:


■ Press H.

■ Click Tools menu ➤ Stylize ➤ Point.

To fill closed areas by dragging a line across boundaries



■ Line option

■ Show Highlighting (recommended)




Procedures: Insert Area Fill | 275

4 On the canvas, click within the first closed area that you want to fill andmove the cursor across its boundary.

A temporary gray fill identifies the areas that you can fill.

5 Continue to move the cursor across boundaries of closed areas that youwant to fill.

■ To change the direction of the line, click inside or outside a boundary.

■ To remove a fill that you have just applied to an area, pressBACKSPACE.

6 To end a fill sequence, click within the last fill area. Then right-clickanywhere.

7 To switch to another fill Style, click a style in the Styles palette.

8 Press ESC or ENTER to complete the fill sequence.

Toolbox:


■ Press N.

■ Click Tools menu ➤ Stylize ➤ Line.

To fill an area enclosed or crossed by a window



■ Window option or Point option

■ Show Highlighting




4 Move the cursor over the canvas. The cursor changes to a paint bucket.

■ To fill areas that are entirely within the window, drag the cursor fromleft to right, starting at a point outside the first area. Release the mouse


button when the solid red bounding box entirely encloses the areasto be filled.

■ To fill areas that the window crosses, drag the cursor from right toleft. Release the mouse button when the red dashed-line boundingbox crosses the boundaries of the areas you want to fill.

Impression fills the areas at the second click.

5 To remove individual fill objects, press ALT+click the fill.



Toolbox:


■ Press W.

■ Click Tools menu ➤ Stylize ➤ Area Fill ➤ Window.

To fill closed areas by dragging a freehand path across boundaries



■ Freehand option

■ Show Highlighting




4 Click within the first closed area that you want to fill and move the cursoracross its boundary. Continue moving the cursor across area boundariesto fill them. End the sequence by clicking the last area that you want tofill.

5 To remove individual fill objects, press ALT+click the fill.



7 Press ESC or ENTER to complete the fill sequence.

Toolbox:


■ Press M.

■ Click Tools menu ➤ Stylize ➤ Freehand.

To fill closed areas by pasting the area fill anchor

1 Press CTRL+click the area fill you want to copy. Right-click the area fillanchor ➤ Copy.

2 Click within the area you want to fill. Right-click ➤ Paste.

The fill expands from the pasted anchor point to the new boundaries.

To fill areas with matching properties (power fill)


2 In the Toolbox, click the Power Fill tool and specify the shared propertiesfor the fill area:

■ Shape (including the allowable tolerance, or deviation)

■ Layers

■ CAD Line Colors

■ Line Weight




4 As the cursor moves over the canvas, it changes to a paint bucket. Grayshading identifies the fill areas that meet the criteria you set in step 2.Click within an area to insert the area fill into all the gray areas.

Impression inserts the fill and displays the Power Fill toolbar.

5 To remove fill from an individual area, move the cursor over the fill.When it turns red, click it.


NOTE You can remove fill from individual areas immediately after you addit. During subsequent fill sessions, you can ALT+click the fill object to removeit.

6 Use the Power Fill toolbar to do the following:

■ Add individual areas to the in-progress power fill set.You can also press SHIFT+click closed areas to add them. PressCTRL+SHIFT+click closed areas to add a fill set with different powerfill criteria.

■ Remove individual areas from the in-progress area fill set.You can also press ALT+click fill areas in the current set to removethem. Press CTRL+ALT+click filled areas to remove a fill set.

■ Specify that areas have the same shape and set shape tolerance.

■ Specify that area boundaries are on the samelayer, have the same CAD color, or have the same stroke weight. Ifnecessary, click the expansion arrow on the right side of the toolbarto see these buttons.


The areas you later fill use the new style.


Toolbox:


■ Press I.

■ Click Tools menu ➤ Stylize ➤ Power Fill.


To set gap tolerance for area fills

1 In the Toolbox, click the properties flyout arrow for the Area Fill tool orthe Power Fill tool to expand the tool properties pane.

2 In the Gap Tolerance box, set the size (in points) of the gaps that arepermitted when you insert area fill.

Any fill you later add ignores gaps smaller or equal to the number ofpoints you enter.

Toolbox:

To display or hide gray highlighting when you insert area fills

1 In the Toolbox, click the Area Fill tool properties flyout arrow to expandthe tool properties pane.


■ To display gray fill temporarily to identify areas that you can fill, selectShow Highlighting. For best results, keep this option on when youinsert fill using the Line, Window, or Freehand options.

■ To suppress display of the gray fill as you insert area fill, clear theShow Highlighting box. Clearing this option can improve programperformance.

Toolbox:

Alternate procedure: Press ALT+H.

To create successive area fills as a single object


2 In the properties pane, clear the Create Individual Area Fills box.

Any fills you insert within the same fill operation are treated as a singlefill object, even if they are not in contiguous areas.

Toolbox:



■ Press ALT+I.

■ Use the Area Fill tool Point option. Press SHIFT as you click successiveareas to create multiple fills as a single object, even when the CreateIndividual Area Fills property is on.

To specify how closely fill adheres to its boundaries


2 In the Precision box, do one of the following:

■ To improve program performance, set the value lower.

■ To increase precision, set the value higher.

Toolbox:

Modify Area FillModify area fill objects just as you would modify other objects, or realign areafill anchors to adjust fill locations.

Change the Area Fill Style

You can easily change the style of an area fill object after you insert it:

■ Change the style of a layer. If the area fill style matches the layer style,you can switch styles by dragging a style swatch to the layer. This methodis common if you work with Auto Layer turned on.

Modify Area Fill | 281

■ Change the style of the area fill object. You can also select the fill anddouble-click a style swatch, or drag a style swatch directly onto the fill.This method can result in a style override.

Edit an Area Fill Object

Inserting area fill creates a separate area fill object. You can use bounding boxgrips and control points to change the shape and location of the fill, just asyou can change other spline-based objects.

Area fill is not associative. Modifying the shape of the original boundaries inImpression does not automatically affect the shape or location of the area fill.However you can update the fill to fit new boundaries using the followingmethods:

■ Boundary modifications made in Impression. Select the area fill, and usethe Update Area Fill option on the shortcut menu.

NOTE This update method is available only in the standard workspace. It isnot available in the Block Editor.

■ Boundary modifications to the original drawing. When you use the CADupdate to refresh the geometry in Impression, select the Update Area FillObjects option.

The accuracy of the fill update depends on the location of area fill anchorsthat define the placement of the fill.


Moving an area fill object away from its boundary retains the fill style.However, the object loses its anchor and cannot be updated.

Moving area fill object deletes anchor

Remove Area Fill Insertions

To remove inserted area fill, select the area fill object and press DELETE. If theCreate Multiple Area Fills property is not on, this action removes all area fillsin the fill set. You can press ALT+click to remove a single object.

You can also remove area fill by selecting an anchor point and pressingDELETE. A selected anchor point turns red when it is active. When you removean anchor point from a line anchor, the gap between the remaining pointscloses. The fill is adjusted to match the new boundaries.

Procedures: Modify Area Fill

To select all area fills

■ On the Edit menu, click Select All Area Fills.Impression selects all area fill objects on the canvas. A red border identifiesthem.

To display area fill anchorsDo one of the following:

■ Click Display menu ➤ Area Fill Anchors. (The check mark is displayed.)Area fill anchors are displayed as you work.

Procedures: Modify Area Fill | 283

■ In the properties flyout pane of the Object Selection or Layer Selectiontool, select Area Fill Anchors.Impression displays area fill anchors whenever you select an area fill object.

To update an area fill whose boundaries have changed

1 On the Display menu, click Area Fill Anchors. (The check mark isdisplayed.)

2 Press CTRL+click the area fill object that you want to update.

3 Right-click the selected object ➤ Update Area Fill.

4 If the fill does not behave as expected, verify the location of the area fillanchor. If needed, drag it to be within the correct boundaries.

Alternate procedure: Drag the area fill anchor to the correct location. (Ifnecessary, drag it outside the original boundary first.)

To remove a fill object


■ To remove fill inserted as a single object: Select the fill object and pressDELETE.

■ To remove a fill set: Select any object in the fill set and press DELETE.

■ To remove a single fill object that is part of a fill set: Click the Area Filltool or the Power Fill tool. Press ALT+click the fill object you want toremove. (The red shading indicates which fill will be removed.)

■ To remove area fill by moving or deleting its anchor: See Procedures: Workwith Area Fill Anchors.

Work with Area Fill AnchorsArea fill anchors set the radiation points that determine how area fill extendsto its boundaries.

About Area Fill Anchors

Area fill anchors identify the points from which a specific fill insertion radiatesoutward to its boundaries. You can set the visibility of these moveable anchorson the Display menu. You can also set them on the properties flyouts of theObject Selection or Layer Selection tools.


Area fill anchors are available only in the standard workspace. They are notavailable in the Block Editor.

The display of the anchors differs, depending on how you created the fill.

The location of these anchors is important if the boundaries move or if theoriginal CAD drawing has changed. In the following example, a kitchen floorplan changed after the fill for the floor and counter tile was inserted. Noticehow the area fill conforms to the new boundary alignment.

Work with Area Fill Anchors | 285

Fill and anchor points before changes

Couch and sink changed

Fill refreshed to realign aroundchanges

The area fill anchors represent a specific point on the canvas, not a relativepoint within the closed boundaries. Therefore, some modifications cause thearea fill anchors to radiate to different boundaries than you intend. In the


following example, a new, connecting counter causes the floor to finddifferent—and undesired—boundaries. Because of the anchor location, thefloor fill style now shades the countertop.

New geometry causes area fill updateto fill to incorrect boundaries

To remedy such a situation, you can drag the anchor point to a position withinthe correct boundaries.

Area fill anchor dragged to a new position

You can drag any type of anchor—whether created using a point, line, window,or freehand fill option—to a new position. You can also resize window anchors.

Work with Area Fill Anchors | 287

Area fill line anchor dragged to different locations

Area fill window crossing anchor dragged to different locations

Use this method to quickly adjust the location of area fill after you have createdit.

Anchors for area fill created as one object (the Create Individual Area Fillsproperty is off) remain connected, even when you use the Point creationmethod.

Dotted lines connect area fill anchorpoints inserted as one object

Adjust inserted fill by deleting selected anchors or anchor points. From theshortcut menu, you can add more points to line anchors or to point anchorscreated as a single object. You can also cut or copy an anchor and then pasteit to a new location.


Use CAD Update with Area Fill

Area fill anchors also play an important role when you update CAD geometryfor an illustration with area fill insertions. By retaining the location of theanchor on the canvas, Impression updates any inserted fill.

Depending on the extent of the changes, this process can save you time byapplying the fill to areas you have already shaded. If some areas are filledincorrectly, drag the area fill anchor to the proper spot.

Procedures: Work with Area Fill Anchors

To display area fill anchorsDo one of the following:

■ On the Display menu, click Area Fill Anchors. (The check mark is displayed.)Area fill anchors are displayed as you work.

■ In the properties flyout pane of the Object Selection or Layer Selectiontool, select Area Fill Anchors.Impression displays area fill anchors whenever you select an area fill object.

To remove an area fill anchor point (line or point anchors only)



3 Click an anchor point.

The point turns red when it is active.

4 Press DELETE.

To insert an area fill anchor point (line anchors and point anchors for fillinserted as one object)



3 Right-click the anchor line between anchor points ➤ Add Control Point.

Impression inserts a new anchor point.

Procedures: Work with Area Fill Anchors | 289

To resize an area fill anchor (window only)


2 Press CTRL+click the area fill object created using a window.

3 Move the cursor over the control points of the window anchor. When

the Resize cursor is displayed, drag the window to resize it.

To move an area fill anchor



3 Move the cursor over the anchor. When the Move cursor is displayed,

drag the anchor to a different location.


Add Text

Create, import, and format text.

Create TextThe text you create in Impression is simple, single-line text. You can format itin the Text Properties palette.

Like single-line text in AutoCAD, Impression text has no fixed line width. Toadd text to your drawing, activate the Text tool, click an empty space on thecanvas, and start typing. At the end of a line, press ENTER to create additionalrows of text.

You can format selected text in the Text Properties palette, which is displayedautomatically when you create or double-click text.

18

291

When you select text, Impression displays the Font and Text Size list boxeson the stationary toolbar. You can change settings for highlighted text byselecting another option from these drop-down lists.

When text is no longer selected, the drop-down lists are removed from thetoolbar.

Create Stacked Text

You can create stacked text, such as fractions by entering a formula thatdetermines the formatting for the text.

Select the text and click the Stack button to complete the formatting. The textis stacked and its size is reduced. Clicking the button again unstacks the text.

Procedures: Create Text

To add text

1 In the Toolbox, click the Text tool.

2 On the canvas, click an empty area and enter text.

292 | Chapter 18 Add Text

Impression displays the Text Properties palette.

3 To modify text content as you type, do the following:

■ To delete the text you have just typed, press BACKSPACE.

■ To remove text within a line, select it and press DELETE.

■ To add text, click between the words and enter the new text.

■ To highlight an entire line for editing, double-click a word.

■ To break the line of text and start a new row, press ENTER.

For details about editing text, see “Keyboard Shortcuts” in Text Tool.

4 Press ESC to end text entry.

Toolbox:

Alternate procedure: Click Tools menu ➤ Text ➤ Text.

To create stacked text


2 On the canvas, click an empty area.


3 Stacked text uses the following formula:

Enter the characters on the left to get the results on the right.

4 Select the text. In the Text Properties palette, click the Stack icon

Impression stacks the text and reduces its size.

Procedures: Create Text | 293

Toolbox:


To unstack text


2 On the canvas, select the stacked text.


3 On the Text Properties palette, click the Stack icon .

Toolbox:


Import and Paste TextImpression converts text that you import or paste from other sources to anImpression text object, which you can edit and format.

Imported Text

When you import DWG or DWF files into Impression, Impression convertsboth single-line and multiline text to single-line text. Word wraps frommultiline text (mtext) are maintained in Impression as line breaks.

If you import a font that Impression does not support, the default font issubstituted. As you open a file, you can map a default font in the MappingOptions dialog box. For detailed information about data conversion, seeContent Conversions.

Pasted Text

You can cut, copy, and paste text within Impression, or you can paste textfrom another document.

Impression converts text that you copy from another document to single-linetext. In some cases, one line of text replaces text that previously used word


wrapping. You can insert line breaks manually to restore the original textconfiguration.

If the pasted selection set includes images or geometry, Impression adds allobjects to the same layer.

The placement of pasted text depends on the method used for pasting:

■ When the Text tool is not active, Impression pastes the text at the centerof the canvas.

■ When the Text tool is active, Impression places the text at the click point.

NOTE If the text placement is not within existing text, press ESC and click theText tool before you click the canvas.

Pasted text objects do not inherit the appearance style of the current layer.

Procedures: Import and Paste Text

To import text from other sources

■ See Procedures: Import Content.

To paste text from other sources

1 In the application that contains the text you want to paste into theImpression illustration, select the text. Press CTRL+C to copy the text tothe Clipboard.

NOTE This procedure varies for some applications.

2 In the Impression Toolbox, click the Text tool.

3 Click the point on the canvas where you want to place the text. (Ablinking line is displayed at the insertion point.) Right-click and clickPaste.

Impression inserts the text at the click point.

4 Format the selected text in the Text Properties palette, which opensautomatically.

Procedures: Import and Paste Text | 295

Toolbox:

Alternate procedure: Press CTRL+V.

Modify Text Content and FormatYou can modify text by editing its content, color, and format, and byconverting the characters to outlines.

Edit Text

After you have created, imported, or pasted text, you can edit its content by

■ Double-clicking the text with the Object Selection tool active.

■ Clicking the text with the Text tool active.

Editing methods match the standard methods used for many Windowsproducts. See Keyboard Shortcuts: Text Tool.

Apply Formats to Text

You can quickly reformat a text selection by changing settings in the TextProperties palette. The changes you can apply include

■ Font type and size

■ Formatting, such as bold, italic, and underline

■ Justification, such as left, centered, and right text alignment

■ Insertion of special characters, such as © and ®

■ Tracking (which changes spacing between characters) and leading (whichchanges the spacing between lines)


■ Lineweights for SHX fonts

■ Vertical orientation

■ Color

Unlike other geometry, text uses a universal scale. That is, its height dependson the font size, not the scale of the sketch. For example, text with a 12-pointfont size retains the 12-point size, whether the sketch that contains it has a1:1 or a 1:32 scale. To change the text size, select the text and drag thebounding box control points or change the font size in the Text Propertiesdialog box.

NOTE Although imported text with bullets and numbers retains its format inImpression, you cannot add this formatting to text you create or modify inImpression.

To quickly copy formats from one text object to another, use the MatchProperties tool.

Convert Text to Outline Geometry

If you convert text to outline format, the text becomes a set of splines thatno longer retain the properties of a text object. You can no longer use standardtext-editing methods to modify the content and formatting of outline text.

However, you can apply an appearance style to outline text to create uniquevisual text styles, including drop shadows.

Switch Between Horizontal and Vertical Text

The Vertical button converts horizontal rows to vertical columns. Charactersdo not rotate.

Modify Text Content and Format | 297

This option is available only for SHX fonts. You cannot use it with text thathas a mixture of TrueType and SHX fonts.

Procedures: Modify Text Content and Format

To edit text content


2 On the canvas, click to indicate an insertion point, or drag across thecharacters to highlight the text you want to change.

■ To delete the text you have just entered, press BACKSPACE.

■ To remove text within a line, select it and press DELETE.

■ To add text, click between the words and enter the new text.

■ To highlight an entire line for editing, double-click a word.

■ To break the line of text and start a new row, press ENTER.

For details about editing text, see “Keyboard Shortcuts” for the Text Tool.

3 Press ESC when you have finished editing.

Toolbox:


■ Press T.

■ Click Tools menu ➤ Text ➤ Text.

To apply formatting to text


2 On the canvas, drag across the characters to highlight the text you wantto change.

NOTE If formatting is the same for all text in the set, double-click the textto select all characters. You can also change the font and text size of selectedtext in the drop-down lists on the stationary toolbar.


Impression automatically displays the Text Properties palette when youselect the text.

3 In the Text Properties palette, modify the settings.

Toolbox:

Alternate procedure: Double-click the text to open the Text Propertiespalette.

To convert text characters to outline geometry

1 Click Palettes menu ➤ Text Properties.

2 Press CTRL to activate the Object Selection tool, and click the text youwant to convert.

3 In the Text Properties palette, click Convert Text to Outlines.

Impression converts the selection from a text object to a geometric objectthat represents the outlined text and inherits the style of the layer.

Toolbox:

Alternate procedure: Click Tools menu ➤ Text ➤ Convert Text toOutline.

To select all text


2 On the Text Properties palette, click the Select All Text Objects button

.

Impression highlights all text in the illustration.

NOTE Text within blocks is not selected.

Procedures: Modify Text Content and Format | 299

Toolbox:

Alternate procedure: Click Edit menu ➤ Select All Text Objects.

To add an appearance style to outline text


2 Press CTRL to activate the Object Selection tool, and click the text youwant to convert.

The bounding box is displayed

3 In the Text Properties palette, click Convert Text to Outlines.

The selection is converted from a text object to a geometric object thatrepresents the outlined text.

4 If the selected text does not have the desired appearance style, you can

■ Move it to another layer using the Properties palette.

■ Double-click a style in the Styles palette.

Toolbox:

To switch text between horizontal and vertical


2 Press CTRL to activate the Object Selection tool, and click the text youwant to rotate.

The bounding box is displayed.

3 In the Text Properties palette, click the Vertical button. (This button isnot available for text that contains TrueType fonts.)

The text is realigned.


Toolbox:

Scale Text and Reset BoundariesThe way you scale text depends on whether you need overall consistency inthe text size, or whether the text size is relative to the geometry.

Set the Scale for Text

You can set a specific text size using the following methods:

■ Set the font size on the Text Properties palette. This value represents thetext size relative to the printed page, and is usually independent of thescale set for the geometry in the sketch.

■ Change the Height and Width settings in the Size panel of the Propertiespalette. These settings represent drawing units. Use them only to scale thetext relative to objects in the illustration. Changes to the Height and Widthsettings automatically change the Font Size value in the Text Propertiespalette.

Stretch the Text Bounding Box

If the precision is not a requirement for text sizing, you can stretch the textextents by dragging bounding box grips.

When you stretch a bounding box, the text realigns to fit the new shape. Textobjects retain their relative proportions when you press SHIFT as the boundingbox is resized. However, stretching outline text can cause distortion.

Scale Text and Reset Boundaries | 301

You create upside-down text by dragging the upper bounding box grips acrossthe lower grips. Similarly, you create backwards text by dragging the grips onthe right or left boundary across the opposite boundary.

Procedures: Scale Text and Reset Boundaries

To set text size in relation to the page size


2 On the canvas, drag across the characters to highlight the text you wantto change.

Impression automatically displays the Text Properties palette.

3 In the Text Properties palette, Font Size box, select a size (in points) forthe text.

Toolbox:

To set text size in relation to geometry


2 Click Tools menu ➤ Select Objects.

3 On the canvas, click the text you want to scale.

4 In the Properties palette, Size panel, enter the Height and Width (indrawing units) for the text.

To resize a text bounding box

1 Click Tools menu ➤ Select Objects.


2 On the canvas, click the text you want to resize.

Impression displays the text bounding box.

Press SHIFT and drag the grips to change the size of the bounding box.

The text is realigned to fit within the new boundaries.

NOTE You create upside-down text by dragging the upper bounding boxgrips across the lower grips. Similarly, you create backwards text by draggingthe grips on the right or left boundary across the opposite boundary.

3 Press ESC.

Toolbox:

Procedures: Scale Text and Reset Boundaries | 303

Reposition and ResizeGeometry

You can change, reposition, or resize the geometry in your illustration using grips andalignment tools.

Move GeometryMove selected geometry by specifying precise values on the Transform palette,by dragging the object, or by pressing the arrow keys.

Move with Precision

If you know the exact distance or angle of the move, you can enter those valueson the Move panel of the Transform palette. With this method, you can specifythe offset distance along horizontal and vertical axes, or you can specify anangle and distance.

Move by Dragging

You can move an object by dragging it to the new location. When you selectone or more objects, a large move grip is displayed at the geometric center ofthe selection set. When the Object Selection tool is active, you can drag thisgrip to any location.

If you press SHIFT as you drag, you can constrain the movement to orthogonalangles.

19

305

Move in Increments

Press the arrow keys on your computer keyboard to nudge, or move, selectedobjects a specified distance at a time. To move larger distances, pressSHIFT+arrow keys.

You can modify the effect of pressing arrow keys or SHIFT+arrow keys in theproperties flyout panel for the Object Selection tool and the Layer Selectiontool.

Procedures: Move Geometry

To move geometry (Transform palette)

1 Press CTRL and click the objects you want to move.


3 On the Transform palette, Move panel, specify the new move locationin one of the following ways:

■ Click Linear. Enter a value or click the arrow buttons to specify thehorizontal and vertical distance, in drawing units, for the move.

■ Click Polar. Enter the angle and distance, in drawing units, for themove.

To move geometry using grips

1 Press CTRL and click the objects you want to move.

2 Click the grip that represents the geometric center of the selection set.

The move cursor is displayed.

Drag the selected objects to the new location and release the mousebutton.

306 | Chapter 19 Reposition and Resize Geometry

NOTE Press SHIFT as you drag to constrain the cursor movement to 45-degreeincrements.

To nudge geometry in increments

1 Click Tools menu ➤ Select Objects and select the objects you want tomove.

2 Press the up, down, right, and left arrow keys to move the selection setone unit at a time.

NOTE Press SHIFT+arrow key to move in larger increments, as specified inthe properties flyout panel for the selection tool.

Rotate GeometryRotate selected objects by specifying an angle, or by moving the outer gripsof the selection set.

Rotate by Specifying an Angle

If you know the exact angle of rotation, you can specify it on the Transformpalette.

By default, the pivot point for the rotation is the geometric center of theselection set. You can change this rotation point by clicking the Show PivotPoint button to display the pivot point on the canvas. You can then drag itto another location.

Rotate Geometry | 307

The pivot point snaps to all eligible snap points. A relocated pivot point isvalid only when you use the Transform palette to specify the rotation. Thepivot point returns to its default position the next time you

■ Rotate by dragging a grip

■ Use the Transform palette

■ Click the Show Pivot Point button again

Rotate by Dragging

When the Selection Tool is active, you can rotate selected objects by draggingone of the grips on its bounding box. The pivot point for the rotation is thegeometric center of the set of objects, as shown in the middle row of thefollowing example. However, if you press ALT as you drag the cursor, eachobject is individually rotated around its center point.


Procedures: Rotate Geometry

To rotate geometry by setting a rotation angle

1 Press CTRL and click the objects you want to rotate.


3 In the Transform palette, Rotate panel, enter the angle of rotation andpress ENTER.

NOTE To see your changes in real time, drag the “needle” in the angleindicator image.

To relocate the rotation pivot point

1 Press CTRL and click the objects you want to rotate.


3 In the Transform palette, Rotate panel, click Show Pivot Point.

The pivot point is displayed in its default location at the geometric centerof the selection set.

4 Drag the pivot point to a new location.

5 In the Transform palette, Rotate panel, enter the angle of rotation.

Procedures: Rotate Geometry | 309

To rotate geometry from its center point using grips

1 Click Tools menu ➤ Select Objects and select the objects you want torotate.

2 Move the cursor over the bounding box until the rotate cursor isdisplayed.

3 Drag the cursor to rotate the selected objects.

NOTE Press SHIFT as you drag to constrain the cursor to 45-degreeincrements. Press ALT to rotate each object in the selection set around itsindividual center point.

Scale GeometryScale objects and text by setting scale values or by dragging grips.

Scale Geometry by a Percentage

You can modify the scale of selected objects by a specific percentage in theTransform palette. To maintain the aspect ratio and avoid distorting theoriginal object, make sure that the Lock Scale icon is locked.

You can scale text just as you can scale other objects. Changes in the text sizeare also reflected in the values displayed in both the Properties palette andthe Text Properties palette.

Scale Geometry by Dragging

When a selection tool is active, the scale cursor (a two-way arrow) is displayed.You can resize, or scale, selected objects by dragging one of the grips on itsbounding box.


To avoid distorting the object, press SHIFT as you drag.

Adjust Style Scale as You Scale an Object

Turn on the Scale Styles setting in a variety of locations to adjust the scale ofthe style proportionately as you scale an object. For more information, seeAdjust the Style Size.

Procedures: Scale Geometry

To scale geometry

1 Click Tools menu ➤ Select Objects and select the objects you want toresize.


3 In the Transform palette, Scale panel, click the Lock Scale icon, ifnecessary, to set the horizontal and vertical aspect ratio.

■ If the icon is locked, the objects are uniformly scaled.

■ If the icon is unlocked, the horizontal and vertical scales can be setindependently.

4 Enter values or click the arrow buttons to set the percentage of changefor horizontal and vertical dimensions of the selected objects.

To scale geometry using grips

1 Click Tools menu ➤ Select Objects and select the objects you want toresize.

2 Move the cursor over the bounding box grips until the scale cursor isdisplayed.

3 Drag the grip to resize the selected objects.

NOTE Press SHIFT as you drag to scale the selected objects uniformly.

Procedures: Scale Geometry | 311

To adjust style scale as you scale geometry

■ For more information, see Procedures: Adjust the Style Size

Align GeometryAlign geometric objects or text to points, or align and distribute objects alongspecified axes such as edges or center points.

Align an Object to a Point or AxisUse the Align tool to align a single object with one or two points on the canvas.

When you use the Align tool to align geometry to a single location, you specifytwo points: the point on the moving object, and the target point. The movedobject is not rotated or scaled in any way.

You can also specify two sets of alignment points. The moved object is rotatedso that both of its points align with the virtual path you set with the secondand fourth clicks.

You can set Align tool properties to resize, or scale, the realigned geometry tomatch the dimensions of the points on the target object.


Procedures: Align a Single Object to a Point or Axis

To align an object to a single point

1 Click Tools menu ➤ Select Objects and select the object you want tomodify.

2 Click Tools menu ➤ Modify ➤ Align.

3 Click a point on the object that you want to move into alignment.

4 Click a target point. This point can be on another object, or anywhereon the canvas. Press ENTER.

The object is realigned so that the first point is adjoined to the secondpoint.

Toolbox:

Align an Object to a Point or Axis | 313

To align an object along an axis

1 Click Tools menu ➤ Select Objects and select the object you want tomodify.

2 Click Tools menu ➤ Modify ➤ Align.

3 Click the first point that you want to move into alignment.

4 Click the first target point. This point can be on another object, oranywhere on the canvas.

5 Click a second point that you want to move into alignment.

6 Click a second target point.

The object is realigned so that the first and third points are adjoined tothe second and fourth points.

Toolbox:

To align to an object and match its size

1 In the Toolbox, click the Align tool properties flyout arrow to display thetool properties Pane.

2 Click Scale Geometry if it is not already selected.

3 Press CTRL to temporarily activate the Object Selection tool. Select theobject you want to align and release the mouse button.

4 Click the first point that you want to move into alignment.

5 Click the first target point. This point can be on another object, oranywhere on the canvas.

6 Click a second point that you want to move into alignment.

7 Click a second target point.

The object is realigned so that the first and third points you clicked areadjoined to the second and fourth points. The object is uniformly rescaledto match its new dimensions.

Toolbox:


Align a Set of Objects in a Row or ColumnAlign the edges or geometric midpoints of a set of objects.

Using the Align and Distribute window, you can align the objects within aselection set in six different ways.

■ Align Left. Shifts selected objects so that their left edges align with the leftedge of the leftmost object in the selection set.

■ Align Right. Shifts selected objects so that their right edges align with theright edge of the rightmost object in the selection set.

■ Align Horizontal Center. Shifts selected objects so that their horizontalcenter points align with the average horizontal center point of all theobjects in the selection set.

■ Align Top. Shifts selected objects so that their top edges align with the topedge of the topmost object in the selection set.

■ Align Bottom. Shifts selected objects so that their bottom edges align withthe bottom edge of the bottommost object in the selection set.

■ Align Vertical Center. Shifts selected objects so that their vertical centerpoints align with the average vertical center point of all the objects in theselection set.

You can also set an alignment key around which the other objects are aligned.In the following example, the orange square is the alignment key for a leftalignment of the remaining objects.

Align a Set of Objects in a Row or Column | 315

Before left alignment, keyselected

After left alignment

NOTE By default, alignments and distributions take into account the visual extentsof the appearance style. For example, if a stroke extends past the underlying vectorpath of the object, that extension is used to calculate the alignment. To use theunderlying vector path for the alignment, clear the Use Visual Extents option inthe Align and Distribute window.


Procedures: Align a Set of Objects Along an Axis

To align a set of objects

1 Click Tools menu ➤ Select Objects and select the objects you want toalign.

2 Click Palettes menu ➤ Align and Distribute.

3 In the Align and Distribute window, on the top row, click the alignmentoption you want to use.

The objects in the selection set are realigned.

4 Press ESC twice to end the current alignment operation and remove theselection.


■ Click Edit menu ➤ Alignment ➤ Align Left.

■ Click Edit menu ➤ Alignment ➤ Align Right.

■ Click Edit menu ➤ Alignment ➤ Align Horizontal Center.

■ Click Edit menu ➤ Alignment ➤ Align Top.

■ Click Edit menu ➤ Alignment ➤ Align Bottom.

■ Click Edit menu ➤ Alignment ➤ Align Vertical Center.

To set alignment based on an alignment key



3 In the Align and Distribute window, under Alignment Key, click Select.

4 On the canvas, select the object to be used as the alignment key.

A red box encloses the extents of the object.

5 In the Align and Distribution window, on the top row, click the alignmentoption you want to use.

The objects in the selection set are realigned based on the location of theobject that you selected as the alignment key.

Align a Set of Objects in a Row or Column | 317


NOTE If the Keep Alignment Key option is selected, the alignment key remainsactive until you close the Align and Distribute window. If you want to clearthe alignment key after each alignment, clear the option.

Distribute Geometry EvenlyDistribute objects to be an equal distance apart, or separate objects by a distancethat you specify.

The Align and Distribute window provides the following distribution options:

■ Horizontally Distribute Left Edge. Aligns selected objects evenly along ahorizontal path, so that their left edges are an equal distance apart.

■ Horizontally Distribute Right Edge. Aligns selected objects evenly along ahorizontal path, so that their right edges are an equal distance apart.

■ Horizontally Distribute Center. Aligns selected objects evenly along ahorizontal path, so that their horizontal midpoints are an equal distanceapart.

■ Vertically Distribute Top Edge. Aligns selected objects evenly along avertical path, so that their top edges are an equal distance apart.

■ Vertically Distribute Bottom Edge. Aligns selected objects evenly along avertical path, so that their bottom edges are an equal distance apart.

■ Vertically Distribute Center. Aligns selected objects evenly along a verticalpath, so that their vertical midpoints are an equal distance apart.


You set the distribution spacing using one of two methods. If the distributionis set to Auto, the average distance between the alignment points of the selectedobjects is calculated and the objects are distributed accordingly. Using thismethod, the outermost objects stay in place, and the innermost objects areredistributed within them.

In the following example, the top grouping is redistributed evenly along theleft edges of the squares. Notice that the vertical position is the same after thedistribution.

Before distribution

After left horizontal distribution

If you set the distribution to Custom, you then specify the number of drawingunits to use for the spacing. This value represents the spacing between thespecified alignment points on the objects. The following example uses a customvalue for the Horizontally Distribute Left Edge option. This value keeps theleftmost object in place and distributes the left edges of the remaining objectsaccording to the spacing that was set.

Distribute Geometry Evenly | 319

Before distribution

After custom spacing for left horizontaldistribution

You can also select an object as an alignment key. With this option, the objectselected as the alignment key remains in place. The other objects in theselection set are redistributed on either side of it.

When you distribute objects whose edges coincide, the draw order of theobjects determines the order of distribution. The topmost objects go to theright of the objects below them.

NOTE By default, alignments and distributions take into account the visual extentsof the appearance style. For example, if a stroke extends past the underlying vectorpath of the object, that extension is used to calculate the alignment. To use theunderlying vector path for the alignment, clear the Use Visual Extents option inthe Align and Distribute window.

Procedures: Distribute Geometry Evenly

To distribute geometry evenly between points

1 Click Tools menu ➤ Select Objects and select the objects you want todistribute.


3 In the Align and Distribute window, under Spacing, select Auto.


4 On the second row, click the distribution option you want to use.

The objects in the selection set are redistributed between the outermostalignment points.

5 Press ESC to end the current distribution operation.


■ Click Edit menu ➤ Distribute ➤ Horizontally Distribute Left Edge.

■ Click Edit menu ➤ Distribute ➤ Horizontally Distribute Right Edge.

■ Click Edit menu ➤ Distribute ➤ Horizontally Distribute Center.

■ Click Edit menu ➤ Distribute ➤ Vertically Distribute Top Edge.

■ Click Edit menu ➤ Distribute ➤ Vertically Distribute Bottom Edge.

■ Click Edit menu ➤ Distribute ➤ Vertically Distribute Center.

To distribute geometry by a specified distance

1 Click Tools menu ➤ Select Objects and select the objects you want todistribute.


3 In the Align and Distribute window, under Spacing, select Custom. Inthe Spacing box, specify the number of drawing units that will separatethe edges or center points of the selected objects.

4 On the second row, click the distribution option you want to use.

The objects in the selection set are redistributed using the spacing youspecified.


To set distribution based on an alignment key



3 In the Align and Distribute window, under Alignment Key, click Select.

4 On the canvas, select the object to be used as the alignment key.

A red box encloses the extents of the object.

Distribute Geometry Evenly | 321

5 In the Align and Distribution window, on the second row, click thedistribution option you want to use.

The objects in the selection set are realigned based on the location of theobject that you selected as the alignment key.


NOTE If the Keep Alignment Key option is selected, the alignment key remainsactive until you close the Align and Distribute window. If you want to clearthe alignment key after each alignment, clear the option.

Adjoin Edges of GeometryDistribute objects so that their horizontal or vertical edges are contiguouslyaligned.

The Align and Distribute window provides the following alignment options:

■ Adjoin Horizontally. Distributes selected objects so that right edge of theleftmost object abuts the left edge of the next object.


Before

Adjoined horizontally

■ Adjoin Vertically. Distributes selected objects so that top edge of the bottomobject abuts the bottom edge of the object above it.

Adjoin Edges of Geometry | 323

Before

Adjoined vertically

Depending on the original positions of the objects, the alignment can resultin objects that are contiguous. If the objects are not contiguous, they arealigned horizontally or vertically. In the following example, the original fourobjects (shown on the left) were “adjoined” on their left edges, even thoughthey are not contiguous.

Before


Horizontally adjoined (not contiguous)

Set the Spacing option to Auto to remove vertical or horizontal space betweenadjoined objects. Set the option to Custom to specify a distance between theobjects. You can experiment with changing the values and viewing the resultson the canvas as long as the objects remain selected.

NOTE By default, alignments and distributions take into account the visual extentsof the appearance style. For example, if a stroke extends past the underlying vectorpath of the object, that extension is used to calculate the alignment. To use theunderlying vector path for the alignment, clear the Use Visual Extents option inthe Align and Distribute window

Procedures: Adjoin Edges of Geometry

To adjoin geometry horizontally or vertically

1 Click Tools menu ➤ Select Objects and select the objects whose edgesyou want to adjoin.


3 In the Align and Distribute window, under Spacing, select Auto (foroverlap) or select Custom and enter a spacing distance.

4 On the third row, click the distribution option you want to use.

The objects in the selection set are redistributed from left to right (forhorizontally adjoined objects) or from top to bottom (for verticallyadjoined objects).


Adjoin Edges of Geometry | 325

Copy, Cut, and PasteGeometry

Cut or copy geometry or text to the Clipboard so you can paste it to another location.

Copy, Cut, and Paste within ImpressionCut or copy Impression objects or text so that you can paste them to anotherlocation or layer.

Impression exhibits standard Windows behavior for cut, copy, and paste.

■ Copy places the current selection set on the Clipboard, where it remains untilyou cut or copy another selection. You can copy any object in Impression,including objects on locked layers. You can also quickly copy a selection bypressing ALT as you drag.

■ Cut places the current selection set on the Clipboard and removes it fromthe canvas.

■ Paste inserts the contents of the Clipboard at the center of the canvas. Pastedobjects are inserted on the current layer. If the pasted objects have a differentappearance style than the current layer, an object style override is created.Objects with style overrides are unaffected by the style assigned to the layerunless you click Reset Style Exceptions in the Style Editor.

You can cut or copy, and then paste objects from one layer to another. You cutor copy objects or blocks in the standard workspace and paste them into theBlock Editor.

20

327

Procedures: Copy, Cut, and Paste within Impression

To copy geometry

1 Click Tools menu ➤ Select Objects and select the geometry you wantto copy.

2 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy.

Impression copies the selection to the Clipboard.

Alternate procedure: Press CTRL+C.

To copy geometry as you drag


2 Press ALT and drag the geometry. As you drag, a copy of the geometrymoves with the cursor.

3 Release the mouse button to place the geometry on the canvas.

To cut geometry


2 Click Edit menu ➤ Cut.

Impression removes the selection from the canvas and copies it to theClipboard.

Alternate procedure: Press CTRL+X.

To paste Impression geometry within Impression

1 Cut or copy geometry to the Clipboard.

2 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste.

The objects on the Clipboard are placed at the center the canvas.

3 While the pasted objects are still selected, drag them to the desiredlocation.


328 | Chapter 20 Copy, Cut, and Paste Geometry

Paste to and from Other ApplicationsWhen you paste information or text to and from other applications, you canexpect some content conversion.

Paste from Other Applications

You can paste several formats into Impression.

■ Impression converts vector geometry from other applications such as AdobeIllustrator or Corel Draw to Bezier splines and pastes it on the current layer.(Objects with style overrides are unaffected by the style assigned to thelayer unless you click Reset to Layer Style in the Layers palette.) Althoughthis process preserves most formatting, you can get unexpected results forcomplex appearance styles.

■ Images, including images in BMP, JPG, PNG, or TIF formats, are pastedonto the current layer with little change.

■ Many original properties in the text are preserved, including font, size,underlining, boldface, italics, paragraph justification, leading, tracking,and simple bullets and numbering.

Paste to Other Applications

When you paste Impression objects to documents in other applications, thefollowing formats are retained:

■ Vector splines retain top-level stroke and fill colors. Effects and compoundfill are not transferred.

■ Bitmap images are pasted at screen resolution (72 dpi) at the scale specifiedfor the current sketch.

■ Text can be pasted in RTF (Rich Text Format) or TXT formats. It does notretain Impression formatting, but can be edited and reformatted.

Procedures: Paste to and from Other Applications

To paste objects or images from other applications

1 In the source application, cut or copy objects or images to the Clipboard.

2 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste.

Paste to and from Other Applications | 329

Impression places the objects on the Clipboard at the center of the canvas.

3 While the pasted objects are still selected, drag them to the desiredlocation.


To paste objects or images to other applications

1 In Impression, cut or copy objects or images to the Clipboard.

2 In the target application, press CTRL+V or follow the instructions forpasting that are provided by the application.

Impression places the objects on the Clipboard at the location youspecified.

330 | Chapter 20 Copy, Cut, and Paste Geometry

Make Corrections andDeletions

Backtrack through your work by deleting objects or by undoing or redoing previous activities.

Delete Geometry

Delete the current selection by pressing the DEL key or selecting the menu option. The deletefunction removes the selection permanently.

To remove the current selection, store it on the Clipboard, and paste it to another location,use the cut function instead.

Undo and Redo Previous Activities

You can undo or redo most activities related to modifying geometry or appearance styles.Impression stores these activities until you end the current drawing session.

Because the number of undo activities that are held in memory affects program performance,the default number is 10. You can change this number in the General panel of the Optionsdialog box.

You cannot undo the following activities:

■ Opening or closing palettes

■ Moving or resizing palettes

■ Assigning keyboard shortcuts

■ Changing settings in the Options dialog box or Properties palette

21

331

Procedures: Make Corrections and DeletionsTo delete geometry

1 On the canvas, select the objects you want to remove.

2 Press DELETE.

Alternate procedure: Edit menu ➤ Delete.

To delete all the geometry on a layer

1 In the Layers palette, click the layer selection triangle to select all theobjects on the layer.

2 Press DELETE.

Alternate procedure: Edit menu ➤ Delete.

To undo previous actions

1 Click Edit menu ➤ Undo.

2 Repeat step 1 to step back through previous actions.

NOTE You can set the number of undo actions on the General panel of theOptions dialog box.

Alternate procedure: Press CTRL+Z.

To redo your last undo action

■ Click Edit menu ➤ Redo.Alternate procedure: Press CTRL+Y.

To set the number of undo steps saved in memory


2 In the Options dialog box, General panel, in the Number of Undo Stepsbox, do one of the following:

■ Click the arrow buttons.

■ Enter the number of activities to save in memory.

332 | Chapter 21 Make Corrections and Deletions

Work with Blocks andGrouped Objects

Create object groupings for geometry that you want to select and edit together. Use blocksfor symbols and entourage, such as trees, that you use frequently.

About Blocks and Object GroupsYou can group objects in three ways: blocks, object groups, and packed objects.

Types of Object Groupings

Impression provides three types of object groupings.

■ Blocks. A saved collection of geometry that usually represents entourage orsymbols. You can insert multiple block references to a single block definitioninto the same drawing.

■ Object groups. A collection of objects that form a selection set. Selectingone object in an object group selects all objects in the group. You can editthe object group components individually simply by selecting them again.

■ Packed objects. On a packed layer, objects that share the same style andhave a sequential draw order. Selecting one object in a packed unit selectsall other objects in the unit. Layer packing improves program performance.See Pack Layers to Improve Performance.

22

333

The following table provides a guideline for when to use each type of grouping.

Comparison of Blocks, Object Groups, and Packed Objects

Packed objectsObject GroupBlocks

To improve pro-gram performance.

To save groupings thatyou frequently selectand edit together.

To save frequentlyused symbols and en-tourage.

Why used

Select one object toselect all in group.

Click any object in thegroup with the Object

Click the block refer-ence to select all itscomponents as a unit.

How selec-ted

Selection tool active toselect all objects in thegroup. Click again toselect the individualobject.

Click the Layer Un-packed icon in the

Click Edit ➤ Group orpress CTRL+G.

Right-click selectedobjects. On the Blockspalette, click the Cre-

Where cre-ated

Layers palette or theDrawing Perform-ance Tuner.

ate Block from Selec-tion button.

Double-click theobject to unpack allobjects on the layer.

As a group or individu-ally.

Double-click block toopen the Block Editor.

How modi-fied

Save and Reuse BlocksSymbols and other representational geometry such as trees, are frequentlysaved as blocks and inserted on the canvas as references.

About BlocksIn Impression, you can quickly substitute one block for another, and vary thesize and rotation of the substitutions.

334 | Chapter 22 Work with Blocks and Grouped Objects

What Is a Block?

A block is a single object that can contain a combination of componentsincluding the following:

■ Vector geometry and text

■ Bitmapped images

■ Appearance styles

■ Other blocks

You can identify blocks on the canvas on page 344 with your cursor.

How Blocks Save You Time

Blocks save you time in several ways.

■ Block definitions and references: Update one, change many. Block referenceson the canvas are insertions that reference the block definitions in the Blockspalette. Using references not only saves disk space, but enables you toupdate all insertions of the block definition simply by modifying orsubstituting the block.

About Blocks | 335

To change the objects contained in a block, you can redefine the block.You can also vary multiple insertions of the same block definition byspecifying a range of scales and rotation angles.

■ Block substitution: Exchange images. To change the image of an insertedblock reference, drag a block from the Blocks palette onto a block on thecanvas. You can also use the Block Properties dialog box to exchange oneblock for another. Impression inserts the substituted blocks on the samelayers, using the same base points as the blocks they replace.

■ Multiblocks: Add variation. Multiblocks are sets of blocks used to achievevariation in your illustration. When you insert a multiblock, Impressionplaces a random instance of the multiblock set at the insertion point.


You can create multiblocks from any blocks in the Blocks palette. Themultiblock icon on the block preview image identifies it as a multiblock.

How Styles and Layers Affect Blocks

A block imported from a DWG file is placed on a corresponding layer inImpression. You can find the styles used in a block in the Block Styles area ofthe Styles palette.

When you edit a block, the Block Editor workspace replaces the standardLayers palette. In this workspace, the Block Layers palette displays a set oflayers with styles that affect the geometry for each saved block. These blocklayers control the appearance of the blocks that contain them. They areindependent of the layers in the standard workspace that contain the blockreferences and other geometry.

About Blocks | 337

Block components inherit styles in the following ways:

■ Style matches the block layer or is assigned to individual objects withinthe block. Use the same methods that you use in the standard workspace.See Apply an Appearance Style.

■ Block geometry or layers inherit the style of the layer on which the blockis inserted. To use this method, set the block layer or geometry to use aspecial block style called By Insert Layer. With this style, different insertionsof the same block can use different appearance styles, depending on thestyle assigned to the layer that contains the block. In the Block Editor,workspace, objects with the By Insert Layer style are displayed with astandard black stroke type.The following icon—displayed in the Styles palette or in the StyleEditor—identifies the By Insert Layer style:

By InsertLayer

Imported blocks with components created on Layer 0 (zero) automaticallyacquire the By Insert Layer style. You can also choose the style from thedrop-down list on the Style Editor, from the Styles palette, or by naminga block layer “0.”

A block layer can contain geometry that has more than one style. The stylesthat differ from the block layer assignment are handled as style overrides onthe block layer. You can reset objects to inherit the layer style in the StyleEditor or in the Styles drop-down list on the stationary toolbar.

If you select and modify a block style, all insertions of that block reflect thechange.


Original block and its styles

Updated block and styles

How Block Sets Are OrganizedBlocks can contain several types of content. They are different than otherobjects with regards to appearance styles and layers.

Use the Blocks Palette

The Blocks palette organizes and stores Impression blocks.

How Block Sets Are Organized | 339

Your illustration can contain several types of block sets.

■ Libraries

■ In Use Blocks (under Search Filters)

■ Saved Blocks (under Search Filters)

■ Custom Block Sets (under Search Filters)

Libraries

Block libraries are links to saved block sets in other Impression illustrations.Block definitions in these linked-to files become part of your document whenyou save them or insert them in your illustration. Saving or using a libraryblock copies it to the Saved Blocks list. The block in the library is unaffected.You can find several block libraries, including plants, people, and cars, in theAutodesk Impression 3\Libraries\Blocks folder.

If you modify a block in a linked-to document, its library reference is updatedthe next time you open the linked illustration. These changes do not altersaved or inserted block references. To apply the changes, save the library blockagain and overwrite the saved block definition. If an IRF file in a library set ismoved or deleted, its link becomes unavailable to illustrations that referenceit in their libraries.

You can export the saved blocks you use most frequently to an empty fileused specifically to store blocks. You can then import those block sets aslibraries or include them the Blocks palettes of all new Impression illustrations.You set the title of the libraries tab in the Document Setup dialog box.


In-Use Blocks

The In Use list In the Search Filters section displays all block references. Theseblock references are also displayed in the Saved Blocks list.

Saved Blocks

Saved blocks consist of new blocks, inserted blocks, and saved library blocks.When you update a style assigned to a block in the Styles palette Block Stylesarea, you do not have to save the block again.

Blocks Belonging to Custom Search Filters

You can set up custom groupings of the blocks that you use most frequently.Filter blocks by name, type (vector or raster), or by their substitution ormultiblock status. For example, you can create an entourage grouping suchas desert plants by setting up a standard that filters blocks by name.

Procedures: How Block Sets Are Organized

To create a block set based on a custom search filter

1 Click Palettes menu ➤ Blocks.

2 In the Blocks palette, navigation pane, right-click Search Filters. ClickCreate New Filter.

3 In the Search Blocks dialog box, specify the criteria for the custom searchfilter.

4 If you plan to use the filter frequently, click Select Keep New Filter inBlocks Palette Filter List Until I Delete It. Leave the check box blank ifyou plan to use the filter only once.

5 Click OK.

Insert and Remove BlocksInsert a block into your illustration by dragging it from the Blocks palette. Ifyou no longer need it, delete it from the canvas, or remove its definition.

Insert and Remove Blocks | 341

Insert Blocks

Blocks inserted on the current layer retain the appearance styles assigned totheir individual components. You can vary the size and rotation of the insertedblock within the limitations you set. The scale of sketch to which the layerbelongs also affects the scale of the inserted block.

NOTE If a block you insert seems to disappear, verify on the Layers palette whetherthe current layer is off (the gray light bulb).

Impression usually places the blocks that you drag onto the canvas at thepoint where you release the mouse cursor. However, when an imported viewhas a differing origin point or scale, the block placement might be in anunexpected location (including off the canvas).

NOTE When you insert blocks from the Blocks palette, hold ALT as you drag blocksonto the canvas to temporarily disable automatic block substitution.

Multiblocks are a collection of blocks that you can use to achieve variableentourage insertions. You insert them just like you insert other blocks: bydragging them onto the canvas. With multiblocks, however, each insertionreferences a randomly assigned block definition. You can use this feature toachieve random variation in the type of trees you insert.


If you insert a block from a library, Impression adds a copy of the block to theSaved Blocks list.

Delete Block References and Definitions

Deleting a block from the canvas removes only that instance of the block. Theblock definition is still available on the Saved Blocks list.

You can delete a block definition from the Blocks palette of the current file.Impression removes blocks that are not in use. However, for inserted blocks,the Delete Block Confirmation dialog box presents options for handling theblock components. If the block was substituted for another block, Impressionrestores the original block insertion and removes the block substitution.

You can also remove all unused block definitions. Purging unused blocksremoves them from the Saved Blocks list.

To delete a block that is part of a multiblock set, first remove it from the set.

Set Block Scaling

Block geometry uses a real-world scale. Its size in your illustration depends onthe following factors:

■ Sketch scale. When you drag a block from the Blocks palette, Impressionplaces it on the current layer. The size of the block is automatically adjustedto the scale of the sketch that contains it.

■ Block definition dimensions. You can change the real-world dimensionsof the block definition in the Block Properties dialog box.

■ Insertion scale. Set the horizontal and vertical scale of the block reference,as compared to the dimensions of the block definition. You can displayand modify the settings for selected blocks in the Properties Palette.

■ Scale to fit bounding box. (Block substitutions only.) In the Block Propertiesdialog box, specify that substitute block dimensions fit within the boundingbox of the block that you are replacing.

■ Vary scale upon insertion. Randomly scale blocks by a percentage that youset in the Block Properties dialog box.

■ Size when printed. Combines block and sketch scale settings, plus anyscale set in the Print Dialog Box.


Set Block Style Scaling

When a block is substituted for another block, Impression scales its style tomatch the scale of the sketch that contains the replaced block. You can scalestyles, including block styles, proportionately whenever you resize an objector change the scale of the sketch. For more information, see Adjust the StyleSize.

Procedures: Insert and Remove Blocks

To identify blocks on the canvas

➤ On the canvas, move the cursor over the geometry you would like toidentify.

If the geometry selected is a block, a symbol is added to the cursor andthe block name displays in the tooltip.

To drag a block to insert it


2 In the Blocks palette navigation pane, click a block set that contains theblock you want to insert.

NOTE If the navigation pane is closed, you can select a block set from thedrop-down list.

3 From the preview pane, drag the block to the location on the canvaswhere you want to insert it.

To insert a multiblock


2 In the Blocks palette navigation pane, click a block set that contains themultiblock you want to insert.



3 Drag the multiblock from the Blocks palette to the location on the canvaswhere you want to insert it.

Impression inserts a block from the multiblock set. For multiplemultiblock insertions, the specific block is inserted randomly.

To replace a block in a multiblock reference

1 On the canvas, select a multiblock reference.

2 Right-click the selection. Click Multiblock.

3 In the pop-up list, click the image of the replacement block.

To remove a block reference

1 On the canvas, press CTRL+click to select the block reference you wantto remove from the canvas.

2 Press DELETE.

Impression removes the block reference from the canvas, but the blockdefinition remains in the Blocks palette.

To delete a block definition


2 In the Blocks palette navigation pane, click a block set that contains theblock you want to delete.


3 In the preview pane, right-click the block you want to remove. ClickDelete.

■ If the block is not in use in the illustration, Impression removes theblock from the Blocks palette.

■ If the block has been inserted, go to step 4.

■ If the block is part of a multiblock, go to step 5.

■ If the block was substituted for another block, Impression restores theoriginal block and removes the substitution.


4 If you try to delete an inserted block, the Delete Block Confirmationdialog box is displayed. Select one of the following options:

■ Explode Instances. Deletes the block from the Blocks palette andexplodes all instances into geometric components. Impression placesthe geometry on the same layer as the original block reference.

■ Delete Instances. Deletes the block definition from the Blocks paletteand removes all instances from the canvas. If the block was substitutedfor another block, Impression restores the original content.

■ Cancel. Cancels the block deletion.

5 If the block you want to delete is part of a multiblock, you have thefollowing options:

■ Remove All Instances. Removes the block from all multiblocks thatcontain it. Block insertions that are part of a multiblock reference arerandomly replaced with other members of the multiblock set.

■ Cancel. Cancels the deletion.

Blocks palette:

To purge all unused block definitions


2 In the Blocks palette navigation pane, click Saved Blocks.

NOTE If the navigation pane is closed, you can select Saved Blocks from thedrop-down list.

3 In the Blocks palette, right-click anywhere in the preview pane. ClickPurge Unused Blocks.

Impression removes all unused block definitions from the Saved Blockslist.

Create BlocksUse the Blocks palette to save and reuse object sets.


Create a BlockYou create a block by selecting the geometry and text and clicking the CreateBlock from Selection button in the Blocks palette. Impression combines theobjects you select to form a single block unit. You cannot separately edit thecomponents of a block unless you explode and redefine the block.

Keyboard Shortcut: Create Block from Selection

ResultLocationActionKey

Creates a block from the currentselection without opening the Blockpalette.

B

The objects you include in the block can be from different layers. However,when you create or insert a block, its components are converted to a singlereference inserted on the current layer.

Create a Nested Block

You can also create nested blocks, that is, blocks that contain other blocks.Nested blocks are treated as a single object, but must be edited separately fromtheir parent block.

You can create a nested block using several methods:

■ Copy or cut the object in the standard workspace and paste it into theBlock Editor workspace.

■ In the Block Editor, drag a block from the Blocks palette onto the BlockEditor workspace.

You cannot nest a block that would create a circular reference. That is, if theblock you want to paste is already part of the parent block, you cannot insertit. Unavailable blocks are shaded.

If the style of a nested block is By Insert Layer, the nested block inherits thestyle of its block layer in the parent block.

Create a Multiblock

Multiblocks are block sets that, with multiple references, give the appearanceof random insertions of different blocks. For example, if you make multipleinsertions of a multiblock that contains three types of trees, each of the treetypes is inserted randomly. You can also set insertions to vary in size androtation. Use this feature as a quick way to diversify your block references.

Create Blocks | 347

Unlike nested blocks, which are treated as one combined object, multiblocksare inserted one block at a time in your drawing.

In the Blocks palette, you can identify multiblocks by the multiblock icon onits preview image. Clicking this icon displays a pop-up list that displays theblock components of the multiblock.

You can drag one of these preview images directly to the canvas to overriderandom placement and insert a specific block. You can also rearrange theblocks by dragging them or you can right-click and delete them from themultiblock set.

Procedures: Create Blocks

To create a block

1 In the Layers palette, click in front of the layer name to make that layercurrent. (Block references are placed on the current layer.)


3 Click Tools menu ➤ Select Objects and select the objects to be saved asa block.

4 In the Blocks palette, click the Create Block from Selection button.


The objects are saved as a block definition in the Blocks palette.

Alternate procedure:

■ On the canvas, right-click the object. Click Create Block from Selection.

To create a nested block

1 In the Layers palette, click a layer to make it current. (References to thenested blocks you create are inserted on the current layer.)


3 Press SHIFT and select the blocks that you want to combine into a nestedblock.

4 In the Blocks palette, click the Create Block from Selection button.

The objects are saved as a block definition in the Blocks palette.


■ Copy or cut the object in the standard workspace and paste it intothe Block Editor workspace.

■ In the Block Editor, drag a block from the Blocks palette onto thedrawing area.

To create a multiblock


2 In the Blocks palette preview pane, press CTRL+click to select the blocksthat you want to combine into a multiblock.

3 Right-click the selection. Click Create Multiblock.

Impression combines the blocks into a multiblock, designated by themultiblock icon at the corner of the block preview image.

Alternate procedure: In the Blocks palette preview pane, drag one blockon top of the other.

Create Blocks | 349

To remove a block from a multiblock set


2 In the Blocks palette preview pane, click the multiblock symbol in thelower-right corner of the multiblock preview swatch.

3 In the pop-up window that displays the multiblock components,right-click the block you want to remove. Click Remove from Multiblock.

Impression removes the block from the set. Another member of the setreplaces the inserted references.

Alternate procedure: In the Blocks palette, Saved Blocks list, right-clickthe multiblock ➤ Properties. In the Block Properties dialog box, clickthe Remove button next to the block you want to remove from the set.Click OK.

Move, Resize, and Redefine BlocksYou can quickly modify the location and size of specific block instances orredefine a block to use different geometry.

Move or Resize Block Instances

Just as you can resize and reposition other Impression objects, you canreposition and resize block references. These transformations affect only theindividual block references, not the block definitions. See Reposition andResize Geometry.


Drag blocks to move them

Drag block grips to resize them

Blocks are created at real-world scale. However, the size of the block on thecanvas depends on the scale of the sketch that contains it. Therefore, theinsertion size of a block definition is different if it is inserted into sketcheswith different scales. If the size of a block insertion seems to be incorrect,verify the sketch scale setting on the Layers palette. See Set Block Style Scaling.

Change the Size of a Block Definition

Modify the height and width settings of a block definition in the BlockProperties dialog box. These modifications change the size of all current andfuture block references.

You can also resize a block definition in the Block Editor.

Explode Blocks

The easiest way to update block geometry is to use the Block Editor. However,another way to modify blocks is to explode the block reference, update thegeometry, and then redefine the block.

“Exploding” breaks a block reference into the original object geometry, whichyou can then modify. When you have completed the changes, select theupdated geometry on the canvas and click the Redefine Blocks button on theBlocks palette.

Move, Resize, and Redefine Blocks | 351

Impression places exploded components on the same layer as the blockreference. If their styles become style overrides, click Reset to Layer Style onthe Layers palette to assign the layer style to the exploded objects.

If you explode nested blocks, the original blocks are placed on the same layeras the nested block reference. Explode the nested blocks more than once togain access to the geometry or styles.

Redefine Blocks

Another way to modify a block definition is to redefine the block. You canselect any set of objects on the canvas, click the Redefine button, and selecta block definition to replace. This process occurs without opening the BlockEditor.

When you replace one block definition with another by redefining it, theoriginal block styles are replaced by the styles of the new block definition.

Move a Block Base Point

Base points define the insertion point of the block. By default, the center pointof the block is defined as its base point.

You can set a new base point when you redefine a block or when you modifythe block in the Block Editor. The location you set specifies a point that isrelative to the location of the geometry.

NOTE When you redefine a new base point for blocks with existing references,their location on the canvas shifts.

Procedures: Move, Resize, and Redefine Blocks

To redefine the real-world size of a saved block definition



2 In the Blocks palette, right-click a saved block ➤ Properties.

3 In the Block Properties dialog box, enter new values in the Height andWidth boxes.

4 Click OK.

Existing insertions of block references change when you click OK.Impression updates the block definition to include the new scale for allsubsequent insertions.

To explode block references

1 On the canvas, right-click the block reference you want to explode ➤

Explode Block.

2 In the Explode Block dialog box, click OK.

Impression places the exploded block geometry on the same layer as theblock reference. Appearance styles assigned to the exploded componentsare handled as object style overrides.

3 If you want the exploded geometry to inherit the layer style, click thelayer row to highlight it. In the Style Editor, click the Style ExceptionAlert button.

In the drop-down list, click Reset Style Exceptions.

Alternate procedure: Right-click the block reference. Click Explode Block.

To redefine a block definition

1 Press CTRL+click to select the objects to include in the redefined block.(These objects are sometimes the components of a block reference thatyou have exploded and modified.)


3 In the Blocks palette navigation pane, click Saved Blocks. Click theRedefine Blocks button at the bottom of the palette.

4 In the Redefine Block dialog box, on the block list, click the block thatyou are replacing.

Move, Resize, and Redefine Blocks | 353

5 To redefine the block base point, click Pick Base Point. On the canvas,click a point to be used as the base point for the block.

The base point icon shifts to the point you specify.

NOTE Redefining a new base point for blocks with existing references shiftstheir location on the canvas.

6 Click OK.

To duplicate a block definition


2 In the Blocks palette navigation pane, click Saved Blocks.

3 Right-click the block you want to copy. Click Duplicate.

Impression adds a new block, labeled “block_name 0,” (or 1, 2, 3, and soon) to the Blocks palette.

4 In the block name text box, enter a new name for the block.

To rename a block


2 In the Blocks palette preview pane, right-click the block you want torename. Click Rename.

The label changes to a text box.

NOTE You cannot rename a block in a library.

3 Enter a new name for the block and press ENTER.

Alternate procedure: (Block Editor workspace) In the Block Layers palette,double-click the block name and enter a new name in the text box.

To move a block base point

1 To open the Block Editor, do one of the following:

■ On the canvas, double-click a block.

■ In the Blocks palette, double-click a block swatch.

■ In the Blocks palette, right-click a block ➤ Edit Block.


The block is displayed in the Block Editor workspace. In the Styles palettethe name of the block you are editing is displayed in red. Preview swatchesfor the block styles are displayed in the preview pane.

NOTE If you double-click a block substitution on the canvas, the replacementblock—not the block it replaces—is opened in the Block Editor. Similarly, ifyou double-click a multiblock on the canvas, the block definition of thedisplayed block instance is opened in the Block Editor.

2 In the Block Editor toolbar, click the Show Block Base Point button.

The block base point icon indicates the location of the base point:

3 Drag the icon to a new location.

4 Click the Save button. Then click Close Block Editor.

Redefining a new base point for blocks with existing references shiftstheir location on the canvas.

Block Editor toolbar:

Edit Block Geometry and StylesYou can adjust block geometry and styles in the Block Editor or resize a blockby changing its properties in the Block Properties dialog box.

About the Block Editor Workspace

The Block Editor provides a way to modify block geometry and styles usingmost of the tools available to you in the standard workspace. Double-click ablock inserted on the canvas or double-click a block swatch in the Blockspalette to open the Block Editor workspace.

Edit Block Geometry and Styles | 355

Most functions that are available in the standard workspace are also availableas you use the Block Editor. However, in the Block Editor, you can edit onlyone block at a time. For example, you can pan, zoom, select, rotate, create,and delete geometry. You can assign and edit styles. And you can use theBlock Layers palette to organize draw order and style assignments.

When the Block Editor is active, the Block Editor toolbar is displayed.

Use this toolbar to show and hide the block base point, to save block changes,and to close the Block Editor and redisplay the standard workspace.

About Block Layers and Styles

In most ways, block layers in the Block Editor workspace behave like layersin the standard workspace. However, block layers are organized by block


groupings instead of by sketch groupings. Each set of block layers is uniqueto each block. They are independent of the layers in the standard Layerspalette, which can contain many objects, including block insertions.

Where possible, Impression maintains the visual integrity of imported blocks.If the components of the object were created on different layers, those layersare displayed in the Block Layers palette, as shown in the following example:

Block in DWG file

Block imported to Impression

The Block Layers palette also retains the original layer and style settings forblocks you create in Impression.

NOTE Components of Impression blocks that were created in Impression 1 arenot split into block layers. Instead, all block components are placed on a blocklayer called Legacy. The Legacy block layer style is usually based on the mostprevalent style in the block. Any text included in the block is split into a separatelayer above the Legacy layer. Other component styles are handled as style overrides.

Within each block, block layer organization in the Block Editor depends onseveral factors.

■ Properties assigned by layer. Block components with properties that areassigned by layer (BYLAYER) are placed on block layers with the same color


and linetype properties. The components retain these properties when theblock is inserted on the canvas.

■ Object property overrides. If block components have style overrides,including linetype or color, those exceptions are maintained as overrideson the block layer. The block layer style retains the object properties ofthe source layer.

■ BYBLOCK geometry (drawings from AutoCAD-based products). Blockswith a BYBLOCK setting —including block components with styleoverrides—inherit the By Insert Layer style in Impression.

■ By insert layer (Layer 0). If bylayer blocks are on Layer 0, they inherit anImpression block style known as By Insert Layer. Upon insertion onto thecanvas, this block geometry inherits the assigned style of the current layer.Use this setting to apply different styles or colors to different blockinsertions.The By Insert Layer style is like other styles except that you cannot edit,save, duplicate, export, or rename it. The following icon identifies the ByInsert Layer style in the Style Editor and Styles palette:

In the Block Editor workspace, block components with the By Insert LayerStyle have a plain black stroke style. If you paste these components ontothe canvas of the standard workspace they retain the black stroke style.


Body style is green fillin Block Editor

Body style is By InsertLayer in Block Editor

By Insert Layer inheritsblue fill on canvas

The following table illustrates how Impression handles different DWG blockproperty settings.

Style Conversions for Blocks

➤ ImpressionSource DWG

Style of inser-ted blockcomponent

Block lay-er style

Blocklayer

Objectlinetype

Objectcolor

Layer col-or

Layer

By Insert Layer(same as blocklayer)

By InsertLayer

➤ 0BYLAYERBYLAYERBlack0

Style override:color = yellow

By InsertLayer

➤ 0BYLAYERYellowGreen0

Style override:color = red,

By InsertLayer

➤ 0DashedBYLAYERRed0


➤ ImpressionSource DWG

Style of inser-ted blockcomponent

Block lay-er style

Blocklayer

Objectlinetype

Objectcolor

Layer col-or

Layer

linetype =dashed

color = green(same as blocklayer)

Green ➤ 1BYLAYERBYLAYERGreen1

Style override:color = red

Green ➤ 1BYLAYERredgreen1

Style override:color = red,linetype =dashed

Blue ➤ 1dashedredblue1

By Insert LayerBlue ➤ 1BYBLOCKBYBLOCKblue1

Style override:color = green,linetype = line-type of first in-

Blue ➤ 1BYBLOCKgreenblue1

serted blockreference

Stylize Blocks

You can quickly change the appearance of a block by editing its styles.Updating block styles provides a quick way to adapt existing blocks orentourage to match the stylized theme of the rest of your design illustration.


You can modify block styles in the following places:

■ Styles palette. The Block Styles area of the Styles palette lists the blocksinserted on the canvas.

■ Block Editor. The title of the current block is displayed in red in the Stylespalette.

Modifying a block style automatically updates the appearance of both insertedblocks and the block definition. However, these changes do not affect theblock definitions stored in libraries. To restore the library version of the block,drag it from the library or save the library version and choose to replace theversion you stylized.

You edit block styles the same way you edit any other style. (See Create andModify Styles.) However, if you save a library style in the Block Editor, thestyle becomes part of the block style list instead of the Saved Styles list

NOTE If the block was created by saving an image (for example, an image in PNGof JPG format), you cannot edit its styles.

Modify Block Geometry

The same drawing tools that are available in the standard workspace are alsoavailable in the Block Editor. You do not need to explode the block first.Simply double-click the block to open the Block Editor, modify the geometryor text, and save the block. All instances of the block are immediately updated.


Impression places updated components on the same layer as the blockreference. Blocks with By Insert Layer style assignments inherit the style ofthe layer.

Nested blocks are blocks within blocks. To access and edit a nested block,double-click the nested block in the Block Editor. The parent block is closed,and the nested block replaces it in the workspace.

You can also modify blocks by exploding and redefining them. For moreinformation, see Move, Resize, and Redefine Blocks.

Procedures: Edit Block Geometry and Styles

To modify a block style





■ On the canvas, right-click a block ➤ Edit Block.



2 In the preview pane, click the style you want to modify.

3 In the Style Editor, click Edit to expand the style tree.

4 Modify the style. See To create an appearance style.


5 When all changes are complete, in the Block Editor toolbar, click theSave button. Then click Close Block Editor.

Impression saves the changes and applies them to any inserted blocksand to the definition in the Saved Blocks list. The block library definitionsremain unchanged.

Alternate procedure: In the Block Styles area of the Styles palette (standardworkspace), click the name of the block you want to edit. Follow steps3-5.

To set block geometry to inherit the insertion layer style





■ On the canvas, right-click a block ➤ Edit Block.



2 In the Block Layers palette, select the layer that contains the geometryyou want to change. Do one of the following:

■ In the Style Editor, click the Style Name list, and select By Insert Layer.

■ Drag the By Insert Layer style from the Styles palette to the layer. (Thisstyle is only available in the Styles palette after it has been used inanother layer.)

■ Double-click the layer name. In the Edit box, enter 0 (zero). (You canhave only one layer named 0 per block.)

3 On the Block Editor toolbar, click the Save button. Then click Close BlockEditor.


Alternate procedure: To set individual block geometry to have the ByInsert Layer style, select the block geometry. In the Style Editor StyleName list, select By Insert Layer. (This method creates a style override.)

To modify block geometry




■ In the Blocks palette or canvas, right-click a block ➤ Edit Block.



2 Use the tools in the Toolbox and the Style Editor to modify the block.Most functions available in the standard workspace are also available inthe Block Editor workspace. See Work with Geometry and Text.

3 When all changes are complete, in the Block Editor toolbar, click theSave button. Then click Close Block Editor.

Impression saves the changes and applies them to any inserted blocksand to the definition in the Saved Blocks list. The block library definitionsremain unchanged.

To modify a nested block


■ On the canvas, double-click an inserted block.


■ In the Blocks palette or canvas, right-click a block ➤ Edit Block.




2 In the Block Editor drawing area, double-click the nested block.

If you have made changes to the parent block, Impression prompts youto save them.

The nested block replaces the parent block in the workspace.

3 Use the tools in the Toolbox and the Style Editor to modify the nestedblock. Most functions available in the standard workspace are alsoavailable in the Block Editor workspace. See Work with Geometry andText.

4 When all changes are complete, in the Block Editor toolbar, click CloseBlock Editor.

Impression saves the changes and applies them to both inserted blocksand parent blocks, and to the definitions in the Saved Blocks list. Theblock library definitions remain unchanged.

To select all instances of an inserted block definition


2 In the Blocks palette preview pane, right-click a block. Click Select AllInstances.

On the canvas, Impression highlights all block references for the selectedblock definition.

Substitute Block ReferencesQuickly exchange one block reference for another by using substitution. Thesubstitutions occur on the canvas instantly.

Substitute Block References | 365

How Block Substitution Works

Substitute one block for another by dragging the replacement from the Blockspalette onto the original block. When you assign a block substitution, theblock substitute replaces the original block whenever you insert the originalblock into the illustration. The instances that you have already inserted arealso replaced.

The Block Substitution Map maintains a list of substitutions. You can addsubstitutions or delete them to restore the original block assignments. A blockcan have only one substitution.

In the Blocks palette, a small block substitution image identifies a replacedblock.

If this icon appears on a block preview image, Impression inserts thereplacement block when you drag that block onto the canvas.

You can display and change the substitution status of a specific block in theBlock Properties palette. In this dialog box, you can set a scale and rotationvariance for multiple references. For example, you can set the scale to vary by


50%. The size of each subsequent reference varies from 50% to 150% of thesize specified in the block definition.

You can substitute a multiblock for a simple block. However, you cannotsubstitute a multiblock for a block that is a component of another multiblock.For an overview of all the block substitutions in your document, open theBlock Substitution Map.

You can export block substitution maps, including their associated blockdefinitions and appearance styles, for use with other drawings or import theminto the current drawing.

Fit Substitutions to the Original Bounding Box

When you create a block substitution, you can set the substitute to retain thedimensions of the original block after the replacement.

Blocks to be replaced with substitution

Substitution with Scale to Fit Bounding Box off

Substitution with Scale to Fit Bounding Box on


The Scale to Fit Bounding Box setting, in combination with the Scale Stylesetting, produces different results during block substitutions.

■ If Scale Styles and Scale to Fit Bounding Box are off: Block styles areautomatically scaled to match the scale of the sketch.

■ If Scale Styles and Scale to Fit Bounding Box are on: The block styles arecumulatively scaled to account for changes to sketch scale. The block sizechanges to fit the bounding box of the original block.

■ If Scale Styles is off and Scale to Fit Bounding Box is on: The styles for eachblock retain their original scale.

■ If Scale Styles is on and Scale to Fit Bounding Box is off. Block styles areautomatically scaled to match the scale of the sketch.

Procedures: Substitute Block References

To substitute blocks (from the Block Substitution Map)

1 Click Palettes menu ➤ Block Substitution Map.

2 In the Block Substitution Map, click the Add Substitution button.

3 In the Original drop-down list, select the block or multiblock you wantto replace. (The list displays only the blocks that have not been used ina substitution.)

4 In the Substitution drop-down list, select a block or multiblock to replacethe original block. (The list displays only saved blocks that have not beenreplaced by another substitution.)

Impression replaces all instances of the original block with thesubstitution.

Blocks Palette:

Alternate procedure: Click Palettes menu ➤ Blocks. Click the DisplaySubstitution Map button.


To substitute blocks (from the Blocks palette)


2 In the Blocks palette preview pane, right-click the image of the savedblock to be replaced ➤ Properties.

NOTE You cannot select a block that is used in another substitution.

3 In the Block Properties dialog box, under Substituted With, click thearrow next to the image.

Impression displays a list of blocks that can replace the selected block.(The list displays only saved blocks that have not been used in asubstitution.)

4 To retain the dimensions of the original block after substitution, clickScale to Fit Bounding Box.

5 To vary the scale and rotation of the block references, click Vary Scaleand Vary Rotation. Specify a percentage to indicate the amount ofvariation.

6 Click OK.

Impression replaces all instances of the original block with thesubstitution.

Alternate procedure: Drag a block from the Blocks palette onto a blockon the canvas.

To remove a block substitution


2 In the Block Substitution Map, select the substitution you want to removeand click the Remove Substitution button.

Impression restores the original block assignment.

To disable block substitution


2 In the Blocks palette preview pane, select the block you want to insert.


3 As you drag and drop the block onto the canvas, press ALT. The blockdisplays on top of blocks already on the canvas.

Share Block Libraries and Substitution MapsShare blocks created for other Impression illustrations by importing blocklibraries, or share block substitutions by importing and exporting blocksubstitution maps.

Add Block Library Links

By adding libraries to the Blocks palette, you can gain access to the contentsof saved block sets in other Impression files. The saved blocks from the linkedfile are displayed as a Blocks palette library. The library list displays the nameof the external file. (In the external file, you can also assign an alternate libraryname in the Document Setup dialog box. That name replaces the file namefor the library listing.)

The blocks in libraries are write-protected. That is, you cannot change them.When you insert a block from a library, Impression adds a copy of that blockdefinition to the Saved Blocks set. You can modify and delete these savedblocks.

After you have linked to a block library in another file, you can save some orall block definitions, which embeds them in the current Impression file. Ifyou use a common set of blocks, symbols, or architectural entourage in yourprojects, you can add the library to the default template file. The library isthen included in all new files by default.

You can find a collection of stylized blocks in the Autodesk Impression3\Libraries\Blocks folder.

Import and Export Block Substitution Maps

Share a block substitution map with other files by importing it or by savingthe current map for future needs. An exported block substitution map containsonly block definitions, appearance styles, and the substitution map, but nogeometry.

You sometimes import a map whose settings conflict with settings in yourcurrent drawing. This situation is most common for documents with sharedblock libraries. For example, the imported map might substitute a block for ablock that has already been substituted. You can resolve these conflicts in theBlock Substitution Conflicts dialog box, which is displayed automatically.


Import Blocks by Importing Other Drawings

When you import a drawing, Impression adds any blocks from the importedfile to the Saved Blocks set in the Blocks palette. If the name, but not thecontent, of the imported block matches the name of an existing block,Impression renames the incoming block using this format: file_name-block_name.For example, if you import geometry from Siteplan.dwg, an imported blockcalled Tree becomes Siteplan-Tree.

Impression also renames imported blocks that were included as externalreferences (xrefs).

Replacement of block definitions can result in some unexpected changes inthe block definition base point, which can in turn change the location of theblock. A replacement can also change the size of existing block references. Ifyou import a drawing with blocks and notice some odd block placements,redefine the blocks and change the insertion point.

Map Block Styles from Other IllustrationsWhen you import style maps from other drawings, the block style mappingsare imported, too. Block mapping follows these basic guidelines:

Block Style Mapping Rules


No mapping (all cases).Block layers with differentnames

Original block layer

Styles are mapped to match-ing block layers within allblocks.

Block layers with same namesSingle block

Styles are mapped to match-ing block layers within match-ing blocks.

Same block names, same blocklayer names

Multiple blocks

No mapping.Same block names, differentlayer names

Multiple blocks

Block styles are mapped ac-cording to the block draw or-

Different blocks, same layernames

Multiple blocks

der. Layer assignments in thesource block with the highestdraw order are mapped to thelayer assignments in the target

Share Block Libraries and Substitution Maps | 371


block with the highest draworder.

The rules used for block style mapping are similar to those used for appearancestyle mapping, although the styles themselves are not related. See Share Styleswith Other Drawings.

Procedures: Share Block Libraries and SubstitutionMaps

To link to a block library from another Impression file

1 Click Palettes menu ➤ Block.

2 In the Blocks palette, click the Link to Block Library button.

3 In the Import Blocks/Open Libraries dialog box, locate and select theImpression file with the block library you want to add.

4 Click Open.

The Libraries list displays the contents of the saved blocks from theexternal file.

Blocks palette:

Alternate procedure: Right-click the name of a saved block in the Blockspalette navigation pane. Click Open Library.

To copy all block library contents to the Saved Blocks list


2 In the Blocks palette navigation pane, right-click the name of a library.

3 In the preview pane, press CTRL+A to select all the blocks in the library.Click Save Blocks.

Impression copies the contents of the block library to the Saved Blockslist.


To save a specific library block


2 In the Blocks palette preview pane, right-click the preview swatch for theblock you want to save. Click Save Blocks.

Impression saves the style to the Saved Blocks list.

To include a specific block set in all new files


2 In the Blocks palette navigation pane, right-click the block set. Click oneof the following:

■ Always Keep This Library Open

■ Always Keep This Search Filter

Impression displays the check mark next to the option, and adds theselected block set to the default Impression template file.

To import a block substitution map


2 In the Block Substitution Map, click the Import Map button.

3 In the Import Map dialog box, find and select the file that contains thesubstitution map you want to import.

NOTE The file can be a substitution map you have previously exported.

4 Click Open.

Impression imports the block substitution mappings, substituted blocks,and their associated styles.

If a substitution block on the imported map has the same name as asubstituted block in the current file, the Block Substitution Conflictsdialog box is displayed. Select your substitution preferences and click OK.The unused mapping is discarded.

Block Substitution Map:

Share Block Libraries and Substitution Maps | 373

Alternate procedure: Click File menu ➤ Import Maps ➤ Import BlockSubstitution Map.

To export a block substitution map


2 In the Block Substitution Map, click the Export Map button.

3 In the Export Map dialog box, navigate to the folder where you want tosave the file. Enter a file name and click Save.

Impression saves the block substitution map, substituted block definitions,and associated appearance styles at the location you specified.

Block Substitution Map:

Create Object GroupsCreate an object group for geometry that you want to select, move, rotate, orscale as a unit.

When you select one object that is part of a group, all objects in the groupare selected. In the following example, all the objects associated with thedormer have been saved as an object group. Clicking any one of those objectsselects the entire group.

Unlike blocks, however, clicking the object a second time selects one of thecomponents of the group. If there is a nested group (a group within a group),the second click selects the nested group, as shown in the following example.


You can edit, move, rotate, resize, and stylize objects that are part of an objectgroup without removing them from the group. Object grouping is a good wayto handle related geometry that you want to treat as a unit without losingediting flexibility.

All objects in an object group must be on the same layer. If you select andgroup objects on different layers, Impression adds the new group to the layerof the topmost object in the selection set. All selected objects are moved tothat layer. If the objects have different styles, their styles are treated as styleoverrides.

Similarly, styles applied to the individual objects within an object group, aretreated as style overrides.

When you no longer need a group, you can ungroup the objects, which remainon the same layer.

Procedures: Create Object Groups

To create a group of objects

1 Click Tools menu ➤ Object Selection and select the objects you wantto group.

2 Click Edit menu ➤ Group Selection.

Alternate procedure: Press CTRL+G.

To create nested groups of objects

1 Click Tools menu ➤ Object Selection and select a combination of objectgroups and objects.

2 Click Edit menu ➤ Group Selection.

Alternate procedure: Press CTRL+G.

Procedures: Create Object Groups | 375

To ungroup objects

1 Click Tools menu ➤ Object Selection and select an object group.

2 Click Edit menu ➤ Ungroup.

Alternate procedure: Press CTRL+U.


Prepare Your Layout andPrint

When you have made the final adjustments to your illustration, select the printer, adjust theposition and print scale of the image, and then print it.

Adjust Printer SettingsYour printer settings, including margins, paper size, and orientation, affect theplacement and scale of the printed image.

In the Print dialog box, you choose from a list of printers that are configuredfor use with your computer. Click the Printer Properties button to change otherprinter-specific settings such as print quality, orientation, and paper size. Thesesettings affect only the output, not the illustration itself.

In the Print Preview window, the dashed gray lines indicate the print marginsthat are available for the printer you have selected. Impression does not printgeometry that is located beyond those margins.

23

377

Procedures: Adjust Printer Settings

To set paper size, orientation, and margins for printing

1 Click File menu ➤ Print.

2 In the Print dialog box, Printer list, accept the listed printer or select adifferent printer.

3 To change settings, such as paper size or print quality, click the printerProperties button.

4 In the Properties dialog box for the current printer, update settings andclick OK.

Alternate procedure: Press CTRL+P.

Scale and Position the Printed ImageSet the scale and position of the printed image in the Print Preview window.

Set Print Scale

The scale that you set for objects in a sketch is different from the print scale.The way you set the scale for printing depends on the precision required forthe final illustration. See Define Sketches and Scale.

The easiest way to scale the image on the page is to click Fit to Page in thePrint dialog box. This option positions the objects to fill the printable area,including portions that extend beyond the edges of the canvas.

If Fit to Page is not selected, you can display the bounding box in the PrintPreview window. Then drag its grips to resize the objects within the printablearea. This procedure scales the objects uniformly, so there is no distortion.

However, if precision is important, be sure to check the scale set for eachsketch before you print your illustration. You can find this scale for ahighlighted row in the properties area of the Layers palette.

The scale you set in the Layers palette and the Print dialog box is cumulative.If a sketch scale is 1:2 (50%), and you set the print scale to 50%, the scale ofthe printed objects is 25%. To retain the scale ratio set for each sketch, selectDo Not Scale, or set the scale to 100%.

378 | Chapter 23 Prepare Your Layout and Print

Position the Image for Printing

By default, Impression places printed objects at the center of the page. Youcan specify how far from the top or left edge of the paper you want to positionthe image. However, the easiest method is to drag the image to the positionyou want in the Print Preview window. (You must clear Center the Imagefirst.)

Print preview: Original position

Print preview: Image dragged to newposition

Procedures: Scale and Position the Printed Image

To set the scale of the printed image


2 In the Print dialog box, select a printer and adjust its settings to suit yourneeds. See Procedures: Adjust Printer Settings.

Procedures: Scale and Position the Printed Image | 379

3 Adjust the scale using one of these options:

■ Do Not Scale. Prints the objects at full size (100%). This option retainsthe scale ratio set for each sketch.

■ Fit to Page. Fits the extents of the canvas within the margins for theselected printer.

■ Scale. Sets the size of the canvas compared to the printed page.

■ Drag the bounding box grips in the Print Preview window. Sets thescale based on the size of the bounding box. Clear the Fit to Pageoption and select Show Bounding Box. Then drag the grips of thebounding box.

Alternate procedure: Press CTRL+P

To set the position of the printed image



3 Adjust the position using one of these options:

■ Center the Image. Positions the canvas in the vertical and horizontalcenter of the printed page.

■ From Top/From Left. Sets the distance from the top or left edge of theprinted page to the top or left edge of the canvas boundary.

■ Drag the bounding box in the Print Preview window. Sets the positionof the image based on the location of the bounding box. Clear the Fitto Page option and the Center the Image check box. Then select ShowBounding Box and drag the center of the bounding box to a newposition.


Print Your IllustrationWhen you have made your final adjustments, you are ready to print.

The Print Preview window gives a good idea of the size and position of theoutput. The changes you make in the Print dialog box affect only the printedoutput. Individual objects sizes or sketch scales are not affected. If the display

380 | Chapter 23 Prepare Your Layout and Print

does not match your expectation, you can cancel the Print dialog box andmake adjustments on the canvas.

Procedures: Print Your Illustration

To print your drawing



3 Set the canvas scale and position of the image. See Procedures: Scale andPosition the Printed Image.

4 Click Print.


To print selected objects in your drawing

1 On the canvas, select the objects you want to print.

2 Click File menu ➤ Print Selection.


4 Set the canvas scale and position of the image. See Procedures: Scale andPosition the Printed Image.

5 Click Print.

Procedures: Print Your Illustration | 381

Share Files and Formats

You can save your Impression illustrations in formats that you can open in other applications.

Convert to Another FormatConverting an Impression illustration to another format is as simple as savingit in that format.

24

383

The amount of data retained in the conversion depends on the format youchoose. You can save data for most format types in one of the following ways:

■ Image only. A “flattened,” digital format that contains only geometry.

■ Image and data. A format that retains information about properties, suchas layer and sketch settings, in addition to geometry.

How Formats Are UsedThe format you use depends on how you plan to use the illustration, andwhether it needs additional processing in another application. The followingtable describes the available formats and their characteristics.

CharacteristicsUseNameFormat

Windowsdisplay

Basic Multi-lingualPlane

BMP ■ Bitmapped format that cannot becompressed. (Files are often large.)

■ Supports 256 colors, but not transpar-ency.

Internet,Web

Design Web

Format™DWF ■ A 2D vector file for publishing draw-

ings on the Web or internet using

Autodesk® DWF™ Viewer or Mi-

crosoft® Internet Explorer.

■ Retains information about layers andviews. You can pan and zoom the im-age.

■ 3D DWF is not available for Impres-sion.

High-qual-ity print

EncapsulatedPostScript

EPS ■ Standard file format for importing andexporting PostScript files for inclusionon other pages.

■ May contain a combination of text,vector graphics, and bitmapped im-ages.

NOTE This version of Impression exportsonly the bitmapped graphics.

384 | Chapter 24 Share Files and Formats

CharacteristicsUseNameFormat

Internet,Web

Joint Photograph-ic Experts Group

JPG ■ Raster format (a bitmapped imageconsisting of a series of predefinedpixels). Commonly used to displayphotographs.

■ Compresses file size by selectively dis-carding data. Does not work well forline drawings.

■ Provides fast download speeds. Highcompression rate results in smallerfiles.

■ Does not support transparency.

Adobe®

Reader

Portable Docu-ment Format

PDF ■ Used mostly to display information ina printed-page format.

Internet,Web

Portable NetworkGraphics

PNG ■ Used to display images in Web andonline applications.

■ Bitmapped (or raster) format with effi-cient compression and less data lossthan JPG.

■ Supports transparency, but not anim-ation.

AdobePho-

toshop®

PhotoshopPSD ■ Bitmapped format used for renderingin Adobe Photoshop.

Comparison: Saving to Other FormatsThe Save As dialog box presents different options, depending on the formatyou select. The following table provides a summary of what is available.

PSDPNGPDFJPGEPSDWFBMPOption

XXXXXXXResolution

XXXXXXAnti-alias

Convert to Another Format | 385

PSDPNGPDFJPGEPSDWFBMPOption

XColor depth

XXQuality (compression)

XFormat

XScans

XBackground

XXPreserve layers

XPassword protected

Procedures: Convert to Another Format

To save a drawing in another format


2 In the Save As dialog box, navigate to the folder where you want to savethe file.

3 In the File Name box, enter a name for the file.

4 From the Files of Type list, select a format.

Notice that the Options area changes, depending on the format youselect.

5 In the Options area, change settings as needed.

6 Click Save.

Impression saves the file in the format you specified.

386 | Chapter 24 Share Files and Formats

Set the Document Defaults

Customize your work environment by setting defaults for the size and orientation of thecanvas, unit of measurement, and default sketch scale.

Set Canvas Size and OrientationSet the size and orientation of the canvas that serves as your work area.

The canvas provides a visual reference to the size of the paper.

In the Document Setup dialog box, you can adjust the canvas height and widthto get a better sense of the layout as you work. You can also set the canvas tolandscape or portrait orientation.

25

387

Procedures: Set Canvas Size and Orientation

To set canvas size and orientation

1 Click File menu ➤ Document Setup.

2 In the Document Setup dialog box, modify one of the following settings:

■ Canvas. Select a paper size from the list. The Height and Width valuesreflect your choice.

■ Height or Width. Enter a custom height or width. The Canvas settingchanges to “custom.”

■ Orientation. Click the appropriate Orientation icon (landscape orportrait).

3 Click OK.

Set Default Unit Type and ScaleMost Impression illustrations inherit unit type and sketch scale from drawingsyou open or import. However, you can change the defaults for these settingslater.

Set the Unit Type

Drawing units (real-world units) represent the full size of the objects you draw.

When you open or import a drawing from another application, Impressionretains the unit type setting, whether it is feet, inches, meters, or centimeters.

If you change this setting in the Document Setup Dialog Box, themeasurements are recalculated using the new unit type.

Set the Default Scale

Sketch scale is also inherited from drawings you open or import. For exampleif an original AutoCAD viewport has a 2:1 scale, the objects derived from thatview retain that scale in Impression.

NOTE Impression scales the model space views that you open or import to fit thecanvas. Layout views have a 1:1 scale.

Sketches created entirely in Impression inherit the default you set in theDocument Setup dialog box.

388 | Chapter 25 Set the Document Defaults

Procedures: Set Default Unit Type and Scale

To set the units display


2 In the Document Setup dialog box, under Units and Scale, select the unitof measurement you want to use.

3 Click OK.

To set the default sketch scale


2 In the Document Setup dialog box, under Units and Scale, select a scalefrom the Default Sketch Scale list.

3 Click OK.

Procedures: Set Default Unit Type and Scale | 389

Use Snaps, Shortcuts, andOther Drawing Aids

You can gain efficiency as you work by using object snaps, shortcut keys, and on-screenrollover highlighting.

Snap to Points on GeometryObjects snaps help maintain precision by snapping the cursor to specifiedlocations on objects.

In the Options dialog box, you can set any combination of seven types of objectsnaps:

■ Endpoint.

Snaps to the closest endpoint of open-ended objects such as lines or splines,or to the end of vector segments in such objects as rectangles.

■ Midpoint.

26

391

Snaps to the midpoint of a line or line segment.

■ Center.

Snaps to the center of a circle, ellipse, or bounding box.

■ Intersection.

Snaps to the point where geometric objects or segments intersect.

■ Perpendicular.

392 | Chapter 26 Use Snaps, Shortcuts, and Other Drawing Aids

Snaps to a point that is perpendicular to the selected object.

■ Nearest.

Snaps to the nearest point on an object.

■ Control points.

Snaps to a control point on a spline.

The snap points are located on the underlying vector geometry, not on theextents of the appearance style. Turning on object snaps sets a six-pixelmagnetic zone around potential snap points. As you move the cursor, itchanges to identify the nearest object snap location. The cursor “locks on” to

Snap to Points on Geometry | 393

the snap point. The snap icon disappears when you move the cursor awayfrom the location.

After you have turned on object snaps in the Options dialog box, you canquickly turn them on and off by pressing F3. You can also click the Osnapbutton in the lower-right corner of the Impression window.

Procedures: Snap to Points on Geometry

To select object snap settings


2 In the Options dialog box, click Object Snap Settings.

3 Select Object Snap On (F3).

4 Select the object snaps that you want to use.

5 Click OK.

Alternate procedure: On the status bar, right-click Osnap. Click Settings.

To turn on object snaps

■ Press F3 or click the OSnap button in the lower-right corner of theImpression window.

NOTE To use F3 or the Osnap button, first select one or more object snaps inthe Options dialog box.

Constrain Cursor MovementAs you draw, you can press certain keys such as SHIFT to constrain themovements of the cursor to an orthogonal direction.

The effect of the constraint key depends on the tool that is active. For example,if you press SHIFT while drawing with the Line tool, the second pointautomatically snaps to angles in 45-degree increments.


Pressing SHIFT as you draw with the Rectangle or Ellipse tools constrainsshapes to be squares or circles.

The following table lists the cursor movement constraints.

Keyboard Shortcuts: Cursor Movement Constraints

To get this result:Do this:Tool

Constrains the cursor to 45-degreeincrements.

SHIFT+dragLinePolygonFreehandSpline

Forces uniform height and width(circle, square).

SHIFT+dragEllipseRectangle

Procedures: Constrain Cursor Movement

To activate cursor movement constraints

1 In the Toolbox, click a drawing tool to select it.

2 On the canvas, click the first point of the geometry you are drawing.

3 Hold SHIFT as you drag or click to specify the next point.

Procedures: Constrain Cursor Movement | 395

Impression constrains the second point according to the guidelines listedin Keyboard Shortcuts: Cursor Movement Constraints.

Assign Keyboard ShortcutsImpression provides many keyboard shortcuts that you can press instead ofopening a menu or clicking a tool on a palette. You can add to or modify theexisting keystroke assignments.

There are two types of keyboard shortcuts.

■ Standard shortcuts. Keys that you press and immediately release.

■ Sticky keys. Keys that you press and hold to temporarily activate a feature.

For many tools in Impression, a single letter acts as both a standard shortcutand a sticky key. For example, R is assigned to the Rectangle tool. Press andrelease the letter quickly to activate the tool. Press and hold R to activate thetool only during the time you press the letter.

You can use most letters and punctuation marks along with any combinationof the CTRL, ALT, and SHIFT keys. After you assign a keyboard shortcut, youcan press it as you work to quickly activate a tool or open a palette.

The Keyboard Shortcuts window in the Options dialog box lists all availableactions and assignments. As you select actions and enter shortcut keystrokes,such as CTRL+ALT+T, the Assigned To box indicates whether that keycombination is already in use.

To create a printout to use as a quick reference to your keyboard shortcuts,save the keyboard shortcuts list in a CSV (Comma Separated Values) format.Then paste it into another program and print it.

Procedures: Assign Keyboard Shortcuts

To display and print a list of keyboard shortcuts


2 In the Options dialog box, click Keyboard Shortcuts.

3 In the Search box, narrow the list, if necessary, by entering a keyword,usually the name of an action or command.


The list changes to show only the actions whose name contains the wordyou entered.

4 Click Copy to Clipboard.

5 Open another program, such as Excel.

6 Press CTRL+V to paste the list you copied into the other application.

7 Print the document, following the instructions for that application.

To search for commands while assigning a shortcut


2 In the Options dialog box, click Keyboard Shortcuts.

3 In the Search box, enter a word that summarizes actions you want todisplay. For example, to display all tools in the toolbox, you could entertool.

The list changes to show only the actions whose name contains the wordyou entered.

To assign a new keyboard shortcut


2 In the Options dialog box, select one of the following options:

■ Click Keyboard Shortcuts ➤ Shortcuts to modify standard shortcutkeys.

■ Click Keyboard Shortcuts ➤ Sticky Keys to modify sticky keys.

3 In the Action column, select the feature to which you want to assign ashortcut or a sticky key.

NOTE You may need to expand the list first by clicking the expansiontriangles.

4 Click inside the Shortcut box. Press the keys that you want to use as akeyboard shortcut. (Do not enter a plus sign (+). The program adds thatautomatically.)

■ Shortcut keys usually use a combination of CTRL, ALT, or SHIFT andanother character.

■ Sticky keys usually use a single letter.

Procedures: Assign Keyboard Shortcuts | 397

5 If that key combination is already in use, the Assigned To box displaysthe name of the feature assignment. Enter another key combination.

6 Click Assign.

To remove a keyboard shortcut


2 In the Options dialog box, select one of the following options:

■ Click Keyboard Shortcuts ➤ Shortcuts to modify standard shortcutkeys.

■ Click Keyboard Shortcuts ➤ Sticky Keys to modify sticky keys.

3 In the Action column, select the feature with the shortcut you want toremove.

NOTE You might need to expand the list first by clicking the expansiontriangles.

4 Click Remove.

Set Rollover HighlightingRollover highlighting helps you isolate specific vector geometry as you movethe cursor across objects on the canvas.


Object highlighting, before and after.

This feature is especially important when you are working with manyoverlapping objects and styles. It helps you identify a specific piece of geometryso you can select it.

In Impression, you can turn on rollover highlighting and set the color of thehighlight.

Procedures: Set Rollover Highlighting

To turn on rollover highlighting


2 In the Options dialog box, click General.

3 Select Use Rollover Highlights.

4 Click OK.

To set the color for rollover highlighting



Procedures: Set Rollover Highlighting | 399

3 From the Rollover Highlights Color list, select the color you want to usefor the highlighting.

4 Click OK.

Turn Off and Restore Information Dialog BoxesInformation dialog boxes provide helpful information during new orpotentially confusing activities. If you want to see them again after you haveturned them off, you can restore them.

In some situations, such as when you insert blocks, or drag a fill style onto alayer, Impression displays an information dialog box that provides informationabout the current activity. In some dialog boxes, such as the Block PropertiesSummary, you can update values.

When you become more experienced, you can click the Don’t Show Me ThisAgain box to prevent the dialog box from displaying. Later, if you changeyour mind, you can reset Impression to display the information. The Resetbutton on the General pane of the Options dialog box restores the display ofall information dialog boxes.


Procedures: Turn Off and Restore Information DialogBoxes

To turn off a specific information dialog box

■ In the information dialog box, click Don’t Show Me This Again.

To restore automatic display of all information dialog boxes



3 Next to Reset All Warning Dialogs, click Reset.

Impression displays any information dialog boxes that you have turnedoff the next time you do the activity that they explain.

Procedures: Turn Off and Restore Information Dialog Boxes | 401

Work with Palettes

Customize your work area by arranging and configuring palettes.

Set Palette PositionArrange palettes such as the Blocks and Properties palettes in a configurationthat is most convenient to the way you work.

Dock Palettes

You can dock a palette to either side of the Impression window. Docking expandsthe palette to fill the vertical length of the drawing area, resizing the drawingarea to fit the new configuration. A docked palette remains in place until youmove it.

27

403

Docked palette

Floating palette

Float a docked palette by dragging the palette grip (above the title bar) awayfrom the docked location.

404 | Chapter 27 Work with Palettes

The components of the dashboard (Layers palette, Style Editor, and Stylespalette) always remain the same. However, you can create magnetizedgroupings of other palettes by dragging them to a “drop” location on the edgeof a docked palette.

Use Magnetized Palettes

Palettes automatically adhere to the corner or edge of the Impression window,to the edge of the screen, or to each other.

Magnetized palettes can overlap the canvas, but if you resize or move theImpression window, the palettes continue to adhere to their original snappoints. You can add a palette to a magnetized palette set by dragging it ontoanother palette. A blue line indicates where you can insert the palette.

If palettes are magnetically attached to other palettes, they move when thepalettes above them move. You can “demagnetize” a palette by dragging itaway from the palette above it.

Resizing one palette in a magnetized grouping resizes all joined palettes.

Procedures: Set Palette Position

To snap palettes together magnetically

■ Drag a palette to a location directly above or below another palette untilit snaps into place.

Procedures: Set Palette Position | 405

When you move a magnetized palette, the palettes directly below it remainattached.

To separate magnetic palettes from other palettes

■ Drag a palette away from the palette above it.

NOTE If the palette you drag is magnetically attached to palettes below it,those palettes remain attached.

To dock a palette

■ Drag the title bar of the palette to the edge of the Impression window.The palette automatically locks into place and elongates to fill the verticallength of the Impression window.

To float a docked palette

■ Drag the grips on the title bar of the palette away from the docking area.

Docked palette:

Modify Content DisplayMove your cursor over the properties flyout arrows to display additionalsettings. Set palette transparency, rollout animation, and layer row height.

Expand Properties Flyouts

You can expand some palettes and tools to modify settings and collapse themto increase your work space. To expand the flyout window temporarily, moveyour cursor over the properties flyout arrow.

For example, move the cursor over the properties flyout arrow in the StyleEditor tree view to display the properties for the associated style element.


The properties flyout arrows are available in the Style Editor, for most toolsin the Toolbox, and on the Layers palette (to display the layer preview).

For the tools and Style Editor, if you click the flyout arrow instead of hoveringover it, the window stays open while you modify settings. (Clicking withinthe flyout window has the same effect.) The window closes as soon as youclick somewhere else.

NOTE The window does not close if you press the Spacebar and drag to pan thecanvas. Therefore, you can reposition the canvas to see the effects of your changes.

The position of the flyout arrow on the Style Editor changes, depending onwhether the palette is on the right or left side of the canvas. The flyout panelalways opens to the inside.

Display Settings and Navigation

Some palettes and dialog boxes have arrows that resize the dialog boxes todisplay more settings or information.

For example, you can expand the Styles and Blocks palettes to display thenavigation pane. You can collapse them when you need more work area.

Modify Content Display | 407

Set Palette Transparency

You can make palettes more transparent, so that the objects on the canvasshow through. This setting is available by right-clicking the palette title bar.

Customize the Layers Palette Interface

For the Layers palette, you can change row width and whether the expansionand collapse of layer groups is abrupt or animated. These settings are availablein the Options dialog box.

Modify Font Display

If your computer uses Microsoft Windows XP, set screen fonts to ClearTypefor the smoothest display of the text in palettes and dialog boxes. To accessthis setting, right-click your desktop. Click Properties ➤ Appearance tab ➤

Effects. Under Use the Following Method to Smooth Edges of Screen Fonts,click ClearType. This setting is on by default in Windows Vista.

Procedures: Modify Content Display

To expand or close properties flyouts

Use one of these methods:

■ To open the properties flyout window temporarily, move the cursor overthe properties flyout arrow.


The arrow changes from gray to blue (Style Editor) and the flyout isexpanded.

To close the flyout, move the cursor to another location.

■ To keep the flyout window open (Styles palette), click the properties flyoutarrow or click inside the window when it is open.To close the flyout, click in another location.

To set the animation display for expanding or collapsing flyouts



3 Under General Palette Options, select Animate Palettes if you want theexpansion to be gradual. Clear the option to set a quicker, but moreabrupt transition.

4 Click OK.

To set the transparency of a palette

1 Right-click the palettes title bar. Click Transparency.

2 Drag the slider until the palette is displayed in the desired transparency.

3 Click outside the palette to dismiss the slider.

To set the style for expanding or collapsing Layers palette rows



3 Select the Animate Expand/Collapse of Layers option if you want theexpansion to be gradual. Clear the option to set a quicker, but moreabrupt transition.

4 Click OK.

To resize the Layers palette rows



3 In the Row Height box, click the arrow or enter a value to indicate theheight, in pixels, of the layer rows.

Procedures: Modify Content Display | 409

NOTE The size you set affects the visibility of the preview images and textin the row.

4 Click OK.

Alternate procedure: Press SHIFT as you roll the scroll wheel on your mouse.

Resize and Hide PalettesUse one of several quick ways to open and close palettes as you work.

Expand or Collapse Palettes

You can expand or collapse an open palette using the following methods:

■ Press TAB to close all palettes simultaneously. Press TAB again to restorethem.

■ Double-click the title bar.

■ Click Minimize/Maximize arrows in the title bar.

Additional shortcut keys provide a way to expand the palettes in the Impressiondashboard so that you can access styles and layers more quickly.


If you want to restore the palette configuration on your interface to its defaultstate, use the Palettes menu ➤ Reset Palettes. The changes go into effect afteryou restart Impression.

Procedures: Resize and Hide Palettes

To open and close a palette

1 To open a palette, do one of the following:

■ Click Palettes menu ➤ the name of the palette you want to open.

■ Right-click any palette title. Click Palettes ➤ the name of the paletteyou want to open.

2 To close a palette, do one of the following:

■ Click the Close button (the X). This option is not available for allpalettes.

■ Right-click the palette title. Click Close.

■ Right-click the palette title. Click Palettes ➤ the name of the paletteyou want to close.

Procedures: Resize and Hide Palettes | 411

To resize a palette

1 Move the cursor over an edge or a corner of a palette.

2 When the cursor changes to bidirectional arrows, drag the palette edgeto resize it.

To hide or restore all open palettes

■ Click the canvas and press the TAB key.Impression hides all open palettes. If palettes are hidden, Impressiondisplays all previously opened palettes.

To expand or compact the Layers palette in the dashboard


■ Press F11.

■ Click Palettes menu ➤ Isolate Layers Section.

To expand or compact the Styles palette in the dashboard


■ Press F12.

■ Click Palettes menu ➤ Isolate Styles Section.

To expand or compact a single palette

■ Double-click the title bar.

■ Click the Maximize/Minimize button on the title bar.

To restore the default palette configuration

1 Click Palettes menu ➤ Reset Palettes.

2 When the information dialog box is displayed, click OK

3 Restart Impression.

When Impression reopens, it restores the default configuration for thepalettes.


Organize Content in PalettesChange the display and sort order for the content on your Blocks and Stylespalettes.

Change the Display of Preview Images

The Blocks palette, Styles palette, and various element-creation dialog boxes,such as the Create New Stroke dialog box, provide a preview of styles andblocks. From the shortcut menu, you can

■ Change the size of the preview image (also called a swatch or thumbnail).

■ Specify whether a label identifies the image.

You can also sort preview images alphabetically.

Add and Remove Libraries or Custom Filters

You add block and style library sets to the Navigation panes of the Blocks andStyles palettes in the following ways:

■ Add libraries by importing them from other Impression files. See ImportStyles and Style Elements.

■ Add block or style sets based on custom search filters by clicking the SearchFilters button and specifying search criteria. See Apply Appearance Styles.

Organize Content in Palettes | 413

■ Add a specified library to the navigation list of all new illustrations. SeeImport Styles and Style Elements.

You can remove these libraries and filters using the shortcut menu.

Procedures: Organize Content in Palettes

To reorder block or style sets in the navigation pane

1 If the navigation pane in the Styles palette or Blocks palette is not open,

click the expansion arrow.

2 In the navigation pane, right-click the name of the item you want tomove. Click Move Item Up in Group or Move Item Down in Group.

This change also affects the drop-down styles or block lists that aredisplayed when you close the navigation pane.

To sort contents on the Blocks or Styles palette

In the Styles palette or Blocks palette, do one of the following:

■ Right-click anywhere. Click Sort by Name.

■ Drag the image preview to a new position on the palette.

To modify the display of preview images in the Styles or Blocks palettes

■ In the Styles palette or Blocks palette, right-click anywhere. Click one ofthe following options:

■ Thumbnail Size. Sets the size of the preview images on all tabs to belarge, medium, or small. (The Small setting is unavailable when IconView with Text is selected.)

■ List View. Displays the block names to the right of the preview images.

■ Icon View. Displays the preview images without the block names.

■ Icon View with Text. Displays the block names beneath the previewimages.


Alternate procedure: Press SHIFT and roll the mouse scroll wheel to cyclethrough the view options.

To remove a block or style library

■ In the Styles palette or Blocks palette navigation pane, right-click the nameof a library. Click Close Library.Impression removes the tab from the palette.

To change the display of elements in the Saved Elements list



■ Create New Stroke. The Create New Stroke dialog box opens.

■ Create New Fill. The Create New Fill dialog box opens.

■ Create New Stroked Fill. The Create New Compound Fill dialog boxopens.

■ Create New Hatch Fill. The Create New Compound Fill dialog boxopens.

■ Create New Outline Stroke. The Create New Outline Stroke dialogbox opens.

3 Right-click anywhere in the Saved Elements area. Click one of thefollowing options:

■ Thumbnail Size

■ List View

■ Icon View

■ Icon View with Text

■ Sort by Name

Procedures: Organize Content in Palettes | 415

Improve Performance

Take steps to improve the speed and performance of the Impression application.

Drawing PracticesManaging program performance becomes more important as your drawing—andthe styles it contains—become more complex.

Methods for Saving Time

You can take a variety of steps to quicken program response time. The followingpractices help you get the best possible performance as you stylize yourImpression illustrations.

Simplify your drawing.

Use the File Cleanup panel on the import wizard to avoid opening or importinggeometry from turned off or frozen layers. Do you really need those dimensions,leaders, and text in your presentation illustration? Discard them. Will you bereplacing hatches—which might consist of numerous individual lines afterimport—with one of the Impression fill styles? Discard them, too, so that fillingthose areas later is easier.

28

417

Import includes hatches, dimensions, and leaders

Import wizard discards hatches, dimensions, andleaders

After you have opened a drawing in Impression, you can simplify it furtherby locking or turning off the visibility for additional objects.

Title block and landscape features turned off inImpression

418 | Chapter 28 Improve Performance

The general rule is, the fewer objects that Impression processes, the faster itcan operate.

Limit your use of complex fill styles—or turn on Fast Display.

Complex style elements such as stylized hatch fills, roughen effects, dropshadows, and complex stroked fills affect program speed. The problem iscompounded when the styles are applied to a large number of objects.

Example of a complex stroked fill style(Style Editor)

You do not need to avoid complexity altogether. However, you might wantto click the Fast Display button on the status bar to hide some of the elementsas you work on other details.

Drawing Practices | 419

Fast Display off and Fast Display on

You can turn off Fast Display to preview the final output.

Be aware of the effect of complex geometry.

Complex splines (such as scallops) and the many objects that populateimported hatches can affect drawing speed.

Consider replacing the hatch patterns with an Impression style or turning onFast Display.

Avoid style overrides.

Style overrides can occur when individual objects have appearance styles thatdiffer from the layer style.

These overrides, or exceptions, are more difficult to stylize, and can affectprogram performance. How do you avoid them?

■ Turn on Auto Layer. As you insert area fill in closed objects, Impressioncreates a new, unique layer containing the fill objects of various styles.Later, you can apply and modify the layer style, instead of adjusting theindividual object style.

Auto layer indicator (Layers palette)


■ Manually create specific layers for the area fill styles. Then make themcurrent before you insert area fill.

■ Avoid editing a style when the object is selected. Instead, select the stylein the Styles palette or select the layer in the Layers palette first. Then themodifications do not result in style overrides.

Avoid selecting a large number of objects.

In large drawings, avoid pressing CTRL+A to select all the objects in thedrawing. If most or all objects are on a single layer, use the Object Selectiontool instead of the Layer Selection tool. That way, you can avoid a possibleslowdown as the program selects all the objects.

Avoid placing many objects on a single layer.

If all or most objects are on a single layer, you cannot freeze, turn off, or packthose layers as you work. You can avoid this problem in the following ways:

■ Set colors and linetypes to be on separate layers. As you open a DWF file,use the One-Layer Drawings tab of the DWF Import Wizard to split objectswith the same color and linetype onto unique layers.

■ Manually move some objects to separate layers. Freeze those layers as youwork.

■ Turn on Auto Layer. Objects with different styles are automatically placedon separate layers.

Avoid opening DWG files with a large number of exploded hatches andblocks.

A side-effect of opening 3D drawings using hidden line removal is that blocks,dimensions, and tables are exploded into their component parts. Text isconverted to outline text geometry. You can mitigate this impact by freezingthe layers that contain these objects before or after they are imported.

Resizing or moving objects by dragging the bounding box grips can be slowerfor objects with complex styles.

For quicker program response, use the Transform palette when performingthese operations on a large number of objects.

Drawing Practices | 421

Avoid running more than one instance of Impression.

Running two sessions of Impression at the same time can affect systemresources. If you need to open a second session, close it as soon as you nolonger need keep it open.

If Impression is running slowly, try tuning it.

The Drawing Performance Tuner provides a way see the relative benefits ofpacking layers or adjusting the screen display. A button on the status bar givesa visual indication of the relative efficiency of the current settings:

If the button recommends tuning, click it to see what changes you can make.See Tune the Interface for Performance.

Hide Elements to Quicken Program ResponseIf your illustration has many objects with complex styles, you can improveprogram performance by turning on Fast Display.

About Fast Display

Available on the Impression status bar, the Fast Display button toggles thedisplay of certain style display settings. You select these settings in theOptimize Style Display tab of the Drawing Performance Tuner. By turning onFast Display, you turn off such style elements as drop shadows, roughen effects,dashed lines, and stroked and hatch fills. Transparency and line quality(anti-aliasing) are also affected.


Fast Display off

Fast Display on

Turn on Fast Display as you work on details, and turn it off again to checkthe overall appearance. This setting has no effect on the quality of the printedillustration

Hide Elements to Quicken Program Response | 423

Procedures: Hide Elements to Quicken ProgramResponse

To turn fast screen display on or off

1 On the status bar, right-click Fast Display. Click Settings.

2 On the Optimize Style Display tab of the Drawing Performance Tuner,select Enable Fast Screen Display.

3 Under Fast Display Settings, select elements to be hidden or modifiedduring fast screen display:

■ Transparency/Antialiasing

■ Shadow Effects

■ Roughen Effects

■ Dashes

■ Stroked and Hatch Fills

4 Click Close.

The canvas display for the elements you selected is modified. To displaythem again, click Screen Display on the status bar.

Tune the Interface for PerformanceAdjust the Impression interface so that you can work more quickly.


How To: ■ Procedures: Tune the Interface forPerformance


■ Customize the Impression Interface


■ Drawing Performance Tuner

■ Options Dialog Box


Ways to Tune Performance

For more informationLocationAction

Turn off these settings: ■ Set Rollover Highlighting■ Options dialogbox (General)■ Use Rollover Highlights ■ Modify Content Display

■ Animate Palettes

■ Make Corrections and De-letions

■ Options dialogbox (General)

■ Decrease the number ofundo steps that Impres-sion saves.

■ How Style Sets Are Organ-ized

■ Styles palette■ Purge unneeded styles.

■ Save only the styles youplan to use, not the en-tire library.

■ Insert and Remove Blocks■ Blocks palette■ Purge unneeded blocks.

■ How Block Sets Are Organ-ized

■ Save only the blocks youplan to use, not the en-tire block library.

■ Pack Layers to ImprovePerformance

■ Layers palette■ Pack objects on layers.

■ Drawing Perform-ance Tuner: thePack Layers tab

■ Hide Elements to QuickenProgram Response

■ Drawing Perform-ance Tuner: thePack Layers tab

■ Turn on Fast Display.

■ Status bar: FastDisplay button

■ See the manualfor your operatingsystem.

■ Maximize the systemmemory for your com-puter.

Tune the Interface for Performance | 425

Procedures: Tune the Interface for Performance

To tune Impression performance

1 Click File menu ➤ Performance Tuner.

2 In the Drawing Performance Tuner, do the following:

■ To pack or unpack layers: Click the Pack Layers tab. See To pack andunpack layers in the Drawing Performance Tuner.

■ To hide style elements for faster display: Click the Optimize StyleDisplay tab. Select Enable Fast Screen Display. Then select the styleelements to hide or modify.

3 Click Close.

Alternate procedure:

■ Click status bar ➤ Fast Display ➤ Settings

■ Click File menu ➤ Performance Tuner

Status bar:


Troubleshoot Impression

Get answers to some commonly encountered questions.

Open or Import Drawings

The drawing I imported is too large for the canvas.

For more information:Solutions:Possible cause:

Try opening the drawinginstead of importing it.

The scale of the drawingdoes not match the sizeof the canvas.

■ Define Sketches and Scale

■ Document Setup DialogBoxYou can also use the

Document Setup dialogbox to change the size ofthe canvas.

29

427

The drawing opened with an inappropriate lineweight.


You can try reopeningthe drawing with a differ-

The stroke type setting inthe DWG Import Wizardwas not what you needed.

■ Change Strokes Simultan-eously

ent stroke type. A quicker■ Global Stroke Dialog Box

way to modify strokesand fill styles in yourdrawing is to use theGlobal Stroke button onthe toolbar.

An object in the source drawing is missing in Impression.


Images (such as PNG orJPG files) that are pasted

The image was pasted in-to the DWG file.

■ Content Conversions

into DWG files are notretained by Impression.For better results, use theIMAGEATTACH com-mand to insert the imageinto the original drawing.

Reopen the drawing. Inthe DWG Import Wizard,

You opened or importedthe drawing with DiscardAll Images selected.

■ File Clean-up (DWG Im-port Wizard)

File Clean-up panel,

428 | Chapter 29 Troubleshoot Impression


make sure Discard AllImages is not selected.

In the original DWG file,do one of the following:

The source drawing con-tains objects (including


■ Explode the objectsbefore opening thefile in Impression.

RText) that were createdusing Express Tools.

■ Publish the originalDWG to DWF formatand open the DWFfile in Impression.

Publish the original DWGto DWF format and open

The source drawing con-tains layers that were hid-


the DWF file in Impres-sion

den using custom ARXapplications.

Styles and Fills

When I insert fill, the shading does not extend to the edges.


In the flyout propertiesfor the Area Fill tool or

The area fill Precisionvalue is too low.

■ Area Fill Tool

■ Power Fill Toolthe Power Fill tool, in-

| 429


crease the Precisionvalue.

In the Style Editor proper-ties flyout for the stroked

The stroked fill Overshootvalue is too high.

■ Stroke Properties (StyleEditor)

fill and stroke elements,decrease the Overshootvalues and variance.

In the Style Editor proper-ties flyout for the

The fill style includes aroughen effect.

■ Effect Properties (Style Ed-itor)

roughen element, try“smoothing” the effectby decreasing the Bassand Treble values.

In the properties flyoutfor the Area Fill tool and

The Gap Tolerance valueis too high.

■ Area Fill Tool

■ Power Fill Toolthe Power Fill tool, de-crease the Gap Tolerancevalue.

NOTE This problem usu-ally occurs when youdrag a style to a closedarea. Click a fill tool firstto display the gap toler-ance extensions.


The scale of the textured fill changes when I insert it into different objects or change thesize of the object.


In the Style Editor proper-ties flyout for the texture

The Mapping property ofthe texture fill is set toTiled.

■ Fill Properties (Style Editor)

fill element, change theMapping setting toScaled.

On the status bar, turnoff Scale Styles.

Scale Styles is on. ■ Adjust the Style Size

The fill disappears after I insert it.

Fast Display off and Fast Display on


Click the Fast Displaybutton on the status bar.

Fast Display is turned on. ■ Hide Elements to QuickenProgram Response

Try modifying the draworder using one of thefollowing methods:

The fill has been insertedon top of existing fill.

■ Layers Palette

| 431


■ Use Layer Sequence toControl Draw Order

■ In the Layers palette,drag the layers up ordown to change thedraw order.

■ Select the fill objecton top and press DE-LETE.

■ Right-click the fill.Click Arrange Selec-tion.

In the Layers palette,click the light bulb iconto turn on the layer.

You inserted the fill on alayer that has been turnedoff.

■ Layers Palette

■ Select and Display Layersand Sketches

The fill is leaking into the wrong area.


Try one of the followingsolutions:

You are inserting area fill:There is a gap in theclosed area.

■ About Area Fill

■ Area Fill Tool■ In the properties fly-

out for the Area Fill ■ Power Fill Tool

■ Line Tooltool, or Power Filltool, increase theGap Tolerance value.

■ Spline Tool

■ Freehand Tool■ Use the Line, Spline,

or Freehand tools tocreate a boundary.



Remove the objectafter you fill the newarea.

Fill styles assigned to lay-ers work best on layers

You have applied a fillstyle to a layer: The closed

■ About Area Fill

■ Area Fill Toolwith geometry that con-areas were not formed by

closed objects. ■ Power Fill Toolsists of closed objectssuch as circles, rect-angles, or polygons.Try inserting area fill in-stead.

Try replacing the filledareas with area fill:Select the leaking fill andfind its layer in the Layers

You have imported a stylemap: The closed areas onsome layers in your targetillustration were notformed by closed objects.

■ About Area Fill

■ Area Fill Tool

■ Power Fill Tool

palette. (Note the nameof the style.) Drag astroke style onto that lay-er. Click one of the areafill tools. Click the fill styleand insert the fill as anarea fill object.

Use area fill anchors torefresh the fill insertions:

Click Display menu ➤

Area Fill Anchors. On the

You have updated CADgeometry: The originalarea fill boundaries havechanged.

■ Work with Area Fill An-chors

■ Update CAD GeometryWhen the Source Changes

canvas, drag the red an-chor points to be withinthe correct boundaries.

| 433

There are red lines extending from the objects in my illustration.


Are you are filling un-closed areas? If you are

You might have increasedthe gap tolerance setting

■ About Area Fill

■ Area Fill Toolnot, in the properties fly-for the Area Fill or Power

Fill tool. ■ Power Fill Toolout for either fill tool,change Gap Tolerance to0 (zero).

Click Display menu ➤

Area Fill Anchors to turnoff the display.

Anchor points might bedisplayed.

■ Work with Area Fill An-chors


I modified a style, but not all the objects with that style changed.


Before you modify thestyle, be sure to click the

The layer or object stylewas selected when youmade the change.

■ Select Geometry and Lay-ers

style in the Styles palette.■ Layers Palette

The Style Editor displays■ Styles Palettethe label, “Selected

■ Style EditorStyle.” If the label says“Selected Layer’s Style,”Impression modifies onlythe objects on the layer.If the label says “SelectedObject’s Style,” Impres-sion modifies only theselected objects.

NOTE In the Style Editor,you can click the checkmark in the lower-rightcorner of the style pre-view to see the affectedgeometry. Be sure toclick the swatch in theStyles palette again be-fore you make changes.

| 435

I cannot snap to an intersection.


To investigate, you canAn overshoot stroke prop-erty or roughen effect is

■ Use Snaps, Shortcuts, andOther Drawing Aids■ Zoom in closer to see

whether the lines in-tersect.

causing the appearance ofintersecting lines.

■ Click each segmenttwice to display theindividual controlpoints. The greenlines indicate the truedimensions of theobject without thestyle.


Curved strokes look jagged.


To remove the rougheneffect, you can

The stroke style includesa roughen effect.


■ Effect Properties (Style Ed-itor)■ Turn off or remove

the effect in thestroke style.

■ Adjust the roughenproperties to besmoother.

To avoid this problem,you can substitute a

Marker strokes with arrowor rounded endcaps canlook jagged.


■ Stroke Properties (StyleEditor)standard stroke (Media

property) and decreasethe Side property value.

NOTE To achieve thesame width as the origin-al stroke, you might needto increase the strokewidth.

| 437

Layers and Selection

When I try to select one object, several are selected.


Click the object a secondtime to select it.

The Layer Selection tool isactive.

■ Select Geometry and Lay-ers

Click the object again toselect it.

The objects are grouped. ■ Create Object Groups

Double-click the objectto unpack it.

The layer is packed. ■ Pack Layers to ImprovePerformance

Right-click the object andclick Explode Block to

The object you selected ispart of a block.

■ Save and Reuse Blocks

break it into individualparts. (It will no longerbe a block.)


The object I created is not displayed where I expect it to be.


Auto Layer places objectswhose style differs from

Auto Layer status is on. ■ Use Auto Layer to Consol-idate Styles

the current layer on aseparate layer. Look forthe object on an autolayer.

On the Layers palette,click the light bulb to

The current layer is turnedoff.

■ Select and Display Layersand Sketches

display the objects on thelayer.

■ Layers Palette

On the status bar, clickthe Fast Display button.

Fast Display is turned on. ■ Improve Performance

■ Optimize Style Display(Drawing PerformanceTuner)

| 439

The location or size of an object changed unexpectedly.


If you are switching lay-ers in order to assign a

You moved the object toa layer whose sketch has

■ Match Styles

■ Define Sketches and Scalenew style, consider usinga different scale or origin

point. ■ Match Properties Toolthe Match Properties toolinstead. (Turn off theLayer option.)

If you are moving thelayer to change its draw

You dragged the layer in-to a sketch that has a dif-

■ Create Layers and LayerGroups

order, try duplicating theferent scale or originpoint.

■ Layers Palettelayer and its objects in-stead. You can turn offeach layer while you re-move the objects thatyou do not need. Thenmove the new layerwithin the same sketchto change draw order.

The scale of a sketch af-fects the size of all ob-

You changed the scale ofthe sketch.


■ Sketch Properties DialogBoxjects contained in the

layers that belong to thesketch. Restore the set-ting by right-clicking thesketch row and choosingProperties.

By default, block basepoints are in the center

You were modifying ablock and changed theblock base point.

■ Move, Resize, and Re-define Blocks

of the block. To make■ Block Editor

adjustments, in the Block



Editor toolbar, click theShow/Hide Base Pointbutton to display thebase point. Then dragthe base point icon to anew location.

The Impression Interface

All my palettes disappeared.


Press the TAB key to dis-play the palettes.

Show/Hide Palettes is off. ■ Resize and Hide Palettes

Performance

Impression seems to be slowing down.


Use Fast Display to hidethem temporarily.

Many objects have com-plex styles.

■ How Complex Styles Af-fect Program Performance

■ Improve Performance

In the properties flyout ofthe Area Fill tool, turn off

You are using the Area Fillor Power Fill tool for the

■ Area Fill Tool

■ Power Fill ToolShow Highlighting orfirst time or have changed

a fill tool property. ■ Improve Performancedecrease the Precisionvalue.

| 441

Align and DistributeWindow

Aligns objects in a row or column or evenly distributes them.

Palettes menu ➤ Align and Distribute

D


How To: ■ Procedures: Align a Single Object to aPoint or Axis

■ Procedures: Align a Set of ObjectsAlong an Axis

■ Procedures: Distribute GeometryEvenly

■ Procedures: Adjoin Edges of Geometry

30

443


■ Align Geometry


■ Toolbox

Align Options

Aligns objects in rows or columns based on their edges or center points.

Alignment options include

■ Align Left. Shifts selected objects so that their left edges align with the leftmost edge inthe selection set.

■ Align Right. Shifts selected objects so that their right edges align with the rightmost edgein the selection set.

■ Align Horizontal Center. Shifts selected objects so that their horizontal center pointsalign with the average horizontal center point in the selection set.

■ Align Top. Shifts selected objects so that their top edges align with the topmost edge inthe selection set.

■ Align Bottom. Shifts selected objects so that their bottom edges align with the bottommostedge in the selection set.

■ Align Vertical Center. Shifts selected objects so that their vertical center points alignwith the average vertical center point in the selection set.

Distribute and Adjoin Options

Distributes objects so that they are evenly spaced or adjoined.

444 | Chapter 30 Align and Distribute Window

Distribution Options Distributes objects to be an equal distance apart, or to be separatedby a distance that you specify.

Distribute options include

■ Horizontally Distribute Left Edge. Aligns selected objects evenly along a horizontal path,so that their left edges are an equal distance apart.

■ Horizontally Distribute Right Edge. Aligns selected objects evenly along a horizontalpath, so that their right edges are an equal distance apart.

■ Horizontally Distribute Center. Aligns selected objects evenly along a horizontal path,so that their horizontal midpoints are an equal distance apart.

■ Vertically Distribute Top Edge. Aligns selected objects evenly along a vertical path, sothat their top edges are an equal distance apart.

■ Vertically Distribute Bottom Edge. Aligns selected objects evenly along a vertical path,so that their bottom edges are an equal distance apart.

■ Vertically Distribute Center. Aligns selected objects evenly along a vertical path, so thattheir vertical midpoints are an equal distance apart.

Adjoin Options Distributes the edges of objects to be contiguously aligned with otherobjects in the set.

| 445

Adjoin options include

■ Adjoin Horizontally. Distributes selected objects so that the right edge of the leftmostobject abuts the left edge of the next object.

■ Adjoin Vertically. Distributes selected objects so that the top edge of the bottom objectabuts the bottom edge of the object above it.

Spacing Sets the spacing between distributed objects.

■ Auto. Automatically adjusts the distance between objects based on their positions.Distributed objects are evenly spaced between the outer- and innermost objects. Foradjoined objects, the shared edges are overlapped.

■ Custom. Sets a specific distance between distributed or adjoined objects in drawing units.

Alignment Key

Sets an alignment key, an object that remains in place as the other objects in the selectionset are redistributed on either side of it.

Select Sets an object you select to be the alignment key. This object, identified by a redbounding box, is designated as the alignment key until you click another object or closethe Align and Distribute palette.

Keep Alignment Key Sets whether the alignment key (and its bounding box) are clearedimmediately after the align or distribute operation. Select this option if you want thealignment key to stay active until you dismiss the Align and Distribute palette or select adifferent alignment key.

Use Visual Extents

Toggles whether the distribution accounts for overlaps and widths imposed by the appearancestyle (the visual extents). Clear this option to base the alignment on the underlying vectors.

446 | Chapter 30 Align and Distribute Window

Block Editor

Modifies the style and geometry of blocks.

Access:

■ On the canvas, double-click a block

■ In the Blocks palette, double-click a block swatch

■ In the Blocks palette, right-click a block ➤ Edit Block

■ On the canvas, right-click a block ➤ Edit Block

31

447


How To: ■ Procedures: Edit Block Geometry andStyles

■ Procedures: Move, Resize, and Re-define Blocks


■ Edit Block Geometry and Styles

■ Move, Resize, and Redefine Blocks


■ Blocks Palette

■ Block Layers Palette

■ Layers Palette

■ Style Editor

■ Styles Palette

The Block Editor is a parallel work space for editing both the geometry and styles of a block.In most ways, it mimics the interface used to edit your illustration, with some importantdifferences.

Block Editing Area

Displays the selected block. Only one block at a time can be edited.

A block image in the lower-left corner distinguishes this area from the canvas in the standardworkspace.

Block Layers Palette

Assigns and manages appearance properties for block layers.

The Block Layers palette is like the Layers palette in the standard workspace. The keydifferences are that block layers are grouped by blocks, not sketches, and block layers cannotbe packed. For more information, see Block Layers palette.

448 | Chapter 31 Block Editor

Style Editor

Edits the elements of the selected block style.

The Style Editor is almost the same in both the standard and Block Editor workspaces.(Instead of displaying the style of the current layer, it displays the style of the current blocklayer.) For more information, see Style Editor.

Styles Palette

Stores and provides the interface for managing block styles.

The Styles palette in the Block Editor is the same as the Styles palette in the standardworkspace, with the following differences:

■ The library styles you save are stored with the styles for the selected block (not in theSaved Styles list). New or duplicated styles are saved with the styles for the selected block.

■ If you save a block style, it is displayed in the Saved Styles list and becomes available foruse with other geometry.

■ Unused block styles are displayed with the other block styles until you delete or purgethem.

For more information, see Styles Palette.

Block Editor Toolbar

Toggles display of the block base point, saves block updates, and closes the Block Editor.

| 449

The name of the selected block is displayed in the toolbar title.

Show/Hide Base Point Displays and hides the display of the block base point inthe Block Editor drawing area.

When the base point icon is visible, you can change the base point by moving the icon. Ifyou turn on object snap settings, the base point adheres to geometric points.

NOTE Changing the base point of inserted blocks shifts their position on the canvas.

Save Saves the changes you make in the Block Editor.

Close Block Editor Closes the Block Editor.

Impression prompts you to save any unsaved changes.

Disabled FunctionsAlthough the Block Editor workspace is like the standard workspace, several functions arenot available as you work in the Block Editor. They include the functions listed in thefollowing tables.

Menu Options Disabled in Block Editor Workspace

Disabled functionsMenu

File ■ Import

■ Update CAD Geometry

■ Import Maps

■ Document Setup

■ Print

■ Print Selection

■ Performance Tuner


Disabled functionsMenu

Edit ■ Group Selection

■ Ungroup Selection

Tools ■ All menu options are available

Display ■ Zoom ➤ Zoom Canvas

■ Zoom ➤ Zoom Preset

Palettes ■ Block Substitution Map

Help ■ Jump Start Tour

Features Disabled in Block Editor Workspace

Disabled featuresDialog box or palette

Block Substitution Map ■ Palette

Blocks palette ■ Create block from selected objects

■ Redefine block

■ Current block

■ Nested blocks and multiblocks that include the cur-rent block (to avoid circular references)

■ Block substitution

Fast Display button (statusbar)

■ Settings option

Drawing Performance Tuner ■ Button on status bar

Block Properties dialog box ■ Dialog box not available for current block, but canbe opened from the shortcut menu for other savedblocks.

| 451

Disabled featuresDialog box or palette

Layers drop-down list (tool-bar)

■ Layers that do not belong to the current block

Global stroke ■ Button on toolbar.

Related Dialog Box

Block Layers PaletteAssigns and manages appearance properties for block layers.

Access:

■ On the canvas, double-click a block

■ In the Blocks palette, double-click a block swatch

■ In the Blocks palette, right-click a block ➤ Edit Block

■ On the canvas, right-click a block ➤ Edit Block



How To: ■ Procedures: Create Layers and LayerGroups

■ Procedures: Use Layer Sequence toControl Draw Order

■ Procedures: Select and Display Layersand Sketches


■ Organize with Layers

■ Select and Display Layers and Sketches

■ Use Auto Layer to Consolidate Styles


■ Styles Palette

The Block Layers palette is like the Layers palette in the standard workspace.

Block layers are special layers that contain one or more components of a block.Block layer names and styles are derived from the layers and styles of theoriginal geometry. However, a connection with the original layers is notretained after the geometry is saved as a block.

Block layers are similar to the layers in the standard workspace. For example,you can do the following:

■ Drag the block layer rows to control the draw order of the objects in theblock.

■ Group block layers.

■ Create geometry on the current block layer.

■ Assign a style to block geometry by assigning a style to a block layer.

■ Reset individual object styles (style overrides) to match the block

■ layer style.

The key differences are as follows:

■ Block layers are organized by blocks, not by sketches.

Block Layers Palette | 453

■ Each block has its own set of styles. They are distinct from the stylesdisplayed for other block styles, or in the In Use or Saved Styles lists.

■ Block layers cannot be packed.

Block Layers List

Lists and manages block layers.

Block Row Serves as a high-level organizational unit for block layers. Clickinganywhere on the block row highlights the layers that belong to the block.Each block row contains these components:

■ Block name. Displays and sets the name of the block, often inherited fromthe original drawing. To rename the block, double-click the name andenter the new name.

■ Block selection triangle. Displays a pop-up preview of objects in the block.To display the preview, move your cursor over the triangle at the insideend of the row. Click the triangle to select all objects in the block.

Layer Row Lists block layers and block layer groups. Each row contains thesecomponents:

■ Current layer check mark (green). Indicates that the block layer iscurrent. Impression adds any new geometry or text to the current blocklayer. To make a block layer current, click the layer row.

NOTE By selecting multiple rows, you can highlight a row (shaded blue)without making it current. You can assign styles to any highlighted row.

■ Auto Layer icon. Indicates whether the block layer is an auto layer.When Auto Layer status is on, new objects whose style differs from thecurrent block layer style are automatically placed on an auto layer.

■ Block layer name. Displays the name of the block layer, often inheritedfrom the original drawing. Right-click the layer name and click Propertiesto open the Block Layer Properties dialog box.

■ Appearance style swatch and style name. Displays a thumbnail previewof the appearance style applied to the block layer. Click the image or nameto open the style in the Style Editor.

NOTE By default, the block layer inherits the style assigned to the layer wherethe object was created.


■ Display and Availability icons. Turns display and locking on and off forthe selected block layer.

On/Off. Toggles the display of the objects in the block layer.

Lock/Unlock. Toggles the ability to select and modify the objectsin the block layer.

■ Layer selection triangle. Displays a pop-up preview of objects in the blocklayer when you move the cursor over the triangle. Click the triangle toselect all objects on the layer.The color of the selection triangles indicates whether some or all of theobjects on the layer are selected.

Opacity Sets the see-through values of the selected block or block layer to ascale between 0% and 100%. A value of 0% is transparent; a value of 100% isopaque.

Task Bar

Contains buttons used for various Block Layers palette functions.

Create New Layer Creates a block layer. The new layer is placed justabove the selected row. If no row is selected, the layer is placed at the top ofthe current block layer grouping.

Create New Layer Group Creates a block layer group consisting ofselected block layers.

Block Layers Palette | 455

Delete Removes the selected block layer.

Keyboard Shortcuts: Block Layers Palette


Isolates the Block Layerspalette by toggling the expan-

F11

sion of the Styles palette in thedashboard.

Isolates the Styles palette bytoggling the expansion of the

F12

Block Layers palette in thedashboard.

Moves highlighting up anddown the block layers list.

Layer and block rowsUp andDown Arrowkeys

Makes highlighted row cur-rent.

Layer and block rowsSpacebar

Increases the height of rows.Layer and block rowsSHIFT+Up Ar-row

Decreases the height of rows.Layer and block rowsSHIFT+DownArrow

Increases or decreases theheight of rows.

Layer and block rowsRoll themousescroll wheel

SHIFT+scrollwheel

Changes draw order of blocklayers. Moves layer to a differ-ent layer group.

Layer rowsDrag a rowto anotherlocation


Block Layers Palette: Shortcut MenuThe following table describes the options that are available when you right-clicka row in the Block Layers palette.

DescriptionShortcut Menu Option

Lists styles that can be applied to selected block layers. Alsoprovides options for creating a style or making a copybased on the selection.

Assign Style

Creates a block layer or block layer group.New

Creates a block layer group based on the selection.Group Highlighted Layers

(Some options available only for block layer rows.) Providesoptions for displaying and hiding the objects on selectedblock layers.

Show/Hide

(Some options available only for block layer rows.) Providesoptions for locking selected block layers so their objects

Lock/Unlock

cannot be edited and unlocking them to make the objectsavailable.

(Available only in block layer rows.) Provides options formoving block layers up and down on the layer list.

Arrange

(Available only in block layer rows.) Creates a copy of theselected block layer just above the row of that layer.

Duplicate

(Available only in block layer rows.) Deletes the selectedlayer and the geometry it contains.

Delete

(Available only in block layer rows.) Depending on whattype of row is selected, opens the Block Layer Propertiesdialog box, or Block Layer Group Properties dialog box.

Properties

Related Dialog Boxes

Block Layer Properties Dialog BoxSets the bounding box color and display status of the selected block layer.

Block Layer Properties Dialog Box | 457

Access:

■ On the canvas, double-click a block ➤ In the Block Layers palette, right-click theblock layer name ➤ Properties

■ In the Blocks palette, double-click a block swatch ➤ In the Block Layers palette,right-click the block layer name ➤ Properties

■ In the Blocks palette, right-click a block ➤ Edit Block ➤ In the Block Layerspalette, right-click the block layer name ➤ Properties

■ On the canvas, right-click a block ➤ Edit Block ➤ In the Block Layers palette,right-click the block layer name ➤ Properties






■ Layers Palette

■ Styles Palette

Name

Displays and sets the name of the block layer.

Color

Sets the bounding box color used to identify the selected block layer. Youcan set different colors for different layers. Double-click the color swatchto open the Color dialog box.


Show

Turns on and turns off the display of the objects in the block layer.

Lock

Turns on and turns off the ability to modify the objects in the block layer.

Block Layer Group Properties Dialog BoxSets the bounding box color and display status of the selected layer group.

Access:

■ On the canvas, double-click a block ➤ In the Block Layers palette, right-click theblock layer group name ➤ Properties

■ In the Blocks palette, double-click a block swatch ➤ In the Block Layers palette,right-click the block layer group name ➤ Properties

■ In the Blocks palette, right-click a block ➤ Edit Block ➤ In the Block Layerspalette, right-click the block layer group name ➤ Properties

■ On the canvas, right-click a block ➤ Edit Block ➤ In the Block Layers palette,right-click the block layer group name ➤ Properties






■ Layers Palette

■ Styles Palette

Block Layer Group Properties Dialog Box | 459

Name

Displays and sets the name of the block layer group.

Color

Sets the bounding box color used by the selected block layer group.Double-click the color swatch to open the Color dialog box.

Show

Turns on and turns off the display of the objects in the block layer group.

Lock

Turns on and turns off the ability to modify the objects on the block layergroup.


Block Substitution Map

Displays and sets properties for all block substitutions in the current drawing.

Palettes menu ➤ Block Substitution Map

F5


How To: ■ Procedures: Substitute Block Refer-ences

■ Procedures: Share Block Libraries andSubstitution Maps

32

461


■ Substitute Block References


■ Blocks Palette

You can share block substitution maps by importing them from other Impression files. Thispalette is not available from the Block Editor.

Substitution List

Lists the names and preview images of original blocks and the blocks that have replacedthem.

Click the block name to display it in the equivalent drop-down list. Click the columnheadings to sort the list alphabetically.

Original Displays the original block before it was replaced by a substitution.

Substitution Displays the block that replaces the original block.

Add Substitution Button Creates a substitution in the Substitution list. You specifythe substitution in the Original and Substitution list boxes.

Remove Substitution Button Removes the selected substitution and restores theoriginal block assignment.

If the original block has been deleted from the Blocks palette, Impression does not replacethe geometry.

Import Map Button Imports a block substitution map from another Impressionfile.

Displays the Import Map dialog box, where you can choose the Impression file that containsthe block substitution map you want to import. Impression adds all block substitutionmappings to the Substitution list and adds the block definitions to the Blocks palette.

If the name of a substituted block on the map matches the name of a substituted block inthe current file, the Block Substitution Conflicts dialog box is displayed.

Select your substitution preferences and click OK to discard the unused substitution.

462 | Chapter 32 Block Substitution Map

Export Map Button Displays the Export Map dialog box, where you can save thecurrent block substitution map as an Impression file that you can import to another file.The new file contains only the mappings, block definitions, and their appearance styles.

Original (drop-down list)

Specifies the block to be replaced. You can make only one substitution per block. Therefore,the drop-down list displays only blocks that have not already been replaced.

Substitution (drop-down list)

Specifies the block that replaces the original block. Blocks that have been replaced by asubstitution cannot replace another block. Therefore, the drop-down list displays only blocksthat have not been replaced.

Related Dialog Box

Block Substitution Conflicts Dialog BoxResolves substitution conflicts between existing block substitutions andimported substitutions.

Block Substitution Conflicts Dialog Box | 463

Menu Access:

■ Palettes menu ➤ Blocks ➤ Import Map button ➤ Displayed if existingblock substitutions conflict with imported block substitutions

■ File menu ➤ Import Maps ➤ Import Block Substitution Map ➤ Displayedif existing block substitutions conflict with imported block substitutions

■ File menu ➤ Import Maps ➤ Import Style & Block Substitution Maps ➤ Displayed if existing block substitutions conflict with imported block substitutions


How To: ■ Procedures: Substitute Block Refer-ences





■ Blocks Palette

List of Conflicting Block Substitutions

Lists block substitutions in the current file that conflict with substitutions inthe imported file. You can choose which to retain and which to replace.Conflicts are most common when you share block libraries with otherImpression illustrations. For each substitution listed, click the file whose blocksubstitutions you want to retain.

464 | Chapter 32 Block Substitution Map

Blocks Palette

Stores and provides the interface for managing blocks, which you can drag onto the canvas.

Palettes menu ➤ Blocks

F4


How To: ■ Procedures: Insert and Remove Blocks

33

465

■ Procedures: Create Blocks

■ Procedures: Edit Block Geometry andStyles

■ Procedures: Substitute Block Refer-ences





■ Block Substitution Map

■ Block Properties Dialog Box

Navigation Pane

Lists the various types of available blocks.

The navigation pane is divided into two categories.

Libraries Lists block sets that have been linked from the saved block sets in other documents.

If a block in the original file is modified, the library reflects the change the next time youopen the Impression file. These changes do not alter blocks that have been inserted in theillustration.

If the file that contains the original blocks is moved or deleted, an error message is displayedthe next time you open the linked illustration. You can browse to the new location or selecta different file.

Search Filters Lists block sets that are grouped by whether they are in use, saved, or meetspecific search criteria.

■ Saved Blocks contains all blocks that have been saved in the current illustration. A checkmark in the lower-right corner of the preview swatch identifies inserted blocks.

466 | Chapter 33 Blocks Palette

■ In Use Blocks lists all inserted block definitions in the illustration. Deleting all instancesof a block from the canvas removes the block from the In Use list. Impressionautomatically saves all in-use blocks.

■ Custom search filters include block sets that match the search criteria you have set upand saved.

Hide/Show Navigation List Expands and collapses the navigation pane todisplay and hide the lists of block sets.

Navigation Pane toolbar Provides tools to create and manage blocks.

■ Link to Blocks Library

Displays the Import Blocks/Open Libraries dialog box, where you can select anImpression illustration. The Saved Blocks list in that file is then linked as a block library.

■ Search Blocks

Displays the Search Blocks dialog box, where you can set criteria for custom blocklists.

Blocks Palette Navigation Pane: Shortcut Menus…The following options are available when you right-click a block set in the navigation paneof the Blocks palette.

Navigation Pane: Libraries Group

DescriptionShortcut MenuOption

Expands the list group.Expand

| 467


Collapses the list group.Collapse

Displays the Import Blocks/Open Libraries dialog box, where youcan select an Impression illustration. The Saved Blocks list in thatfile is then linked as a block library.

Open Library

Navigation Pane: Libraries List


Displays the Import Blocks/Open Libraries dialog box, where youcan select an Impression illustration. The Saved Blocks list in that

Open Library

file is then linked as a block library. You can also import individualblocks to the Saved Blocks list.

Displays the Export Blocks dialog box, where you can export blocksto a file that you can link to other block libraries.

Export Library

Removes the selected library link from the Blocks palette.Close Library

Moves the selected item up in the list.Move Item Up inGroup

Moves the selected item down in the list.Move Item Downin Group

Sets the size of the preview images on all lists to be large, medium,or small. (The Small setting is unavailable when Icon View withText is selected.)

Thumbnail Size

Lists the names to the right of the preview images.List View

Displays the preview images without the names.Icon View

Displays the names beneath the preview images.Icon View withText

Arranges preview images in alphabetical order.Sort by Name

Includes a current library in all new drawings.Always Keep ThisLibrary Open



Adds all contents of a selected library to the Saved Blocks list.Save All LibraryContent

Navigation Pane: Search Filters Group




Displays the Search Blocks dialog box, where you can set criteriafor custom block lists.

Create New Filter

Navigation Pane: Search Filters List


Opens the Search Blocks dialog box, where you can set criteria forcustom block lists.

Create New Filter

Opens the Export Blocks dialog box, where you can export blocksto a file that you can link to other block libraries.

Export Blocks




Thumbnail Size




| 469



(Available only for custom search filters.) Includes a custom searchfilter in all new drawings.

Always Keep ThisSearch Filter

(Available only for custom search filters.) Removes the selectedsearch filter from the Search Filters list.

Delete Search Fil-ter

Preview Pane

Displays blocks of the type selected in the preview pane.

Preview Swatches Displays images and names of the blocks that belong to the set selectedin the navigation pane.

You can use the shortcut menu to modify the display of block swatches.

Preview Pane toolbar Provides tools to create and manage blocks.

■ Show/Hide Navigation

Expands and collapses the pane that contains the navigation list.

■ Create Block from Canvas Selection

Creates a block from objects selected on the canvas.

■ Redefine Block


(Available only when objects are selected.) Replaces an existing block definitionwith a block consisting of the current selection set.

■ Create Multiblock

(Available only when two or more block definitions are selected in the previewpane.) Creates a new multiblock from blocks that you select on the palette.

■ Save Blocks

(Available only for unsaved blocks.) Saves the library blocks that you select inthe preview pane.

■ Link to Blocks Library

Displays the Import Blocks/Open Libraries dialog box, where you can select anImpression illustration. The Saved Blocks list in that file is then linked as a block library.

■ Export Blocks

Displays the Export Blocks dialog box, where you can export the selected blocksto a file that serves as a linked library for other illustrations.

■ Delete Blocks

(Available only on the Saved Blocks list.) Removes the selected blocks. You canalso delete a block by dragging its image to the Delete Blocks button.

Blocks Palette Preview Pane: Shortcut MenusThe following options are available when you right-click in the Blocks palette preview pane.

Preview Pane: Libraries List


Saves the selected blocks to the Saved Blocks list and opens theSaved Blocks preview list.

Add to SavedBlocks

| 471


Displays the Export Blocks dialog box, where you can export theselected blocks to a file that can serve as a block library for otherillustrations.

Export Blocks


Thumbnail Size





Preview Pane: Search Filters


(Available only for unsaved blocks in search filters.) Saves the selec-ted blocks to the Saved Blocks list.

Save Blocks

On the canvas, selects all instances of the blocks selected in thepreview pane.

Select All Instances

Displays the Export Blocks dialog box. You can export the blocksin the selected block set to a file that can serve as a block libraryfile for other illustrations.

Export Blocks

Creates a block from objects selected on the canvas.Create Block fromSelection

Creates a multiblock from blocks selected on the preview pane.Available only when two or more blocks are selected.

Create Multiblock

Opens the Block Substitution Map. elect a block instance to bereplaced by the current selection on the canvas.

Substitute For



Opens the Block Properties dialog box. Select a block to replaceinstances of the current selection on the canvas.

Substitute With

Creates a copy of the selected block, named <block_name>+n,where n is an incremental number.

Duplicate

Opens a text box in which you can revise the name of the selectedblock.

Rename

(Available only when objects are selected on the canvas.) Opensthe Redefine Block dialog box. Replace an existing block definitionwith the geometry in the current selection set.

Redefine

Removes the selected blocks from the blocks list.Delete

Removes all blocks that are not in use in the illustration.Purge UnusedBlocks

Sets the size of the preview images on all preview panes to belarge, medium, or small. (The Small setting is unavailable whenIcon View with Text is selected.)

Thumbnail Size

Lists the names to the right of the preview image.List View

Displays the preview image without the name.Icon View


Arranges block preview images in alphabetical order.Sort by Name

(Available only in Saved Styles list.) Opens the Block Propertiesdialog box.

Properties


| 473

Block Properties Dialog BoxDisplays and modifies information about the selected block.

Access:

■ Palettes menu ➤ Blocks ➤ Right-click a swatch in the Saved Blocks previewpane ➤ Properties

■ Palettes menu ➤ Blocks ➤ Right-click a swatch in the Saved Blocks previewpane ➤ Substitute With


How To: ■ Procedures: Edit Block Geometry andStyles

■ Procedures: Substitute Block Refer-ences





■ Blocks Palette


■ Block Layers Palette

■ Block Editor

The displayed options differ, depending on whether you select a single blockor a multiblock in the preview pane of the Blocks palette. This dialog box isnot available for a block that is being edited in the Block Editor.

Block Properties—Collapsed State

Block Image Displays an image preview of the block that you selected in theBlocks palette preview pane. If the selection is a multiblock, the multiblockicon is displayed in the lower-right corner.

Substitute With Sets substitution for the selected block.

■ Substitution list. Lists the blocks that are eligible to be substituted for theblock selected in the Styles palette preview pane. Blocks that are alreadyinvolved in substitutions are not available.If no substitutions have been made, the following symbol is displayed:

To assign or change a substitution, select a block from the list.

Block Properties Dialog Box | 475

■ Scale to Fit Bounding Box. Sets the substituted block to fit within thebounding box of the block it replaces. Clear the check box to retain thedefault size of the block.

NOTE To scale the block style to match the relative size of the block, turn onScale Styles in the Transform palette.

Expansion Arrow Expands and collapses the dialog box to displaymore settings.

Properties Dialog Box—Expanded StateBlock Image Displays an image preview of the block that is selected in theBlocks palette preview pane.


■ Substitution list. Lists the saved blocks that are eligible to be substitutedfor the block selected in the Styles palette preview pane. Blocks that areinvolved in substitutions are not available. To use library blocks, you mustfirst save them.If no substitutions have been made, the following symbol is displayed:



NOTE To scale the block style to match the relative size of the block, turn onScale Styles in the Transform palette.


Block Name Displays the name of the selected block. Enter a new name tochange it.


Block Size (Available for single block only.) Displays the size of the selectedblock.

■ Width. Displays the width, in drawing units, of the selected block. Entera value to change the width in all instances of the block.

NOTE In your illustration, the printed size of the inserted blocks depends onthe scale of the sketch that contains it.

■ Height. Displays the height, in drawing units, of the selected block. Entera value to change the height in all instances of the block.

NOTE In your illustration, the size of the inserted blocks depends on the scaleof the sketch that contains it.

■ Lock Height/Width. Toggles whether the height and width values can beset independently. The icon should be locked when you want to maintainthe same aspect ratio as you scale the object.

Block Variation (Available for single blocks only.) Sets scale and rotationvariances for block substitutions.

■ Vary Scale. Toggles whether blocks are randomly scaled as they are inserted.

■ Variance Percentage (Scale). (Available when Vary Scale is selected.)Sets the percent of variation in size for blocks. For example, with thedefault 10% setting, inserted blocks can be between 90% and 110% oftheir current size.

■ Vary Rotation. Toggles whether blocks are randomly rotated as they areinserted.

■ Variance Percentage (Rotation). (Available when Vary Rotation isselected.) Sets the percent of variation in rotation for blocks. Forexample, with the default 10% setting, inserted blocks can be rotated10% in either direction from their default orientation.

Block Properties Dialog Box | 477

Properties Dialog Box—Multiblock

Block Image Displays an image preview of the block that is selected in theBlocks palette preview pane. If the selection is a multiblock, the multiblockicon is displayed in the lower-right corner.


■ Substitution list. Lists the blocks that are eligible to be substituted for theblock selected in the Styles palette preview pane. Blocks that are alreadyinvolved in substitutions are not available.If no substitutions have been made, the following symbol is displayed:




NOTE To also scale the block’s styles to match its relative size, turn on ScaleStyles in the Transform palette.


Block Name Displays the name of the selected block. Enter a new name tochange it.

Blocks Contained in Multiblock (Available for multiblocks only.) Displaysthe blocks contained in the multiblock set.

■ Remove. Deletes the block from the multiblock set. The block definitionremains in the Saved Blocks list.

Delete Block Confirmation Dialog BoxSpecifies handling of in-use block geometry that is being deleted.

Palettes menu ➤ Blocks ➤ Select a block image and click the Delete buttonor right-click the image and click Delete



Delete Block Confirmation Dialog Box | 479


■ Insert and Remove Blocks


■ Blocks Palette

Explode Instances

Deletes the block definition from the Blocks palette and explodes allinstances on the canvas into geometric components. The geometry is placedon the same layer as the original block reference.

Delete Instances

Deletes the block definition from the Blocks palette and removes all instancesfrom the canvas. If the block was substituted for another block, the originalcontent is restored.

Cancel

Cancels the block deletion.

Redefine Block Dialog BoxSpecifies a block to be replaced by a block containing objects in the currentselection set.

Palettes menu ➤ Blocks ➤ Select a block reference on the canvas and clickthe Redefine Block button


How To: ■ Procedures: Create Blocks



■ Create Blocks


■ Blocks Palette

Redefine

Specifies which block will be replaced by a block containing objects currentlyselected on the canvas.If a block in the Blocks palette was already selected, that block is displayedin the preview image.

Pick Base Point

Sets the point you specify as the new base point for the redefined block.Redefining the base point shifts the location of any existing references tothe redefined block. If you do not specifically define a base point, the centerof the block is considered to be the base point.

Search Blocks Dialog BoxSets the filter criteria for adding a filtered list of blocks to the Search Filter liston the Blocks palette navigation pane.

Palettes menu ➤ Blocks ➤ In the navigation pane, click the Open NewSearch Filter button

If the navigation pane is closed, select Search Blocks from the drop-down list

Search Blocks Dialog Box | 481


How To: ■ Procedures: Share Block Libraries andSubstitution Maps





■ Blocks Palette

Search By

Sets the criteria for the custom search filter. The Search Filter area changesto be either a text box or a drop-down list, depending on your choice.Options include the following:

■ Block Name. Includes blocks whose titles match the criteria you enterin the Search Filter text box.

■ Block Type. Includes blocks of the type you select (such as Vector Only,Raster Only, or Vector and Raster).

■ Other. Filters for multiblocks or block substitutions.

Search Filter

Narrows the search according to the selection under Search By.

■ If Block Name is selected, displays a text box, where you can enter searchcriteria. You can enter any character, including wild-card characters.

■ Clear Text Box button. (Available only when one or more charactershave been entered.) Clears all characters from the text box.

■ If Block Type is selected, displays a list with the following options:

■ Vector Only. Filters for blocks that include only vectors, that is, onlyline geometry with no raster images.

■ Image Only. Filters for blocks that contain only raster images, withno vectors or raster-based fills.

■ Vector and Images. Filters for blocks that contain both vector andraster images.


■ If Other is selected, displays a list with the following options:

■ Multiblocks Only. Filters for any multiblock in the current drawing.

■ Substituted Blocks Only. Filters for any block that has been replacedby substitution in the current drawing.

Keep New Filter in Blocks Palette Filter List Until I Delete It

Adds the filter to the navigation list in the Blocks palette, where it remainsuntil it is deleted.If the check box is not selected, the filter is temporarily added to the list(in italics), and is removed when another item on the list is selected.

Export Blocks Dialog BoxExports any type of block to the Saved Blocks list in a blank Impression file,which can then be used as a block library.

Palettes menu ➤ Blocks ➤ In the navigation pane, right-click a block listname and then click Export Blocks

Export Blocks Dialog Box | 483




■ Share Block Libraries and SubstitutionMaps


■ Blocks Palette

Places List

Provides quick access to predefined file locations. Changes to the Places listaffect all standard file selection dialog boxes. This list may differ, dependingupon your setup.

History Displays a list of documents that you have previously opened.

My Documents Displays the contents of your My Documents folder.

Favorites Displays a list of folders that you have specified by clicking Toolsmenu ➤ Add to Favorites in this dialog box.

Desktop Displays the contents of your computer’s Desktop folder.

Navigation Toolbar

Provides ways to find and select files in other folders and locations.

Recent Displays the paths to documents you have recently opened.

Save In Displays the current folder or drive. Click the arrow to display thefolder path and to navigate to drives, networks, or other locations.

Go to Last Folder Visited Returns to the previous file location.

Up One Level Navigates one level up in the current folder path.

Delete Removes the selected folder or file.

Create New Folder Adds a new folder to the list currently displayed in theFile Browser area.


View Controls the appearance of the Files list and specifies whether to showa preview image.

■ Thumbnails. Displays a preview image of folders and files.

■ List. Lists files in a multiple-column format with no details.

■ Details. Lists files in a single-column format with file details about size,type, and save dates.

Tools Adds selected folders to the Places list.

■ Add Current Folder to Places. Adds the folder shown in the Save In boxto the Places list.

■ Add to Favorites. Adds the selected file or folder to the Favorites list (locatedin the Places area).

Files Browser

Displays the files and folders in the current path specified in the Look In box.Use the Views menu in the dialog box to switch between List view and Detailsview.

Preview

Displays an image of the selected file when you choose Views ➤ Thumbnailsin the dialog box.

File Name

Displays the name of the file you select in the File Browser list. You can choosea recently opened file from the list or use wild-card characters to filter filesdisplayed in the file browser.

Files of Type

Displays the type of file to be exported. You can only export Impression files(IRF).

Save

Saves the selected blocks in the Saved Blocks list in a new, blank Impressionfile.

Export Blocks Dialog Box | 485

Import Blocks/ Open Libraries Dialog BoxSpecifies a file that contains a set of saved blocks to be added to the Librarieslist.

Palettes menu ➤ Blocks ➤ In the navigation pane, click Libraries. Click theOpen Libraries button




■ Share Block Libraries and SubstitutionMaps


■ Blocks Palette


Places List






Navigation Toolbar



Look In Displays the current folder or drive. Click the arrow to view the folderpath and to navigate to drives, networks, or other locations.





View Controls the appearance of the Files list and specifies whether to showa preview image.







Import Blocks/ Open Libraries Dialog Box | 487

Files Browser


Preview

Displays images of the blocks contained in the selected file when Views ➤

Thumbnails is active.

■ Deselect All. Clears the selection from all selected blocks.

■ Select All. Selects all blocks.

File Name


Open File as External Library

Adds the saved blocks in the selected Impression drawing as a library in theLibraries section of the Blocks palette.

Copy Selected Blocks to Palette

Adds a copy of any blocks selected in the Preview area to the saved blocks inyour current drawing’s Blocks palette.

Library Display Name

Displays the alternative name assigned to the selected file to identify the blockset. You can change this name in the Document Setup dialog box.

Block Properties SummaryAs you insert a block, provides information about how blocks are scaled andsets some of the properties.


Palettes menu ➤ Blocks ➤ Drag a block onto the canvas




■ Insert and Remove Blocks



■ Blocks Palette

■ Properties Palette

■ Print Dialog Box

Sketch Scale

Displays the scale of the sketch that contains the current layer.

Block Properties Summary | 489

Sketch Scale

Displays the scale of the sketch that will contain the inserted block. Thisvalue is also displayed on the Layers palette.You can reset the value in theSketch Properties dialog box.

Block Dimensions

Sets the real-world size of a saved block definition. You can also set this valuein the Block Properties dialog box.

Block Height

Sets the real-world height of the block definition.

Block Width

Sets the real-world width of the block definition.

Lock Height/Width

Toggles whether the height and width values can be setindependently. The icon should be locked when you want to maintain theaspect ratio as you scale the block.

Insertion Scale

Sets the relative scale of the current block reference. After the block is inserted,you can change this value in the Properties palette.

Scale X

Sets the relative insertion scale in the X direction (horizontal scale).

Scale Y

Sets the relative insertion scale in the Y direction (vertical scale).

Lock X/Y Scale

Toggles whether the X and Y values can be set independently.The icon should be locked when you want to maintain the aspect ratio asyou scale the block reference.

Printed Size

Displays the size of the printed block. Factors that affect this value includesketch scale, block dimensions, and insertion scale.

Height

Displays the height of the printed block.


Width

Displays the width of the printed block.

Don’t Show Me This Again

Permanently dismisses the dialog box so that it is no longer displayed whenyou insert a block.

Block Properties Summary | 491

Color Dialog Box

Sets a color for a style element using a color wheel or color book selection.

Style Editor ➤ In the Properties area, double-click the color preview images


How To: ■ Procedures: Apply and Modify Colors


■ Apply and Modify Colors

34

493


■ Style Editor

Color Wheel Tab

Sets a color based on color wheel selections or by entering numeric values for RGB (Red,Blue, Green) or HSL (Hue, Saturation, Luminance).

Color Wheel Sets a color based on where you move the cursor in the color wheel circle andtriangle.

■ Color Wheel Circle. Sets the hue of the color. You change the values by dragging thecursor in the circle or by entering a value in the Hue box.The changes you make in the color triangle are reflected in the Hue and Red-Green-Bluesettings.

■ Color Triangle. Sets the brightness and intensity gradations for luminance and saturation.Luminance, or brightness, is modified by moving the cursor vertically. Saturation, orcolor intensity, is modified by moving the cursor horizontally. You can change the valuesby dragging the cursor or by entering a value.The changes you make in the color triangle are reflected in the HSL and RGB settings.

494 | Chapter 34 Color Dialog Box

HSL settings Sets the color based on hue, saturation, and luminance values.

■ Hue. Sets the color based on the color wheel location (from 0 to 360 degrees).

■ Sat. Sets the saturation, or intensity, of the color based on a percentage, with 100%representing the highest color saturation.

■ Lum. Sets the luminance, or brightness, of the color based on a percentage, with 100%representing the brightest color luminance.

RGB settings Sets the color based on red, green, and blue values.

■ Red. Sets the red component of the color on a scale of 0 to 255.

■ Green. Sets the green component of the color on a scale of 0 to 255.

■ Blue. Sets the blue component of the color on a scale of 0 to 255.

Select Color Component Changes the new color selection to be the complementary,or opposite, color of the previous color selection.

Select Color from Screen Closes the Color dialog box temporarily to allow selectionof any color pixel on the canvas. As you move the eyedropper cursor around the screen, itscolor changes to indicate color candidates. Click a color to load the eyedropper and displaythe Color dialog box with the new color selected.

Old/New Color Previews Displays the new and previous color choices.

Preview in Canvas As you change color settings, displays the effect on the objects on thecanvas and the style swatches on the dashboard. If you clear this option, the changes aredisplayed after you click OK.

NOTE This option is available only when you open the Color dialog box from the Style Editoror the Text Properties palette.

Add to Color Book Saves the current color to an existing color book, or opens the NewColor Book dialog box, where you can set up a custom color book.

| 495

Color Books Tab

Sets a color chosen from colors defined in a PANTONE® color book, or from a book ofcustom colors you have saved.

NOTE Autodesk Impression 3 includes updated PANTONE colors books. Some color formulashave changed and there are several new color books. RAL color books have also been added.

Color Book Selection Area Specifies a color by selecting an example from a color book.

■ Book. Specifies a color book from a list of available color books. Changes made on thistab are reflected on the Color Wheel tab.

■ Colors. Specifies a color in a color book.

■ Color Name. Displays the name of the current color selection.

■ Color Book navigator. Provides a way to find a color range in a color book by clickingits color. You can also press the UP and DOWN ARROW keys to scroll through the colorsone set at a time.For custom color books, you can also rearrange colors by dragging them within thenavigator.

Old/New Color Previews Displays the new and previous color choices.


Color Book Color (Available only for custom color books.) Displays the name of the colorselected in a custom color book. Type over the name to update it.

Delete Color (Available only for custom color books.) Removes the selected colorfrom the custom color book.

Preview in Canvas As you change color settings, displays the effect on the objects on thecanvas and the style swatches on the dashboard. If you clear this option, the changes aredisplayed after you click OK.

NOTE This option is available only when you open the Color dialog box from the Style Editoror the Text Properties palette.

Add to Color Book Saves the current color to an existing color book, or opens the NewColor dialog box, where you can set up a custom color book.


New Color Book Dialog BoxNames and specifies the contents of a new custom color book.

Color dialog box ➤ Add to Color Book ➤ New Color Book





New Color Book Dialog Box | 497


■ Color Dialog Box

■ Style Editor

Name

Sets the name of the new color book.

Source

Specifies whether to start with an empty color book or with a copy of thecontents of an existing color book.

Rename Color Book Dialog BoxRenames a custom color book.

Color dialog box ➤ Book ➤ Rename Current Book







■ Style Editor

Name

Sets the new name of the selected custom color book.


Delete Color Book Dialog BoxDeletes a custom color book.

Color dialog box ➤ Book ➤ Delete Color Book







■ Style Editor

Book

Lists the names of the custom color books that are available for deletion.

Import Color Book Dialog BoxImports a custom color book.

Delete Color Book Dialog Box | 499

Color dialog box ➤ Book ➤ Import Color Book







■ Style Editor

Places List

Provides quick access to predefined file locations. Changes to the Places listaffect all standard file selection dialog boxes. This list differs, depending uponyour setup.





Desktop Displays the contents of your Desktop folder.

Navigation Toolbar



Look In Displays the current folder or drive. Click the arrow to display thefolder path and to navigate to drives, networks, or other locations.


Up One Level Navigates up one level in the current folder path.



Views Controls the appearance of the Files list and specifies whether to showa preview image.







Files Browser


Preview

Not available for color books.

Import Color Book Dialog Box | 501

File Name


Files of Type

Filters the list of files by the color book file type (CBK).

Export Color Book Dialog BoxExports a custom color book.

Color dialog box ➤ Book ➤ Export Current Color Book








■ Style Editor

Places List

Provides quick access to predefined file locations. Changes to the Places listaffect all standard file selection dialog boxes. This list differs, depending uponyour setup.




Desktop Displays the contents of your Desktop folder.

Navigation Toolbar












Export Color Book Dialog Box | 503




Files Browser


Preview

Not available for color books.

File Name

Specifies the name of the exported file.

Files of Type

Displays the type of file. You can only export Impression color book files(CBK).

Save

Saves the selection to ...\Autodesk Impression 3\Libraries\Color Books.


Communication Center

Manages the interface for receiving news and information about updates from Autodesk.

Impression status bar ➤ Click the Communications icon.




■ Use the Communication Center

35

505


■ Communication Center: Initial SetupWizard

■ Communication Center: ConfigurationSettings

Different information is displayed in the Communication Center window, depending uponwhether you are doing the initial setup, changing settings, or accessing information.

Information Update Links Connects you to information that you have specified you wantto receive.

Refresh Content Refreshes the information displayed in the information update links.

Settings Displays the Configuration Settings dialog box, where you can change yourpreferences for the Communication Center.


Communication Center: Initial Setup WizardServes as a checklist for the initial setup of Communication Center settings.

Impression status bar ➤ Click the Communications icon (before initial setup)

506 | Chapter 35 Communication Center







■ Communication Center: ConfigurationSettings

To set up the Communication Center, select each link and complete therequested information. A check mark indicates that the information has beencompleted. You can modify the information later on the Settings and Channelstabs.

Communication Center: Configuration SettingsModifies preferences for using the Communication Center.

Communication Center: Configuration Settings | 507

Impression status bar ➤ Click the Communications icon (after initial setup)







■ Communication Center: Initial SetupWizard

Click Apply to save the settings without closing the dialog box. Click OK tosave the settings and close the dialog box.

Settings Tab

Specifies preferences for local country or region, frequency of notifications,and method of notification.

Country/Region

Specifies a country or region. You receive only the communications thatare applicable to the locale you specify.

Check for New Content

Specifies how frequently you would like to receive notifications.

■ Daily

■ Weekly

■ Monthly

■ On Demand (when you click the Communication Center icon)

Balloon Notification

Toggles whether you are notified of new information by a pop-up balloonmessage.

Channels Tab

Specifies what types of information you would like to receive.

508 | Chapter 35 Communication Center

List of Channels

Specifies types of information, such as live updates, articles and tips, andproduct support information. Select the information you would like toreceive.

Communication Center: Configuration Settings | 509

Dashboard

Holds the Layers palette, Style Editor, and Styles palette.

Palettes menu ➤ Show/Hide Palettes

TAB key

36

511


How To: ■ Procedures: Set Palette Position


■ Work with Palettes

■ Sketches, Layers, and Objects

■ Achieve the Hand Drawn Look


■ Layers Palette

■ Style Editor

■ Styles Palette

Provides access to the palettes you use most frequently.

■ Layers Palette

■ Style Editor

■ Styles Palette

Keyboard Shortcuts: Dashboard DisplaySee Resize and Hide Palettes for more information about changing the dashboardconfiguration.

ResultCursor LocationKey

Clears all palettes from the screen or restorespalettes that were previously open.

CanvasTAB

Expands or compacts the palette.Palette title barDouble-click

Toggles the dashboard to expand the Layerspalette.

F11

Toggles the dashboard to expand the Stylespalette.

F12

512 | Chapter 36 Dashboard

Document Setup DialogBox

Sets defaults for canvas size, scale, and unit type.

File menu ➤ Document Setup


How To: ■ Procedures: Set Canvas Size and Orient-ation

■ Procedures: Set Default Unit Type andScale

■ Procedures: Define Sketches and Scale

37

515


■ Set the Document Defaults



■ Layers Palette

Canvas

Sets the dimensions of the canvas based on a paper size you select. Changes to this settingare reflected in the Width and Height values. If you enter Width or Height values, the settingfor this option is Custom.

Width Sets a custom width for the canvas. The value you enter represents the printed widthof the canvas.

■ Units (Width). Sets the unit of measurement to be used for the canvas width. Changesto this setting are automatically reflected in the units setting for Height.

Height Sets a custom height for the canvas. The value you enter represents the printedheight of the canvas.

■ Units (Height). Sets the unit of measurement to be used for the canvas height. Changesto this setting are automatically reflected in the units setting for Width.

Orientation Switches canvas position between landscape and portrait orientation.

Units & Scale

Sets the default type and precision for the real-world size of the geometry in the illustrationand the default scale used for new sketches.

Drawing Units Specifies the measurement type to be used for the real-world dimensionsof the geometry in your drawing. Choices include Inches, Feet, Yards, Miles, Millimeters,Centimeters, Meters, Kilometers, and Unitless.

If you set this option to be Unitless, the unit type of a file that you open or import isautomatically inherited.

If you change from one unit type to another, the real-world measurement is recalculated.

Unit Precision Sets the maximum number of decimal places to be used when measurementsare displayed. Different unit types display different precision defaults, which can be changed.

Default Sketch Scale Sets the default scale for new sketches, that is, sketches created in theLayers palette. Any sketches derived from views that have been imported or opened fromanother source are scaled as described in Define Sketches and Scale.

516 | Chapter 37 Document Setup Dialog Box


Sets the title to be displayed if the current drawing is linked to another Impression file as ablock or style library.

Name By default, displays the file name of the current Impression illustration. If you planto use the styles or blocks in the current illustration as style or block libraries in otherillustrations, you can assign an alternative descriptive name without changing the file name.(You do not need to specify the path.) The name you enter is displayed in the Blocks paletteor Styles palette Libraries list whenever the current document is linked as a library.

| 517

Drawing PerformanceTuner

Provides a way to improve performance by packing layers and modifying how styles aredisplayed.

38

519

Access:

■ File menu ➤ Performance Tuner

■ Status bar ➤


How To: ■ Procedures: Pack Layers to ImprovePerformance


■ Pack Layers to Improve Performance



■ Layers Palette

■ Pack Layers (Drawing PerformanceTuner)

■ Optimize Style Display (Drawing Per-formance Tuner)

You can create beautiful, complex illustrations using Impression, but the complexity comesat a performance cost. However, by packing objects on layers and adjusting the screenrendering quality while you work, you can greatly improve the program speed.

The Drawing Performance Tuner has two tabs that control settings that can help improveperformance:

Pack Layers (Drawing Performance Tuner)Get visual feedback on the performance gain as you pack specific layers.

520 | Chapter 38 Drawing Performance Tuner

Access:

■ File menu ➤ Performance Tuner

■ Status bar ➤ ➤ Pack Layers tab






Pack Layers (Drawing Performance Tuner) | 521


■ Layers Palette

■ Optimize Style Display (Drawing Per-formance Tuner)

Pack Layers to Improve Performance

Packing improves program speed by combining objects with the same layer,same Impression style, and a sequential draw order into a single object inorder to improve program speed. Although you cannot select individual objectsthat are part of a packed grouping, you can apply styles and area fills to them.For more information, see Pack Layers to Improve Performance.

Performance Meter

Displays the relative effect of packing objects on each layer. Layers with themost number of objects offer the most performance improvement whenthey are packed. As you click the Layer Packed and Layer Unpacked icons,the bar in the meter changes to show the benefit.

Performance Tuner: layers unpacked

Performance Tuner: layers packed

■ Layer. Lists layers, organized by sketch. Click the expansion arrow nextto the sketch name to expand and collapse the list.


■ Performance Cost. Displays a bar that demonstrates the relativeadvantage of packing the layer. The bar is longer when you pack a layerthat has many objects with the same style. The bar is shorter when youpack a layer that has many objects with differing styles. The longer thebar, the better the optimization.

■ Objects. Indicates the number of objects in the layer. A value of 17/1320indicates that the 1,320 objects on the layer have been consolidatedinto 17 objects.

■ Pack/Unpack. Specifies whether the layer is packed or unpacked. Clickthe icon to change the status:

Layer Unpacked icon

Layer Packed icon

Pack All

Provides the following filters for packing specific types of objects:

■ Pack All Layers. Packs all eligible objects on all layers, offering maximumbenefit.

■ Pack Layers from CAD. Packs all objects (such as AutoCAD objects)derived from programs other than Impression.

■ Pack All Locked Layers. Packs all layers that are currently locked inImpression.

Performance Improvement by Packing

Displays a performance bar that shows the effect of packing or unpackinglayers compared to the potential benefit when all layers are packed. SinceImpression is quicker when it has fewer distinct objects to process, a shorterbar (indicating fewer objects) indicates optimized performance.

Optimize Style Display (Drawing PerformanceTuner)

As you work, disable the display of certain style components in order toimprove program speed.

Optimize Style Display (Drawing Performance Tuner) | 523

Access:

■ File menu ➤ Performance Tuner ➤ Optimize Style Display tab

■ Status bar ➤ ➤ Optimize Style Display tab

■ Status bar ➤ Right-click the Fast Display button ➤ Settings








■ Layers Palette

■ Pack Layers (Drawing PerformanceTuner)

Optimize Style Display

Offers a way to work faster by disabling the screen display of style componentsthat are costly in terms of program speed. This setting does not affect thequality of the printed illustration.

Enable Fast Screen Display

Toggles the Fast Display status on or off. The following settings are availableonly when Enable Fast Screen Display is selected.

■ Transparency/Antialiasing. Affects the opacity of certain style elementsand the anti-aliasing, or line quality, of strokes.

■ Shadow Effects. Hides the display of drop shadows.

■ Roughen Effects. Turns off the roughen effect.

■ Dashes. Converts dashed lines to continuous lines.

■ Stroked and Hatch Fills. Hides the display of stroked fill and hatch fillstyle elements. The strokes used for the stroked or hatch fills identifythe boundaries of the filled objects.

Optimize Style Display (Drawing Performance Tuner) | 525

Fast Display off

Fast Display on

Clicking the Fast Display button on the status bar also toggles this optionon or off.

Screen Display Optimization

Displays the cumulative effect to the Fast Display settings. A shorter barindicates better screen display. A longer bar indicates better performance.


Global Stroke Dialog Box

Updates stroke elements in saved styles and blocks to match the stroke type and scale thatyou set.

Access:

■ Toolbar ➤


How To: ■ Procedures: Change Strokes Simultan-eously


■ Change Strokes Simultaneously

39

527


■ Style Editor

■ Styles Palette

By assigning a global stroke or stroke weight, you can quickly modify most of the strokeelements currently in use in your illustration.

Set New Stroke Type

Applies the stroke you select to

■ The stroke elements of all geometry on the canvas.

■ The stroke elements in all saved block styles.

This update includes nested strokes in complex styles such as stroked fills. The change issaved with the style.

Stroke elements are not changed for library strokes or for the stroke element of outlinestrokes.

The available strokes are the same strokes that are on the Saved Elements list in the CreateNew Stroke dialog box. This stroke also affects the default stroke displayed in the StyleAssignments pane of the DWG Import Wizard. Changing the stroke type in one locationchanges the stroke type in the other location.

Scale Stroke Weights

Sets the relative scale of the stroke including overshoot values.

528 | Chapter 39 Global Stroke Dialog Box

Import Dialog Box

Imports an existing Impression file, or a file created by another application such as AutoCAD.

File menu ➤ Import

CTRL+I


How To: ■ Procedures: Import Content

40

529


■ Import Content


■ DWG Import Wizard

■ DWF Import Wizard

Places List

Provides quick access to predefined file locations. Changes to the Places list affect all standardfile selection dialog boxes. This list may differ, depending upon your setup.



Favorites Displays a list of folders that you have specified by clicking Tools menu ➤ Addto Favorites in this dialog box.


Navigation Toolbar



Look In Displays the current folder or drive. Click the arrow to display the folder path andto navigate to drives, networks, or other locations.




Create New Folder Adds a new folder to the list currently displayed in the File Browser area.

Views Controls the appearance of the Files list and specifies whether to show a previewimage.



■ Details. Lists files in a single-column format with file details about size, type, and savedates.

530 | Chapter 40 Import Dialog Box


■ Add Current Folder to Places. Adds the folder shown in the Save In box to the Placeslist.

■ Add to Favorites. Adds the selected file or folder to the Favorites list (located in the Placesarea).

Files Browser

Displays the files and folders in the current path specified in Look In. Use the View menuin the dialog box to switch between the List and Details views.

Preview

Displays an image of the selected file when you choose Views ➤ Thumbnails in the dialogbox.

File Name

Displays the name of the file you select in the File Browser list. You can choose a recentlyopened file from the list or use wild-card characters to filter files displayed in the file browser.

Files of Type

Filters the list of files by file type. When you are saving files, Files of Type specifies the formatin which the file is saved.

OK

Imports the selected file.


Depending on which file format you are importing, the following additional dialog boxesmay be displayed:



| 531

Layers Palette

Assigns and manages appearance properties for layers and sketches.

Palettes menu ➤ Show/Hide Palettes (to display the dashboard)

F11



■ Procedures: Use Layer Sequence toControl Draw Order

41

533




■ Select and Display Layers and Sketches



■ Styles Palette

Layer Search Box

Filters layers based on the search criteria that you enter in the LayerSearch text box. Layers that match the criteria are displayed in the Layers palette.

The Layer Search box is displayed by default. To display the Layer Search box in an expandedor collapsed state, click the arrow to its left.

You can enter any character, including the following wild-card characters.

Wild-card Characters

DefinitionCharacter

Matches any numeric digit# pound

Matches any alphabetic character@ (at)

Matches any nonalphanumeric character. (period)

Matches any string and can be used any-where in the search string

* (asterisk)

Matches any single character; for example,?BC matches ABC, 3BC, and so on

? (question mark)

Matches anything but the pattern; for ex-ample; ~*AB*matches all strings that don'tcontain AB

~ (tilde)

534 | Chapter 41 Layers Palette

DefinitionCharacter

Matches any one of the characters en-closed; for example, [AB]C matches ACand BC

[]

Matches any character not enclosed; forexample, [~AB]C matches XC but not AC

[~]

Specifies a range for a single character; forexample, [A-G]C matches AC, BC, and soon to GC, but not HC

[-]

Reads the next character literally; for ex-ample, `~AB matches ~AB

‘ (reverse quote)

Sketches and Layers List

Lists and manages sketches, layer groups, and layers.

Sketch Row Serves as a high-level organizational unit for layers. Clicking anywhere on thesketch row highlights the layers that belong to the sketch. Each sketch row contains thefollowing components:

■ Sketch name. Displays and sets the name of the sketch, often inherited from the originaldrawing. Right-click the sketch name to open the Sketch Properties dialog box.

■ Sketch scale. Displays the scale ratio of the selected sketch based on its scale if printedat full size. Scale is set in the Sketch Properties dialog box.

■ Display and Availability icons. Turn packing, display, and locking on and off for all layersin the sketch. The sketch indicator is on if the setting for any of its layers is on.

Packed/Unpacked. Toggles whether objects on the layers within the sketch arepacked or unpacked. On packed layers, objects with characteristics such as the same styleand sequential draw order are combined to provide improved program performance.For more information, see Pack Layers to Improve Performance.

On/Off. Toggles the display of the objects in the layers.

Lock/Unlock. Toggles the ability to select and modify the objects in the layers.

■ Sketch selection triangle. Displays a pop-up preview of objects in the sketch. To displaythe preview, move your cursor over the triangle at the inside end of the row. Click thetriangle to select all objects in the sketch.

| 535

Layer Row Lists layers and layer groups. Each row contains the following components:

■ Current layer check mark (green). Indicates that the layer is current. Any newgeometry or text is added to the current layer. To make a layer current, click the layerrow.

NOTE When multiple rows are selected, a row can be highlighted (shaded blue) withoutbeing current. You can assign appearance styles to any row that is highlighted.

■ Auto Layer icon. Indicates whether the layer is an auto layer. When Auto Layerstatus is on, new objects whose style differs from the current layer style are automaticallyplaced on an auto layer.

■ Layer name. Displays the name of the layer, often inherited from the original drawing.Right-click the layer name and click Properties to open the Layer Properties dialog box.

■ Appearance style swatch and style name. Displays a thumbnail preview of the appearancestyle applied to the layer. Click the image or name to open the style in the Style Editor.

■ Display and Availability icons. Turns packing, display, and locking on and off for theselected layer.

Packed/Unpacked. Toggles whether objects on a layer are packed or unpacked.On packed layers, objects with characteristics such as the same style and sequential draworder are combined to provide improved program performance. For more information,see Pack Layers to Improve Performance.

On/Off. Toggles the display of the objects in the layer.

Lock/Unlock. Toggles the ability to select and modify the objects in the layer.

■ Layer selection triangle. Displays a pop-up preview of objects in the layer when youmove the cursor over the triangle. Click the triangle to select all objects on the layer.The color of the selection triangles indicates whether some or all of the objects on thelayer are selected.

Opacity Sets the see-through values of the selected layer or sketch to a scale between 0%and 100%. A value of 0% is completely transparent; a value of 100% is completely opaque.


Task Bar

Contains buttons used for various Layers palette functions.

Layer Tools (drop-down list) Displays a list of layer tools thatare available when no layer is selected in the Layers palette. The following options areavailable in the Layer Tools drop-down list and Tools menu ➤ Layer Tools:

■ Turn Layer Off. Turns off the layer of all selected objects. Objects on turned-off layersare invisible.

■ Make Object's Layer Current. Makes the layer of a selected object the current layer.

■ Isolate Layer. Hides all layers except the layers of the selected objects.In special selection mode, the following options display in the shortcut-menu: Enter(confirm selection) and Cancel Isolate Layer.

If you select the Enter (confirm selection) option, the special selection mode ends andthe operation is executed, as though you pressed ENTER.

If you select the Cancel Isolate Layer option, the operation ends and no layers are isolated,as though you pressed ESC.

■ Unisolate Layer. Restores all layers that were hidden with the Isolate Layer option.

NOTE You can also access Layer tools from Tools menu ➤ Layer Tools.

Filter Selected Layers Creates a temporary selection filter based on sketches, layergroups, and layers selected in the Layers Palette. This option is only available if one or morelayers are selected in the Layers palette.

NOTE The visibility of geometry on the canvas is not affected by layer filters.

| 537

New Sketch Creates a new sketch. If any rows are selected, the sketch is createdabove the sketch that contains the topmost row. If no rows are selected, the sketch is createdat the top of the Layers palette. New sketches use the scale that is set in the Document Setupdialog box.

NOTE When you create a new sketch, one layer is automatically included with each new sketch.The new layer created with the sketch is automatically set to current.

Create New Layer Creates a new layer. If any rows are selected, the layer is createdjust above it. If no rows are selected, the layer is created at the top of the current sketch.

Create New Layer Group Creates a layer group. If one or more layers are selected,they are included in the group.

Delete Removes the selected layer or sketch and its contents. If all sketches havebeen removed, you can automatically create a new sketch by creating new geometry.

Keyboard Shortcuts: Layers Palette


Isolates the Layers palette bytoggling the expansion of the

F11

Styles palette in the dash-board.

Isolates the Styles palette bytoggling the expansion of the

F12

Layers palette in the dash-board.

Moves highlighting up anddown the layers list.

Layer and sketch rowsUp andDown Arrowkeys

Makes highlighted row cur-rent.

Layer and sketch rowsSpacebar



Increases the height of rows.Layer and sketch rowsSHIFT+Up Ar-row

Decreases the height of rows.Layer and sketch rowsSHIFT+DownArrow

Increases or decreases theheight of rows.

Layer and sketch rowsRoll themousescroll wheel

SHIFT+scrollwheel

Moves row to a differentsketch or layer group.

Layer and sketch rowsDrag a rowto anotherlocation Changes draw order of ob-

jects.

Layers Palette: Shortcut MenuThe following table describes the options that are available when you right-click a row inthe Layers palette.


Lists styles that can be applied to selected layers. Alsoprovides options for creating a new style or making a copybased on the selection.

Assign Style

Creates a new sketch, layer, or layer group.New

Creates a new layer group based on the selection.Group Highlighted Layers

Provides actions for packing or unpacking some or all lay-ers. For more information, see Pack Layers to ImprovePerformance.

Pack/Unpack

Provides options for displaying and hiding the objects onselected layers.

Show/Hide

Provides options for locking selected layers so their objectscannot be edited and unlocking them to make the objectsavailable.

Lock/Unlock

| 539


Provides options for moving layers and sketches up anddown on the layer list.

Arrange

Creates a copy of the selected layer just above that layer’srow.

Duplicate

Deletes the selected layer and the geometry it contains.Delete

Opens the Update CAD Geometry dialog box, where youcan update the selected row with any changes that mayhave occurred in the source drawing.

Update CAD Geometry

Depending on what type of row is selected, opens theSketch Properties dialog box, Layer Properties dialog box,or Layer Group Properties dialog box.

Properties


Sketch Properties Dialog BoxSets the display status of the selected sketch.

Palettes menu ➤ Show/Hide Palettes (to display the dashboard) ➤

Right-click a sketch in the Layers palette. Click Properties


How To: ■ Procedures: Define Sketches and Scale





■ Layers Palette

■ Styles Palette

Name

Displays and sets the name of the sketch.

Pack

Packs and unpacks layers in the sketch.

Show

Turns on and turns off the display of the sketch objects in the illustration.

Lock

Turns on and turns off the ability to modify the sketch objects.

Scale

Sets the scale ratio of the selected sketch based on its scale if printed at fullsize.

■ Custom. Sets a custom scale ratio in the Custom Scale dialog box. Usethis option if the scale you need is not on the list.

■ Lock Scale. Locks the sketch scale so that it cannot be changed. Thesketch stays locked until you unlock it by selecting the option again.

Layer Properties Dialog BoxSets the bounding box color and display status of the selected layer.

Layer Properties Dialog Box | 541


Right-click the name of a layer in the Layers palette. Click Properties






■ Layers Palette

■ Styles Palette

Name

Displays and sets the name of the layer.

Color

Sets the bounding box color used to identify the selected layer. You can setdifferent colors for different layers. Double-click the color swatch to openthe Color dialog box.

Pack


Show

Turns on and turns off the display of the objects in the layer.

Lock

Turns on and turns off the ability to modify the objects in the layer.

Layer Group Properties Dialog BoxSets the bounding box color and display status of the selected layer group.



Right-click a layer group row in the Layers palette. Click Properties






■ Layers Palette

■ Styles Palette

Name

Displays and sets the name of the layer group.

Pack


Show

Turns on and turns off the display of the objects in the layer group.

Lock

Turns on and turns off the ability to modify the objects on the layer group.

Custom Scale Dialog BoxSets a custom scale ratio for a sketch on the basis of canvas units: drawing units.

Custom Scale Dialog Box | 543


Right-click a sketch ➤ Properties ➤ Scale list ➤ Custom


How To: ■ Procedures: Define Sketches and Scale




■ Layers Palette

Canvas Units

Sets the number of canvas units to be used for the scale ratio of the printedoutput. For example, if the default unit type is inches, and you want thescale to be one inch equals a foot, enter 1 for canvas units (on the left) and12 for drawing units (on the right).

Drawing Units

Sets the number of drawing (real-world) units represented by each canvasunit.


New Dialog Box

Sets defaults for canvas size, scale, and unit type for a new document.

File menu ➤ New

CTRL+N


How To: ■ Procedures: Open a Drawing


■ Open a Drawing


■ Set the Document Defaults

42

545


■ Document Setup Dialog Box

Name

Sets the name of the file. The default name is Untitled-1.

Canvas

Sets the dimensions of the canvas based on a paper size you select. Changes to this settingare reflected in the Width and Height values. If you enter Width or Height values, the settingfor this option is Custom.

Width Sets a custom width for the canvas. The value you enter represents the printed widthof the canvas.

■ Units (Width). Sets the unit of measurement to be used for the canvas width. Changesto this setting are automatically reflected in the units setting for Height.

Height Sets a custom height for the canvas. The value you enter represents the printedheight of the canvas.

■ Units (Height). Sets the unit of measurement to be used for the canvas height. Changesto this setting are automatically reflected in the units setting for Width.

Orientation Switches canvas position between landscape and portrait orientation.

Units & Scale

Sets the default type and precision for real-world dimensions related to geometry in yourdrawing, and the default scale used when you create new sketches.

Drawing Units Specifies the measurement type to be used for the real-world dimensionsof the geometry in your drawing. Choices include Inches, Feet, Yards, Miles, Millimeters,Centimeters, Meters, Kilometers, and Unitless.

If you set this option to be Unitless, the unit type of a file that you open or import isautomatically inherited.

If you change from one unit type to another, the real-world measurement is recalculated.

Unit Precision Sets the maximum number of decimal places to be used when measurementsare displayed. Different unit types display different precision defaults, which can be changed.

Default Sketch Scale Sets the default scale for new sketches, that is, sketches created in theLayers palette. Any views imported or opened from another source retain their original scalewhen converted to Impression sketches.

546 | Chapter 42 New Dialog Box

Open Dialog Box

Opens an existing Impression file, or a file created by another application such as AutoCAD.

Menu Access:

■ File menu ➤ Open

■ File menu ➤ Open as Template

CTRL+O

43

549




■ Open a Drawing




■ Import Dialog Box

Places List

Provides quick access to predefined file locations. Changes to the Places list affect all standardfile selection dialog boxes. This list differs, depending upon your setup.




Desktop Displays the contents of the Desktop folder on your computer.

Navigation Toolbar



Look In Displays the current folder or drive. Click the arrow to display the folder path andto navigate to drives, networks, or other locations.





Views Controls the appearance of the Files list and specifies whether to show a previewimage.


550 | Chapter 43 Open Dialog Box






Files Browser

Displays the files and folders in the current path specified in the Look In box. Use the Viewsmenu in the dialog box to switch between List view and Details view.

Preview


File Name


Files of Type

Filters the list of files by file type. When you open files, only those files are included in thelist.

OK

Opens the selected file.


Depending on which menu option you chose, the following additional dialog boxes aredisplayed:

| 551

DWF Import WizardLeads you through the options for opening or importing a DWF file inImpression.

Menu access:

■ File menu ➤ Open ➤ Select a DWF file

■ File menu ➤ Import ➤ Select a DWF file

Keyboard access:

■ CTRL+O (to open a DWF file)

■ CTRL+I (to import a DWF file)



■ Procedures: Import Content



■ Open a Drawing

■ Import Content

■ How Data Changes in Impression


■ Open Dialog Box


■ Import Options (DWF Import Wizard)

■ Mapping Options (DWF Import Wiz-ard)

■ File Clean-up (DWF Import Wizard)

■ One-Layer Drawings (DWF ImportWizard)

■ Pack Layers (DWF Import Wizard)

Each panel in the wizard provides options for displaying the drawing on thecanvas. You can proceed through all the panels by clicking the Next button.You can also modify specific panels by clicking the navigation list on the leftside of the wizard.

Show Current Settings

Redisplays the navigation list to show the current wizard settings. You leavethe settings as they are and click finish, or you can click the headings toskip to the panels you want to modify.

Restore Default Settings

Resets the wizard to use program defaults.

DWF Import Wizard Panels

The panels include the following:

■ Import Options

■ Mapping Options

■ File Clean-up

DWF Import Wizard | 553

■ Pack Layers

Import Options (DWF Import Wizard)Specifies the sheet (for multi-sheet DWF files) and the stroke type applied togeometry when you open or import a DWF file.

Menu access:

■ File menu ➤ Open ➤ Select a DWF file

■ File menu ➤ Import ➤ Select a DWF file

Keyboard access:








■ Open a Drawing

■ Import Content



■ Open Dialog Box







Sheet

Specifies the sheet available for import into Impression.

Stroke Type

Applies the stroke you select to all incoming geometry.The stroke type that you choose becomes the default setting in subsequentsessions.

Mapping Options (DWF Import Wizard)Specifies style maps and font substitutions for opening or importing DWFfiles.

Mapping Options (DWF Import Wizard) | 555

Menu access:

■ File menu ➤ Open ➤ Select a DWF file ➤ Mapping Options

■ File menu ➤ Import ➤ Select a DWF file ➤ Mapping Options

Keyboard access:







■ Open a Drawing

■ Import Content




■ Open Dialog Box







Style Map

Sets a style map to be used with the opened drawing. For more information,see Share Styles with Other Drawings.

Substitute Font

Sets an alternative font to use when a TrueType font in the original drawingis not available in Impression.

File Clean-up (DWF Import Wizard)Provides options that reduce the complexity of the DWF files you open orimport.

File Clean-up (DWF Import Wizard) | 557

Menu access:

■ File menu ➤ Open ➤ Select a DWF file ➤ File Clean-up

■ File menu ➤ Import ➤ Select a DWF file ➤ Select a DWF file ➤ FileClean-up

Keyboard access:







■ Open a Drawing

■ Import Content




■ Open Dialog Box







Discard All Text Objects

Specifies whether to import text, including text inside blocks and attributes.

Discard All Images

Specifies whether to import images such as PNG and GIF.

One-Layer Drawings (DWF Import Wizard)Separates objects with the same color and linetype into separate layers as theyare imported from a DWF file.

One-Layer Drawings (DWF Import Wizard) | 559

Menu access:

■ File menu ➤ Open ➤ Select a DWF file ➤ One-layer Drawings

■ File menu ➤ Import ➤ Select a DWF file ➤ One-layer Drawings

Keyboard access:







■ Open a Drawing

■ Import Content




■ Open Dialog Box







For DWF files with all objects on one layer, make subsequent stylizations easierby splitting objects with the same color or linetype onto unique layers. Thispane is not displayed for multiple-layer files.

No

Uses the original layer organization when the drawing is opened inImpression.

Yes

Splits objects in the DWF file into separate layers based on their originalcolors. Raster images are placed on a separate layer at the bottom of thelayer list. Text objects are placed on a separate layer at the top of the layerlist.

Pack Layers (DWF Import Wizard)Provides a way to improve performance by consolidating the objects on eachlayer as they are imported or opened from a DWF file.

Pack Layers (DWF Import Wizard) | 561

Menu access:

■ File menu ➤ Open ➤ Select a DWF file ➤ Pack Layers

■ File menu ➤ Import ➤ Select a DWF file ➤ Pack Layers

Keyboard access:







■ Open a Drawing

■ Import Content




■ Open Dialog Box







Layer packing improves program performance by minimizing the number ofobjects Impression processes during various activities, including stylization.For more information, see Pack Layers to Improve Performance.

Pack All Layers

Combines objects on each layer to form fewer objects. Criteria for packinginclude sharing the same style, being in sequential draw order, being withinthe same object group (if applicable), and more.

NOTE You can unpack layers as you work by clicking the Layer Packed icon

on the Layers Palette.

Don’t Pack Any Layers

Leaves imported layers unpacked. You can pack them later by clicking the

Unpacked Layer icon on the Layers palette.

DWG Import WizardLeads you through the options for opening or importing a drawing (DWG)file in Impression.

DWG Import Wizard | 563

Menu access:

■ File menu ➤ Open ➤ Select a DWG file

■ File menu ➤ Import ➤ Select a DWG file

Keyboard access:

■ CTRL+O (to open a drawing)

■ CTRL+I (to import a drawing)





■ Open a Drawing

■ Import Content



■ Open Dialog Box


■ What to Open (DWG Import Wizard)

■ Style Assignments (DWG Import Wiz-ard)

■ Import Options (DWG Import Wizard)

■ File Clean-up (DWG Import Wizard)

■ Pack Layers (DWG Import Wizard)

The wizard provides options for opening, displaying, and improving theperformance of the drawing in Impression. You can proceed through all thepanels by clicking the Next button, or modify specific panels by clickingheadings in the navigation list on the left.

General Options (DWG Import Wizard)

Show Current Settings

Redisplays the navigation list to show the current wizard settings. You leavethe settings as they are and click finish, or can click the headings to skip tothe panels you want to modify.

Restore Default Settings

Resets the wizard to use program defaults.

DWG Import Wizard Panels


■ What to Open

■ Style Assignments

■ Import Options

■ File Clean-up

■ Pack Layers

DWG Import Wizard | 565

What to Open (DWG Import Wizard)Specifies which layout, viewport, or model space view to display when youopen or import a drawing (DWG) file.

Menu access:



Keyboard access:








■ Open a Drawing

■ Import Content




■ Open Dialog Box






Layout

Specifies a layout to open or import. When you click the Layout button, a listof the layouts in the original drawing is displayed in the lower part of thepanel.

What to Open (DWG Import Wizard) | 567

Layout (list)

Lists the layouts available in a drawing you open or import.

Viewport

Specifies a specific layout and viewport to open or import. When you clickthe Viewport button, a list of the layouts and viewports in the original drawingis displayed in the lower part of the panel.

Layout

Lists the layouts available in the drawing you are opening or importing.

Viewport

Lists the viewports in the layout you selected. The order of the viewportsis based on their order of creation in the original drawing.

Model Space

Specifies the opening or import of the model space view. When you click theModel Space button, you can specify the canvas size and orientation in thelower part of the panel.


Canvas Size

Sets the size of the canvas, often based on a standard paper size.If you specify a custom paper size, enter the width and height values in theCustom Canvas Size dialog box and click OK.

Orientation

Switches the canvas position between landscape (horizontal) and portrait(vertical) orientation.

Related Dialog Box

Custom Canvas Size Dialog BoxWhen opening a model space view, specifies a custom size for the canvas.

What to Open (DWG Import Wizard) | 569

File menu ➤ Open ➤ Select a DWG file ➤ Select Model Space. Select Customin the Canvas Size list





■ Open a Drawing

■ Import Content


■ Open Dialog Box







Width

Sets a custom width for the canvas. The value you enter represents theprinted width of the canvas.

■ Units (width). Sets the unit of measurement for the canvas width.Changes to this setting are automatically reflected in the units settingfor Height.


Height

Sets a custom height for the canvas. The value you enter represents theprinted height of the canvas.

■ Units (height). Sets the unit of measurement for the canvas height.Changes to this setting are automatically reflected in the units settingfor Width.

Style Assignments (DWG Import Wizard)As you open or import a drawing (DWG) file, specifies the initial stroke typeand whether the illustration retains certain plot style settings.

Menu access:

■ File menu ➤ Open ➤ Select a DWG file ➤ Style Assignments

■ File menu ➤ Import ➤ Select a DWG file ➤ Style Assignments

Keyboard access:



Style Assignments (DWG Import Wizard) | 571





■ Open a Drawing

■ Import Content

■ Apply Appearance Styles


■ Open Dialog Box






Plot Style Table

Sets the plot style table (CTB or STB file) to be used as a basis for convertingcolor, lineweight, and linetype properties to appearance styles. If you chooseNone, the appearance styles are based on the lineweight, and linetype ofeach incoming layer, or on the Default Stroke setting.

■ Supported plot style properties: Color, grayscale, screening, linetype,lineweight, line end scales (butt, square, and round).

■ Unsupported plot style properties: Dither, pen number, virtual pennumber, line end style (diamond), line join style, fill style.

You can choose the default plot style from the source drawing or selectBrowse from the list to browse to a file in another folder.

NOTE Moved or removed plot style tables are labeled as “missing.”

Set Stroke Type

Applies the stroke you select to all incoming geometry.


NOTE If you want to apply a stroke type to incoming geometry, it must firstbe saved in the Style Editor. You can then select the stroke type from the setstroke type drop-down list and apply it to your drawing.

If you choose both a stroke and a plot style, the illustration reflects thefollowing combination:

■ The lineweight and linetype of the plot style.

■ The stroke color and type (such as pencil or marker) that you specifyunder Stroke Type.

If the settings overlap, the plot style setting is given priority.The stroke type that you choose becomes the default setting in subsequentsessions.

Import Options (DWG Import Wizard)When importing drawing files, specifies relative scale, style maps, conversionoptions for 3D drawings, and block and font substitutions.

Menu access:

■ File menu ➤ Open ➤ Select a DWG file ➤ Import Options

Import Options (DWG Import Wizard) | 573

■ File menu ➤ Import ➤ Select a DWG file ➤ Import Options

Keyboard access:







■ Open a Drawing

■ Import Content

■ Share Styles with Other Drawings



■ Open Dialog Box






1 Imported Unit =

Sets a drawing unit to represent a unit of measurement type such as inches,feet, or metric. If you select “unitless,” scales are shown as a ratio (such as1:50).

Style Map

Sets a style map to be used with the opened drawing. For more information,see Share Styles with Other Drawings.


3D Import Options

Opens the 3D Import Options dialog box, where you can specify how athree-dimensional drawing is converted to 2D.

Mapping Options

Opens the Mapping Options dialog box, where you can specify a blocksubstitution map and alternate fonts.


3D Import Options Dialog BoxSets how objects with 3D or perspective views are imported from a DWG file.

Menu access:

■ File menu ➤ Open ➤ Select a DWG file ➤ Import Options ➤ 3D ImportOptions

■ File menu ➤ Import ➤ Select a DWG file ➤ Import Options ➤ 3D ImportOptions

Keyboard access:








■ Open a Drawing

■ Import Content



■ Open Dialog Box







Remove Hidden Lines

(On by default for 3D or perspective views.) Removes geometry that ishidden behind 3D objects in the view. Partially hidden objects are clipped,or broken, and the hidden portions are deleted.

■ Show Intersecting Edges. (Available only when Remove Hidden Linesis selected.) Retains defining lines at the edge where two 3D objectsintersect. Clear the check box to remove the lines.


Display Contour Lines

Displays isolines to illustrate the contours of curves. Isolines are tessellationlines used to visualize the curved portions of an object.

■ Number of Lines. Sets the number of isolines used to define the contour.

Mapping Options Dialog BoxWhen opening or importing a drawing, provides options for block and fontsubstitutions.

Menu access:

■ File menu ➤ Open ➤ Select a DWG file ➤ Import Options ➤ MappingOptions

■ File menu ➤ Import ➤ Select a DWG file ➤ Import Options ➤ MappingOptions


Keyboard access:







■ Open a Drawing

■ Import Content



■ Open Dialog Box







Block Substitution Map

Sets a block substitution map for the opened drawing. For more information,see Share Block Libraries and Substitution Maps.

TT Substitute Font

Sets an alternative font to use when a TrueType font in the original drawingis not available in Impression.

SHX Substitute Font

Sets an alternative font to use when an SHX font in the original drawing isnot available in Impression.


File Clean-up (DWG Import Wizard)Provides options that reduce the complexity of drawings you open or import.

Menu access:

■ File menu ➤ Open ➤ Select a DWG file ➤ File Clean-up

■ File menu ➤ Import ➤ Select a DWG file ➤ File Clean-up

Keyboard access:






File Clean-up (DWG Import Wizard) | 579


■ Open a Drawing

■ Import Content


■ Open Dialog Box






Layers

Specifies how layer settings in the original drawing affect what you import.Options include:

■ Discard Off Layers. Excludes layers that are turned off in the originaldrawing.

■ Discard Frozen Layers. Excludes layers that were frozen in the originaldrawing.

■ Discard layers with plot turned off. Excludes layers with plotting turnedoff in the original drawing.

Miscellaneous

Specifies which object types in the original drawing (such as text or hatches)are imported. Options include:

■ Discard All Dimensions. Does not import dimensions.

■ Discard All Leaders. Does not import leaders and leader lines, includingmultileaders.

■ Discard All Text Objects. Does not import text, including text insideblocks and attributes.

■ Discard All Hatches. Does not import hatches, including solid hatchesand gradients.


■ Discard All Images. Does not import images, including PNG, GIF andBMP.

Pack Layers (DWG Import Wizard)Provides a way to improve performance by consolidating the objects on eachlayer as they are opened or imported from a DWG file.

Menu access:



Keyboard access:



Pack Layers (DWG Import Wizard) | 581





■ Open a Drawing

■ Import Content



■ Open Dialog Box






Layer packing improves program performance by minimizing the number ofobjects that are processed for various activities, including stylization. For moreinformation, see Pack Layers to Improve Performance.

Pack All Layers

Combines objects on each layer to form fewer objects. Criteria for packinginclude sharing the same style, being in sequential draw order, being withinthe same object group (if applicable), and more.

You can unpack layers as you work by clicking the Layer Packed icon on the Layers palette.

Don’t Pack Any Layers

Leaves imported layers unpacked. You can pack them later by clicking the

Unpacked Layer icon on the Layers palette.


DWF Password Dialog BoxAccepts a password when you open password-protected DWF files.

File menu ➤ Open ➤ Select a password-protected DWF file

CTRL+O




■ Open a Drawing


■ Open Dialog Box

Password

Requires a password for DWF files that are password-protected.

Select a Viewport Dialog BoxDuring a CAD Update operation, specifies a viewport when you have browsedfor a file.

DWF Password Dialog Box | 583

File menu ➤ Refresh CAD Geometry ➤ Click Browse button ➤ Select aDWG file and click Open


How To: ■ Procedures: Update Your Illustration


■ Update the CAD Geometry in Your Il-lustration


■ Open Dialog Box

■ Update CAD Geometry Dialog Box

List of Viewports

Specifies which viewport or model space view to refresh. The refresh pathbecomes the default displayed in the Update CAD Geometry Dialog Box.


Options Dialog Box

Sets general interface preferences.

Access:

■ Edit menu ➤ Options

■ Right-click the canvas ➤ Options


How To: ■ Procedures: Snap to Points on Geo-metry

44

585

■ Procedures: Assign Keyboard Shortcuts

■ Procedures: Set Rollover Highlighting

■ Procedures: Open a Drawing




■ Open, Import, and Save Content



■ Open Dialog Box

All settings in this dialog box are retained from session to session

To access the settings, click the navigation list on the left side of the dialog box. The settingspanels include the following:

General (Options Dialog Box)Sets behavior for protecting imported geometry, undo, palette animation, andthe default row size for the Layers palette.

586 | Chapter 44 Options Dialog Box

Access:

■ Edit menu ➤ Options ➤ General

■ Right-click the canvas ➤ Options ➤ General


How To: ■ Procedures: Make Corrections andDeletions

■ Procedures: Set Palette Position

■ Procedures: Set Rollover Highlighting


■ Make Corrections and Deletions


■ Set Rollover Highlighting



■ Layers Palette

General (Options Dialog Box) | 587

General

Sets behavior for undo operations.

Number of Undo Steps

Sets the number of actions that are saved in memory for use with the Undofeature. You can set from 10 to 500 steps. Higher numbers can affectperformance.

General Palette Options

Sets how palettes are displayed as they expand and collapse.

Animate Palettes

Sets the palette to expand and collapse with a slide animation. Clear thisoption to speed the palette response when you open panels.

Layers Palette Options

Sets the behavior of the Layers palette.

Animate Expand/ Collapse of Layers

Sets the rows in the Layers palette to expand and collapse with animation.Clear this option to speed the response when you expand a sketch row todisplay its layers, for example.

Row Height

Sets the default height (in pixels) of the rows in the Layers palette.

Rollover Highlights

Turns on and sets the color for highlighting that is displayed when you movethe cursor over geometry.

Use Rollover Highlights

Toggles whether geometry is highlighted as you move the cursor over it.


Rollover Highlights Color

Sets the color for rollover highlighting.

Delete Color

Deletes the selected color from the list.

Reset All Warning Dialogs

Restores warning and information messages that you have turned off byclicking Don’t Show This To Me Again. After you click Reset, these messagesare once again displayed.

Files (Options Dialog Box)Sets options for opening and saving your document.

Files (Options Dialog Box) | 589

Access:

■ Edit menu ➤ Options ➤ Files

■ Right-click the canvas ➤ Options ➤ Files



■ Procedures: Save an Illustration


■ Open, Import, and Save Content


■ Open Dialog Box

■ Save As Dialog Box

Save

Sets whether and how often your file is automatically saved.


Auto Save

Toggles whether drawings are automatically saved at regular intervals. Thefile extension for illustrations that have been backed up using Auto Save is.ibak. To use a backup file, rename its extension to .irf.

Auto Save Every

Sets the timing for Auto Save to an interval of 1 minute to 60 minutes.

History of Recent Files

Controls settings for the display of recently used files on the Files menu.

Number of Files Displayed

Sets the number of recently used files to display on the File menu. You candisplay up to 20 files.

Keep Files in History For

Sets the number of days to keep recently used files in the File menu historylist.

Templates

Specifies which template file is used as a basis for all new drawings.

Default Template

Displays the name of the template file used for all new drawings.

Browse

Displays the Open dialog box, where you can browse to the Templates folderto find a template file.

Paths (Options Dialog Box)Sets up preferred search paths for storing external files referenced by yourdesign illustration.

Paths (Options Dialog Box) | 591

Access:

■ Edit menu ➤ Options ➤ Paths

■ Right-click the canvas ➤ Options ➤ Paths


How To: ■ Procedures: Import Content


■ Import Content



■ Open Dialog Box

External Files Search Paths

Lists absolute paths that have been added. This list determines whereImpression searches to find the source files for externally referenced imagesand files.The order of the paths determines the order in which they are searched.


Modify

Opens the Browse for Folder dialog box, where you can select a file to replacethe current selection.

Delete

Removes the selected path from the External Files list.

Add

Opens the Browse for Folder dialog box, where you can find and select asearch path to add to the External Files list.

Move Up

Moves the selected file up one level in the list.

Move Down

Moves the selected file down one level in the list.

Keyboard Shortcuts (Options Dialog Box)Displays key combinations for keyboard shortcuts and sticky keys that youpress and hold to temporarily activate a tool.

Keyboard Shortcuts (Options Dialog Box) | 593

Access:

■ Edit menu ➤ Options ➤ Keyboard Shortcuts

■ Right-click the canvas ➤ Options ➤ Keyboard Shortcuts


How To: ■ Procedures: Assign Keyboard Shortcuts


■ Assign Keyboard Shortcuts



Search

Provides a quick way to locate an action (a command or tool) in the Actioncolumn. As you type, the list changes to display the actions that match thesearch.

Clear

Removes all text from the Search box.

Feature list

Lists features and interface elements, including information about associatedshortcuts, and whether that shortcut is a standard shortcut or sticky key.Double-click the column heading to sort by topic.

Copy to Clipboard

Copies the current list of shortcuts to the Clipboard as a CSV (CommaSeparated Value) file. You can then paste it into another program such asMicrosoft® Excel to create a copy that can be printed as a quick reference.

Related Options Dialog Box Panels

Change the shortcuts displayed on this panel in two other Options panels.

Shortcuts (Options Dialog Box)Customizes standard keyboard shortcuts (keys that you press and immediatelyrelease.)


Access:

■ Edit menu ➤ Options ➤ Keyboard Shortcuts ➤ Shortcuts

■ Right-click the canvas ➤ Options ➤ Keyboard Shortcuts ➤ Shortcuts







Search

Provides a quick way to locate a feature on the feature list. As you type, thelist changes to display the features that match the search.

Clear


Shortcuts (Options Dialog Box) | 595

Action List

Lists Impression features and interface elements that can be assigned toshortcuts, including information about shortcut keys that have already beenassigned. Double-click the column heading to sort by that topic.

Feature Description

Displays a short description of the selected feature.

Shortcut

Displays and sets a keystroke combination for the selected feature. Forexample, if you select the Shortcut box and press CTRL+SHIFT+w, theShortcut box displays CTRL+SHIFT+W.

Assigned To

If the keystroke you enter in the Shortcut box has already been assigned,displays the name of the conflicting assignment.

Assign

Assigns the keystroke combination you entered in the Shortcut box to theselected feature.

Remove

Eliminates the selected shortcut.

Sticky Keys (Options Dialog Box)Customizes sticky key shortcuts (keys that you press and hold to temporarilyactivate a tool).


Access:

■ Edit menu ➤ Options ➤ Keyboard Shortcuts ➤ Sticky Keys

■ Right-click the canvas ➤ Options ➤ Keyboard Shortcuts ➤ Sticky Keys







Search

Provides a quick way to locate an action in the Action column. As you type,the list changes to display the actions that match the search.

Clear


Sticky Keys (Options Dialog Box) | 597

Action List

Under Actions, lists Impression features and interface elements that can beassigned to sticky keys. Under Shortcut, lists sticky keys that have alreadybeen assigned. Double-click the column heading to sort by topic.

Feature Description

Displays a short description of the selected feature.

Sticky Key

Displays and sets a keystroke combination for the selected feature. Forexample, if you select the Sticky Key box and enter t, the Sticky Key boxdisplays T.

Assigned To

If the keystroke you enter in the Sticky Key box has already been assigned,displays the name of the conflicting assignment.

Assign

Assigns the keystroke combination you entered in the Sticky Key box tothe selected feature. The new sticky key is added to any other sticky keysdefined for the feature.

Remove

Eliminates the selected sticky keys.

Object Snap Settings (Options Dialog Box)Toggles object snaps, which are used to snap the cursor to specific objectlocations, such as an endpoint or midpoint.


Access:

■ Edit menu ➤ Options ➤ Object Snap Settings

■ Right-click the Osnap button (on the status bar) ➤ Settings

Menu Access:


How To: ■ Procedures: Snap to Points on Geo-metry


■ Snap to Points on Geometry



Object Snap Settings (Options Dialog Box) | 599

Object Snap Settings

Sets the object snaps you want to use. Select the Object Snap On option tomake these settings available as you work.

Object Snap On (F3)

Turns on or turns off all selected object snaps. You can also press F3 to turnobject snaps on or off.

Endpoint

Snaps to the following locations:

■ Closest endpoints of open-ended objects such as lines or splines

■ Ends of line segments for closed objects such as rectangles

Midoint

Snaps to the middle point of a line or line segment.

Center

Snaps to the center of a circle, ellipse, or bounding box.

Intersection

Snaps to the point where geometric objects or segments intersect.

Perpendicular

Snaps to a point that is perpendicular to the selected object.

Nearest

Snaps to the nearest point on an object.

Control Point

Snaps to a control point on a spline or spline-based object.

Select All

Selects all object snap settings.

Clear All

Clears the check mark from all object snap settings.

Auto Layer Settings (Options Dialog Box)Controls settings that automatically place new objects whose style differs fromthe current layer on auto layers.


Access:

■ Edit menu ➤ Options ➤ Auto Layer Settings

■ Right-click the Auto Layer button (on the status bar) ➤ Settings


How To: ■ Procedures: Use Auto Layer to Consol-idate Styles





■ Layers Palette

Auto Layer Settings

Specifies whether and under what conditions auto layers are created. Settingsare maintained from session to session.

Auto Layer Settings (Options Dialog Box) | 601

Auto Layer On

Sets the Auto Layer status for the illustration.

■ On. Adds an auto layer (Auto 1, Auto 2) when you create an object whosestyle differs from the current layer. If an auto layer of the same styleexists, the new objects are placed on the existing auto layer.When this option is on, auto layers can receive new objects of only onestyle. They are identified on the Layers palette by a star in front of thelayer name.

Layers palette: Auto Layer icon

Turning on Auto Layers to consolidate layers with the same style on thesame layer makes changing or editing those styles easier. This feature isuseful in illustrations with many area fill objects.

■ Off. Creates a style override when you create an object that has a differentappearance style than the current layer. Auto layers designated on theLayers palette are converted to regular layers.

Create Auto Layers For

Sets which activities place new objects on auto layers.

■ Area Fills. Creates an auto layer whenever area fill is inserted on a layerwith a different style. If an auto layer with that style exists, the new fillobject is placed on that auto layer.This situation occurs when you drag a style swatch into closed geometry,or when you click a style swatch just before inserting the area fill.

■ New Shapes. Places a new object on an auto layer whenever the objectis created on a layer that has a different style. This situation occurs whenyou click a style swatch just before you create the object.


Print Dialog Box

Sets final page layout for and prints design illustrations.

Menu Access:

■ File menu ➤ Print

■ File menu ➤ Print Selection

CTRL+P

45

603


How To: ■ Procedures: Adjust Printer Settings

■ Procedures: Scale and Position thePrinted Image

■ Procedures: Print Your Illustration


■ Prepare Your Layout and Print



Settings that you modify in this dialog box are saved with the illustration. New Impressionillustrations use the default settings.

Printer SettingsSpecifies a printer, paper size, number of copies, and print quality.

Printer Specifies a printer from a list of printers available to your computer.

■ Properties button. Opens a dialog box in which you can set options for paper, includingorientation, size, source, and type. The available options differ, depending on whichprinter you select.

Paper Size Sets a paper size from a list of standard sizes available for the selected printer.

Copies Sets the number of copies to be printed.

Quality Sets the quality of the print. The list varies according the printer you select.

■ Pixel measurement. Sets whether the DPI value is pixels per inch or pixels per millimeter.

ScaleSets the scale of the canvas on the printed page.

Do Not Scale Prints the canvas at full size (100%). This option retains the scale ratio set foreach sketch.

Fit to Page Scales the extents of the objects in the illustration to fit the page (based on yourprinter settings). When this option is selected, the Scale and Position values are unavailable.

604 | Chapter 45 Print Dialog Box

Scale Sets a percentage that represents the size of the object extents compared to the extentsof the printed page. Setting this percentage to an amount other than 100% further scalesthe images within the sketches in the final output. Therefore, setting this scale to 50%reduces a 1:2 sketch scale ratio to 1:4 on the printed page.

OrientationSets the rotation of the image on the printed page.

Portrait Orients the drawing on the paper so that the short edge is horizontal.

Landscape Orients the drawing on the paper so that the long edge is horizontal.

PositionSets the position of the canvas on the printed page.

Center the Image Positions the illustration in the vertical and horizontal center of theprinted page.

From Top Sets the distance from the top edge of the printed page to the top edge of thecanvas boundary. This value changes if you drag the image in the Print Preview area toreposition it. Negative values indicate that portions of the image extend beyond the printablepage.

■ From Top (unit type). Sets the unit of measurement to be used for From Top. Changingthe unit type automatically recalculates the From Top values based on the new unit type.

From Left Sets the distance from the left edge of the printed page to the left edge of thecanvas boundary. This value changes if you drag to reposition the image in the Print Previewarea. Negative values indicate that portions of the image extend beyond the printable page.

■ From Left (unit type). Sets the unit of measurement to be used for From Left. Changingthe unit type automatically recalculates the From Left values based on the new unit type.

Print Preview WindowPreviews how the geometry on the canvas will be positioned on the printed page.

| 605

The dashed lines represent the margins for the current printer. Geometry that is outside thedashed lines is not printed.

This window is scaled to match the Page Size value. The position of the image in the previewis affected by the values you enter in the Scale and Position areas. You can also move theimage by dragging it in the preview window.

NOTE Changes made in the Print Preview window are applied only to the printed output, notthe geometry on the canvas.

Show Bounding Box Toggles the display of a bounding box that represents the extents ofthe image on the canvas. When Scale is selected, the bounding box grips can be dragged touniformly scale the output. When Center the Image is not selected, you can also drag thebounding box to reposition the image on the printed page.

PrintSends the illustration to the printer.

Keyboard Shortcut: Print Dialog Box


Opens the Print dialog box.CanvasCTRL+P

606 | Chapter 45 Print Dialog Box

Properties Palette

Displays and sets properties such as layer, style, and size for the current selection.

Palettes menu ➤ Properties

F2


How To: ■ Procedures: Display Information AboutYour Drawing


■ Display Information About YourDrawing

■ Create and Modify Styles



■ Blocks Palette

■ Object Selection Tool

46

607

If more than one object is selected, the displayed values are listed as “Varies” to indicatethat the objects have different settings. The values are blank if nothing is selected.

General

Sets the layer and appearance style of selected objects.

Layer Sets the layer of selected objects.

Style Sets the style of selected objects.

Style Scale Sets the relative scale (percentage) of the object’s style, usually based on thescale of the sketch that contains it or on the amount by which the object was resized afterit was created or imported.

This percentage is affected automatically when the Scale Styles option is selected in theTransform palette, or in the properties flyouts for the Object Selection or Layer Selectiontools.

Size

Displays and sets the size of selected objects in drawing units.

Width Sets the width of the selected objects.

Height Sets the height of the selected objects.

Lock/Unlock Icon Locks or unlocks the ability to modify width and heightratios separately. If this setting is locked, changing one size value changes the other valuesproportionally. Unlock the setting to resize height and width independently.

Block Properties

(Available only when a block is selected on the canvas.) Displays and sets the properties forblock objects.

608 | Chapter 46 Properties Palette

Block Name Sets the name of the selected block. If you modify the name, the change isreflected in the Blocks palette and Block Properties dialog box.

Sketch Scale (Read only.) Displays the scale of the sketch that contains the selected blockreference.

Block Dimensions (Read only.) Displays the real-world width and height of the blockdefinition.

NOTE You can only modify these values in the Block Properties dialog box.

Insertion Scale Sets the horizontal and vertical scale of the selected block reference, ascompared to the dimensions of the block definition. For example, enter 2.0 to double thesize of the block reference on the canvas. Enter 0.5 to halve it.

■ Lock or Unlock Height/Width icon

Locks or unlocks the ability to change the width and height ratio separately.If this setting is locked, changing one size value changes the other values proportionally.Unlock the setting to resize height and width independently.

Size on Canvas Displays the size of the block in canvas units, that is the size when printed.

■ Lock or Unlock Height/Width icon

Locks or unlocks the ability to change the width and height ratio separately.If this setting is locked, changing one size value changes the other values proportionally.Unlock the setting to resize height and width independently.

| 609

Save As Dialog Box

Saves an Impression document in a variety of formats.

Menu Access:

■ File menu ➤ Save As

■ File menu ➤ Save Selection As

■ File menu ➤ Save a Copy

CTRL+SHIFT+S

47

611


How To: ■ Procedures: Save an Illustration

■ Procedures: Convert to AnotherFormat


■ Save an Illustration

■ Share Files and Formats

Places List

Provides quick access to predefined file locations. Changes to the Places list affect all standardfile selection dialog boxes. This list may differ, depending upon your setup.





Navigation Toolbar



Save In Displays the current folder or drive. Click the arrow to display the folder path andto navigate to drives, networks, or other locations.





View Controls the appearance of the Files list and specifies whether to show a previewimage.



612 | Chapter 47 Save As Dialog Box





Files Browser

Displays the files and folders in the current path selected in the Look In box. Use the Viewsmenu in the dialog box to switch between List view and Details view.

Preview


File Name


Files of Type

Filters the list of files by file type. When you are saving files, Save As Type specifies theformat in which the file is saved.

Options (for saving in other formats)

The settings available in the Options area change, depending on what format is selected inFiles of Type.

BMP Options

Changes settings for saving your illustration as a BMP file.

Resolution Sets the dots per inch (dpi) resolution for the output file.

■ Screen (72 dpi). Sets the best resolution for screen display.

■ Print (150 dpi). Sets the best resolution for printing.

■ Custom. Sets a custom value from 36 to 400 dpi.

| 613

Anti-Alias Removes jagged edges from the output. Turn off this option to maintain hardedges in line art.

Color Depth Sets the total number of colors that the image can contain. Choices include

■ 8-bit

■ 16-bit

■ 24-bit (default)

DWF Options

Changes settings for saving your illustration as a DWF file.

Password Protected Sets whether a password is required to open the exported DWF file. Ifselected, the text box becomes available for you to enter the password, which remainsdisplayed on the screen.


■ Screen (72 dpi). Sets the optimum resolution for screen display.

■ Print (150 dpi). Sets the optimum resolution for printing.


Preserve Layers Exports Impression layers with the file.

NOTE Saving large drawings in the DWF format can take a long time. To save time, you canturn off this option.


EPS Options

Changes settings for saving your illustration as an EPS file.





JPG Options

Changes settings for saving your illustration as a JPG file.


Quality Sets the amount of compression to be used for the output file. Higher compressionsresult in smaller file sizes, but reduce output quality.

You can set a numeric value or select a setting from the list. The following table demonstrateswhat values correspond to the settings.

Corresponding SettingValue

Low1-3

Medium4-6

High7-8

Maximum9-10






Format Sets the JPG file to be one of the following formats:

■ Standard. Recognized by most Web browsers.

■ Optimized. Provides optimized color and a slightly smaller file size. Not supported byall Web browsers.

■ Progressive. Displays a series of increasingly detailed scans as the image is downloaded.Not supported by all Web browsers.

Scans Available only when Format is set to Progressive. Sets the number of scans createdwhen the graphic is displayed. You can set 3, 4, or 5 scans.

PDF Options

Changes settings for saving your illustration as a PDF file.

Image Quality Sets the amount of compression to be used for the output file. Highercompressions result in smaller file sizes, but reduce output quality.

| 615

You can set a numeric value or select a setting from the list. The following table demonstrateswhat values correspond to the settings.

Corresponding SettingValue

Low1-3

Medium4-6

High7-8

Maximum9-10






PNG Options

Changes settings for saving your illustration as a PNG file.

Background Sets the background color of the image.

■ Transparent. Sets the background to be 100% transparent.

■ White. Sets the color to white.

■ Black. Sets the color to black.

■ Other. Opens the Color dialog box, where you can select a color.







PSD Options

Changes settings for saving your illustration as a PSD file, for use with Adobe® Photoshop®.





Preserve Layers Exports Impression layers with the file.


Save

Saves the file.

Keyboard Shortcuts: Save As Dialog Box


Opens Save dialog box if the illus-tration has never been saved.

CanvasCTRL+S

Opens Save As dialog box.CanvasCTRL+SHIFT+S

| 617

Style Editor

Creates and modifies appearance styles.



How To: ■ Procedures: Create a Custom Style

48

619




■ Styles Palette


■ Fill Properties (Style Editor)

■ Effect Properties (Style Editor)

Style Editor—Collapsed State

Displays the style associated with the current selection, which can be a layer, block layer,an object, or a style on the Styles palette.

Selected Style label Indicates whether a layer, block layer, style, or object is selected. Changesmade in the Style Editor affect the component designated in the label.

■ Selected layer’s style. Displayed when a layer in the Layers palette is selected. Changesmade in the Style Editor affect all objects on the layer except objects with a style override.Changes to the style sometimes result in creation of a new style.

■ Selected block layer’s style. In the Block Editor, displayed when a block layer in theBlock Layers palette is selected. Changes made in the Style Editor affect all objects onthe block layer except objects with a style override. Changes to the style sometimes resultin creation of a new style.

■ Current layer style. Displayed when no objects or layers are selected. Modifications madein the Style Editor affect the style assigned to the current layer.

■ Current block layer style. In the Block Editor, displayed when no objects or layers areselected. Modifications made in the Style Editor affect the style assigned to the currentlayer.

620 | Chapter 48 Style Editor

■ Selected object’s style. Displayed when one or more objects are selected on the canvas.Changes made in the Style Editor affect only the selected object. Changes to the stylesometimes result in creation of a new style. Editing the style of an object often createsa style override and is not recommended.

■ Selected style. Displayed when you select a style in the Styles palette. Style changes affectthe selected style and any objects or layers that use that style.

Style Name Displays and sets the name of the appearance style for the selection indicatedin the label. The styles on the list represent the styles in the Saved Styles list on the Stylespalette.

Style Exceptions Alert (Available only when objects on the layer have a style override.)Indicates the number of objects on the layer that do not use the layer style.

Click the arrow to display the following options:

■ Select Style Exceptions. On the canvas, highlights objects on the current layer that havestyle exceptions, or overrides.

■ Reset Style Exceptions. Restores the layer style to all objects on the layer that had styleoverrides.

Edit/Close Expands and collapses the Style Editor to show and hide the style tree.

Style Preview Image Displays an example of the style.

For certain types of selections, the following graphics replace the preview image:

■ Style Varies. Indicates that the selection set contains more than one style.

■ Block. Indicates that the selection is a block. You can select block styles in the BlockStyles area of the Styles palette.

| 621

■ Non-Impression image. Indicates that the selection set contains an image, such as araster image. You cannot stylize or edit this type of image.

■ By Insert Layer. (Available only in the Block Editor.) Indicates that the selectedblock contains geometry that inherits the style of the layer where it is inserted.

In Use Check Mark Indicates that the current style is in use on the canvas or is assignedto a layer. Click the icon to select all objects that use the style.

Style Editor—Expanded State

Displays the style tree that you use to build and edit the displayed appearance style.


In addition to the options listed for the collapsed Style Editor, above, the following settingsare available.

Global Style Controls panelResize Style flyout Opens the Resize Style dialog box, where you can specify a percentageby which to scale various settings in the size.

Modify Style Color flyout Opens the Modify Style Color dialog box on page 681, where youcan modify hue-related style settings of all color elements based on the hue offset.

Rotate Style flyout Opens the Rotate Style dialog box on page 682, where you cansimultaneously rotate all directional components of the current style based on the rotationangle.

| 623

Copy the Style in the Style Editor Makes a copy of the displayed style. An incrementalnumber, such as style_name 1, style_name 2, and so on, follows the number. The changes areautomatically stored in the Saved Styles list on the Styles palette, where you can renamethem.

Style Tree Displays the style elements that have been combined to create the style shownin the style preview.

Each row represents one element (stroke, fill, or effect) of the displayed appearance style.

The row order determines the draw order of the elements in the style. Style elements aredrawn on top of the elements below them. To change the draw order, drag an element toa different position on the list.

The row includes the following components:

■ Properties flyout arrow. Displays the element properties window.

With the cursor, hover over the arrow to display the properties for the associated elementtemporarily. If you click inside the window or change settings, the window stays openuntil you click outside it. The available properties include the following:

■ Stroke properties including standard and outline strokes.

■ Fill properties including uniform, gradient, texture, stroked, and hatch fill types.

■ Effect properties including roughen and drop shadow.

■ Style element swatch. Displays an example of the stroke or fill style element.For outline strokes or compound fills (such as stroked fill), the style elements are nested.Click the plus or minus sign to the left of the style element swatch to expand or collapsethe rows.

■ Style element type. Displays the type of element (such as stroke, fill, compound fill, andso on) represented by the style tree row.

■ Show/Hide light bulb. Turns the display of the style element on and off.


Add Style Element Displays the following options, which enable you to add style elements.

■ Create New Stroke. Opens the Create New Stroke dialog box, where you can select astroke to use as a basis for a new stroke element.

■ Create New Fill. Opens the Create New Fill dialog box, where you can select a fill to useas a basis for a new fill element.

■ Create New Stroked Fill. Opens the Create New Compound Fill dialog box, where youcan select a stroked fill to use as a basis for a new element. This option inserts a strokenested within a compound fill element.

■ Create New Outline Stroke. Opens the Create New Outline Stroke dialog box, where youcan select an outline stroke to use as a basis for a new element. This option inserts astroke, a fill, or both stroke and fill nested within an outline stroke element.

■ Create New Hatch. Opens the Create New Compound Fill dialog box, where you canselect a hatch to use as a basis for a new hatch element.

■ Add Effect. Opens the Add Effect dialog box, where you can select a roughen effect ordrop shadow to add to the current style. You can apply the effect to the entire style (soit modifies both stroke and fill). You can also apply the effect to only the selected element.

| 625

Style Tree: Shortcut MenuThe following table describes the options available when you right-click within the styletree in the Style Editor.


Removes the selected style element.Remove

Inserts a copy of the selected style element directly abovethe selected element.

Duplicate

Opens the Create New Stroke dialog box, where you canselect a stroke to use as a basis for a new stroke element.

Create New Stroke

Opens the Create New Fill dialog box, where you can selecta fill to use as a basis for a new stroke element.

Create New Fill

Opens the Create New Compound Fill dialog box, whereyou can select a stroked fill to use as a basis for a newstroked fill element.

Create New Stroked Fill

Opens the Create New Compound Fill dialog box, whereyou can select a new hatch fill to use as a basis for a newhatch fill element.

Create New Hatch Fill

Opens the Create New Outline Stroke dialog box, whereyou can select an outline stroke to use as a basis for a new

Create New Outline Stroke

outline stroke. This option inserts a stroke, a fill, or bothstroke and fill, nested within an outline stroke element.

Opens the Add Effect dialog box, where you can select aroughen effect or drop shadow to add to the current style.

Add Effect

Moves the selected style element row to the top of thestyle tree.

Move to Top

Moves the selected style element row up one row.Move Up

Moves the selected style element row down one row.Move Down

Moves the selected style element row to the bottom of thestyle tree.

Move to Bottom


Style Element Properties and Related Dialog Boxes

The following Properties flyouts and dialog boxes are available from the Style Editor.

Fill Properties (Style Editor)Sets the characteristics of a fill element within an appearance style.

Palettes menu ➤ Show/Hide Palettes (to display the dashboard) ➤ Inthe Style Editor, click Edit to open the Style Editor (If Close is displayed, the Style Editoris already open) ➤ In the style tree, click the properties flyout arrow next to a fillelement


How To: ■ Procedures: Create and Modify Stand-ard Fill

■ Procedures: Create and Modify Com-pound Fill


■ Set Fill Styles

Fill Properties (Style Editor) | 627


■ Styles Palette

■ Style Editor

When you select a fill element in the style tree, the Properties flyout displaysthe fill properties.

General Fill Properties

Sets the properties common to all fill types.

Fill Type

Specifies whether a fill is uniform, gradient, textured, or stroked. Each filltype has a unique set of properties that you can modify.

■ Uniform. Sets a single color for the fill. If this option is selected,additional Uniform Fill properties are displayed in the Properties flyout.

■ Gradient. Sets a graduated blend of colors for the fill. If this option isselected, additional Gradient properties are displayed in the Propertiesflyout.

■ Hatch. Specifies a compound fill that simulates a stroke pattern. If thisoption is selected, additional Hatch Fill properties are displayed in theProperties flyout.

■ Stroked. Specifies a compound fill that simulates a series of parallelstrokes. If this option is selected, additional Stroked Fill properties aredisplayed in the Properties flyout.


■ Texture. Specifies an image to be used as a texture in a fill. You can usetextures created in BMP, JPG, PNG, and other formats. If this option isselected, additional Texture properties are displayed in the Propertiesflyout.

Effect

(Available only when Uniform or Gradient is selected in the Fill Type List.)Modifies the fill to display noise and watercolor variations.

■ None. Adds no additional noise or watercolor effects to the fill style.

■ Noise. Adds mottling or blotching to the fill. If this option is selected,additional Noise and Advanced Noise properties are displayed in theProperties flyout.

■ Watercolor. Adds properties that simulate grain, texture, and bleedingedges. If this option is selected, additional Watercolor and AdvancedWatercolor Properties panels are displayed in the Properties flyout.

Opacity

Sets the see-through value of the selected style element to a scale between0% and 100%. A value of 0% is transparent. A value of 100% is opaque.


Style Element toolbar

Provides tools that save, turn off, and remove the style element from thecurrent style.

■ Save Style Element. Saves the current element so that it is displayed inthe Saved Elements list that is available when you add a new element.

■ Turn Style Element Off/On. Turns the display of the element in the styleon and off.

■ Delete Style Element. Removes the element from the style tree.

Uniform Fill Properties

When Uniform is selected in the Fill Type list, the Uniform Fill properties aredisplayed.

Color

Displays the color of the selected style element. To modify the color in theColor dialog box, click the color swatch or click the Color button.

Color Sliders

Updates the color of the selected style element. Drag the slider to set theRGB values (red, green, and blue). You can also enter a numeric value inthe text box to the right of the slider.


Gradient Properties

When Gradient is selected in the Fill Type list, the Gradient properties aredisplayed.

Gradient Swatch

Displays a sample of the current fill element.

Type

Specifies whether the gradient blend direction is linear, radial or adaptive.

■ Linear. Sets the color gradations to blend from one side to the other.

■ Radial. Sets the color gradations to blend from the center of the objectto the outer boundaries.

■ Adaptive. Sets the color gradations to blend with the shape of the objectthat is being filled.

You can apply an adaptive gradient to an open shape. The gradient isapplied as though the shape was closed by drawing a line from the startand end points of the shape.


If you apply an adaptive gradient to an object with several sub-shapes,the gradient is applied to each sub-shape as thought they are seperateshapes.

Angle

(Available only when Type is Linear.) Sets the angle of the linear gradient.

Mode

(Available only when Type is Radial.) Sets how the gradient is displayedwithin the space it fills.

■ Flexible. Sets the extents of the gradient range to fit the filled area,distorting the gradation proportions, if necessary. If the object is resized,the gradient pattern adapts to the new shape.

■ Rigid. Retains the size and proportion of the gradient to match originalsettings. For example, if the object is scaled to a smaller size, portionsof the gradient shading might be excluded.


Gradient Ramp

Modifies the colors and blend gradations of the gradient fill.

■ Blend Flags. Diamond-shaped flags that are spaced across the top of theramp. Drag the flags along the ramp to modify how gradually one colorblends with the other. You can modify the location of a selected flagunder Flag Properties.

■ Color Flags. Square color flags that are spaced across the bottom of theramp. Select and drag these flags to modify the coloration of the fill.You can modify the color, location, and opacity of a selected flag underFlag Properties. You can also double-click the flag to open the Colordialog box.

■ Add Flag button. Adds a new color flag halfway between the selectedcolor flag and the flag to its right. The new flag inherits the color at thatposition in the gradient. You can also click the ramp to add a flag.

■ Remove Flag button. Removes a selected flag from the ramp. You canalso remove a flag by dragging it off of the ramp.

Flag Properties

Sets the color, location, and opacity of the color flags.

■ Color. (Available for color flags only.) Sets the color represented by theselected flag. Use the slider to set the RGB values (red, green, and blue)or enter a value in the text box. Click the Color button to open the Colordialog box.

■ Location. Sets the location of the selected flag on the gradient ramp. Fora color flag, the percentage represents the relative location of the flagfrom the left end of the ramp. For blend flags, the percentage representsthe relative location of the flag with regards to the flags on either sideof it.

■ Opacity. (Available for color flags only.) Sets the see-through value ofthe selected flag to a scale between 0% and 100%. A value of 0% istransparent. A value of 100% is opaque. You can use this feature to createa mask effect.


Texture Properties

When Texture is selected in the Fill Type list, the Texture properties aredisplayed.


Texture Swatch

Displays a sample of the selected texture fill.

Browse

Displays the Open dialog box, where you can find a file with a new texture.You can also open this dialog box by double-clicking the texture preview.You can use BMP, GIF, JPG, PNG, PCX, TIF, or TGA files as textures.

Mapping

Sets the relative size and repetition of the texture pattern.

■ Scaled. Use this option to retain the real-world scale that matches thedrawing units you specified when you opened the drawing in Impression.If you resize the geometry, the texture fills the new area withoutchanging the scale of the pattern. You can adjust the scale of the textureimage by changing the Height and Width settings under Texture Scale.

Texture fill: Scaled, 63 x 63

Texture fill: Scaled, 120 x 120

■ Tiled. Use this option to specify the number of repetitions, or tiling, forthe texture pattern. If you resize the geometry, the texture stretches tofill the new area.


Texture fill: Tiled, 1 horizontal, 1 vertical

Texture fill: Tiled, 2 horizontal, 2 vertical

Texture fill: Tiled and mirrored, 2horizontal, 2 vertical

Texture Scale

(Available only when Mapping is set to Scaled.) Specifies the size of theimage used for tiling. The value indicates the unit of measurement, suchas inches or centimeters, set in the Document Setup dialog box.

■ Height. Specifies the height of the texture image in the current drawingunits.

■ Width. Specifies the width of the texture image in the current drawingunits.

■ Lock Scale. When the image is locked, preserves the aspect ratio of theheight and width settings. Changing one value automatically resizes theother value to avoid distortion. Click the image to unlock it if you wantto stretch the texture.

Number of Tiles

(Available only when Mapping is set to Tiled.) Specifies how many timesthe texture image is repeated in the filled area.

■ Horizontal. Sets the number of times the texture image is tiledhorizontally.Mirror (Horizontal). When selected, alternating horizontal tiles aremirrored.

■ Vertical. Sets the number of times the texture image is tiled vertically.


Mirror (Vertical). When selected, alternating vertical tiles are mirrored.

Angle

Sets the angle of rotation of the texture image.

Origin

Sets the point in the texture pattern from which the tiling begins.

■ Origin Preview Swatch. Displays the current selection in the Origin list.

Stroked Fill Properties

When Stroked is selected in the Fill Type list, the Stroked properties aredisplayed.

Angle

Sets the angle of the stroke.

■ Variance Percentage (Angle). Sets the variance percentage for the angleof the stroke. Use a higher percentage to achieve a more random look.


Arc

Sets the arc of the stroked line, using a percentage. Set 0% for flat lines. Set100% for the maximum curvature. You can also enter negative values tochange the direction of the arc.

■ Variance Percentage (Arc). Sets the variance percentage for the arc ofthe stroke. Use a higher percentage to achieve a more random look.

Spacing

Sets the spacing, in points, between strokes.

■ Variance Percentage (Spacing). Sets the variance percentage for thespace between the strokes. Use a higher percentage to achieve a morerandom look.

Overshoot

Sets the endpoints of the stroke to extend beyond the vector path by aspecified amount.


■ Variance Percentage (Overshoot). Sets the variance percentage for thestroke overshoot. Use a higher percentage to achieve a more randomlook.

Mirror

Creates a reversed image of the arced stroke at the midpoint of the filledgeometry.

Hatch Fill Properties

When Hatch Fill is selected in the Fill Type list, the Hatch Fill properties aredisplayed.

Scale

Sets the size of the hatch pattern based on a percentage of its original size.

Angle

Sets the angle of rotation applied to the hatch.

NOTE This angle, but not the pattern itself, is reflected in the style elementswatch displayed in the Style Editor style tree.


Origin

Sets the origin point for hatch tiling. Choices include Custom, Center, TopRight, Top Left, Bottom Left, and Bottom Right.

Noise Properties

When Noise is selected under Effect, the Noise properties are displayed.

Type

Sets the type of noise for the fill.

Opacity

Sets the see-through value of the noise to a scale between 0% and 100%. Avalue of 0% is transparent. A value of 100% is opaque.


Color Offset

Adjusts the hue of the noise, based on its position on the color wheelcompared to the color currently assigned to the fill. If you change the colorof the fill, the color offset is also adjusted.

Intensity Offset

Adjusts the intensity, or color saturation, of the noise. Higher numbersbrighten the noise. Lower numbers darken the noise.

Advanced Noise Properties

When Noise is selected under Effect, the Advanced Noise properties aredisplayed.

Noise Position

Sets the relative position of the mottling within the filled object.

■ Horizontal. Sets the horizontal positioning of the noise within the filledobject.

■ Vertical. Sets the vertical positioning of the noise within the filled object.


Adjust Grain

Adjusts the high-frequency noise, that is, the smaller, more granularblotching.

■ Amount. Sets the number of blotches, or grains in the noise pattern.Higher percentages result in a finer grain.

■ Contrast. Creates greater differentiation between light and dark. Higherpercentages result in more distinct noise edges.

■ Scale. Sets the size of the grain. Higher percentages result in a smallergrain.

Adjust Texture

Adjusts the low-frequency noise, that is the larger, underlying texture.

■ Amount. Sets the number of repetitions for the underlying texture.Higher percentages result in more repetitions.


■ Scale. Sets the size of the texture pattern. Higher percentages result insmaller patterns.


■ Squash. Distorts, or skews the texture.

Watercolor

When Watercolor is selected under Effect, the Watercolor properties aredisplayed.

Opacity

Sets the see-through values of the watercolor fill effects (the noise). With avalue of 0%, the noise is transparent; with a value of 100%, the noise isopaque.

NOTE This value is combined with the style opacity to provide the overalltransparency of the style.

Paper Grain

Simulates paper by setting the grain of the watercolor effect. The followingoptions are available:

■ Smooth

■ Regular

■ Coarse


■ Custom

Brush Style

Sets the general, underlying pattern for the noise pattern:

■ Soft

■ Faint

■ Camouflage

■ Large

■ Diagonal

■ Custom

Edge

Sets of the properties for the fill perimeter.

■ Width. Sets the width of the darkened edge of the fill.

■ Darkness. Sets the darkness of the fill perimeter.

■ Propagation. Sets where the darkened edge starts and ends.


Advanced Watercolor Properties

When Watercolor is selected under Effect, Advanced Watercolor Propertiesare displayed. These properties are the same as noise properties.

Color Offset

Adjusts the hue of the noise, based on its position on the color wheelcompared to the color currently assigned to the fill. If you change the colorof the fill, the color offset is also adjusted.

Intensity Offset

Adjusts the intensity, or color saturation, of the noise. Higher numbersbrighten the noise. Lower numbers darken the noise.


Noise Position

Sets the relative position of the mottling within the filled object.

■ Horizontal. Sets the horizontal positioning of the noise within the filledobject.

■ Vertical. Sets the vertical positioning of the noise within the filled object.

Adjust Paper Grain

Adjusts the high-frequency noise that defines the paper grain (the smaller,more granular blotching).

■ Amount. Sets the number of blotches, or grains in the noise pattern.Higher percentages result in a finer grain.


■ Scale. Sets the size of the grain. Higher percentages result in a smallergrain.


Adjust Brush Style

Adjusts the low-frequency noise that defines the brush style (the larger,underlying pattern).

■ Amount. Sets the number of repetitions for the underlying texture.Higher percentages result in more repetitions.


■ Scale. Sets the size of the texture pattern. Higher percentages result insmaller patterns.

■ Rotation. Sets the angle of the brush stroke.

■ Squash. Distorts, or skews the texture.

Stroke Properties (Style Editor)Sets the characteristics of a stroke.

Stroke Properties (Style Editor) | 647

Palettes menu ➤ Show/Hide Palettes (to display the dashboard) ➤ Inthe Style Editor, click Edit to open the Style Editor (If Close is displayed, the Style Editoris already open) ➤ In the style tree, click the properties flyout arrow next to a strokeelement






■ Styles Palette

■ Style Editor

When a stroke element is selected in the style tree, the Properties flyout displaysthe stroke properties.

Stroke Preview

Displays an example of the stroke element.

General Stroke Properties

Sets the properties common to all stroke types.


Color

Displays the color of the selected style element. To modify the color in theColor dialog box, click the color swatch or click the Color button.

Color Sliders

Updates the color of the selected style element. Drag the slider to set theRGB values (red, green, and blue). You can also enter a numeric value inthe text box to the right of the slider.

Opacity

Sets the see-through value of the selected style to a scale between 0% and100%. A value of 0% is transparent; a value of 100% is opaque. (This optionis not available for outline strokes.)

Weight

Sets the stroke thickness (lineweight) to a value from 0.1 to 1000 points.The default is 1 point.


Overshoot


Split Corners

If selected, creates overshoot at the corners of objects such as rectangles.

Media

Sets the stroke media, such as a Standard, Pencil, or Marker.

■ Standard. Sets the stroke to be a continuous linetype with no specialproperties. When this option is selected, additional Standard Stroke Fadeproperties are displayed in the Properties flyout.

■ Pencil. Sets the stroke to simulate pencil strokes. When this option isselected, additional Pencil properties are displayed in the Propertiesflyout.


■ Marker. Sets the stroke to simulate marker strokes. When this option isselected, additional Marker properties are displayed in the Propertiesflyout.

Endcap

Defines the style of the stroke start and endpoints.

The following options are available:

■ Standard. Sets squared start points and endpoints for open-ended strokes.

■ Arrows. Sets the endcaps to be arrows. If you select Arrows, additionalArrows properties are displayed in Properties flyout.

■ Round. Rounds both ends of open-ended strokes.

Gaps

Determines whether a stroke has gaps.

■ None. Displays the stroke as a solid line.

■ Dashed. Displays the stroke as a dashed line. If this option is selected,additional Dashed properties are displayed in the Properties flyout.

■ Random. Displays the stroke with irregularly drawn spaces betweensegments. If this option is selected, additional Random properties aredisplayed in the Properties flyout.





NOTE You can save any element in the Stroke Properties (Style Editor) todisplay the saved stroke element in the Stroke Type list of the Import Wizardand Global Stroke dialog box.



Standard Stroke Fade Properties (Media)

When Standard is selected in the Media list, the Standard Stroke Fade propertiesare displayed. These properties enable you to develop overlapped stroke stylesfor stroked fills.

Start/End

Sets the distance from the endpoints at which the standard stroke starts tofade.


Side

Sets the distance from the sides, or edges of the strokes at which the standardstroke starts to fade.

Pencil Properties (Media)

When Pencil is selected in the Media list, the Pencil properties are displayed.

Hardness

Simulates the relative hardness of a pencil.

Darkness

Sets the saturation, or brightness, of the stroke.

Start/End Fade

Sets the length, in points, of the fade-in and fade-out at either end of thestroke.


Tilt

Simulates the angle of the pencil to the paper.

Paper

Simulates different types of paper. Choices include standard, pastel, coarse,and fine.

Marker Properties (Media)

When Marker is selected in the Media list, the Marker properties are displayed.

NOTE The variations in marker settings are more apparent in colors other thanblack.

Start/End

Sets the amount of saturation for the start and end of the marker stroke.


Paper

Simulates different types of paper. Choices include Bristol, Charcoal, andVellum.

Arrows Properties (Endcap)

When Arrows is selected in the Endcap list, the Arrows properties are displayed.

Start

Sets the type of arrowhead for the start of the line.

End

Sets the type of arrowhead for the end of the line.

Scale

Sets the scale of the arrowhead as a percentage of the weight of the stroke.


Dashed Properties (Gaps)

When Dashed is selected in the Gaps list, the Dashed properties are displayed.

Dash (3)

Sets the length, in points, of the displayed line segment. You can set lengthsfor up to three line segments.

Gap (3)

Sets the length, in points, of the gap, or open area, between line segments.You can set lengths for up to three gaps.

Variance Percentage

Sets the variance percentage for the dashes and gaps. Use a higher percentageto produce a more random look.


Random Properties (Gaps)

When Random is selected in the Gaps list, the Random properties are displayed.

Gap Size

Sets the length of the gaps between “pen-down” segments.

■ Variance Percentage (Gap Size). Sets the variance percentage for thegaps. Use a higher percentage to produce a more random look.

Gap Spacing

Sets the spacing between gaps, that is, the length of the line segments.

■ Variance Percentage (Gap Spacing). Sets the variance percentage forthe space between the gaps, that is, for the stroke segments. Use a higherpercentage to produce a more random look.

Outline Stroke Properties (Style Editor)Sets the characteristics of an outline stroke element within an appearancestyle.

Outline Stroke Properties (Style Editor) | 657

Palettes menu ➤ Show/Hide Palettes (to display the dashboard) ➤ Inthe Style Editor, click Edit to open the Style Editor (If Close is displayed, the Style Editoris already open) ➤ In the style tree, click the properties flyout arrow next to an outlinestroke element






■ Styles Palette


■ Style Editor

Stroke Preview

In the style tree, click the properties flyout arrow next to the outline strokeelement.

Outline Stroke Properties

Sets the properties common to outline strokes.


Weight

Sets the stroke thickness (lineweight) to a value from 0 to 1000 points.

Overshoot


Split Corners

If selected, creates overshoot at the corners of objects such as rectangles.

Endcap

Defines the style of the stroke start and endpoints.

The following options are available:

■ Standard. Sets a squared start point and endpoint for open-ended strokes.

■ Arrows. Sets the endcaps to be arrows. If you select Arrows, additionalArrows properties are displayed in Properties flyout.


■ Round. Rounds both ends of open-ended strokes.

Gaps

Determines whether a stroke has gaps.

■ None. Displays the stroke as a solid line.

■ Dashed. Displays the stroke as a dashed line. If this option is selected,additional Dashed properties are displayed in the Properties flyout.

■ Random. Displays the stroke with irregularly drawn spaces betweensegments. If this option is selected, additional Random properties aredisplayed in the Properties flyout.






Arrows Properties (Endcap)

When Arrows is selected in the Endcap list, the Arrows properties are displayed.


Start

Sets the type of arrowhead for the start of the line.

End

Sets the type of arrowhead for the end of the line.

Scale

Sets the scale of the arrowhead as a percentage of the weight of the stroke.

Dashed Properties (Gaps)

When Dashed is selected in the Gaps list, the Dashed properties are displayed.

Dash (3)

Sets the length, in points, of the displayed line segment. You can set lengthsfor up to three line segments.

Gap (3)

Sets the length, in points, of the gap, or open area, between line segments.You can set lengths for up to three gaps.

Variance Percentage

Sets the variance percentage for the dashes and gaps. Use a higher percentageto produce a more random look.

Random Properties (Gaps)

When Random is selected in the Gaps list, the Random properties are displayed.

Gap Size

Sets the length of the gaps between “pen-down” segments.

■ Variance Percentage (Gap Size). Sets the variance percentage for thegaps. Use a higher percentage to produce a more random look.


Gap Spacing

Sets the spacing between gaps, that is, the length of the line segments.

■ Variance Percentage (Gap Spacing). Sets the variance percentage forthe space between the gaps, that is, for the stroke segments. Use a higherpercentage to produce a more random look.

Effect Properties (Style Editor)Sets the characteristics of roughen and drop shadow elements within anappearance style.

When an effect element is selected in the style tree, the Properties flyoutdisplays the effect properties.

Roughen properties

Drop shadow properties

Palettes menu ➤ Show/Hide Palettes (to display the dashboard) ➤ Inthe Style Editor, click Edit to open the Style Editor (If Close is displayed, the Style Editoris already open) ➤ In the style tree, click the properties flyout arrow next to an effectelement


How To: ■ Procedures: Create and Modify Effects





■ Styles Palette

■ Style Editor

Roughen Properties

Sets the size and curvature of the roughen effect, which enhances thehand-drawn look by applying jitter, or wiggle, to the edges.

When the properties flyout arrow for a roughen effect is selected in the styletree, the roughen properties are displayed. The bass values define the generalpath that is adhered to by the more jagged treble, or jitter, aspect of the effect.

Treble

Sets jitter aspect of the roughen effect.

■ Height. Sets the average height for the treble, or jitter, aspect of theroughen effect.

Effect Properties (Style Editor) | 663

■ Frequency. Sets the number of zigzags per inch for the treble, or jitter,aspect of the roughen effect.

Bass

Sets the underlying curvature of the roughen effect.

■ Height. Sets the average height, in points, for the underlying curvature,or bass aspect.

■ Frequency. Sets the number of curves per inch for the underlyingcurvature, or bass aspect.







Drop Shadow Properties

Sets a drop shadow effect, which simulates a shadow by creating an offsetcopy of the geometry with special transparency.

When the properties flyout arrow for the drop shadow effect is selected in thestyle tree, the drop shadow properties are displayed.

Angle

Sets the angle of the drop shadow relative to the associated geometry.

Distance

Sets the distance, in points, that the drop shadow is drawn from thegeometry.

Opacity

Sets the see-through value of the selected style element to a scale between0% and 100%. A value of 0% is transparent. A value of 100% is opaque.

Fade

Sets the distance, in points, at which the shadow starts to fade. This valuespecifies the distance from the outer edge of the shadow.

Effect Properties (Style Editor) | 665

Internal

Draws the drop shadow on top of and inside the specified stroke or fill. Usethis option to give the geometry the appearance of a hole. This option worksbest with fill styles.

Cast Shadow

Connects the endpoints of the drop shadow to the corners of the originalgeometry and fills the enclosed area with shadow.

Color

Sets the color of the drop shadow. Click the swatch or the Color button toopen the Color dialog box.

Create New Stroke Dialog BoxSpecifies a stroke style to be used as a basis for an element added to the styletree.


Palettes menu ➤ Show/Hide Palettes (to display the dashboard) ➤ Inthe Style Editor, click Edit to open the Style Editor (If Close is displayed, the Style Editoris already open) ➤ Add Style Element button ➤ Create New Stroke






■ Styles Palette


■ Style Editor

Stroke Media Type

Sets the type of media (for example, Standard, Pencil, or Marker) to bedisplayed under Saved Elements.

Style Element Preview Image

Displays an image of the selected style element.

Create New Stroke Dialog Box | 667

Saved Elements

Displays the saved strokes that match the type selected under Stroke MediaType.

Create New Stroke Toolbar

Provides buttons that import and delete style elements.

■ Import Style Elements. Displays the Open dialog box, where youcan select an Impression file whose style elements you want to import.

■ Delete Selected Style Elements. Removes the selected styleelement. At least one element must always be present.

Create New Stroke Dialog Box: Shortcut MenuThe following table describes the options available when you right-click withinthe Create New Stroke dialog box.


(Available when a style swatch is selected.) Inserts a copyof the selected style element in the style elements list.

Duplicate

(Available when a style swatch is selected.) Displays an editbox in which you can enter a new name for the style ele-ment.

Rename

(Available when a style swatch is selected.) Removes theselected style element from the style elements list.

Delete

Specifies whether the displayed preview images are large,medium, or small. (The Small setting is unavailable whenIcon View with Text is selected.)

Thumbnail Size

Displays the names to the right of the preview images.List View


Displays the names beneath the preview images.Icon View with Text

Sorts the items in the style elements list by name.Sort by Name



Imports saved style elements from other Impression files.Import Presets

Create New Fill Dialog BoxSpecifies a fill style to be used as a basis for an element added to the style tree.

Palettes menu ➤ Show/Hide Palettes (to display the dashboard) ➤ Inthe Style Editor, click Edit to open the Style Editor (If Close is displayed, the Style Editoris already open) ➤ Add Style Element button ➤ Create New Fill


How To: ■ Procedures: Create and Modify Stand-ard Fill


■ Set Fill Styles


■ Styles Palette

Create New Fill Dialog Box | 669

■ Style Editor

Fill Type

Sets the type of fill (for example, Uniform, Gradient, or Textured) to bedisplayed under Saved Elements.



Saved Elements

Displays the saved fills that match the type selected under Fill Type.

Create New Fill Toolbar




Create New Fill Dialog Box: Shortcut MenuThe following table describes the options available when you right-click withinthe Create New Fill dialog box.



Duplicate


Rename


Delete


Thumbnail Size



Displays the names to the right of the images.List View





Create New Compound Fill Dialog BoxSpecifies a compound fill style to be used as a basis for an element added tothe style tree.

Menu access:

■ Palettes menu ➤ Show/Hide Palettes (to display the dashboard) ➤ In theStyle Editor, click Edit to open the Style Editor (If Close is displayed, the Style Editoris already open) ➤ Add Style Element button ➤ Create New Stroked Fill

Create New Compound Fill Dialog Box | 671

■ Palettes menu ➤ Show/Hide Palettes (to display the dashboard) ➤ In theStyle Editor, click Edit to open the Style Editor (If Close is displayed, the Style Editoris already open) ➤ Add Style Element button ➤ Create New Hatch Fill


How To: ■ Procedures: Create and Modify Com-pound Fill


■ Create and Modify Compound Fill


■ Styles Palette

■ Style Editor

Compound Fill Type

Sets the type of compound fill (for example, Stroked or Hatch) to bedisplayed under Saved Elements.



Saved Elements

Displays the saved compound fills that match the type selected underCompound Fill Type.

Create New Compound Fill Toolbar





Create New Compound Fill Dialog Box: Shortcut MenuThe following table describes the options available when you right-click withinthe Create New Compound Fill dialog box.



Duplicate


Rename


Delete


Thumbnail Size






Create New Outline Stroke Dialog BoxSpecifies an outline stroke style to be used as a basis for an element added tothe style tree.

Create New Outline Stroke Dialog Box | 673

Palettes menu ➤ Show/Hide Palettes (to display the dashboard) ➤ Inthe Style Editor, click Edit to open the Style Editor (If Close is displayed, the Style Editoris already open) ➤ Add Style Element button ➤ Create New Outline Stroke






■ Styles Palette

■ Style Editor

Outline Stroke Options

Sets the type of outline stroke (for example, Stroke and Fill or Stroke Only)to be displayed under Saved Elements.




Saved Elements

Displays the saved outline strokes that match the type selected under OutlineStroke Options.

Create New Outline Stroke Toolbar




Create New Outline Stroke Dialog Box: Shortcut MenuThe following table describes the options available when you right-click withinthe Create New Outline Stroke dialog box.



Duplicate


Rename


Delete


Thumbnail Size





Create New Outline Stroke Dialog Box | 675



Add Effect Dialog BoxSpecifies an effect, such as roughen or drop shadow, to be used as a basis foran element added to the style tree.

Palettes menu ➤ Show/Hide Palettes (to display the dashboard) ➤ Inthe Style Editor, click Edit to open the Style Editor (If Close is displayed, the Style Editoris already open) ➤ Add Style Element button ➤ Add Effect


How To: ■ Procedures: Create and Modify Effects




■ Styles Palette


■ Style Editor

Choose Effect

Sets the type of effect to display under Saved Effects (for example, Roughenor Drop Shadow).


Displays an image of the selected style element and how it affects the currentstyle.

Options

Specifies which style elements display the selected effect.

■ Apply to Entire Style. Sets the effect to influence all other elements inthe style.

■ Apply to Highlighted Style Element Only. (Available only when a styleelement is selected in the style tree.) Sets the effect to influence onlythe selected style element.

Saved Effects

Displays the saved effects that match the type selected under Choose Effect.

Add Effect Toolbar




Add Effect Dialog Box: Shortcut MenuThe following table describes the options available when you right-click withinthe Add Effect dialog box.



Duplicate

Add Effect Dialog Box | 677


(Available when a style swatch is selected.) Displays an editbox, where you can enter a new name for the style ele-ment.

Rename


Delete


Thumbnail Size






Resize Style Dialog BoxModifies various size-related style settings based on a percentage.


Palettes menu ➤ Show/Hide Palettes (to display the dashboard) ➤ Inthe Style Editor, click Edit to open the Style Editor (If Close is displayed, the Style Editoris already open) ➤ Move cursor over the properties flyout arrow next to the stylepreview image ➤ Resize Style




■ Construct Custom Styles


■ Styles Palette

■ Style Editor

Style Preview

Displays an image that shows how the modified percentage affects theselected style.

Resize Style

Sets the percentage for resizing the style settings.

Resize Style Dialog Box | 679

Include Drop Shadow effects

If selected, the percentage for resizing style settings specified in the ResizeStyle dialog box is applied to drop shadow effects.

Preview on Canvas

Updates the styles on the canvas as the percentage changes. Clear this optionto improve program performance.

How Style Settings Are Resized

The following settings are resized when you set a percentage in the ResizeStyle dialog box. Settings are modified within a specific range.

Stroke Settings

■ Weight

■ Overshoot

■ Marker: Start and End settings

■ Pencils: Start and End Fade settings

Outline Stroke Settings

■ Weight

■ Overshoot

■ Gap settings: Dashes, Gaps, Gap Size, Gap Spacing

Hatch Fill Settings

■ Scale

Stroked Fill Settings

■ Spacing

■ Overshoot

Roughen Effect Settings

■ Bass Height

■ Bass Frequency


■ Treble Height

■ Treble Frequency

Drop Shadow Effect Settings

■ Distance

■ Fade

Modify Style Color Dialog BoxModifies hue-related style settings of all color elements based on the hue offset.

Palettes menu ➤ Show/Hide Palettes (to display the dashboard) ➤ Inthe Style Editor, click Edit to open the Style Editor (If Close is displayed, the Style Editoris already open) ➤ Move cursor over the properties flyout arrow next to the stylepreview image ➤ Modify Style Color



Modify Style Color Dialog Box | 681




■ Styles Palette

■ Style Editor

Style Preview

Displays an image that shows how the modified hue offset affects theselected style.

Hue Offest

Sets the amount of hue offset that can be applied to all color elements ofthe style.


If selected, the hue offset specified in the Modify Style Color dialog box isapplied to drop shadow effects.

Preview on Canvas

Updates the styles on the canvas as the hue offset changes.

The following color components of a style are affected by the hue offset:

■ Stroke color

■ Outline Stroke (includes each color of nested stroke and fill element)

■ Uniform Fill color

■ Stroked Fill (includes each nested stroke)

■ Hatch Fill (includes each nested stroke)

■ All Gradient colors (includes each color flag of all gradient types)

■ Drop Shadow color

NOTE The color components of a style are not affected by the hue offset valuewhen the saturation or luminance value is set to 0.

Rotate Style Dialog BoxSimultaneously rotates all directional components of the current style basedon the rotation angle.


Palettes menu ➤ Show/Hide Palettes (to display the dashboard) ➤ Inthe Style Editor, click Edit to open the Style Editor (If Close is displayed, the Style Editoris already open) ➤ Move cursor over the properties flyout arrow next to the stylepreview image ➤ Rotate Style






■ Styles Palette

■ Style Editor

Style Preview

Displays an image that shows how the modified angle affects the selectedstyle.

Rotate Style Dialog Box | 683

Angle

Sets the amount of rotation that can be applied to all directional componentsof the style.


If selected, the amount of rotation specified in the Rotate Style dialog boxis applied to drop shadow effects.

Preview on Canvas

Updates the styles on the canvas as the angle changes.

The following style elements are affected by the rotate style parameter:

■ Stroked Fill

■ Hatch Fill

■ Texture Fill

■ Linear Gradient Fill

■ Watercolor effect

■ Drop Shadow effect

Save Style Element Dialog BoxSaves the current style element so that it can be reused in other styles.

Palettes menu ➤ Show/Hide Palettes (to display the dashboard) ➤ Inthe Style Editor, click Edit to open the Style Editor (If Close is displayed, the Style Editoris already open) ➤ Move cursor over the properties flyout arrow next to the styleelement ➤ Save Style Element







■ Styles Palette

■ Style Editor

Name

Specifies the name for the style element. Depending on the type, the savedelement becomes available in the following locations:

■ Stroke element: In the Create New Stroke dialog box, and as a stroketype you can specify in the Style Assignments panel of the DWG ImportWizard or the Import Options panel of the DWF Import Wizard.

■ Outline stroke element: In the Create New Outline Stroke dialog box.

■ Uniform, gradient, or texture fill element: In the Create New Fill dialogbox.

■ Stroked or hatch fill element: In the Create New Compound Fill dialogbox.

■ Drop shadow or roughen element: In the Add Effect dialog box.

Native Scale

Sets the default scale of the stroke you are saving. This setting determinesthe relative thickness, or weight, of the stroke when it is applied to geometrythat is imported or exported to Impression.The geometry changes proportionately to match the scale of the sketch thatcontains it. For example, if you export to Impression from anAutoCAD-based product, the scale of the stroke is adjusted to match thescale of the exported view.

Save Style Element Dialog Box | 685

Styles Palette

Stores and provides the interface for managing styles, which can be dragged to the Layerspalette.


F12 (Expands palette in the dashboard)


How To: ■ Procedures: Apply an Appearance Style

49

687

■ Procedures: Work with Style Elements

■ Procedures: Import Styles and StyleElements

■ Procedures: Create a Custom Style





■ Style Editor

■ Layers Palette

■ Block Editor

The Styles palette is displayed in both the standard workspace and in the Block Editor. Itsappearance and behavior are the same in both cases, except where otherwise noted.

Navigation Pane

Lists the various types of available styles.

The navigation pane is divided into three categories.

Libraries Lists styles that reference Saved Styles lists in other documents. (A library stylethat you assign to a layer or object is automatically copied to the Saved Styles list. Theoriginal style remains in the library set.)

If you modify a style in the original document, the change is updated in the library the nexttime you open the linked illustration. These changes do not alter library style copies thathave been applied to objects or layers. To apply the modification, save the library style againand choose to overwrite the saved style.

If you move or delete the file that contains the original styles, an error message is displayedthe next time you open the linked illustration. You can browse to the new location or selecta different file.

Search Filters Lists styles that are filtered by whether they are in use, saved, or meet specificsearch criteria.

■ Saved Styles includes any in-use styles, saved block styles, or saved library styles. Forsaved styles that are in use, a check mark is displayed in the lower-right corner of thestyle swatch.

688 | Chapter 49 Styles Palette

■ In Use Styles lists all styles that are currently assigned to a layer or object. If you deleteall the layers or objects that use a specific style, that style is removed from the set.The Saved Styles list displays all In Use styles.

■ Custom search filters list contains styles that match the search criteria you have set upand saved.

Block Styles Lists style sets that are assigned to inserted blocks. The list is sortedalphabetically by the name of the block. In the Block Editor workspace, the name of theselected block is red.

The block style swatches are displayed in the preview pane, just as standard appearancestyles are displayed. The following types of blocks get special treatment:

■ By Insert Layer (Layer 0). Imported blocks with geometry created on Layer 0 (zero) areBy Insert Layer. That is, they inherit any style assigned to the layer where they areinserted. You cannot modify By Insert Layer block styles. You only can change blockgeometry with this style by modifying the style assigned to the standard layer.

■ Nested blocks. Blocks contained by other blocks are edited separately from the blocksthat contain them. To access a nested block for editing, open the block in the BlockEditor and double-click the nested geometry.

■ Images. If the block includes images in formats such as PNG, BMP, or JPG, you cannotedit it.

The following icons identify these types of blocks:

You can save Block styles and apply them to other layers and objects. If two styles have thesame name but different settings, you can choose whether to replace the saved style orrename the block style you are saving.

| 689

Hide/Show Navigation List Expands or collapses the navigation pane to displayand hide the lists of style sets.

Navigation Pane toolbar Provides tools to create and manage styles.

■ Link to Styles Library

Displays the Import Styles/Open Libraries dialog box, where you can select anImpression file whose Saved Styles list you want to include as a library.

■ Search Styles

Displays the Search Styles dialog box, where you can set criteria for custom stylelists.


Styles Palette Navigation Pane: Shortcut MenusThe following options are available when you right-click the Libraries group or an item onthe Libraries list in the navigation pane.

Navigation Pane: Libraries Group




Displays the Import Styles/Open Libraries dialog box, where youcan select an Impression file whose Saved Styles list you want to

Open Library

link to the current palette. You can also specify individual styles tobe added to the Saved Styles list.

Navigation Pane: Libraries List


Displays the Import Styles/Open Libraries dialog box, where youcan select an Impression file whose Saved Styles list you want to

Open Library

link to the current palette. You can also specify individual styles tobe added to the Saved Styles list.

Displays the Export Styles dialog box, where you can export thestyles in the selected library to a file that serves as a library forother illustrations.

Export Library

Removes the selected library link from the Styles palette.Close Library




Thumbnail Size


| 691





Specifies whether a current library is included in all new drawings.Always Keep ThisLibrary Open

Adds all contents of a selected library to the Saved Styles list.Save All LibraryContent

Navigation Pane: Search Filters Group




Displays the Search Styles dialog box, where you can set criteriafor custom style lists.

Create New Filter

Navigation Pane: Search Filters List


Opens the Search Styles dialog box, where you can set criteria forcustom style lists.

Create New Filter

Opens the Export Styles dialog box, where you can export thestyles in the selected search filter to a file that serves as a library forother illustrations.

Export Styles






Thumbnail Size




Arranges preview images in alphabetical order within each category.Sort by Name

(Available only for custom search filters.) Specifies whether a customsearch filter is included in all new drawings.

Always Keep ThisSearch Filter

(Available only for custom search filters.) Removes the selectedsearch filter from the Search Filters list.

Delete Search Fil-ter

Navigation Pane: Block Styles Group




Navigation Pane: Block Styles List


Displays the Export Styles dialog box, where you can export thefiles in the selected block to a file that serves as a block library forother illustrations.

Export Styles



| 693



Thumbnail Size





Preview Pane

Displays styles of the type selected in the navigation pane.

Preview Swatches Displays images and names of the styles that belong to the list selectedin the navigation pane.

You can use the shortcut menu to modify the display of style swatches.

Preview Pane toolbar Provides tools to create and manage styles.

■ Show/Hide Navigation

Expands or collapses the navigation pane to display and hide the lists of stylesets.

■ Create New Style

(Available only on the Search Filters lists.) Creates a style based on the defaultstyle. In the standard workspace, the new style is listed in the Saved Styles list. In theBlock Editor workspace, the new style is saved with the styles for the current block.

■ Save Styles/Add to Saved Styles

(Not available in the Saved Styles and In Use Styles lists.) Saves the selected styleto the Saved Styles list.

■ Duplicate Style


(Available only on the Search Filters list.) Creates a style based on the selectedstyle. Duplicates are created for all selected styles. In the Block Editor, styles are savedwith the styles for the current block.

■ Create Style Library from Selection/Launch Style Library Wizard

Displays the Style Library Wizard on page 707, where you can create a customamount of style librarys based on the existing starting style.

■ Link to Styles Library

Displays the Import Styles/Open Libraries dialog box, where you can select anImpression file whose Saved Styles list you want to include as a library.

■ Export Styles

Displays the Export Styles dialog box, where you can export the selected styles toa file that can serve as a library file for other illustrations.

■ Delete Styles

(Available only on Saved Styles list.) Removes the selected appearance style(s.) Ifthe style is currently in use, the Delete Appearance Styles dialog box is displayed. Youcan also delete a style by dragging its image to the Delete button.

Preview Pane: Shortcut MenusPreview Pane: Libraries List


Saves the selected styles to the Saved Styles list and opens theSaved Styles preview list.

Add to SavedStyles

Displays the Export Styles dialog box, where you can export theselected styles to a file that can serve as a library file for other illus-trations.

Export Styles

| 695


Opens the Style Library Wizard dialog box on page 707, where youcan generate a custom amount of style libraries based on the exist-ing starting style

Create Style Lib-rary from Selec-tion


Thumbnail Size





Preview Pane: Search Filters


On the canvas, selects all instances of the selected styles.Select All Instances

Displays the Export Styles dialog box, where you can export thestyles in the selected style set to a file that can serve as a style libraryfile for other illustrations.

Export Styles

Opens the Style Library Wizard dialog box on page 707, where youcan generate a custom amount of style libraries based on the ex-isting starting style

Create Style Lib-rary from Selection

(Available only in the Saved Styles list when no swatch is selected.)Creates a duplicate of the default (standard stroke) style. The new

Create New

style is assigned an incremental number such as Style 2, Style 3,and so on.

(Available only for unsaved files in a filters list.) Saves the selectedstyles to the Saved Styles list and opens the Saved Styles previewlist.

Save Styles



Makes a copy of the selected style, adding an incremental numberto the end of the name, such as style_name 1, style_name 2, andso on.

Duplicate

Opens a text box in which you can revise the name of the selectedstyle.

Rename

(Available for saved styles only.) Removes the selected styles fromthe styles list. You cannot remove a style that has been applied toan object or layer.

Delete

Removes all styles that are not in use in the illustration.Purge UnusedSaved Styles


Thumbnail Size




Arranges style preview images in alphabetical order within eachcategory.

Sort by Name

Preview Pane: Block Styles


Saves the styles in the selected block to the Saved Styles list andopens the Saved Styles preview list.

Add to SavedStyles

In the Block Editor drawing area, selects all instances of the selectedstyles.

Select All Instances

Displays the Export Styles dialog box, where you can export thestyles in the selected block to a file that can serve as a style libraryfile for other illustrations.

Export Styles

| 697


(Available when no swatch is selected.) Creates a duplicate of thedefault (standard stroke) style. The new style is assigned an incre-mental number such as Style 2, Style 3, and so on.

Create New

Makes a copy of the selected style, adding an incremental numberto the end of the name, such as style_name 1, style_name 2, andso on.

Duplicate

Displays a text box in which you can revise the name of the selec-ted style.

Rename

Removes the selected styles from the styles list for the currentblock. You cannot remove a style that has been applied to thecurrent block.

Delete

Removes all styles that are not in use in the current block.Purge UnusedStyles


Thumbnail Size




Arranges style preview images in alphabetical order within eachcategory.

Sort by Name

Related Dialog Box

Search Styles Dialog BoxSets the filter criteria for adding a filtered list of styles to the Search Filter liston the Styles palette navigation pane.


Palettes menu ➤ Show/Hide Palettes (to display the dashboard) ➤ Inthe Styles palette navigation pane, click the Open New Search Filter button ➤ If thenavigation pane is closed, select Search Styles from the drop-down list


How To: ■ Procedures: Apply an Appearance Style


■ Procedures: Import Styles and StyleElements

■ Procedures: Create a Custom Style





■ Style Editor

Search Styles Dialog Box | 699

■ Layers Palette

Search By

Sets the criteria for the custom search filter. The Search Filter area changesto be either a text box or a drop-down list, depending on your choice.Options include the following:

■ Style Name. Includes styles whose titles match the criteria you enter inthe Search Filter text box.

■ Media Type. Includes styles that have the media types you select (suchas standard, pencil, or marker strokes.) Filtered styles include outlinestrokes or stroked fills that contain the selected media type.

■ Style Type. Includes specific style types (such as stroked fill, or styleswith drop shadows).

Search Filter

Narrows the search according to the selection under Search By.

■ If Style Name is selected, displays a text box, where you can enter searchcriteria. You can enter any character, including wild-card characters.

■ Clear Text Box button. (Available only when one or more charactershave been entered.) Clears all characters from the text box.

■ If Media Type is selected, displays a list with the following options:

■ Pencil Styles

■ Marker Styles

■ Standard Media Styles

■ If Style Type is selected, displays a list with the following options:

■ Stroke only

■ Outline Stroke only

■ Fill only

■ Uniform Fill only

■ Gradient Fill only

■ Stroked Fill only


■ Hatch Fill only

■ Styles with Drop Shadow

■ Styles with Roughen effect

Keep New Filter in Styles Palette Filter List Until I Delete It

Adds the filter to the navigation list in the Styles palette, where it remainsuntil it is deleted.If the check box is not selected, the filter is temporarily added to the list(in italics), and is removed when another item on the list is selected.

Export Styles Dialog BoxExports any type of style to the Saved Styles list in a blank Impression file,which can then be used as a style library.

Palettes menu ➤ Show/Hide Palettes (to display the dashboard) ➤ Inthe Styles palette navigation pane, right-click a style list name ➤ Export Styles

Export Styles Dialog Box | 701


How To: ■ Procedures: Import Styles and StyleElements



■ Import Styles and Style Elements



■ Style Editor

■ Layers Palette

Places List






Navigation Toolbar



Save In Displays the current folder or drive. Click the arrow to display thefolder path and to navigate to drives, networks, or other locations.













Files Browser


Preview

Displays an image of the selected file when you choose Views ➤ Thumbnailsin the dialog box.

File Name

Specifies the name of the style set you are exporting.

Files of Type

Displays the type of file to be exported. You can only export Impression files(IRF).

Save

Saves the selection to the Saved Styles list in a new, blank Impression file.

Import Styles/Open Libraries Dialog BoxSpecifies a file that contains a set of saved styles to be added to the Librarieslist.

Import Styles/Open Libraries Dialog Box | 703

Palettes menu ➤ Show/Hide Palettes (to display the dashboard) ➤ Inthe Styles palette navigation pane, click Libraries ➤ Open Libraries icon.








■ Style Editor

■ Layers Palette


Places List






Navigation Toolbar















Import Styles/Open Libraries Dialog Box | 705

Files Browser


Preview

Displays images of the blocks contained in the selected file when Views ➤

Thumbnails is active.

■ Deselect All. Clears the selection from all selected blocks.

■ Select All. Selects all blocks.

File Name


Files of Type

Filters the list of files by file type. When you open files, Files of Type filtersthe format types to include in the list.

Open File as External Library

Adds the saved styles in the selected Impression drawing as a library in theLibraries section of the Styles palette.

Copy Selected Files to Palette

Adds a copy of any styles selected in the Preview area to the saved styles inthe Styles palette of the current drawing.


Displays the alternative name assigned to the selected file to identify the styleset. You can change this name in the Document Setup dialog box.


Style Library WizardLeads you through the options for generating a custom amount of style librariesbased on the existing starting style.

Menu access:

■ Tools menu ➤ Style Library Wizard

Keyboard access:

■ F7

Palettes menu ➤ Show/Hide Palettes (to display the dashboard) ➤ Inthe Styles palette navigation pane, from the drop-down list, select a style library ➤

Select a style ➤ Right-click to display the shortcut menu ➤ Select Create Libraryfrom Style Selection.

Style Library Wizard | 707








■ Style Editor

■ Layers Palette

Each panel in the wizard provides options for creating new style libraries bygenerating multiple variations of an existing style. You can proceed throughall the panels by clicking the Next button. You can also modify specific panelsby clicking the navigation list on the left side of the wizard.

Style Library Wizard Panels


■ Introduction

■ Starting Style

■ Color Modification Rules

■ Name and Location

Introduction (Style Library Wizard)Provides a brief description of Style Library.


Menu access:


Keyboard access:

■ F7







Introduction (Style Library Wizard) | 709


■ Style Editor

■ Layers Palette

Don’t Show this Panel Again

If selected, the next time you use this wizard, the Introduction panel willnot display.

Starting Style (Style Library Wizard)Displays the name and a preview of the style that is used as a template forgenerating new style libraries.

Menu access:



Keyboard access:

■ F7








■ Style Editor

■ Layers Palette

Starting Style Panel (No Starting Style Selected)

If no starting style or multiple styles have been selected in the Styles palettebefore launching the Style Library Wizard, displays a panel that provides anoption to select a starting style.

Starting Style (Style Library Wizard) | 711

Select Style From Styles Palette

Displays the Styles palette, where you can select a starting style for the StyleLibrary.

Starting Style Panel (Starting Style Selected in the Styles Palette)

If a starting style has been selected in the Styles palette before launching theStyle Library Wizard, displays a panel with the following options:


Style Preview/Name

Displays name and an image of the style selected in the Styles palette beforelaunching the Style Library Wizard.

Select Other

Provides an option to select a different style after a starting style has alreadybeen selected.

Specify the Number of Styles Created

Sets the number of styles created for the Style Library.

Apply the Same Color Modification Rules to all the Style Elements

If this option is selected, same color modification rules are applied to allthe style elements in the Color Modification Rules (Style Library Wizard)on page 714.

Apply Different Color Modification Rules to Individual Style Elements

If this option is selected, different color modification rules are applied toindividual style elements in the Color Modification Rules (Style LibraryWizard) on page 714.

Starting Style (Style Library Wizard) | 713

Color Modification Rules (Style Library Wizard)Specifies the color modification rules applied to style elements.

Menu access:


Keyboard access:

■ F7









■ Style Editor

■ Layers Palette

Color Modification Rules panel (Apply the Same Color ModificationRules to all the Style Elements)

Specifies the color modification rules applied to all style elements.

NOTE This panel is displayed if ‘Apply the same color modification rules to all thestyle elements’ option is selected in the Starting Style (Style Library Wizard) onpage 710.

Style Library Preview

Displays images of all styles generated for the Style Library.

Specify Color Modification Rule (drop-down)

Displays a list of saved color modification rules.

Color Modification Rules (Style Library Wizard) | 715

Save Color Modification Rule As

Displays the Save Modification Rule As dialog box. In the Save ModificationRule As dialog box, you can specify a name for the color modification rule.

Delete

Removes the custom color modification rule from the list.

Color Modification Range

Sets the hue, saturation and luminosity of each color element.

Color Modification Rules panel (Apply Different ColorModification Rules to Individual Style Elements)

Specifies the different color modification rules applied to individual styleelements.

NOTE This panel is displayed if “Apply different color modification rules toindividual style elements” option is selected in the Starting Style (Style LibraryWizard) on page 710.

Select Style Element to Modify

Displays a list of style elements contained within the starting style.


NOTE The style elements without color are not affected by color modificationrules.

Specify Color Modification Rule for each Selected Style Element

Displays a list of saved color modification rules.

Name and Location (Style Library Wizard)Specifies the name and save location of the Style Library.

Menu access:


Keyboard access:

■ F7

Name and Location (Style Library Wizard) | 717








■ Style Editor

■ Layers Palette

Style Library Name

Displays the name of the Style Library.

Style Name

Displays the naming convention for new styles created for the Style Library.

Save Style Library In

Displays the save location for the Style Library file.

Browse

Displays the Browse for Folder dialog box, in which you can specify a newsave location for the Style Library.


Text Properties Palette

Displays settings that change font formatting for selected text.

Access:

■ Palettes menu ➤ Text Properties

■ Displayed automatically when you create or select text


How To: ■ Procedures: Modify Text Content andFormat


■ Modify Text Content and Format


■ Properties Palette

■ Text Tool

50

719

Formatting Options

Sets the formatting for selected text characters.

Select All Text Objects Selects all text in the illustration, not including text containedin blocks. Use this option when you want to uniformly format or modify all text.

Font Sets the font type of selected text.

Font Size Sets the font size, in points, for selected text. This value represents the text sizerelative to the printed page, and is independent of the scale set for the geometry in thesketch.

NOTE You can also modify text size by changing the Height and Width settings in the Size panelof the Properties palette. Those settings represent drawing units. Use them only to scale the textrelative to objects in the illustration. Changes to the Height and Width settings affect the FontSize setting.

Text Lineweight (Available only for SHX fonts.) Assigns a lineweight to importedtext that uses an SHX font.

The default lineweight is 0.71 points. If the original lineweight was 0 (zero), a lineweightof 0.1 points is assigned.

You can select a preset weight or enter a custom value.

Bold Turns the boldface character setting on and off.

Italics Turns the italics character setting on and off.

Underline Turns the underline character setting on and off.

Justification Sets text alignment to left, centered, or right.

The centered and right justification is not available for SHX font types with a Vertical textdirection.

720 | Chapter 50 Text Properties Palette

Vertical (Available only for SHX fonts.) Sets the vertical or horizontal orientationof text characters and rows. Left-to-right horizontal rows become top-to-bottom, left-to-rightvertical columns. Characters do not rotate.

If the selected text is a mixture of SHX and TrueType fonts, this option is not available. Ifyou change the font of the text after you have made it vertical, you can change the textback to a horizontal position. However, the button is then no longer available.

This option available for SHX fonts that had vertical capabilities in the original drawing.

Character Map Opens the Windows Character Map dialog box, where you canassign special characters such as © or ®.

Stack Stacks selected text vertically based on the formula you enter:

Convert Text to Outlines Converts text objects to geometry, which you can stylize.You cannot edit or format the content of converted text.

Width Factor Sets the horizontal width of the characters without changing theheight.

| 721

Tracking Sets the horizontal distance between selected characters. The default is 1.Increase the value to increase the spacing between characters. The permitted range is 0.75to 4.

Leading Sets the vertical spacing (in points) between rows of selected text. Thepermitted range is 0.25 to 4.

Font Color Sets the font color of selected text. This property does not affect the layerappearance style.

722 | Chapter 50 Text Properties Palette

Toolbox

Provides a consolidated interface for drawing, selection, and navigation tools.

Palettes menu ➤ Toolbar


How To: ■ Procedures: Draw a Line

■ Procedures: Draw a Rectangle

■ Procedures: Draw an Ellipse

■ Procedures: Draw a Polygon

■ Procedures: Draw a Spline

■ Procedures: Draw a Freehand Path


51

723

■ Procedures: Select Objects

■ Procedures: Create Text

■ Procedures: Align a Single Object to aPoint or Axis

■ Procedures: Pan to Shift the Canvas

■ Procedures: Zoom to Change Magni-fication


■ Draw Geometry

■ Select Geometry and Layers

■ Add Text

■ Align Geometry

■ Navigate the Canvas



The Toolbox is displayed under the menu bar.

Click the tool to use it. Press ESC or right-click to end the current operation. The CTRL keytemporarily activates the Object Selection tool.

Tools in the Toolbox

Align ToolMoves an object to coincide with one or two alignment points.

724 | Chapter 51 Toolbox

Access:

■ Toolbox ➤

■ Tools menu ➤ Modify ➤ Align

A


How To: ■ Procedures: Align a Single Object to aPoint or Axis

■ Procedures: Align a Set of ObjectsAlong an Axis

■ Procedures: Distribute GeometryEvenly

■ Procedures: Adjoin Edges of Geometry


■ Reposition and Resize Geometry


■ Align and Distribute Window

■ Toolbox

The results of using this tool differ, depending on whether you match onepoint or two.

Align Tool | 725

1-point alignment

2-point alignment


Align Tool Properties

Click the flyout properties arrow beneath the tool to open the properties flyoutpanel.

Scale Geometry

Toggles how the selected geometry is scaled for two-point alignment. Selectthis option to resize the points on the selected object to match the targetpoints. The selected object retains its aspect ratio as it is proportionatelyresized.If this option is cleared, the selected object retains its original size after atwo-point alignment.

Keyboard Shortcuts: Align Tool


Activates the Align tool.CanvasA

Constrains point selection to or-thogonal (90-degree) angles.

Alignment pointson canvas

ClickSHIFT+

Area Fill ToolFills a closed area with the appearance style of the current layer.

Area Fill Tool | 727

Access:

■ Toolbox ➤

■ Tools menu ➤ Stylize ➤ Area Fill

Access:

■ H (point fill)

■ N (line fill)

■ W (window fill)

■ J (freehand fill)


How To: ■ Procedures: Insert Area Fill

■ Procedures: Modify Area Fill


■ About Area Fill

■ Insert Area Fill

■ Modify Area Fill



■ Styles Palette

■ Power Fill Tool

Area Fill Tool Properties

Click the flyout properties arrow beneath the tool to open the properties flyoutpanel. When the Line, Window, or Freehand area fill method is selected, itsicon replaces the default Point icon in the Toolbox. The default icon isdisplayed again as soon as you begin another activity.


Area Fill Point

(Default) Fills an area specified by clicking within a closed boundary.

Area Fill Line

Fills a closed area specified by dragging a line across the outerboundaries of closed areas.

Area Fill Window

Fills a closed area specified in one of the following ways:

■ Enclosure window. When you drag from left to right, closed areas thatare entirely within the solid-line red bounding box are filled.


■ Crossing window. When you drag from right to left, closed areas whoseouter boundaries are crossed or are within the red, dashed-line boundingbox are filled.

Area Fill Freehand

Fills a closed area specified by dragging a freehand line across theouter boundaries of closed areas.

Gap Tolerance

Sets the maximum gap that can be ignored for objects that are used as fillboundaries. Red lines extending from the endpoints of the strokes identify


the extents of the current tolerance. These gap tolerance lines are displayedonly when an area fill tool is selected.

NOTE Gaps resulting from appearance style properties (such as a dash-linestroke), do not affect application of an area fill.

Changing this value also affects the Power Fill tool.

Precision

Sets how closely the area fill object adheres to its boundaries. Specify ahigher number to obtain more precision. Specify a lower number to improveprogram performance.

Show Highlighting

Displays gray highlights when the cursor passes over areas that are eligibleto be filled. Turn off this option to improve program performance.


Create Individual Area Fills

Inserts fill so that each insertion is a separate object. You might want toturn off this option when inserting gradient or patterned fills that shouldhave the appearance of a contiguous pattern.

If your canvas is large (for example, more than 1,400 square inches) youmight want to turn this option off to improve program performance.

Keyboard Shortcuts: Area Fill Tool


Activates the Area Fill tool, Pointoption.

H

Activates the Area Fill tool, Lineoption.

N

Activates the Area Fill tool, Win-dow option.

W



Activates the Area Fill tool,Freehand option.

J

When Area Fill tool is active,toggles Show Highlighting.

ALT+G

When Area Fill tool is active,toggles Create Individual AreaFills.

ALT+I

Creates successive area fill ob-jects that behave as a single ob-ject (for pattern continuity).

Within selected fillboundaries (Pointoption only)

ClickSHIFT+

Removes an individual area fillobject.

A filled areaClickALT+

Removes the last selected areafrom the fill set.

When using the Lineoption of the AreaFill tool

BACKSPACE

Cancels the fill operation.Before the final pointis confirmed

ESC

Ellipse ToolDraws ellipses or circles.

Access:

■ Toolbox ➤

■ Tools menu ➤ Geometry ➤ Ellipse

Ellipse Tool | 733

C


How To: ■ Procedures: Draw an Ellipse


■ Draw an Ellipse


■ Toolbox

The Ellipse tool has no unique properties.

Keyboard Shortcuts: Ellipse Tool


Activates the Ellipse tool.C

Constrains ellipse to be a circle.CanvasClick or dragSHIFT+

Draws ellipse from the center.CanvasClick or dragALT+

Freehand ToolDraws freehand paths that closely follow the cursor movements.


Access:

■ Toolbox ➤

■ Tools menu ➤ Geometry ➤ Freehand

F


How To: ■ Procedures: Draw a Freehand Path

■ Procedures: Modify a Freehand Path


■ Draw Freehand


■ Toolbox

Freehand Tool Properties


Smooth

Sets the amount of smoothing to be applied to the path. Higher numbersresult in smoother paths.

Precision

Sets the relationship between the distance that the mouse is moved andthe location of the control points. Higher values result in smoother andsimpler paths.

Close Curve

Specifies whether freehand paths will be closed automatically when freehandcreation is complete.

■ Yes. Automatically connects the start points and endpoints of paths youcreate.

Freehand Tool | 735

■ No (default). Leaves paths open unless the last point you click is thestart point.

Keyboard Shortcuts: Freehand Tool


Activates the Freehand tool.F

Constrains mouse movements to45-degree increments.

CanvasDragSHIFT+

Keyboard Shortcuts: Extended Freehand Modification


Activates extended freehand-editmode and makes the followingactivities possible.

Spline objectClickFCTRL+

Extends the object along the free-hand path.

Endpoint of openobject

Drag

Redirects the object’s shape to fol-low the new freehand path.

From a point onthe object to an-

Drag

other point onthe object

Creates a new freehand path.From a point onthe object to a

Drag

point off the ob-ject

Layer Selection ToolSelects all objects on a layer.


Access:

■ Toolbox ➤

■ Tools menu ➤ Select Layers

Keyboard Access:

■ CTRL+click

■ CTRL+drag

■ V


How To: ■ Procedures: Select and Display Layersand Sketches

■ Procedures: Select Objects




■ Toolbox

Layer Selection Tool Properties


Layer Selection Tool | 737

Selection Mode

Sets the method for selecting objects.

■ Crossing. Selects objects that the rectangular window encloses or crosses.

■ Window. Selects objects that the rectangular window encloses.

■ Window / Crossing (default). Determines the selection method basedon the direction of the drag. Dragging left to right creates a windowselection. Dragging right to left creates a crossing selection.

Arrow Key Nudge

Sets the distance, in drawing units, that an object moves when you pressan arrow key.


Shift+Arrow Key Nudge

Sets the distance, in drawing units, that an object moves when you pressSHIFT+arrow key.

Scale Styles

Toggles whether the settings in a style will be scaled proportionately whenyou resize an object or move it to a sketch with a different scale. For example,if you scale an object 50%, various settings in the style are also scaled 50%for that object. This option does not create a new style.

NOTE You can also change this setting on the status bar, in the properties flyoutfor the Object Selection tool or in the Transform palette.

Area Fill Anchors

Displays the area fill anchors for area fill objects within a selected layer.These anchors identify a central point from which fill is radiated. They areused to determine how area fill objects are regenerated after you use CADUpdate to refresh an illustration after the original drawing is modified.Anchors are displayed differently, depending on how the fill was created.

Keyboard Shortcuts: Layer Selection Tool

ResultActionKey

Activates the Layer Selection tool.V

Cancels the current selection.ESC

Selects all objects on the layer.Click an unselectedobject

Layer Selection Tool | 739

ResultActionKey

Selects and moves all objects on the layer.Click and drag an unse-lected object

Clears all selections.Click or drag across anarea with no objects

Adds all unselected objects on the layer to theselection set or removes all selected objectson the layer from the selection set.

Click an objectSHIFT +

Adds and moves unselected objects on thelayer or removes all objects on the layer fromthe selection set.

Click and drag acrossobjects

SHIFT+

Selects individual objects.Click an unselectedobject

CTRL+

Selects object segments, displaying controlpoints.

Click a selected objectCTRL+

Selects individual objects, not all objects onthe layer.

Drag across objectsCTRL+

Adds or removes individual objects from theselection set. (Activates the Object Selectiontool.)

Click or drag acrossobjects

CTRL+SHIFT+

Selects all objects on the canvas.CTRL+A

Constrains movements to 45-degree incre-ments.

Drag to move a selec-tion

SHIFT+

Creates a copy and moves it.Drag to move a selec-tion

ALT+

Constrains rotation to 45-degree increments.Drag to rotate a selec-tion

SHIFT+

Rotates each object in the selection about itsown center.

Drag to rotate a selec-tion

ALT+


ResultActionKey

Enforces uniform scaling.Drag to resize objectsSHIFT+

Line ToolDraws straight lines.

Access:

■ Toolbox ➤

■ Tools menu ➤ Geometry ➤ Line

L


How To: ■ Procedures: Draw a Line


■ Draw a Line


■ Toolbox

Line Tool Properties


Line Tool | 741

Connect Line Segments

Creates sequential line segments as single, usually continuous, splinesinstead of as separate spline objects.

Keyboard Shortcuts: Line Tool


Activates the Line tool.L

Constrains mouse movements to45-degree increments.

CanvasClick or dragSHIFT+

Draws line from the center.CanvasClick or dragALT+

Match Properties ToolCopies style, layer, and text properties from one object to another.

Access:

■ Toolbox ➤

■ Tools menu ➤ Modify ➤ Match Properties

M


How To: ■ Procedures: Match Styles

■



■ Match Styles


■ Toolbox

■ Styles Palette

Match Properties Tool Properties

Sets which properties of the source object are applied to the objects you selectnext (the target objects). For appearance styles, the source can also be a swatchon the Styles palette. At least one option is selected at all times.

Layer

Moves the target object to the layer of the source object.If you leave this option blank and the new object style does not match thelayer style, Impression applies the matched style as a style override.

Style

(Available only for geometric objects.) Changes the style of the target objectto match the style of the source object.

If the Layer option is on and you select a block or image as the source, thetarget object acquires the layer and layer style. However, if you select a blockor image as the target, the layer, but not the style, is matched.

Text

(Available only for text objects.) Changes the properties of the target textto match the properties of the source text.If the source text has more than one set of properties, Impression copiesonly the properties of the first character.

Match Properties Tool | 743

Keyboard Shortcuts: Match Properties Tool


Activates the Match Properties tool.M

Switches from the paintbrush tothe eyedropper so that you canclick another style.If the eyedropper is active, dis-misses the tool.

CanvasESC

If the paintbrush is active, dismissesthe tool.

ENTER

Dismisses the Match Properties toolCanvasESC+ESC

Object Selection ToolSelects objects and object groups.

Access:

■ Toolbox ➤


■ Tools menu ➤ Select Objects

Keyboard Access:

■ O

■ CTRL


How To: ■ Procedures: Select Objects





■ Toolbox

Object Selection Tool Properties


Selection Mode

Sets the method for selecting objects.

■ Crossing. Selects objects that the rectangular window encloses or crosses.

■ Window. Selects objects that the rectangular window encloses.

■ Window / Crossing (default). Determines the selection method basedon the direction of the drag. Dragging left to right creates a windowselection. Dragging right to left creates a crossing selection

Object Selection Tool | 745

Arrow Key Nudge

Sets the distance, in drawing units, that an object moves when you pressan arrow key.

Shift+Arrow Key Nudge

Sets the distance, in drawing units, that an object moves when you pressSHIFT+arrow key.

Scale Styles

Toggles whether the settings in a style will be scaled proportionately whenyou resize an object or move it to a sketch with a different scale. For example,if you scale an object 50%, various settings in the style are also scaled 50%for that object. This option does not create a new style.

NOTE You can also change this setting on the status bar, in the properties flyoutfor the Layer Selection tool or in the Transform palette.

Area Fill Anchors

Displays the area fill anchors for selected area fill objects. These anchorsidentify a central point from which fill is radiated. They are used to


determine how area fill objects are regenerated after you use CAD Updateto refresh an illustration after the original drawing is modified.Anchors are displayed differently, depending on how the fill was created.

Keyboard Shortcuts: Object Selection Tool

ResultActionKey

Activates the Object Selection tool.O

Activates the Object Selection tool.CTRL

Cancels the current selection.ESC

Selects the object, displaying its boundingbox.

Click or drag across anunselected object

Displays the spline control points for the ob-ject.

Click a selected object(an object that alreadyhas a bounding box)

Clears all selections.Click or drag across anarea with no objects

Adds or removes objects from the selectionset.

Click objectsSHIFT+

Adds and moves unselected objects or re-moves selected objects from the selection set.

Click and drag acrossobjects

SHIFT+

Object Selection Tool | 747

ResultActionKey

Selects all objects on the canvas.CTRL+A

Constrains movements to 45-degree incre-ments.

Drag to move a selec-tion

SHIFT+

Creates a copy and moves it.Drag to move a selec-tion

ALT+

Constrains rotation to 45-degree increments.Drag to rotate a selec-tion

SHIFT+

Rotates each object in the selection about itsown center.

Drag to rotate a selec-tion

ALT+

Enforces uniform scaling.Drag to resize objectsSHIFT+

Adds or removes individual objects from theselection set.

Click or drag acrossobjects

CTRL+SHIFT+

Pan ToolRepositions the canvas on the screen.

Access:

■ Toolbox ➤

■ Display menu ➤ Pan

P


How To: ■ Procedures: Pan to Shift the Canvas



■ Pan to Shift the Canvas


■ Toolbox

The Pan tool has no unique properties.

Keyboard Shortcuts: Pan Tool


Activates the Pan tool.P

Temporarily activates Pan tool.CanvasDragSPACEBAR+

Temporarily activates Pan tool.CanvasDragMiddlemouse but-ton+

Polygon ToolDraws equilateral shapes with the number of sides you specify.

Access:

■ Toolbox ➤

■ Tools menu ➤ Geometry ➤ Polygon

Y

Polygon Tool | 749


How To: ■ Procedures: Draw a Polygon


■ Draw a Polygon


■ Toolbox

Polygon Tool Properties


Sides

Sets the number of sides for polygons. Enter a value or click the arrows tospecify a value between 3 (a triangle) and 1000 (a circle).

Rounded Corners

Rounds the corners of polygons by the radius you specify.

■ Radius. (Available only when the Rounded Corners option is selected.)Sets the radius of the corner in drawing units.

Keyboard Shortcuts: Polygon Tool


Activates the Polygon tool.Y

Constrains the orientation of thepolygon to 45-degree increments.

CanvasClick and dragSHIFT+

Power Fill ToolSimultaneously fills multiple areas based on such criteria as shape, layer, CADcolor, and lineweight.


Access:

■ Toolbox ➤

■ Tools menu ➤ Stylize ➤ Power Fill

I


How To: ■ Procedures: Insert Area Fill

■ Procedures: Modify Area Fill


■ About Area Fill

■ Insert Area Fill

■ Modify Area Fill



■ Styles Palette

■ Area Fill Tool

Power Fill Tool | 751

Power Fill Tool Properties


NOTE The effect of the last four options are cumulative. For example, if both theShape and Layers options are selected, power fill can be applied only to closedareas of the same shape whose boundaries are on the same layer.

Gap Tolerance

Sets the maximum gap that can be ignored for objects that are used as fillboundaries. Red lines extending from the endpoints of the strokes identifythe extents of the current tolerance. These gap tolerance lines are displayedonly when an area fill tool is selected.

NOTE Gaps resulting from appearance style properties (such as a dash-linestroke), do not affect application of an area fill.

Changing this value also affects the Area Fill tool.

Precision

Sets how closely the area fill object adheres to its boundaries. Specify ahigher number to obtain more precision. Specify a lower number to improveprogram performance.

Changing this value also affects the Area Fill tool.

Create Individual Area Fills

Inserts fill so that each insertion is a separate object. You might want toturn off this option when inserting gradient or patterned fills that shouldhave the appearance of a contiguous pattern.


Shape

Limits the fill set to include only objects with the same shape. The shapesmay vary according to the Shape Tolerance setting. When you select thisoption, objects with the same shape can be filled in a single operation.

■ Tolerance. Sets the percentage by which the area or perimeter of shapescan differ from one another in order to be filled.

Layers

Limits the fill set to closed areas formed by geometry that is on the samelayer.

CAD Line Colors

Limits the fill set to closed areas formed by imported geometry that hadthe same color in the original CAD drawing. The original CAD line color isdetected, even if you set a common Impression stroke type when you openor import the drawing.When you use this tool, objects created in Impression are treated as if theyare all one color.

Line Weight

Fills a closed area formed by boundaries whose strokes are of the sameweight, as defined in the Stroke Properties pane of the Style Editor.

Power Fill Toolbar

The Power Fill toolbar is displayed as soon as you specify the first power fillset. It is closed automatically when you start another activity.


Add Fill

Adds individual areas to the in-progress power fill set. The fill youinsert using this button becomes part of the same object set as other fillinserted in the same session, even if characteristics such as shape or layerare different. This method is particularly useful for maintaining visualcontinuity for gradient or texture fills. Press SHIFT to achieve the sameeffect.

Remove Fill

Removes individual areas from the in-progress area fill set. Whenthis button is active, area fill is deleted as a group. Press ALT to achieve thesame effect.

Same Shape

Limits the fill set to include only objects with the same shape. Theshapes may vary according to the Shape Tolerance setting.

Shape Tolerance

Sets the percentage by which the area or perimeter of shapes can differ fromone another in order to be filled.

Same Layer

Limits the fill set to closed areas formed by geometry that is on thesame set of layers.


Same CAD Color

Limits the fill set to closed areas formed by imported geometry thathad the same color in the original CAD drawing.

Same Lineweight

Fills a closed areas formed by boundaries whose strokes are of thesame weight, as defined in the Stroke Properties flyout pane of the StyleEditor.

Keyboard Shortcuts: Power Fill Tool


Activates the Power Fill tool.I

Applies fill to the current fill set.After clicking in anarea to be filled

ENTER

When Power Fill tool is active,toggles the Create IndividualArea Fills property.

ALT+I

Specifies multiple individualareas to be added to or re-moved from the set.

Across closedboundaries

DragSHIFT+

Adds an individual fill area withdifferent properties to the cur-rent fill set.

Within a closedboundary

ClickSHIFT+

Removes an individual fill areafrom the current fill set.

A filled areaClickALT+

Adds area fill to all members ofa different fill set.This option is

Within a closedboundary

ClickCTRL+SHIFT+

only available for fill insertedduring the current power fillsession.



Removes area fill from all mem-bers of the fill set. This option is

A filled area that ispart of a fill set

ClickCTRL+ALT+

only available for fill insertedduring the current power fillsession.

Cancels the fill operation.Before the final pointis confirmed

ESC

Rectangle ToolDraws rectangles and squares.

Access:

■ Toolbox ➤

■ Tools menu ➤ Geometry ➤ Rectangle

R


How To: ■ Procedures: Draw a Rectangle



■ Draw a Rectangle


■ Toolbox

Rectangle Tool Properties


Rounded Corners

Rounds the corners of rectangles by the radius you specify.

■ Radius. (Available only when the Rounded Corners option is selected.)Sets the radius of the corner in drawing units.

Fix

Sets the rectangle to one of the following options:

■ Aspect Ratio. Sets the rectangle’s width to always be a specific ratio ofits height.Height. Sets the relative height, in drawing units, of the rectanglecompared to its width.

Width. Sets the relative width, in drawing units, of the rectanglecompared to its height.

■ Size. Sets the rectangle’s width and height to a fixed size.Height. Sets the height, in drawing units, of the rectangle.

Width. Sets the width, in drawing units, of the rectangle.

Keyboard Shortcuts: Rectangle Tool


Activates the Rectangle tool.R

Creates a square.CanvasClick and dragSHIFT+

Spline ToolDraws curves or vectors.

Spline Tool | 757

Access:

■ Toolbox ➤

■ Tools menu ➤ Geometry ➤ Spline

S


How To: ■ Procedures: Draw a Spline

■ Procedures: Change the Shape of aSpline


■ Draw a Spline

■ Change the Shape of a Spline


■ Toolbox

Spline Tool Properties


Advanced Spline

Specifies a method for drawing splines.

■ Select the check box if you want to use Bezier spline principles to achievecontrol over the arc and direction of the spline as you draw it.


■ Clear the check box to create smooth, symmetrical curves that areautomatically generated, based on how you draw.

Close Spline

Specifies whether splines will be closed automatically when spline creationis complete.

■ Select the check box to automatically create a connection between thestart points and endpoints of splines you create.

■ Clear the check box to leave splines open unless the last point you clickis the start point.

Spline Tool: Shortcut MenuThe following table describes the options available after you press CTRL+clicka spline while the Spline tool is active. The following options do not includegeneral options that are available for other tools.

DescriptionLocation onSpline

Shortcut MenuOption

Closes spline with a corner control point.Any locationon an openspline

Close Spline(Straight)

Closes a spline with a smooth control point.Any locationon an openspline

Close Spline(Smooth)

Straightens the segment.A curved splinesegment

Make SegmentFlat

Converts the flat segment to a curved segment.A flat splinesegment

Make SegmentSmooth

Converts the point to a corner control point.A smoothspline controlpoint

Make Knot Corner

Removes the control point and reconnects thesurrounding control points with a single seg-ment.

Any controlpoint

Delete Knot

Spline Tool | 759

DescriptionLocation onSpline

Shortcut MenuOption

Modifies the curve by making both sides of thedirection handles the same length.

A control pointwith irregular

Make Knot Auto-matic

directionhandles

Adds the extended spline object to the end ofan existing spline.

Control pointat start or endof spline

Append to Spline

Keyboard Shortcuts: Spline Creation (Spline Tool)


Activates the Spline tool.S

Advanced splines: Creates cornercontrol point.Simple splines: Creates smoothcontrol points.

CanvasClick+Move+Click

Creates smooth control point.CanvasClick+Drag+Click

Simple Splines: Toggles creation ofcorner control points.

CanvasClick+Drag+ClickALT+

Constrains the angle of controlpoint placement to 45-degree incre-ments.

CanvasClickSHIFT+

Ends spline creation. Spline tool isstill active.

ESC

Ends spline creation. Spline tool isstill active.

Right-click



Temporarily turns on the ObjectSelection tool.

Click or dragCTRL+

Keyboard Shortcuts: Extended Spline-Edit Modification


Activates extended spline-editmode and makes the followingactivities possible.

Spline ob-ject

ClickSCTRL+

Adds smooth control point.Spline seg-ment

Click

Starts new spline.Spline seg-ment

ClickSHIFT+

Removes the point.Selectedspline con-trol point

DEL

Converts to corner control point.Smoothcontrolpoint

ClickALT+

Selects multiple control points.Controlpoints

ClickCTRL+SHIFT+

Text ToolAdds and edits text.

Access:

■ Toolbox ➤

Text Tool | 761

■ Tools menu ➤ Text ➤ Text

T


How To: ■ Procedures: Create Text

■ Procedures: Import and Paste Text

■ Procedures: Modify Text Content andFormat

■ Procedures: Scale Text and ResetBoundaries


■ Add Text


■ Text Properties Palette

■ Toolbox

When this tool is selected, you can click to specify a start point and then entertext.

After you have added the text, you can update the text, modify its boundingbox to resize, move or rotate it, and format it using the Text Properties palette.

Keyboard Shortcuts: Text Tool


Activates the Text tool.CanvasT

Highlights text so you cantype over it to replace it.

Selected textDouble-click textwith Text tool active

Moves cursor from charac-ter to character.

Selected textArrow key

Moves cursor from word toword.

Selected textCTRL+ arrowkey



Moves highlighting fromletter to letter.

Selected textSHIFT+arrowkey

Deletes highlighted text ortext to the left of cursor.

Selected textBACKSPACE

Deletes highlighted text.Highlighted textDELETE

Places an insertion point foradding new text.

Within selectedtext

Click

Starts new line of text.End of a textline

ENTER

Exits text editing.ESC

Zoom ToolChanges the size of the canvas and objects on the screen.

Access:

■ Toolbox ➤

■ Display menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom

Z

Zoom Tool | 763


How To: ■ Procedures: Zoom to Change Magni-fication


■ Zoom to Change Magnification


■ Toolbox

Zoom Tool Properties


Animated Window Zoom

Sets the zoom transition to be a gradual (animated) or abrupt.

Keyboard Shortcuts: Zoom Tool


Activates Zoom tool.Z

Zooms in and out.CanvasRoll forwardand backward

Mouse scrollwheel

Zooms out by the current zoom factor.CanvasClickALT+

Restores previous zoom levels.CanvasCTRL+SHIFT+Z

(Not available in the Block Editor.)Zooms to printed size.

CanvasALT+SHIFT+Z

Zooms to show all objects in the illus-tration (zoom extents).

CanvasALT+Z

Zooms to show all selected objects,centered on the screen.

CanvasSHIFT+Z

Assigns a number to the current zoomlevel.

CanvasALT+(0 to 9)



Zooms to show a saved zoom level.CanvasCTRL+(0 to9)

Zoom Tool | 765

Transform Palette

Moves, scales, and rotates selected objects using precision values.

Palettes menu ➤ Transform


How To: ■ Procedures: Move Geometry

■ Procedures: Rotate Geometry

■ Procedures: Scale Geometry


■ Reposition and Resize Geometry

52

767


■ Layer Selection Tool

■ Object Selection Tool

Changes made to the values in the Transform palette are applied to selected objects in oneof two ways:

■ If you click the arrow buttons to modify a value, the object changes immediately.

■ If you enter a new value, the object changes as soon as you press the TAB key or clickinside another box.

If no objects are selected, all values on the Transform palette are empty.

Move

Moves selected objects by specifying a horizontal or vertical distance (linear), or by specifyingan angle and distance (polar).

Linear Sets the offset of the move along a horizontal and vertical axis on the canvas.

■ Horizontal. Sets a horizontal distance (in drawing units). Enter a value or click the arrowbuttons.

■ Vertical. Sets a vertical distance (in drawing units). Enter a value or click the arrowbuttons.

Polar Sets the offset location of the move based on angle and distance.

■ Angle. Sets the direction of the move. Enter an angle.

■ Distance. Sets the distance (in drawing units) for the move. Enter a value or click thearrow buttons.

Rotate

Rotates selected objects around a default or custom pivot point.

Angle Sets the angle to rotate the selected objects.

Show Pivot Point Toggles the display of the pivot point for the current selection. By default,the pivot point is at the geometric center of the selection set. You can drag it to anotherlocation to move it.

Scale

Resizes selected objects and sets whether appearance style is scaled proportionately.

768 | Chapter 52 Transform Palette

NOTE The values in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes return to 100% after you press the Tabkey or click outside the box.

Horizontal Sets the percentage to scale the object in a horizontal direction. Enter a valueor click the arrow buttons to specify the percentage. Numbers greater than 100 increase thesize. Numbers less than 100 decrease the size.

Vertical Sets the percentage to scale the object in a vertical direction. Enter a value or clickthe arrow buttons to specify the percentage. Numbers greater than 100 increase the size.Numbers less than 100 decrease the size.

Lock/Unlock Scale icon Toggles whether the horizontal and vertical values can be setindependently. The icon should be locked when you want to maintain the same aspectratio as you scale the object.

Scale Styles Toggles whether the settings in a style will be scaled proportionately when youresize an object or move it to a sketch with a different scale. For example, if you scale anobject 50%, various settings in the style are also scaled 50% for that object. This option doesnot create a new style.

NOTE You can also change this setting on the status bar, or in the properties flyout for the ObjectSelection or Layer Selection tools.

| 769

Update CAD GeometryDialog Box

Sets the options for updating CAD objects that have been modified in the source drawing.

Menu Access:

■ File menu ➤ Update CAD Geometry

■ Right-click a sketch or layer ➤ Update CAD Geometry ➤ Entire File or Sketches or Layers

53

771


How To: ■ Procedures: Update Your Illustration


■ Update CAD Geometry When theSource Changes


■ CAD Update Report

Select Sketches or Layers to UpdateSpecifies what CAD updates will be imported into the Impression illustration. Only sketchesand layers with an update path are displayed. Click the plus (+) and minus (-) icons toexpand and collapse the list.

■ Select one or more sketches to import updates to all layers and objects belonging to thespecified sketches, and to include viewport updates resulting from pan, zoom, viewpointchanges, and viewport resizing.

■ Select one or more layers to import updates made to objects on the layers. Only objectswithin the specified layer are affected.

An exclamation mark icon in front of the sketch name indicates that the source file hasbeen moved or changed.

If a 3D view was imported with hidden lines removed, a grayed check box is displayed forthe layers, which cannot be individually selected.

Show Report After UpdateDisplays the CAD Update Report after the update is complete.

772 | Chapter 53 Update CAD Geometry Dialog Box

Update FromDisplays the name of the selected layer or viewport and the file path to the source drawingthat was used as a basis for the Impression illustration.

If “Multiple” is displayed, more than one viewport or layer is selected. If “Varies” is displayed,the selected layers or viewports have more than one file path.

■ Browse. (Available only when a sketch is selected.) Displays the Open dialog box, whereyou can find and select a drawing.

Update OptionsSets options for how updated objects are handled.

Special Objects Specifies whether updated blocks should be imported.

■ Update Blocks Definition. Imports updated versions of all blocks on selected layers orsketches.

■ Update Area Fill Objects. Regenerates area fill objects to extend to revised boundaries.The fill type is based on the location of the area fill anchor.

Modified CAD Objects Specifies how CAD objects that were modified in the Impressionillustration are handled by the CAD update.

■ Retain CAD Objects Modified in Impression. Retains modified CAD objects and importstheir equivalents from the DWG file. Because selecting this option results in duplicateobjects, you usually need to delete one version of those objects.If this option is not selected, the modified CAD object is removed from Impression andthen re-imported. If there are no modified CAD objects in the selection, this option isunavailable.

Style for New Layers and Blocks Sets stroke styles for objects on new layers, includingblocks. If you select both a plot style and a stroke, the initial stylization combines thelineweight settings from the plot style with the stroke’s color and media settings.

■ Use Plot Style. Sets the plot style table (CTB or STB file) to be used as a basis for convertingcolor, lineweight, and linetype properties to appearance styles. If you choose None, theappearance styles are based on the color, lineweight, and linetype of each incominglayer, or on the Default Stroke setting.You can choose the default Plot Style folder from the source drawing or select Browsefrom the list to browse to a file in another folder. Any new file that you choose becomesthe default plot style file in subsequent Impression sessions.

NOTE Moved or removed plot style tables are labeled as “missing.”

■ Set Stroke Type. Applies the stroke you select to all incoming geometry.

| 773

UpdateStarts the update process for items selected under Select Sketches or Layers to Update.


CAD Update ReportDisplays information about data changes resulting from a CAD updateoperation.

Menu Access:

■ File menu ➤ Update CAD Geometry ➤ Click the Show Report After Updateoption

■ Right-click a sketch or layer ➤ Update CAD Geometry ➤ Click the ShowReport After Update option

774 | Chapter 53 Update CAD Geometry Dialog Box


How To: ■ Procedures: Review Updates to CADGeometry


■ Review Updates to CAD Geometry


■ Update CAD Geometry Dialog Box

The CAD Update Report identifies the sketches, layers, and blocks that havechanged as a result of a CAD update operation. The following information isincluded. In the report, click the expansion triangles to display additionalinformation.

■ Name of the sketches.

■ File path of the source drawing.

■ Number of layers updated. Expand the list to see the layer names.

■ Number of layers that could not be found (source missing). Expand thelist to see the layer names.

■ Number of new layers that were imported. Expand the list to see the layernames.

■ Number of blocks that were updated. Expand the list to see the blocknames.

CAD Update Report | 775

Glossary

appearance style A saved collection of one or more strokes, fills, and effects(and their properties).

area fill A special type of fill object that shades areas enclosed by one or moreobjects. You insert area fill with the Area Fill tool, the Power Fill tool, or bydragging a fill style from the Styles palette.

Glossary | 777

Whereas a fill style assigned to a layer affects single closed objects, you caninsert area fill within closed areas formed by multiple objects.

area fill anchor A marker that identifies the points from which a specific fillinsertion radiates outward to its boundaries. The moveable area fill anchorsrepresent a specific point on the canvas, not a relative point within the closedboundaries.

Auto Layer A setting that automatically places new objects, including areafill objects, on a style-specific layer if the new object style differs from thelayer style. Turn the overall function on or off on the status bar. With AutoLayer on, click the Auto Layer icon on the Layers palette to activate anddeactivate the auto layer capabilities for the layer.

778 | Glossary

blend flag An icon on a gradient ramp that controls the gradation, or gradualblending, of a color mixture.

block A saved collection of geometry, usually representing symbols orentourage. AutoCAD blocks are converted to Impression blocks upon import.

block definition The block name, base point, and set of objects that arecombined and stored in the drawing.

block layer A layer in the Block Layers palette that contains one or morecomponents of a block.

block reference An instance of a compound object that is inserted on thecanvas. These insertions reference the data stored in block definitions, whichyou can find on the Blocks palette. Block references are sometimes referred toas block insertions.

block substitution map A file that tracks block substitutions, which replaceone type of block insertion with another.

Blocks palette The interface used to collect and reuse symbols, entourage,and so on.

bounding box grips The modifiable control points on a rectangular boundingbox that define the extents of an object.

Glossary | 779

by insert layer A block style in which the block objects inherit the styleassignment of the layer where they are inserted. This style is the same as Layer0 in DWG files such as AutoCAD.

bylayer Objects whose style assignment matches the style assigned to thelayer that contains them. See also: style override.

CAD objects Imported DWG objects that have not been resized, reshaped,or moved. Applying appearance styles does not change the status of CADobjects. See also: modified CAD objects and Impression objects.

CAD update A method for updating, or refreshing, your Impressionillustration if the source drawing changes. Your illustration is updated basedon the settings in the Update CAD Geometry dialog box.

canvas The drawing area in an Impression document.

780 | Glossary

canvas units Measurements that represent the real-world size of the canvas.

CMYK color model A color system that is based on Cyan, Magenta, Yellow,and blacK components.

color books A library of colors that can used in a style.

color flag An icon on the gradient ramp that defines the color andtransparency value at a relative location of a gradient fill. Gradients are createdby blending the values between adjacent color flags.

complementary color The color opposite a selected color on the color wheel.

compound fill A fill that consists of strokes or hatch patterns.

control points Points, or grips, that define the shape of a spline or spline-basedobject (in conjunction with direction handles). You can change the shape ofa curve by moving its grips or by manipulating its direction handles. See also,spline control points.

corner control points Spline control points that represent an angularintersection of two spline segments.

Glossary | 781

dashboard A dockable palette that includes the Layers palette, Style Editor,and Styles palette.

In the Block Editor, the Block Layers palette replaces the Layers palette. Youcan expand and collapse various components of the dashboard by pressingthe F11 and F12 keys.

dashed Property of a line; a dashed line has alternating strokes and spaces.

design illustration The final rendered output of an Impression drawing.

direction handles Temporary handles that are tangent to a spline controlpoint that is being edited. You can drag direction handles to change the slope,depth, and length of a smooth curve or corner point.

drawing units Measurements that represent the actual size of the objects youare drawing. Also called real-world units.

drop shadow effect A style element that adds a drop shadow to all objectswith that appearance style.

782 | Glossary

effects Part of a style that alters the appearance of an element so that it isroughened or displays a shadow. You can apply effects to an entire style, orto individual strokes and fills.

elements The stroke, fill, or effect component of an appearance style.

endcap The stroke property used to define the shape of the endpoints on acurve, including arrowheads and rounded endpoints.

fill A style element that applies solid color, texture, or gradients to an areadefined by one or more vectors.

fill set Area fill objects that were inserted in a single session with the CreateIndividual Area Fills property selected in the Area Fill or Power Fill tool.Selecting one fill object in a set selects all fill objects in the set.

gradient ramp An interface element that uses color flags and blend markersto define the appearance of a gradient fill.

grips Control points or bounding box grips that you can drag to change thesize, shape, rotation, or location of the object.

groups See object group and layer group.

hatch fill Fill consisting of a pattern, usually based on PAT files importedfrom another program such as AutoCAD. You can stylize imported hatch fillsin Impression.

Glossary | 783

hidden line removal A process for opening or importing 3D drawings thatremoves lines that would be hidden by the surfaces of the object. The RemoveHidden Lines option is available in the 3D Import Options Dialog Boxin theDWG Import Wizard.

Hidden line removal on

Hidden line removal off

HSL color model A color system that defines a color by its Hue (location onthe color wheel), Saturation (color intensity), and Luminance (brightness).

784 | Glossary

Impression objects Objects or blocks created in Impression, including copiesof CAD objects. See also: CAD objects and modified CAD objects.

keyboard shortcuts Keystroke combinations and shortcut keys used to activatetools and open dialog boxes.

knots Points, or grips, that define the shape of a spline or spline-based object(in conjunction with direction handles). Also known as control points.

layer A named collection of vector geometry, frequently imported. InImpression, the layer order affects the draw order of geometry.

layer group Layers that have been arranged into sets, or groupings.

Layers palette A palette that manages the status, draw order, and appearancestyles of layers and sketches in an Impression file.

modified CAD objects Imported DWG objects that have been resized,reshaped, moved, or rotated. See also: CAD objects and Impression objects.

multiblocks A set of variable blocks that you can substitute for other blocks.

noise A mottling or blotching property for fill elements.

nudge An action that uses the arrow keys or SHIFT+arrow keys on the keyboardto move a selected object in specified increments. The nudge distance is aproperty of the Object Selection and Layer Selection tools.

object group One or more objects that have been grouped to form a set thatyou can select or edit together. To create an object group from selected objects,click Edit Menu ➤ Group Selection.

opacity A value indicating the transparency of a style element or sketch. Anopacity value of 100% is opaque. An opacity value of 0% is transparent.

Glossary | 785

outline stroke A primary stroke that contains a secondary fill.

outline text Text that has been converted to geometry. Unlike text objects,you can assign a stroke or fill style to outline text. However, you can no longeredit the text content or modify formatting such as bold, underline, or italic.

overshoot A stroke property that represents the distance that a line extendsbeyond a boundary or vector. Sometimes called “overhang.”

packed layers Layers with objects that have been combined based on criteriathat includes having matching styles and sequential draw order. These objects,or packed units, are treated as a single object. Packed layers improve programperformance. You can pack and unpack layers from a variety of places,including the Layers palette. See Pack Layers to Improve Performance.

packed units A grouping of packed objects on a packed layer.

page layout The arrangement of elements on the canvas for presentation.

786 | Glossary

pane An expanding panel found on some palettes (such as the Style Editor)and for some tools on the Toolbox. You can open and close panes by clickingor moving the cursor over the properties flyout arrow.

PANTONE® colors Color libraries from Pantone, Inc., which are available inthe Color dialog box.

preview image In appearance styles, an image that shows the effect ofcombining various elements such as strokes and fills.

properties flyout arrow Displays a pane that contains tool or style element

settings when you move the cursor over the arrow.

raster image The graphical representation of an image, using pixels.

real-world units Measurements that represent the actual size of the objectsyou are drawing. Also called “drawing units.”

RGB color model A color system that defines a color by its Red, Green, andBlue components. This model displays how colors result from transmittedlight, and is best suited for digital media.

roughen effect An effect that applies “wiggle,” or irregular jagged lines oredges to a vector path or a fill.

shortcut menu A context-sensitive menu that is displayed when you right-clickan area of the application, such as a palette or the canvas. The menu optionsdiffer, depending on where you click.

sketch Highest level of hierarchy within an Impression illustration. Impressionsketches contain layers and layer groups, which contain vector geometry.Sketches have no geographical boundary; they are content containers thatcan overlap each other.

Glossary | 787

smooth control points Spline control points that represent a change indirection for a continuous spline curve.

spline control points The modifiable control points, sometimes called knots,that run along the vector of a spline or spline-based object.

split corners A stroke property that creates a split, or crossover strokes, atintersecting endpoints.

788 | Glossary

standard workspace The interface configuration used to create, modify, andstylize your illustration. The configuration includes the canvas, Toolbox, anddashboard.

stationary toolbar The toolbar that contains the Toolbox, the Global Strokebutton, and drop-down lists that set layer, style, text font and text size. Thistoolbar is located above the workspace, and cannot be relocated or hidden.However, some toolbar options can become hidden when you resize theImpression window.

status bar The bar that runs along the bottom edge of the Impression window.It includes information about the cursor location and prompts for usingdrawing tools. It also includes buttons that turn off and turn on such functionsas object snaps, style scaling, Auto Layer, and Fast Display.

Glossary | 789

stroke A display style applied to a vector. Each stroke has a media (such aspencil or marker), a color (or gradient), and a specific lineweight.

stroked fill A compound style that fills an area with parallel stokes.

Style Editor The component of the dashboard used to customize appearancestyles.

style element A style component, such as a stroke, a fill, or an effect.

style map A saved combination of layer names and appearance styles. Whenopening a new file, you can assign a style map that automatically appliesspecific appearance styles to corresponding layers. Similarly, you can save astyle map from a current Impression file and import it into other drawings.

style override A style that is applied to an object rather than to a layer. If aselected layer has a style override, the Style Editor displays the Style Exceptionicon:

790 | Glossary

You can remove a style override from objects by clicking Reset Style Exceptionson the Style Editor. Also called “object style override” and “style exception.”

NOTE To avoid style overrides, turn on the Auto Layer function.

transform tools Tools used to move, rotate, and scale objects.

transparency The see-through quality of an element.

vectors Geometry consisting of one or more line or spline segments withspecific lengths and directions. Vectors represent the path that the geometriclines follow without the appearance styles.

view A representation of geometry from a specific location (viewpoint) inspace. Views from other applications are converted to sketches in Impression.

wild-card characters Special characters used to filter text box searches. Thefollowing wild-card characters are available:

ExamplesDescriptionText

#AB matches 1AB through 9AB.Matches any numeral.#

A@C matches ABC through AZC.Matches any alphabetic char-

acter.

@

.ABC matches #ABC and &ABC.Matches any non-alphanumer-

ic character.

.

ABC*** matches ABC543 or ABC_YZ.Matches any set of characters.*

?BC matches ABC and 3BC.Matches any single character.?

~*AB* matches CD, #E, 4Z.Matches everything except the

pattern within the asterisks.

~* *

[AB]C matches AC and BC.Matches any one of the en-

closed characters.

[ ]

[~AB]C matches XC but not BC.Matches any character that is

not enclosed in the brackets.

[~]

Glossary | 791

ExamplesDescriptionText

[A-G]C matches AC through GC, but not HC.Sets the alphanumeric-order

range for a single character.

[ - ]

‘~AB matches only ~AB.Matches only the characters

that immediately follow.

‘

workspace The current work area. Impression has two workspaces: the standardworkspace and the Block Editor workspace. You modify and stylize mostgeometry and text in the standard workspace. You modify and stylize onlyblocks in the Block Editor workspace.

03-06-08-A

792 | Glossary

Index

! (exclamation marks) 27Autodesk notifications 27source file changes 772

2D drawings 41effects of conversion 59opening 41saving as 384updating from source drawings 221

3D blockseffects of conversion 70

3D drawings 43effects of conversion 63importing into Impression 43, 575importing views 45updating sketches from 221

3D Import Options (DWG ImportWizard) 576

3D solidseffects of conversion 61

A

actionsassigning to sticky keys 597listing available Impression

actions 596actual size view 120, 122adaptive gradient fills 631Add Effect dialog box 677, 685Add Effect toolbar 677adjoining edges of objects 322, 325, 444administrative permissions 31Adobe Illustrator 329ADT Display Manager 39advanced splines 242

defined 242drawing 246, 758

AECTOACAD command 39Align and Distribute window 444

Align toolabout 312, 725keyboard shortcuts 727

aligning 444adjoining edges of objects 322, 325,

444Align and Distribute window 444Align tool 312, 725alignment keys 315, 317, 320, 446geometry 312–313keyboard shortcuts 727multiple objects 315, 317rows and columns of objects 317scale properties and 727text 127, 296

all-cap text styles 68alpha channels 58alternative library names 488, 517, 706anchors

area fill objects 220, 265, 284, 739, 746, 773, 778

updating area fill 226, 278, 288angles

in splines 242moving objects by specified 768of drop shadows 190, 665of gradient fills 632of hatch fills 639of pencil strokes 654of rotation 307, 309, 768of stroked fills 637of texture images 637spline direction handles and 244

animated palettes 588animated properties flyouts 409animated window zoom 120, 123, 764animation, PNG files and 385anti-aliasing 385, 525, 614appearance style elements 685appearance styles 129

about 129

793 | Index

adding elements to 154, 180, 200, 625

adding to Styles palette 156alignment and 316applying elements of 153applying to layers 87, 141applying to objects 136, 141applying to text 300area fills and 94, 267, 274, 281as properties 127block styles 132, 335, 337–338CAD update process and 215, 220,

773colors in 203, 206, 623, 682compared to area fills 263compound fills 672copying 131, 202, 624, 706creating 161, 166, 198creating sets of 133current 128custom search filters for 133defined 777deleting 135, 695deleting elements of 169displaying 106, 536, 620displaying elements of 624displaying for blocks 454draw order 90, 168draw order of elements 165duplicating 134, 202, 694editing 89, 131, 153, 161, 621effects in 164, 188–189, 193, 624,

677elements of 153exceptions to 78exporting 131, 156, 158, 695, 702fast display 424fills in 161, 624, 628, 670filtering lists of 700importing 155, 157, 228, 230, 695,

705importing elements of 156–157, 230In-Use list 132, 202, 622, 689information about 126, 128keyboard shortcuts 626layers and 78, 84

multiple styles indicator 621names 134, 621nested elements 161opacity 140, 168overrides 85, 138, 142plot style settings and 572previewing 198, 201, 621, 624, 694purging 135re-imported geometry and 215renaming 134resetting original styles 140resizing options 211–212, 311, 679,

769rotating components 623rotating components of 683saved styles 200saving 131–132, 135, 159, 694saving elements of 153, 155scale of 140, 211, 213searching for 133, 202, 700selected layers and 107sets of 129, 132–133strokes in 161, 169, 171, 173, 624,

667Style Book Wizard 708Style Editor 129, 161, 198, 620style libraries 131, 135, 705style maps 51, 228, 230style tree 199, 626Styles palette 129, 688text and 291turning elements on or off 168, 200types of 624unused 135updating 156visual extents and 316, 446

applications 13copying and pasting objects to or

from 329system requirements 13

Architectural Desktop 10, 64arcs and curves 246

adding to straight splines 254closing 735, 759control points on 243drawing 246, 758

794 | Index

effects of conversion 66flattening 254Freehand tool settings 735in stroked fills 638keyboard shortcuts 759reshaping 248smoothing 735spline direction handles and 244splines as 242

area fill anchors 778deleting 289displaying 283, 289, 434inserting 289moving 290resizing (window) 290updating 220, 433, 773

area fill objects 274adding to drawings 267, 274anchor display 739, 746anchors 265, 284and performance 441Area Fill tool 728Auto Layer and 94Auto Layers and 281boundaries of 264CAD update process and 220, 222,

282, 289, 433compared to fill styles 263creating with Freehand option 270,

277, 730creating with Line option 269, 275,

729creating with Point option 268, 729creating with Window option 270,

276, 729defined 163, 263, 777deleting 283–284disappearing 431display precision 281editing 282gap tolerance 266, 280gray highlighting 269, 280, 731inserted based on layer 433, 753inserted based on shape 753inserted successively as one

object 273, 280, 732

keyboard shortcuts 732, 755layer style overrides and 94, 281layers and 78, 176pasting 278, 288Power Fill tool 752precision 429, 731removing 754retaining during CAD update 226

Area Fill tool 263, 274, 728area fills 283arrow-key nudging 306, 738, 746, 785arrows 651, 655articles about Impression 509ARX objects 429aspect ratio

blocks 477, 490, 608locking 477, 608, 769objects 608rectangles 237, 757texture images 636

assigningkeyboard shortcuts 596sticky keys 597

associativity of hatches 64asterisks 106ATI FireGL graphics cards 14ATI Radeon graphics cards 14attributes 59Auto Layer

defined 93, 778settings 96, 601turning on 93, 95, 439

Auto Layer Settings (Options dialogbox) 601

auto layersconverting block layers to auto

layers 454converting layers to auto layers 96,

536, 778creating 95, 105

Auto Save feature 70, 73, 591AutoCAD Architecture 10, 39AutoCAD Civil 3D files 10AutoCAD files 10AutoCAD LT files 10AutoCAD Map 3D files 10

Index | 795

AutoCAD Mechanical files 10Autodesk

Communication Center 506Web site information 18

Autodesk Impression 2about 2Communication Center 26–27downloading 31–32features 3feedback and support 26Help system 17, 19installing 31–32interface and tools 2online resources 15opening 46preparing drawings for 37privacy policy 27Quick Start Guide 16Readme file 17sample illustrations 3sending comments about 26starting 33subscription information 26system requirements 13uninstalling 35Web site information 18

Autodesk Inventor files 10Autodesk MapGuide files 10axes, aligning objects to 312, 314, 317

B

backgrounds 386PNG files 616saving in other formats and 386

backup copies of drawings 70, 73backwards text 69, 302balloon notification 508base points 352, 354, 440, 450, 481Basic Multilingual Plane file format 10bass aspect (roughen effect) 664Bezier splines

about 242adding or removing control

points 252advanced splines 242, 758

appending new segments to 250closing 245, 248, 251–252connecting line segments into 234converting text to 297, 299corner points 248direction handles 244, 249direction of 245drawing 232, 242, 245–246, 758editing 248, 252effects of conversion 62fill styles and 175freehand paths as 255grips 243keyboard shortcuts 759reshaping 248, 252simple splines 242, 246spline control points 111, 243, 252,

788types of 242

Big Fonts 68bitmap (BMP) files 50

copying and pasting 329effects of conversion 58importing 50including in blocks 335including in fills 163, 177resolution 613saving drawings as 10, 70, 384, 613textures in fills 179, 629

black backgrounds 616blank drawings 46, 48blend flags 633, 779block definitions 335

about 335CAD update process and 216, 222,

773changes in source documents

and 216, 773defined 779deleting 343, 345, 480dimensions 127duplicating 354effects of conversion 60libraries and 340redefining 353, 481replacing 370

796 | Index

resizing 351–352saving 370, 373selecting all instances of 365

block editing area 448Block Editor 448

block styles in 360closing 450defined 355disabled functions in 450layers and 337toolbar 356, 449

block geometry 364Block Layer Group Properties dialog

box 460block layer groups

colors 460creating 455displaying objects in 460listing 454names 460properties 460

Block Layer Properties dialog box 458block layers

block layer groups 460colors 458creating 455current 454defined 453, 779deleting 456displaying 455, 458–459duplicating 457highlighting 454listing 357, 454locking 459names 454, 458opacity settings 455properties 458selecting 454

Block Layers paletteabout 453Block Layer Group Properties dialog

box 460Block Layer Properties dialog

box 458keyboard shortcuts 457shortcut menu commands 457

styles and 337task bar 455

block libraries 340adding to palette navigation

panes 413exporting blocks to 484importing 370, 372importing from 370, 372, 487listing available blocks 466paths 592removing from palettes 415using block sets from 340

block mapping styles 371block preview images 470

displaying 470, 475multiblocks 475, 478

Block Properties dialog box 475Block Properties Summary 489block references 335

about 335CAD update process and 222defined 779deleting 343, 345exploding 351, 353

block sets 339, 341block style maps 371block styles 360

by insert layer 338, 363, 780defined 356editing 133, 362, 449effects of conversion 60, 357, 359indicators 621listing 360, 689mapping 371scaling in substitutions 368unused 449

Block Substitution Conflicts dialogbox 464

Block Substitution Map 462about 462Block Editor and 451Block Substitution Conflicts dialog

box 464defined 779exporting maps 370, 374, 463handling conflicts 370, 464

Index | 797

importing maps 51, 370, 373, 462listing substitutions 367–368setting for imported content 578sorting maps 462

block substitutions 336about 336bounding boxes 476creating 462dimensions 367handling conflicts 370, 462, 464importing 575listing eligible blocks 475multiblocks and 478removing 369, 462searching for 483

blocksabout 335appearance styles and 78, 132, 337as CAD objects 219as Impression objects 219aspect ratio 477base points 352, 354, 440, 450block sets 339, 341block styles 338, 357, 360Blocks palette 339, 466CAD update process and 222, 775CAD Update Report 775canvas units 609collections of 370compared to object groups 334, 374copying 488creating 335, 347–348defined 333, 779deleting 342, 456, 471, 480deleting from multiblocks 350dimensions 477, 490, 609displaying information about 476DWF files and 61editing 336, 352, 355–356, 361, 448effects of conversion 60, 70exploding into components 43,

351, 353, 480exporting 340, 471, 484global strokes and 143, 147, 528importing 51, 487importing libraries of 370, 372

In-Use lists 341, 467information about 127inserting 342, 344layers and 337locking size 477, 490, 609modifying 448moving instances 350multiblocks 38, 336, 347, 349, 471,

478names 454, 476, 609, 775nested blocks 347, 349, 689preview images 470, 475printed size 490properties 475, 489, 608randomly rotating 477randomly scaling 477redefining 471renaming 354rendering in Impression 38resizing instances 350rotating 477Saved Blocks list 370, 372saving 450, 471scale 343, 476, 609searching for 341, 466, 482selecting 334, 438selecting all instances of 365selecting objects to create 470substituting 366, 368, 462types of 482updating 222, 224, 773, 775updating styles 361

Blocks palette 335, 466about 339, 466, 779adding libraries to 413Block Properties dialog box 475Block Properties Summary 489block substitutions in 366, 369creating blocks 347Delete Block Confirmation dialog

box 480display options 413Export Blocks dialog box 484Import Blocks/Open Libraries dialog

box 487Navigation pane 466

798 | Index

Preview pane 470Redefine Block dialog box 481Search Blocks dialog box 482shortcut menu commands 467, 471sorting content 413–414

blotchy fills 177, 629blue components of colors 495BMP files 50

copying and pasting 329effects of conversion 58importing 50including in blocks 335including in fills 163, 177resolution 613saving drawings as 10, 70, 384, 613textures in fills 179, 629

bold text 68, 296, 720bottom-aligned objects 315, 444boundaries of area fills 264, 282bounding box colors

block layers 458layers 542

bounding box grips 243, 779bounding boxes 110

block substitutions and 367grips 111multiblocks 479print margins 378, 606selected objects 110substituted blocks 476text 301–302

brightness of colors 494bristol paper 655browsing

for files 551for source drawings 773for templates 591for textures 635

bulleted text 68, 297by insert layer (block styles) 338, 689

assigning 363defined 358, 780text 67

BYBLOCK propertieseffects of conversion on 358

BYLAYER propertiesblocks and 357defined 780displaying 79

C

CAD line color 753CAD objects 217

comparing after updates 225defined 217, 780modified CAD objects 217, 225retaining 773retaining area fill during

updates 226updating 773

CAD update process 215about 41, 215, 772appearance styles and 228area fill and 289, 433defined 780packed layers and 100reports 220, 226–227, 772, 775selecting viewports for 584types of objects 217

CAD Update Reportabout 775generating 220, 226–227, 772, 775

canvasdefault settings 544defined 780illustrated 2magnifying view 764orientation 387–388, 546, 569panning view of 119, 749scale settings 544size 387–388, 516, 569–570

canvas units 82block size and 609defined 82, 781setting 544

Cartesian coordinate system 125cast shadows 192, 666CBK files 205, 502, 504center points on objects 392, 600centered object alignment 315, 444

Index | 799

centered text 296centering printed images 379–380, 605channels in Communication Center 509Character Map dialog box 721character spacing 296characters

effects of conversion 67maps of 721spacing 296width 721wild-card 534, 791

charcoal paper 655CIP (Customer Involvement Program) 26circles 232

drawing 232, 238–239, 395, 734keyboard shortcuts 734

circular references 347clearing

selections 116style overrides 142

ClearType fonts 408clipping boundaries 57–58clipping in imported files 44, 53closing

Block Editor 450curves 735, 759drawings 50freehand paths 256–257palettes 410properties flyout windows 408splines 245, 248, 251–252

CMYK color model 781coarse paper 654collapsing

palettes 406, 410, 412, 588Style Editor 621

collected multileaders 65color

as basis for inserting fill 753displaying changes 495, 497previewing 204, 207

color book colors 203about 203adding colors to 495applying colors from 207creating new books 498

customizing 205, 208deleting color books 210, 499exporting 210, 503importing 209, 500renaming books 209, 498selecting 496

color booksdefined 781deleting 499exporting 503importing 500removing 209renaming 209, 498selecting 496

Color Books tab (Color dialog box) 496color depth 386, 614Color dialog box 494

about 494Color Books tab 496Color Wheel tab 494Delete Color Book dialog box 499Export Color Book dialog box 503Import Color Book dialog box 500New Color Book dialog box 498Rename Color Book dialog box 498

color flags 633, 781Color Modification Rules panel (Style Book

Wizard) 715color sliders 630color wheel 203, 207, 494Color Wheel tab (Color dialog box) 494colors 203

about 203adding to color books 205, 495, 497appearance styles and 203assigning by layers 38backgrounds in PNG files 616block layer groups and 460block layers and 458brightness 494color book colors 203, 496, 498color depth 614color models 494color wheel 203, 207, 494complementary 204, 206converting to appearance styles 773

800 | Index

copying 206deleting 497drop shadows 192, 666editing 206, 623, 682effects of conversion 60, 66fills and 163, 177, 628gradations in 162gradient fills and 178, 628hue 494imported content and 572layers and 542named colors 496noise effects and 641PANTONE 205, 207, 496, 787rollover highlighting 399, 588saturation 494saving in other formats and 384selecting 495strokes and 170–171, 649styles and 715text and 297, 722uniform fills and 177, 630

columns, aligning objects in 315, 317command keyboard shortcuts 396comments, sending to Autodesk 26Communication Center 26

about 26, 506Configuration Settings dialog

box 508displaying information 28frequency of messages 28Initial Setup Wizard 507setting up 27

compactingpalettes 406, 410, 412, 588Style Editor 621

comparing modified CAD objects 225complementary colors 204, 206, 781complex styles in style tree 200compound fills 184

about 184creating 186, 625, 672defined 163, 781hatch fills 185, 187preview images 672stroked fills 184

types of 672compression 384, 615computers 13

installation 31system requirements 13

Configuration Settings dialog box 508conflicts in block substitutions 370,

462, 464connecting lines 233–234, 742constrained cursor movement 394–395constrained shapes 232construction lines (xlines) 69contiguous alignment 324contour lines 577contrast in noise effects 642control points (area fill) 282control points (corner)

adding 248, 253advanced splines 243defined 781editing 251

control points (freehand paths) 255control points (spline)

adding 250, 252corner control points 251, 253defined 111, 781, 788drawing splines and 245editing with 243, 252object snaps and 393, 600removing 243, 245, 250, 252reshaping splines with 248smooth control points 251, 253

converting2D drawings 41by copying and pasting objects 329copying and pasting objects 329effects of, on content 53, 58–59sketches to other formats 384, 386,

613text to geometry 297, 299, 721

coordinatesCartesian coordinate system 125cursors 127

copyingappearance styles 131, 134, 202,

624, 706

Index | 801

block definitions 354block layers 457blocks 488colors 206drawings 71–72layers 86, 90, 540lists of keyboard shortcuts 594objects 327–328objects to or from other

applications 329Corel Draw 329corner control points (splines)

adding 248, 253advanced splines 243defined 781editing 251

cornerscontrol points for 244, 248, 251,

253, 781polygons 750rectangles and squares 757rounded 237, 240–241, 660, 750,

757split, on strokes 650, 659, 788–789

countries 508Create New Compound Fill dialog

box 672, 685Create New Fill dialog box 670, 685Create New Fill toolbar 672Create New Outline Stroke dialog

box 674, 685Create New Stroke dialog box 667, 685Create New Stroke toolbar 668crossing selection 112, 738, 745CTB files 38

importing 572rendering in Impression 38retaining plot styles 42, 572

current block layersindicating 454information about 620

current folders 550current layers 105

defined 105indicating 536information about 128, 620

making layers current 108current settings

opening DWF files 553opening DWG files 565

cursors 127area fills and 267constraining movement 394–395coordinates 2, 126–127

curvesadding to straight splines 254closing 735, 759control points on 243drawing 246, 758effects of conversion 66flattening 254Freehand tool settings 735keyboard shortcuts 759reshaping 248smoothing 735spline direction handles and 244splines 242stroked fills 638

Custom Canvas Size dialog box 570custom hatch patterns 64Custom Scale dialog box 544Customer Involvement Program (CIP) 26customizing

appearance styles 153, 161, 167block sets 341canvas size 570color books 205, 208Communication Center settings 29keyboard shortcuts 595Layers palette display 408–409scale settings 544style sets 132–133

cutting objects 327–328

D

daily notifications 508darkness (pencil strokes) 653dashboard 2, 512, 782dashed lines

defined 782effects of conversion 65

802 | Index

outline strokes 660performance and 525stroke properties 171, 173, 651

DCX files 50defaults 387

canvas orientation 387–388canvas size 387–388drawing units 388–389scale 388–389setting 387, 544template settings 46, 48, 591

Delete Block Confirmation dialogbox 480

Delete Color Book dialog box 499deleting

all objects on layers 332appearance styles 135, 695area fill anchors 284area fills 283block definitions 343, 345, 480block layers 456block or style libraries 415block references 343, 345block substitutions 369, 462blocks 342, 456, 471, 480blocks from multiblocks 350, 479color books 210, 499colors 497files 550fill elements 670, 672folders 550gradient flags 633keyboard shortcuts 398, 596layers 87, 89, 538objects 331–332outline stroke elements 675paths 593sketches 538spline control points 243, 245, 250,

252sticky key assignments 598stroke elements 668style elements 168, 630, 652, 660,

664style overrides 142unused block definitions 343, 346

deselecting objects 112design illustrations 782Design Web Format (2D) files

converting to sketches 41effects of conversion 59importing 50, 53opening 48passwords 583, 614saving drawings as 10, 384, 614text in imported files 294

Desktop 550details for files, displaying 551dialog boxes 22

accessing Help for 22–23expanding 407preview images in 413

diamond end styles 66dimension text 60dimensions 127

effects of conversion 61exploding into components 43of blocks 127, 609opening 417, 580

direction handlesdefined 782displaying 244editing splines with 244, 249

direction of splines 245DirectX 14, 31Disk Cost button 31disk space 13, 31display adapters 14displaying

appearance style elements 424, 439, 624, 652, 660, 664

appearance styles 620area fill anchors 283, 289block layer group objects 460block layers 453, 458–459Blocks palette content 413CAD Update Report 226–227, 772,

775Communication Center

information 28current appearance styles 128current layers 128

Index | 803

cursor coordinates 127direction handles 244drawing information 125flyout windows 406, 408keyboard shortcuts 396, 594layer group objects 543layers 107–108, 432, 534, 542lists of blocks 467lists of styles 700navigation panes 407, 470, 690palettes 410–411, 441, 512pivot points 307, 768properties 128properties flyout 200saved effects 677saved fills 670, 672saved strokes 668scale for sketches 489sketches 541spline control points 243status bar 127style of object 128style tree 621Styles palette content 413

distances 665, 768distorting text 301distributing objects 444

adjoining edges 322, 325, 444Align and Distribute window 444evenly 316, 318, 320

dither 66, 572docking palettes 403, 406Document Setup dialog box 516dots per inch (DPI) 604downloading 31

Autodesk Impression 31–32Communication Center

information 28DPI (dots per inch) 604dragging

blocks into sketches 342, 344fill styles to create area fills 267, 274geometry to new position 305palettes 404spline direction handles 244styles from Styles palette 136

to copy objects 328to create freehand paths 256to magnify view 121to resize objects 310to rotate objects 310to select objects 112while drawing splines 245

draw order (hatches) 63draw order (layers) 90

CAD update process and 220changing 91, 142, 440defined 90right-click menu shortcuts 92

draw order (objects) 90changing 91effects of conversion 64on packed layers 100right-click menu shortcuts 92

draw order (style elements) 165, 168drawing

about 231advanced splines 246circles 238–239, 734curves 246, 758ellipses 238, 734freehand paths 255, 257, 735geometry 231keyboard shortcuts 232lines 233–234, 741polygons 240, 750rectangles 235, 757shapes 231simple splines 246splines 232, 242, 245–246, 758squares 236, 757tips 231tools 724vectors 758

drawing extents 122Drawing Performance Tuner 102, 426,

520Block Editor and 451Optimize Style Display tab 525Pack Layers tab 522

drawing tools 724

804 | Index

drawing unitscanvas settings 516customizing scale 544defaults 388–389defined 782effects of conversion 59, 65imported content 574setting 42, 574sketch settings 82, 546text size and 301

drawings (Impression) 46backup copies 70blank 46closing 50contents 75coordinate system 125copying 71–72creating 46, 48, 546defaults 387displaying information 125drawing extents 122importing content into 50–51naming 71opening 41, 46, 550, 590orientation 387–388printing 380–381recovering 70, 73saving 72, 590, 612saving as templates 73setting up 516sharing styles 228size 387–388sketches in 75starting from scratch 46, 48updating with changes 215, 223

drawings (source) 41blocks in 337, 371–372changes to data in 53effects of conversion 58importing 50, 530layouts in 50, 567model space views in 50, 568opening 41, 47, 550paths to 775preparing for Impression

rendering 37

retaining plot styles 42, 572styles in 155, 228text in 294updating Impression sketches with

changes 215–216, 220, 772viewports in 50, 568

drop shadows 189about 189colors 192, 666creating 193defined 782editing 193hatch fills 186hiding for performance 422, 424,

525in effects 164, 188offset 192, 665opacity 192properties 662resizing with objects 681stroke properties and 170–171text 297

drop-down lists 2duplicating

appearance styles 134, 202, 694block definitions 354block layers 457layers 86, 90, 222, 540

DWF files 50and masking 56–57blocks 61effects of conversion 59, 61hatch patterns and 39importing 50, 53opening in Impression 48, 553passwords 583, 614saving drawings as 10, 70, 384, 614text in imported files 294

DWF Import Wizard 553DWF Password dialog box 583DWG files 52

blocks in 337effects of conversion 58importing 52layouts in 50model space views in 50

Index | 805

opening in Impression 47retaining plot styles 42, 572text in 294updating objects from 217viewports in 50

DWG Import Wizard 565dynamic blocks 60

E

editingappearance styles 89, 131, 153, 161,

167area fills 282block definitions 353block geometry 364block styles 362blocks 335–336, 352, 355, 361color books 208colors 206, 682compound fills 186drop shadows 193effects 189, 193freehand paths 256, 258, 260gradient fills 181hatch fills 187keyboard shortcuts 595object groups 334roughened edges effects 194spline control points and 111splines 243, 248, 252stroked fills 186strokes 171, 174Style Editor settings 621templates 48text 296, 762textured fills 183uniform fills 181

Effect Properties flyout (Style Editor) 662effects 189

about 188applying 662as style elements 153, 161, 624creating 189, 193, 625, 677defined 164, 783drop shadows as 188–189, 193

editing 189, 193in style tree 199roughened edges as 188, 192, 194shortcut menu options 677turning on or off in styles 200

elements (style)creating 166, 173, 625defined 783, 790displaying or hiding 652, 660, 664removing 652, 660, 664saving 660, 664

elevations 39Ellipse tool 233, 238, 395, 734ellipses

drawing 231, 238, 734keyboard shortcuts 734

Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) 10, 384, 614

end points 233, 243, 391freehand paths 258lines 233object snaps 391, 600splines 243

endcapsdefined 783outline strokes 659strokes 171, 650

endpoints 652entourage 50EPS files 10, 384, 614equidistant objects 318, 320, 444equilateral polygons 240errors, reporting to Autodesk 25exclamation marks (!) 27, 772expanding

dialog boxes 407palettes 406, 408, 410, 412, 588Style Editor 621

exploding 222blocks 43, 351, 353, 480CAD update process and 222dimensions 43nested blocks 362tables 43

Export Blocks dialog box 484Export Color Book dialog box 503

806 | Index

Export Styles dialog box 702Export to Impression feature 41exporting 384

appearance styles 131, 156, 158, 695, 702

block substitution maps 370, 374, 463

blocks 340, 471, 484color books 205, 210, 503copying and pasting to or from other

formats 329drawings to Impression 685files 384, 612, 702IRF files 702layers with drawings 617Saved Blocks lists 484Saved Styles lists 702saving in other formats 384

EXPORTTOAUTOCAD command 39Express Tools 62

objects created by 429Extended freehand editing 258Extended spline editing 248extending freehand paths 260extension lines 60external block libraries

exporting blocks to 484importing 487listing available blocks 466paths 592

external references 50CAD update process and 221effects of conversion 59, 70importing drawings with 50paths to 51

external style librariescreating 702importing styles from 705linking to, in new documents 228opening 705paths 592Styles palette 688

eyedropper tool 206

F

F11 key 456, 538F12 key 456, 538fading effects

drop shadows 190, 665pencil strokes 653standard strokes 652

Fast Display 419, 422, 424, 431, 439, 451, 525

Favorites list of folders 550–551feedback on problems 26File Clean-up (DWF Import Wizard) 559File Clean-up (DWG Import Wizard) 580file cleanup 417file formats 10

effects of conversion on 58exporting blocks 485finding files by 551, 613importable formats 50importing content and 531opening 10saving in 10, 70, 384, 386, 613

File options (Options dialog box) 590files

browsing 551deleting 550IBAK files 71locations 550, 592names 551opening 550, 590previewing 551recently-opened 50, 550, 591sample 18saving 590, 612

Fill Properties flyout (Style Editor) 628fill set

defined 783removing 284

FILLMODE setting 64fills (area) 267, 274

adding to drawings 267, 274and masking boundaries 265Area Fill tool 728boundaries of 264CAD update process and 222

Index | 807

compared to fill styles 263creating 274defined 163, 263, 777deleting 283editing 282fixing leaks 432gap tolerance 266, 280gray highlighting 280inserted as single objects 273, 280inserting into matching areas 271,

278keyboard shortcuts 732layer style overrides and 94, 281overlapping 431Power Fill tool 752precision 281

fills (power)adding to drawings 753keyboard shortcuts 755removing from drawings 754

fills (styles) 175about 175adding to appearance styles 180and layers 176applying effects to 189, 662as appearance style elements 153,

161, 624colors 192, 206compound fills 163, 184, 186, 672copied and pasted objects and 329creating 166, 177, 180, 625, 670defined 163deleting elements of 630, 670, 672drop shadows and 186, 191effects of conversion 63fill styles 783gradients 63, 177–178, 181, 628hatch patterns and 64, 163, 185,

628hiding or displaying elements 630importing elements 156–157, 670,

672noise effects 177, 629opacity 177, 629open objects and 175outline strokes and 172

preview images 670properties 177, 628roughened edges on 194saving and reusing 153, 630shortcut menu options 670standard fills 177stroked fills 163, 184, 186, 628style tree and 199styles in imported content 572textures in 175, 179, 183, 629tiled patterns in 177, 179turning on or off in styles 200types of 628, 670uniform fills 177, 181, 628watercolor 177, 182, 629, 643

filtersadding libraries to palette navigation

panes 413creating style sets with 133finding appearance styles 688, 700finding blocks 341, 466, 482finding files by file format 551, 613retaining in Blocks palette list 483

finding 21all instances of applied styles 202appearance styles 688, 700blocks 466, 482command shortcuts 397creating style sets with custom search

filters 133filtering criteria for blocks 466, 482filtering results to add to palette

navigation panes 413image blocks 482In-Use blocks list 341, 467information in Help 20, 22keyboard shortcuts 594–595layers 534narrowing searches in Help 21search paths for externally-referenced

files 51search tips 21substituted blocks 483vector blocks 482wild-card characters and 791

fine paper 654

808 | Index

fixed size rectangles 237flags

blend flags 633color flags 633, 781

flattened images 384flattening

curves 254roughened edges 192

flexible gradient fills 632floating palettes 404, 406folders

adding to Favorites or Places list 551creating 550current 551deleting 550navigating through 550returning to last folder visited 550view options for contents 550

font sizechanging 292, 296, 720displaying in Text Properties

palette 127effects of conversion 68scaling objects and 301–302

fontschanging display in interface 408color 722displaying in Text Properties

palette 127effects of conversion 68substituting 294, 557, 575, 578switching 296, 720

formatting 291copied and pasted text 329displaying in Text Properties

palette 127text 150, 291, 296, 298, 720, 743

fractions in tolerances 60Freehand option

area fill objects 270, 277, 730freehand paths 257

closing 257control points 255drawing 232, 255, 257, 735editing 256, 258, 260end points 258

precision 257segments 259smoothness 257

Freehand toolabout 735constrained cursor movements 395drawing shapes 232, 255keyboard shortcuts 736

freezing unneeded layers 37, 43frequency

messages from CommunicationCenter 28

roughen effect settings 664frozen layers 64

G

gap tolerance (area fills) 266, 280, 430, 432, 434, 730, 752

gap tolerance (power fill) 752gaps

between objects 325, 446, 752dashed strokes 656in area fill boundaries 432outline strokes 660stroke properties 170–171, 651

General options (Options dialogbox) 588

geometry 79adjoining edges 322, 325, 444aligning 312–313, 315, 317as objects 79blocks as 335CAD update process and 220converting text to 297, 299, 721converting to blocks 347copying 327–328cutting 327–328deleting 331distributing evenly 318, 320, 444draw order and 91effects of conversion 59–61exploding blocks 353, 361fill styles and 263in sketches 77layers and 78

Index | 809

moving 305–306object snaps and 391, 394, 600pasting 327–328refreshing 584resizing text and 302rollover highlighting 399rotating 307, 309roughened edges on 194saving in other formats 384scaling 310–311selecting 438strokes on 42updating in Impression 215, 772zooming to magnify 122

GIF files 50effects of conversion 58importing 50textured fills 179, 635

Global Stroke dialog box 41, 143, 147, 528

global strokes 143, 147, 428, 452, 528glossary of terms 777gradient fills 178

about 178, 628colors in 207creating 181editing 181effects of conversion 61, 63fill styles and 175, 177flexible mode 632gradient ramps 633outline strokes and 172properties 631radial fills 178rigid mode 632

gradient ramps 633, 783graphics card system requirements 14gray highlighting (area fills) 280, 731grayscale 66, 572green components of colors 495grids 67grips

bounding boxes 111defined 783moving objects with 306resizing geometry with 310

rotating objects with 308, 310splines 243

groups (block layer)colors 460creating 455displaying objects in 460listing 454names 460properties 460

groups (layer) 78creating 84, 88, 538defined 78, 783displaying objects in 543draw order 92listing 535locking 460, 543names 543nesting 85opacity settings 142organizing drawings with 85properties 543removing layers from 89

groups (object) 783compared to blocks 374creating 374–375defined 785keyboard shortcuts 747layers and 375nested groups 375Object Selection tool 745selecting 374, 438, 745selecting objects in 111ungrouping 376

H

hard disks 13, 31hardness (pencil strokes) 653hardware 13, 31hatch origin 63hatches 185

about 185, 628associative 64creating 187, 625custom 64defined 163, 783

810 | Index

editing 187effects of conversion 61, 63fill styles and 175hiding for performance 422, 424,

525opening 417, 580preparing drawings for

Impression 39properties 639

heightas property 127, 608block size 477, 490, 609canvas 516, 546, 571rectangles 757roughen effect settings 664texture images 636

Help 17online Help system 17, 19palette and dialog box Help 22–23printable version 18searching for 20, 22technical support 25

hidden lines 44CAD update process and 221effects of conversion 62removing 44, 576, 784

hidden objects 113, 116hiding

appearance style components 624lists of blocks 467navigation panes 470, 690objects on layers 107–108palettes 410, 412selecting hidden objects 113, 116sketches 84status bar 127style elements 652, 660, 664

highlighted block layers 454highlighted layers 106, 536highlighting (rollover) 399

about 399colors 399displaying vector paths 114, 588turning on or off 399

history of opened files 550, 591horizon lines 63

horizontal image tiling 636horizontal object alignment 315, 444horizontal object distribution 318, 445horizontal object size 769horizontal offset 768HSL color model 494, 784hue 204

color settings 204, 494noise effects 641

Hue, Saturation, Luminance color model(HSL) 494, 784

I

IBAK files 71Illustrator 329image-only blocks 482images

appearance styles and 78copying or pasting 329effects of conversion 59, 61, 64, 428image-only blocks 482in blocks 335, 361opening 428, 559, 581previews in palettes and dialog

boxes 413saving flattened images 384

Import Blocks/Open Libraries dialogbox 487

Import Color Book dialog box 500Import dialog box 530Import Options (DWF Import

Wizard) 555, 685Import Options (DWG Import

Wizard) 574Import Styles/Open Libraries dialog

box 705import wizard settings

restoring 553, 565importing 51

appearance styles 51, 155, 157, 228, 695, 705

block libraries 370, 372, 487block substitution maps 51, 370,

373, 462, 464blocks 51, 359

Index | 811

clipped data in imported files 53color book colors 500color books 205, 209compound fill elements 672content into drawings 50–51copying and pasting to or from other

formats 329drawings into Impression 41, 50,

371–372, 530DWF files 53DWG files 52effects from other files 677effects of conversion on files 53, 58–

59fill elements 156, 670hatch fills 185images 428masked data in files 55, 57outline stroke elements 675preparing drawings for 37re-importing geometry to update

files 215, 772stroke elements 156, 668style maps 51, 228, 230text 294–295xclip data in files 57–58

Impression 2about 2Communication Center 26–27, 506downloading 31–32features 3feedback and support 26glossary of terms 777Help system 17, 19installing 31–32interface and tools 2Jump Start Tour 15online resources 15opening 46opening multiple instances 41options 586preparing drawings for 37privacy policy 27Quick Start Guide 16Readme file 17sample illustrations 3

sending comments 26starting 33subscription information 26system requirements 13uninstalling 35web site information 18

Impression objects 217, 785Impression Rendering Format (IRF) 46

exporting 485, 702importing 50opening 46saving drawings as 10, 70

In-Use listsappearance styles 132, 202, 622, 689blocks 341, 467

incrementally moving objects 306–307indexed images

effect of conversion 64individual objects

area fill 732power fill 752

individual version 31information messages

restoring 400–401Initial Setup Wizard 507inserting

area fill anchors 289blocks 342, 344effects of conversion 59insertion scale 490, 609multiblocks 342, 344

insertion angle (hatches) 63insertion scale 490, 609installing Autodesk Impression 31–32intensity

colors 494noise effect 641

interfaceassigning keyboard shortcuts 596assigning sticky keys 598illustrated 2options 586status bar 789workspace 792

internal shadows 191, 666intersecting edges of 3D objects 576

812 | Index

intersecting objects 264, 392, 436, 600inverting selections 115IRF files 46

exporting 485, 702importing 50opening 46saving drawings as 10, 70

isolate Layers palette 410, 412, 512isolate Styles palette 410, 512isometric drawings 221italic text 68, 296, 720

J

jagged edges (roughen effect)about 192as effects 188creating 194defined 787hatch fills 186in effects 164modifying 194properties 662resizing with objects 680stroke properties 171

jagged strokesfixing 437

jittery lines 663Joint Photographic Experts Group

format 10JPG (JPEG) files 10

available formats 615copying or pasting 329effects of conversion 58importing 50optimized, standard, or

progressive 615saving drawings as 10, 70, 385, 614textured fills 179, 629

Jump Start Tour 15justified text 68, 296, 720

K

keyboard shortcuts 594Align tool 727

Area Fill tool 732assigning 396–397block layers 457Block Layers palette 457copying lists of 594customizing 595defined 785displaying 594drawing circles or ellipses 734drawing constrained shapes 232,

395Ellipse tool 734Freehand tool 736Layer Selection tool 739layers 539, 739Layers palette 539Line tool 742magnifying view 764matching properties 744objects 747palette shortcuts 410, 512panning 749polygons 750Power Fill tool 755rectangles and squares 757removing 398, 596selecting 739, 747splines 759sticky keys 232, 597style tree 626text 762

Keyboard Shortcuts settings (Optionsdialog box) 594

keystrokes 26knots (spline control points)

adding 250, 252corner control points 251, 253defined 111, 781, 785, 788drawing splines and 245editing with 243, 252object snaps and 393, 600removing 243, 245, 250, 252reshaping splines with 248smooth control points 251, 253

Index | 813

L

landscape orientation 516, 546, 569Layer 0 338, 358, 363, 689, 780Layer Group Properties dialog box 543layer groups

creating 84, 88, 538defined 785displaying objects in 543draw order 92listing 535locking 460, 543names 543nesting 85opacity settings 142organizing drawings with 85properties 543removing layers from 89

Layer Properties dialog box 542Layer Search box 534Layer Selection tool 110, 737layers

applying appearance styles 87, 136, 141, 176, 439, 621

as criteria for inserting fill 753as properties 127auto layers 93, 601, 778availability of 535behavior of, in Impression 78blocks and 337, 347CAD update process and 219, 221CAD Update Reports on 227, 775colors 38, 542converting a layer to an auto

layer 96copying objects to 327creating 84, 86–88, 95–96, 538current 105, 108, 128, 536cutting objects from 327defined 785deleting 87, 538deleting everything on 332deleting from layer groups 89displaying 107–108, 432, 439, 535–

536, 542displaying for objects 128

draw order and 90–91, 142, 440duplicating 86, 90, 222, 540effects of conversion 59, 61, 64–65exploded block references and 351fill styles and 433freezing unneeded layers 37, 43highlighting 536in sketches 77information about 127keyboard shortcuts 739layer groups 78, 543Layers palette 77lineweights 38listing 535locking 107–108, 535, 542matching 149, 743moving objects to other layers 117,

149, 151, 440, 743names 64, 89, 536, 542, 775object groups and 375objects on 50, 421opacity settings 142, 536opening 580organizing sketches with 84pack and unpack 43, 97, 101–102,

438, 522, 535–536, 563, 582, 786

pasting objects on 327properties 89, 542–543restoring original styles 140, 142saving in other formats and 384,

614scale and 81selected layers 106selecting 106, 110, 536, 772selecting all objects on 116, 737selecting multiple 107, 109style inheritance 84style maps and 230style overrides and 85, 94, 138, 281switching 79turned-off layers 64updating geometry from

source 216, 220, 222, 772Layers drop-down list 79

814 | Index

Layers paletteabout 534applying styles with 136current layers in 105Custom Scale dialog box 544customizing display in 408–409,

412defined 785draw order and 90keyboard shortcuts 539Layer Group Properties dialog

box 543Layer Properties dialog box 542organization of 77properties flyouts 407rows in 588searching layers 534selected layers in 107setting behavior 588shortcut menu commands 539Sketch Properties dialog box 541task bar 537

layouts 41effects of conversion 58, 65importing 41, 50opening 567orientation 387–388scale and 81size 387–388

leader lines 65leaders

excluding 417, 580leading (text)

effects of conversion 68formatting 296settings 722

leaksarea fill 432

left-aligned objects 315, 444left-aligned text 296libraries (block) 340

adding to palette navigationpanes 413

display name 340, 488, 517exporting blocks to 484importing from 370, 372, 487

listing available blocks 466moving or deleting 466paths 592removing from palettes 415using block sets from 340

libraries (style) 131about 131adding styles to Styles palette 156adding to navigation panes 413creating 702display name 131, 517, 706exporting styles to 158importing styles from 155, 705linking to, in new documents 158,

228listing 688moving or deleting 688opening 705paths 592removing from palettes 415saving styles from 135, 159Style Book Wizard 708Styles palette 156, 688using styles from 131

light bulb icon 200line ends 66, 572Line option 269, 275, 729line spacing (leading) 68, 296, 722Line tool

about 741constraining cursor movement 394drawing with 233keyboard shortcuts 742

line weightas basis for inserting fill 753

linear gradient fills 178, 631lines 231

connecting ends 233–234, 742curved 246drawing 231, 233–234, 741endpoints 233gap tolerance extensions 266hidden 43, 62, 221, 576horizon 63intersecting 436keyboard shortcuts 742

Index | 815

straight 246linetype scale 65linetypes 38

converting to appearance styles 773effects of conversion 60–61, 66in imported content 572rendering in Impression 38

lineweights 38assigning by layers 38converting to appearance styles 773effects of conversion 60imported content and 572text 297, 720

lining up objects 312adjoining edges of objects 322, 325,

444Align and Distribute window 444Align tool 312, 725alignment keys 315, 317, 320–321,

446geometry 312–313keyboard shortcuts 727multiple objects 315, 317rows and columns of objects 315,

317scale properties and 727

linkingto block libraries 340, 370, 372to exported styles 156to style libraries 228, 690

listingavailable blocks 466block layer groups 454block layers 454block styles 689blocks in multiblocks 479conflicting block substitutions 464eligible blocks for substitutions 475files in folders 551In-Use blocks 341, 467In-Use styles 132, 202, 622, 689keyboard shortcuts 396, 594layer groups 535layers 535saved styles 688sketches 535

viewports 584live updates 509locations

of color flags 633of files 550, 592of style books 718

locking 108aspect ratio 477, 490, 609, 769block layers 459insertion scale 490layer groups 460, 543layers 535, 542objects on layers 107, 109scale 84, 541shortcuts 109sketches 84, 541texture image aspect ratio 636

luminance 204, 494

M

magnetized palettes 405magnifying view

CAD update process and 220keyboard shortcuts 764saving settings 122settings 120–121Zoom level controls 2Zoom tool 764zooming in or out 120

Managed DirectX 31mapped images 64mapping block substitutions 462

about 462Block Substitution Conflicts dialog

box 464Block Substitution Map 462defined 779exporting maps 370, 374, 463handling conflicts 370, 464importing maps 51, 370, 373, 462listing substitutions 367–368sorting maps 462

Mapping Options (DWF ImportWizard) 557

816 | Index

Mapping Options (DWG ImportWizard) 578

mapping stylescreating maps 228importing style maps 51, 230layers and 230rules for 229style maps 228, 230style maps defined 228, 790

mapping textures 431, 635margins (print) 377–378, 605margins (text) 68marker strokes 650, 654Mask by Sketch 55masking

area fills and 265clipping boundaries 57objects 55, 57–58opacity 633

Match Properties tool 147, 743keyboard shortcuts 744

matchingaligning objects to matched

points 312, 314layers 149, 743styles 147, 743text formats 150, 743undoing 152wild-card characters 791

maximizing palettes 410measurement units 82

canvas units 82, 546, 570default settings 388–389, 544drawing units 42, 82levels of precision 516scale and 82setting for imported content 574sketch settings 82, 516, 546

media 171listing appearance styles by 700strokes 171, 650, 667

memorynumber of undo activities 331–332,

588system requirements 13

menu keyboard shortcuts 396Add Effect dialog box 677assigning shortcuts 596Block Layers palette 457Blocks palette 467, 471command shortcuts 396Create New Fill dialog box 670Create New Outline Stroke dialog

box 675Create New Stroke dialog box 668defined 787draw order 92effects 677fills 670finding shortcuts 397Layers palette 539navigation panes 467, 691Options dialog box 595outline strokes 675preview panes 471, 695strokes 668Styles palette 691

midpoints 392, 600minimizing palettes 410MINSERT command 60mirrored stroked fills 185, 187, 639mirrored text 68mirrored textured fills 179missing plot style tables 773model space views

custom canvas size for 570effects of conversion 58, 66importing 50opening 568scale 388updating 223

modes for gradient fills 632modified CAD objects

defined 217, 785retaining during updates 225–226updating 773

Modify Style Color dialog box 682modifying

appearance styles 89, 131, 153, 161, 167, 621

area fills 282

Index | 817

block definitions 353block geometry 364block styles 133, 362blocks 335–336, 352, 355, 361color books 208colors 206compound fills 186drop shadows 193effects 189, 193freehand paths 256, 258, 260gradient fills 181hatch fills 187keyboard shortcuts 595nested blocks 364object groups 334roughened edges effects 194spline control points and 111splines 243, 248, 252stroked fills 186strokes 171, 174Style Editor settings 621templates 48text 296, 298, 762textured fills 183uniform fills 181

monthly notifications 508mottled fills 629moving

area fill anchors 290block instances 350canvas 119, 749constrained cursor movement 394–

395geometry 305–306layers 100, 440linear and polar offsets 768modified CAD objects and 217objects 111, 421, 440, 768objects to other layers 100, 117,

149, 151, 743palettes 404pivot points 309spline control points 248

mtext (multiline text)effects of conversion 60, 69importing 294

multiblocks 336about 336block substitutions and 367, 478bounding boxes 479creating 347, 349, 471defined 785inserting 342, 344listing blocks in 479naming 479preview images 475, 478properties 478removing blocks from 350, 479rendering inserted blocks 38replacing blocks in 345scale 479searching for 483

multiline texteffects of conversion 60, 69importing 294

multiple sessionsperformance and 422

My Documents folder 550

N

Name and Location panel (Style BookWizard) 718

names and namingappearance styles 621, 700as properties 609block layer groups 460block layers 454, 458blocks 354, 454, 476, 609, 775CAD update process and 222drawings 71files 551layer groups 543layers 89, 536, 542, 775listing styles by 700multiblocks 479named colors 496named views 50searching for blocks by 482sketches 81, 84, 535, 541, 546, 775style books 718

narrowing searches in Help 21

818 | Index

native scale (strokes) 685navigating

color books 496folders and files 550hiding or displaying navigation

panes 690Styles palette 690tools for 724

navigation panesadding libraries to 413Blocks palette 466hiding or displaying 407, 690Styles palette 690–691

nearest point object snaps 393, 600nesting

blocks 347, 349, 689by insert layer 347circular references (blocks) 347editng nested blocks 364elements in appearance styles 161exploding nested blocks 362layer groups 85object groups 375

New Color Book dialog box 498New dialog box 546noise effects

blotchy or mottled fills 177defined 785fills 629grain 641positioning 641properties 640texture 641

notifications 26–27, 508nudging objects into place 307, 738,

746, 785number of copies to print 604numbered text 68, 297numerals, searching for 791NVidia graphics cards 14

O

object groupscompared to blocks 374creating 374–375

defined 333, 785keyboard shortcuts 747layers and 375nested groups 375Object Selection tool 745selecting 374, 438, 745selecting objects in 111ungrouping 376

object property overrides 358Object Selection tool 110, 296, 305, 745Object Snap Settings (Options dialog

box) 600object snaps 391

about 391indicator 2settings 600turning on or off 394, 600

objects 79adjoining edges 322, 325, 444aligning 312–313, 315, 317applying appearance styles to 87,

136, 141applying effects to 189area fill objects 263aspect ratio 608CAD objects 217CAD Update Reports on 226clipping 44, 53copying 327–329cutting 327–328defined 79deleting 331–332deselecting 112displaying all on specific layers 116displaying layer of 128distributing evenly 316, 318, 320,

444effects of conversion 60hiding 107, 109Impression objects 217information about 128keyboard shortcuts 747layers and 78locking 107, 109, 608masking 55, 57

Index | 819

matching another object’s size 312, 314

modified CAD objects 217moving 111, 305–306, 768moving to other layers 117, 151Object Selection tool 745opacity 142overriding appearance styles 138packed 333pasting 327–329precisely moving 305, 768precisely resizing 768precisely rotating 768previewing 80printing 381properties 127–128, 608removing style overrides 142resizing 111, 310–311, 768resizing appearance styles with 211,

213, 311, 679, 769resizing text with 301–302rotating 111, 307, 309, 768saving in selection sets 71, 73selecting 110, 114, 438, 745selecting all 116, 737selecting hidden 116selecting multiple 115snap 391, 394, 600style information 621vector segments in 111wireframe 45xclipping 57–58

obliqued text 68offset

drop shadows 192, 665specifying with Transform

palette 768On Demand notifications 508One-Layer Drawings (DWF Import

Wizard) 561online Help 17

about 17, 19finding information in 20palette and dialog box Help 22–23searching for topics 20, 22

opacityappearance styles and 140, 168backgrounds of images 616block layers 455color flags 633defined 785drop shadows 192, 665fills 177, 629layers 536masks 633noise effects 640palettes 408–409saving in other formats, transparency

and 384setting 142, 168strokes 171, 649

open freehand paths 257, 264Open Libraries dialog box 487, 705open splines 251opening 10

available file formats 10backup copies of drawings 73blank drawings 48dimensions 580drawings 41, 46, 550, 590drawings based on templates 46DWF files 48, 583DWG files 47external block libraries 487external style libraries 705hatches 580images 428, 559, 581Impression 46IRF files 46layers 580layouts 567leader exclusion 580model space 568multiple drawings 41preparing drawings for 37properties flyout windows 408recently-opened files 50sheets 555, 710sketches 550stroke type 555, 572templates 46

820 | Index

text 559, 580viewports 568

operating system requirements 13optimization

screen display and 526Optimize Style Display (Drawing

Performance Tuner) 525optimized JPG files 615Options dialog box 586

about 586Auto Layer settings 601file options 590general options 588keyboard shortcut settings 594object snap settings 600path options 592shortcuts settings 595sticky keys settings 597

orientation 387canvas 516, 546, 569print settings 377–378, 604setting defaults 387–388

origin 126hatches 640points 126textured fills 637

original blocks in substitution maps 462orthogonal drawing 232, 394–395Osnap button 394Outline Stroke Properties flyout (Style

Editor) 658outline strokes 162

creating 170, 174, 625, 674defined 162, 786elements of 172fills in 176importing elements 675previewing 658properties 170, 658resizing with objects 680shortcut menu options 675

outlines, converting text to 297, 299, 721, 786

overhang (overshoot)defined 786outline strokes 659

stroke properties 170, 172, 650stroked fills 638

overlined text 68overriding

appearance styles 78, 85, 138area fills as overrides 94, 281CAD update process and 220–221defined 790removing style overrides 142

overshootdefined 786outline strokes 659stroke properties 170, 172, 650stroked fill 430stroked fills 638

P

Pack Layers (Drawing PerformanceTuner) 522

Pack Layers (DWF Import Wizard) 563Pack Layers (DWG Import Wizard) 582packed objects

compared to blocks and objectgroups 334

defined 333selecting 114

packed units 786packing

defined 786layers 43, 97, 101–102, 333, 438,

522, 536, 563, 582page layouts 41

converting to sketches 41defined 786effects of conversion 58, 65importing 50opening 567orientation 387–388scale and 81size 387–388

page size 65pages

centering images on 379, 605scaling text and 301–302size 387–388

Index | 821

palettes 403about 403accessing Help for 22–23arranging 403closing 410disappearing 441docking 403, 406dragging 404expanding and collapsing 406, 408,

410, 412, 588floating 406magnetized 405moving 404preview images in 413properties flyouts 406, 408resizing 407, 410, 412restoring default configuration 412separating 405–406transparency 408–409

Pan tool 119, 749panes 787panning 119

CAD update process and 220keyboard shortcuts 749view of canvas 119, 749

PANTONE colors 205, 207, 496, 787paper

simulating types of 654size 377–378, 604

passwords 386, 583, 614pastel paper 654pasting 327

area fill anchors 278, 288objects 327–328text 294–295to or from other applications 329

paths (file)CAD update process and 219deleting 593externally-referenced files 51file locations 550setting defaults 592source drawings 775update paths 222, 773

paths (freehand)closing 257

control points 255drawing 232, 255, 257, 735editing 256, 258, 260end points 258freehand paths 257Freehand tool 735precision 257segments 259smoothness 257

Paths options (Options dialog box) 592patterned fills 163, 635patterns in searches 791PCX files 50, 179, 635PDF files 10

effects of conversion 58Help system 18saving drawings as 10, 385, 615

pen numbers 66, 572pencil strokes 650, 653percentages

object resizing and 310, 769resizing styles with geometry 211stroked fills and 638

performancetuning 422, 426

performance issues 417area fill gray highlighting 280, 441,

732area fill precision 281multiple sessions 422pack to improve 97, 101, 522roughen effects and 193styles 195, 422, 424, 525tuning 441, 520

performance meter 522permissions 31perpendicular object snaps 393, 600perspective drawings 43

CAD update process and 221importing into Impression 43

photographs 385PhotoShop file format (PSD) 50

effects of conversion 58importing 50saving drawings as 11, 385, 617

pivot points 307, 309, 768

822 | Index

pixel measurements in resolution 604Places list 550plot styles

CAD Update process and 773effects of conversion 66rendering in Impression 38retaining in converted drawings 42

PNG files 50copying or pasting 329effects of conversion 58importing 50saving drawings as 11, 70, 385, 616textured fills 179, 629

Point optionarea fill objects 268, 729

pointsaligning objects to 312–313object snaps 393, 600

polar offset locations 768Polygon tool 233, 395, 750polygons

drawing 231, 240, 750keyboard shortcuts 750number of sides on 240–241, 750Polygon tool 750rounded corners 240–241

Portable Document Format (PDF) 10effects of conversion 58saving drawings as 10, 385, 615

Portable Network Graphics format(PNG) 50

copying or pasting 329effects of conversion 58importing 50saving drawings as 11, 70, 385, 616textured fills 179, 629

portrait orientation 516, 546, 569PostScript fonts 68power fill objects

inserted as one object 752inserting 271, 278precision 752

Power Fill tool 271, 278, 752keyboard shortcuts 755settings 752

Power Fill toolbar 753

precision 516adherence of area fill to

boundaries 281, 731adherence of power fill to

boundaries 752drawing freehand paths 257Freehand tool settings 735levels of 516moving objects precisely 305, 768print output 378resizing objects precisely 768rotating objects precisely 768spacing objects evenly 321units of measurement and 516, 546

preview imagesappearance styles 621, 624blocks 470, 475compound fills 672defined 787effects 677files 550fills 670multiblocks 475, 478outline strokes 674palette and dialog box display 413resizing 413sorting 413strokes 667

preview panesBlocks palette 470shortcut menu options 695Styles palette 694

previewing 80appearance styles 198, 694blocks 470color choices 204, 207, 495files 550images in palettes and dialog

boxes 413objects 80outline strokes 658Print Preview window 377, 605resized styles 679–680strokes 648style changes 201

Print dialog box 604

Index | 823

print margins 377–378printed output 544, 546printers 377–378, 604printing

centering images 379–380, 605draw order and 90drawings 381fitting images on pages 378, 380,

604lists of keyboard shortcuts 396number of copies 604print margins 377–378Print Preview window 377, 605printed size of blocks 490resolutions for 613scale of printed output 82, 378–

379, 604selected objects 381settings 377–378, 604sketches 380, 604

privacy policy, Autodesk 27processor system requirements 13product information 506product support 509progressive JPG files 615prompts in status bar 18properties

block layer groups 460block layer groups and 460block layers and 458blocks 475, 489, 608CAD update process and 220currently-selected objects 127displaying 128, 200drop shadows 662fills 177, 628gradient fills 631hatch fills 639layer groups 89, 543layers and 89, 542–543, 608matching 147, 743multiblocks 478noise effects 640objects 128outline strokes 658

palette and tool flyouts 200, 406, 408, 787

printer settings 377–378, 604Properties palette 608roughened edges 662saving in other formats and 384sketches 541stroked fills 637strokes 171, 648styles 200text 127, 720textures 634uniform fills 630

properties flyouts 200, 406, 408Properties palette

about 608drawing information in 125, 127scaling styles with 214

proportionsfill patterns 180proportional resizing 739, 746resizing styles with objects 211

PSD fileseffects of conversion 58importing 50saving drawings as 11, 385, 617

PUBLISHHATCH system variable 39punctuation marks

in text 296wild-card characters 791

purgingunused appearance styles 135unused block definitions 343, 346

Q

qualityof images 386, 615of printing 604

Quick Start Guide 16

R

radial gradient fills 178, 631radius of rounded corners 750

824 | Index

ragged edges (roughen effect) 192about 192creating 194defined 787effects and 164, 188hatch fills 186modifying 194properties 662resizing with objects 680stroke properties 170

RAM system requirements 13ramps 633randomly dashed lines 651, 657, 660randomly stroked fills 185, 637raster images

defined 787effects of conversion 58importing 50indicators for 622saving as 385

rayseffects of conversion 69

re-importing geometry to updatefiles 215, 772

Readme file 17, 31real-world units (drawing units)

canvas settings 516customizing scale 544defaults 388defined 782, 787effects of conversion 59, 65imported content 574setting 42, 574sketch settings 82, 546text size and 301

rearrangingblock substitution maps 462Blocks palette content 413–414layer draw order 91palettes 403preview images 413–414Styles palette content 413–414

recently-opened files 50, 550, 591recovering drawings 70, 73Rectangle tool 233, 235–236, 395, 757

rectangles 231aspect ratio 237, 757drawing 231, 235, 757fixed size settings 237keyboard shortcuts 757Rectangle tool 233, 235, 395, 757rounded corners 237

red components of colors 495red dots 434red lines 434Red, Green, Blue color model (RGB) 64,

494, 787Redefine Block dialog box 481redefining block definitions 353, 471,

481redirecting freehand paths 261redoing actions 331–332refreshing

Communication Centercontent 506

geometry 584regions 508removing

all objects on layers 332appearance styles 135, 695area fill anchors 289area fills 283–284Autodesk Impression 35block definitions 343, 345, 480block layers 456block references 343, 345block substitutions 369, 462blocks 342, 456, 471, 480blocks from multiblocks 350, 479color book colors 209color books 210, 499colors 497compound fill elements 672files 550fill elements 670folders 550gradient flags 633hidden lines 43, 221, 576, 784keyboard shortcuts 398, 596layers 87, 89, 538libraries 415

Index | 825

object masking 57objects 331–332objects from selection sets 112outline stroke elements 675paths 593sketches 538spline control points 243, 245, 250,

252sticky key assignments 598stroke elements 668style elements 168, 652, 660, 664style overrides 142unused block definitions 343, 346xclip masking 57–58

Rename Color Book dialog box (Colordialog box) 498

renamingappearance styles 134blocks 354CAD update process and 222color books 209, 498drawings 71layers 89sketches 81, 84

reorderingblock substitution maps 462Blocks palette content 413–414layer draw order 91palettes 403preview images 413–414Styles palette content 413–414

repeating patterns in textures 635replacing blocks 345, 367, 481reporting errors to Autodesk 25reports 226–227, 772, 775repositioning

block instances 350canvas 119, 749constrained cursor movement 394–

395geometry 305–306linear and polar offsets 768modified CAD objects and 217objects 111, 768palettes 404pivot points 309

spline control points 248reset palettes 410resetting

appearance styles 85object masking 57objects with style exceptions 621original blocks 361overridden styles 140palettes 410, 412xclip masking 57–58

reshapingmodified CAD objects 217splines 248, 252

Resize Style dialog box 679resizing

alignment and scale 727appearance styles 2, 211, 213appearance styles with objects 140,

211, 213, 311, 623, 679, 769area fill anchor windows 290block definitions and 351–352block instances 350block substitutions and 367, 476–

477blocks 343, 609dialog boxes 407displaying size 127geometry 310–311, 440hatch fills 639Layers palette rows 409locking or unlocking 84, 541modified CAD objects and 217multiblocks 479objects 111, 421, 440objects by matching and aligning

points 312, 314objects precisely 768objects proportionally 739, 746objects randomly 477outline strokes 659palettes 407, 410, 412preview images 413–414printed output 82, 378–379, 604setting percentages for 211, 310text 296, 301–302textures 635

826 | Index

resolutionpixel measurements 604saving in other formats and 385,

613restoring

appearance styles 85import wizard settings 553, 565information dialog boxes 400–401object masking 57objects with style exceptions 621original blocks 361overridden styles 140palette configuration defaults 412palettes 410, 412warning messages 400–401, 589xclip masking 57–58

retaining CAD objects 219, 773returning to last folder visited 550reusing styles 153, 228reviewing update results 226–227revision clouds 67Revit Architecture files 10Revit files 39RGB color model 494, 787RGB images 64RGBA images 64Rich Text Format (RTF) 329right-aligned objects 315, 444right-aligned text 296right-click menu shortcuts

Add Effect dialog box 677assigning shortcuts 596Block Layers palette 457Blocks palette 467, 471command shortcuts 396Create New Fill dialog box 670Create New Outline Stroke dialog

box 675Create New Stroke dialog box 668defined 787draw order 92effects 677fills 670finding shortcuts 397Layers palette 539locking or unlocking layers 109

navigation panes 467, 691Options dialog box 595outline strokes 675preview panes 471, 695strokes 668Styles palette 691

rigid gradient fills 632rollover highlighting 399

about 399colors 399displaying vector paths 114, 588turning on or off 399

Rotate Style dialog box 683rotating

blocks 477geometry 307hatch fills 639modified CAD objects and 217objects 111, 309, 768pivot points and 768precisely rotating objects 768randomly varying rotation 477spline control points 249style components 623, 683text 297, 300, 721texture images 637

roughen effect 192about 192and fill precision 430creating 194defined 787hatch fills 186hiding for performance 422, 424,

525in effects 164, 188modifying 194properties 662resizing with objects 680stroke properties 170

rounded cornersoutline strokes 660polygons 240–241, 750rectangles and squares 237, 757

rounded endcaps 651rows

aligning objects in 315, 317

Index | 827

in Layers palette 409, 588in style tree 624

RTEXT objectseffects of conversion 69, 429

RTF (Rich Text Format) 329

S

sample files 18saturation 494

colors 204pencil strokes 653setting 494

Save As dialog box 612Save Style Element dialog box 685saved blocks

exporting 484in external files 370, 373sets of 341

saved compound fills 672saved effects 677saved fills 670, 672saved strokes 668saved styles

adding elements to styles 154displaying saved elements 415exporting 702in style tree 200listing 688

savingappearance style elements 630appearance styles 132, 135, 694Auto Save feature 73, 591backup copies of drawings 70, 73block definitions 370, 373blocks 450, 471color books 504drawings 70, 72drawings as templates 73file formats for 10, 384, 386, 613files 70, 590, 612filters 483IRF files 70library styles 155, 159Saved Blocks list 485stroke elements 652, 685

style elements 153, 155, 660, 664, 685

time 417zoom settings 122

scalealignment and 727arrows 655block substitutions and 367, 476–

477blocks 127, 343, 609customizing 544default settings 388–389, 544displaying 127drawing units and 82effects of conversion 64, 66hatch fills 639locking or unlocking 84, 541model space views 388multiblocks 479on opening 427outline strokes 659precisely resizing objects 768printed output 82, 378–379, 604proportional resizing 739, 746randomly varying 477resizing appearance styles with

objects 140, 211, 213, 311, 769

resizing geometry 310–311sketch settings 82, 489, 516, 535,

541, 546styles 2, 211, 213, 431text size 296, 301–302textures 431, 635views in sketches 81

Scale Styles feature 2, 211, 214scans 386, 615screen display

optimization and 419, 526resolution 613

screening 572Search Blocks dialog box 482search paths for externally-referenced

files 51Search Styles dialog box 700

828 | Index

searchingadding libraries to palette navigation

panes 413creating style sets with custom search

filters 133filtering criteria for blocks 466, 482for all instances of applied

styles 202for appearance styles 688, 700for blocks 466, 482for command shortcuts 397for image blocks 482for information in Help 20, 22for keyboard shortcuts 594–595for multiblocks 483for substituted blocks 483for vector blocks 482In-Use blocks list 341, 467layers 534search paths for externally-referenced

files 51tips 21wild-card characters and 791

sections 39segments in freehand paths 259Select a Viewport dialog box 584selected block layers 454selected layers 106, 536selecting

all area fills 283all objects on layers 737all text objects 720block instances 365block layers 454blocks 334, 347clearing selections 116color book colors 496colors 205, 495crossing selection 112current selections, information

about 127hidden objects 113, 116inverting selections 115keyboard shortcuts 739, 747layers 105, 110, 536locking layers against 107–109

locking objects against 109modes 738, 745multiple layers 107, 109multiple objects 115object groups 374, 745objects 110, 114, 438, 745objects to create blocks 347objects with style exceptions 621packed objects 100, 114problems with 113properties of selected objects 128rollover highlighting and 114, 399,

588setting selection method 115status of selected objects 116styles to edit 167text 296tools 724viewports 584window selection 112zooming to selections 120

selection setsadding objects to 112identifying layers 112, 116large 420removing objects from 112saving objects in 71, 73Style Editor 198

selection tools 724selection triangles 112, 116, 202, 455,

536separating palettes 405–406shading in area fills 264, 429shadows 189

about 189cast shadows 192, 666colors 192creating 193defined 782editing 193hatch fills 186in effects 164, 188internal shadows 191, 666offset 192, 665opacity 192properties 662

Index | 829

resizing with objects 681stroke properties and 170–171text 297

shapeas criteria for inserting fill 753

sharing styles with other drawings 228sheets

opening 555, 710shortcut menu commands

Add Effect dialog box 677assigning shortcuts 596Block Layers palette 457Blocks palette 467, 471command shortcuts 396Create New Fill dialog box 670Create New Outline Stroke dialog

box 675Create New Stroke dialog box 668defined 787draw order 92effects 677fills 670finding shortcuts 397Layers palette 539navigation panes 467, 691Options dialog box 595outline strokes 675preview panes 471, 695strokes 668Styles palette 691

Shortcuts settings (Options dialogbox) 595

Show/Hide Palettes 512SHX fonts 578

effects of conversion 61, 68lineweights 297, 720

sides on polygons 240–241, 750simple splines 242, 246single-object area fills 273, 280Sketch Properties dialog box 541sketches

AutoCAD viewports as 76CAD update process and 219CAD Update Report 226–227, 775converting to other formats 384,

386, 613

creating 538, 546defined 75, 787defining new 83deleting 538displaying objects 541drawing units 546hiding 84importing 530including block sets in all new 373layers in 77list of 535locking 84, 541names 81, 535, 541naming 546objects in 79opacity settings 142opening 550orientation 387–388printing 380, 604properties 541resizing styles with size changes 214saving 612scale settings 82, 440, 489, 516,

535, 541, 544, 546selecting all objects in 116selecting layers in 107selecting to update 772setting defaults 387setting up 516size 387–388units of measurement 546updating with changed

geometry 216, 220, 223views as 59, 81

smooth control points (splines) 243, 251, 253, 788

smoothingcurves 254, 735roughened edges 192smoothness in freehand paths 257

snappingobject snaps 391palettes into place 405problems with 436snap indicator 2snap settings 600

830 | Index

turning snap on or off 394, 600software

copying and pasting objects to orfrom 329

system requirements 13sorting

block substitution maps 462Blocks palette content 413–414preview images 413–414Styles palette content 413–414

source drawings 41blocks in 337, 371changes to data in 53effects of conversion 58importing 50, 52, 530layouts in 50, 567model space in 568model space views in 50opening 41, 47, 550paths 775preparing for Impression

rendering 37retaining plot styles 42, 572styles in 155, 228text in 294updating Impression drawings with

changes 215–216, 220, 772viewports in 50, 568

spaces (gaps)in dashed strokes 656–657in outline strokes 170, 660in standard strokes 170in stroked fills 638stroke properties and 170–171

spacing objectsadjoining edges 322, 325, 444evenly 318, 320, 444methods 322, 446

special characters 296in text 296wild-card characters in searches 791

speedpack to improve 101program 417styles and 195

spline control pointsadding 250, 252corner control points 251, 253defined 111, 781, 785, 788drawing splines and 245editing with 243, 252object snaps and 393, 600removing 243, 245, 250, 252reshaping splines with 248smooth control points 251, 253

Spline tool 232, 242, 251, 395, 758splines 242

about 242adding or removing control

points 252advanced 242, 758appending new segments to 250closing 245, 248, 251–252connecting line segments into 234converting text to 297, 299corner points 248direction handles 244, 249direction of 245drawing 232, 242, 245–246, 758editing 248, 252effects of conversion 62effects on performance 420fill styles and 175freehand paths as 255grips 243keyboard shortcuts 759reshaping 248, 252simple 242, 246spline control points 111, 243, 252,

788Spline tool 758types of 242

split corners 650, 659, 788–789squares

drawing 232, 236, 395, 757keyboard shortcuts 757Rectangle tool 757

stacked fractions in tolerances 60stacked text

creating 292–293, 721effects of conversion 68

Index | 831

unstacking 294stand-alone version 31standard endcaps 651standard fills 177standard JPG files 615standard strokes 162, 170–171, 652standard workspace 789standards for drawings 228start points of splines 243starting Autodesk Impression 33starting drawings 46Starting Styles panel (Style Book

Wizard) 711stationary toolbar 789status bar 127

defined 789drawing information in 125–126hiding or displaying 127illustrated 2, 789prompts in 18Scale Style settings 213

STB files 38importing 572rendering 38retaining plot styles 42

sticky keysassigning 397drawing with 232listing 594removing assignments 598settings 597temporarily activating 396

Sticky Keys settings (Options dialogbox) 597

straight lines 741straight splines 246, 254Stroke Properties flyout (Style

Editor) 648stroked fills

about 628compound fills and 184creating 170, 186, 625defined 163, 790hiding for performance 422, 424,

525mirrored strokes 187

outline strokes and 172properties 637resizing with objects 680

strokes 170about 170appearance styles and 153, 161, 624applying effects to 189, 662applying to geometry 42CAD update process and 773colors 170–171, 649compound fills and 184copied and pasted objects and 329creating new strokes 667creating style elements 166, 171,

173, 625dashed strokes 171, 173defined 162, 790drop shadows on 171editing 171, 174endcaps 171, 650fade properties 653gaps in 171global 143, 147, 528importing style elements 156–157,

668in style tree 199jagged 437media 171, 650, 667opacity 171, 649outline strokes 162, 170, 674overshoot 650preview images 667properties 171, 648removing stroke elements 668resizing with objects 680roughened edges 171saving and reusing 153setting for imported content 555,

572setting for opened content 555, 572setting scale 685shortcut menu options 668split corners 650standard strokes 162, 171turning on or off in styles 200types of 170

832 | Index

weight 143, 147, 171, 428, 528, 649Style Assignments (DWG Import

Wizard) 572, 685Style Book Wizard

about 708Color Modification Rules panel 715Introduction panel 710Name and Location panel 718Starting Styles panel 711

style booksabout 708color modification rules 715introduction 710names and locations of 718starting styles 711

Style Editor 198about 129, 198, 620Add Effect dialog box 677applying styles with 137blocks and 449Create New Compound Fill dialog

box 672Create New Fill dialog box 670Create New Outline Stroke dialog

box 674Create New Stroke dialog box 667custom styles 161, 164defined 790editing style elements 153, 164Effects Properties flyout 662expanding or collapsing Style

Editor 621Export Styles dialog box 702Fill Properties flyout 628Import Styles/Open Libraries dialog

box 705importing styles 228, 705In-Use styles list 202Modify Style Color dialog box 682Outline Stroke Properties flyout 658previewing styles 201properties flyouts 407, 628, 648, 662Resize Style dialog box 679resizing styles 213, 679Rotate Style dialog box 683saved style elements 685

saved styles 200searching for all instances of applied

styles 202selected layers in 106Stroke Properties flyout 648style properties in 200, 648style tree 199, 621

style elementscreating 166, 171, 173, 625defined 783, 790deleting 652displaying or hiding 652, 660, 664removing 660, 664saving 660, 664, 685

Style Exception Alertsabout 621flagging style exceptions 78overriding styles 139resetting objects 85

style exceptionsabout 621avoiding 78flagging 78overriding styles 138resetting objects 85, 621selecting objects with 621

style libraries 131about 131adding libraries to navigation

panes 413adding styles to Styles palette 156adding to navigation panes 413creating 702exporting styles to 158importing styles from 155, 705linking to, in new documents 158,

228opening 705paths 592removing from palettes 415saving styles from 135, 159Style Book Wizard 708Styles palette 156, 688using styles from 131

style mapscreating 228, 230

Index | 833

defined 228, 790importing 51, 230layers and 230, 433rules for 229setting for imported content 557,

574style overrides 420

appearance styles 78, 85, 138applying 138area fills as overrides 94, 281blocks and 338, 358CAD update process and 220–221defined 790removing style overrides 142

style setsas properties 608creating 132–133custom search filters and 133defined 132

style tree 168, 199about 199displaying 621keyboard shortcuts 626rows in 624saved styles in 200style properties and 200

styles 129about 129adding elements to 154, 180, 200,

625adding to Styles palette 156alignment and 316applying elements of 153applying to layers 87, 141applying to objects 136, 141applying to text 300area fills and 94, 267, 281as properties 127block styles 132, 335, 337–338, 360block substitutions and 368CAD update process and 215, 221,

773colors in 203, 206, 623, 682, 715compared to area fills 263compound fills 672copying 131, 202, 624, 706

creating 161, 166, 198creating sets of 133current 128, 435custom search filters for 133defined 777deleting 135, 695deleting elements of 168displaying 106, 536, 620displaying elements of 424, 624displaying for blocks 454displaying for objects 128draw order 90, 165, 168duplicating 134, 202, 694editing 89, 131, 153, 161, 435, 621effects in 164, 188–189, 193, 624,

677elements of 153exceptions to 78, 420exporting 131, 156, 158, 695, 702fills in 161, 175, 624, 628, 670filtering lists of 700importing 51, 155, 157, 228, 230,

695, 705importing elements of 156–157, 230In-Use list 132, 202, 622, 689information about 127–128keyboard shortcuts 626layers and 78, 84matching 147, 743multiple styles indicator 621names 134, 621nested elements 161opacity 140, 168overrides 85, 138, 142performance and 525previewing 198, 201, 621, 624, 694purging 135re-imported geometry and 215renaming 134resetting original styles 140resizing options 211, 213, 431, 623,

679, 769rotating components of 623, 683saved styles 200saving 132, 135, 159, 694saving elements of 153, 155

834 | Index

scale of 140, 211, 213, 431searching for 133, 202, 700selected layers and 106sets of 129, 132–133sketches and 77starting styles 711strokes in 161, 169, 171, 173, 624,

667Style Editor 129, 161, 198, 620style libraries 131, 135, 705style maps 228, 230, 557, 574style tree 199, 626Styles palette 129, 688text and 291turning elements on or off 168, 200types of 624unused 135updating 156visual extents and 316, 446watercolor 182, 629, 643

Styles paletteabout 129, 688adding frequently-used styles to 156adding libraries to 413applying styles with 136block styles in 360, 449copying styles to 706display options 413–414expanding 412In-Use styles list 202linking to style libraries 228navigation pane 407, 688preview pane 694searching for styles in 700shortcut menu options 691, 695sorting content 413–414

subscription information 26substituting

block references 366, 368fonts 294, 557, 575, 578

swatches (preview images)appearance styles 621, 624, 694compound fills 672defined 787effects 677fills 670

gradient fills 631outline strokes 674palette and dialog box display 413–

414resizing 414sorting 413–414strokes 667textures 635uniform fills 630

switchingbetween expanded and compact

palette views 412between smooth and corner control

points 251, 253blocks 336, 366, 368blocks in multiblocks 345layers 79tools 232

symbolsin text 60, 296wild-card characters 791

system requirements 13, 31

T

tables 43, 67task bar (Block Layers palette) 455task bar (Layers palette) 537technical support 25templates

browsing for 591defaults 48, 591drawings based on 46modifying 48opening 46saving drawings as 73

textadding 291–292, 762appearance styles and 291, 300as objects 79backwards 302block text 335bounding boxes 301colors 297, 722converting to geometry 297, 299,

721

Index | 835

copying or pasting to or from otherapplications 329

creating blocks from 347dimension text 60distorting 301drop shadows on 297editing 296, 298, 762effects of conversion 59–61, 69font substitution 294fonts 720formatting 150, 291, 296, 298, 720,

743importing 294–295keyboard shortcuts 762leading 722lineweights 297, 720matching formats 150, 743pasting 294–295, 329properties 127, 720Properties palette 720resizing 310saving in other formats and 384selecting 296, 299, 720size 720source drawing text 294stacked 292–293, 721Text tool 291, 296, 762tracking 722upside-down 302vertical and horizontal 297, 300,

721width 721

text file format 329text objects

opening 559, 580Text Properties palette 127, 291, 720text size

changing 292, 296, 720displaying in Text Properties

palette 127effects of conversion 68scaling objects and 301–302

Text tool 291, 296, 762textures 179

about 179, 629creating 183

editing 183in fills 163, 175, 179in outline strokes 172properties 634

TGA files 179, 635three-dimensional drawings

effects of conversion 63importing into Impression 43, 576importing views 45updating sketches from 221

three-dimensional solids 61thumbnails (preview images)

appearance styles 621, 624blocks 470, 475compound fills 672defined 787effects 677files 550fills 670multiblocks 475, 478outline strokes 674palette and dialog box display 413–

414resizing 413sorting 413–414strokes 667

TIF files 50copying or pasting 329importing 50textured fills 179, 635

tiled bitmaps 163, 177tiled fill patterns 177, 179, 635tiled texture fills 635tips for using Impression 509tolerances 61toolbars

Block Editor 449Navigation pane 467Power Fill 753Preview pane 470stationary 126, 789

Toolboxabout 724accessing tools in 232illustrated 2properties flyouts 407

836 | Index

toolsflyouts 406, 408keyboard shortcuts 232sticky keys 597

top-aligned objects 315, 444tracking 296, 722

effects of conversion 68Transform palette

about 768moving geometry 305resizing objects 310resizing styles with objects 213rotating objects 307scaling styles 213

transform tools 791transparency

appearance styles and 140, 168backgrounds of images 616block layers 455color flags 633defined 791drop shadows 192, 665Fast Display and 422, 424fills 177, 629layers 536noise effects 640palettes 408–409performance and 525saving in other formats and 384setting 142, 168stroke opacity 171, 649

treble aspect (roughen effect) 663troubleshooting 427TrueType fonts 68, 557, 578tuning

for performance 422, 426two-dimensional drawings 41

effects of conversion 59opening 41saving as 384updating from source drawings 221

TXT format 329

U

underlined text 68, 296, 298, 720

undoing actions 152, 331–332, 588ungrouping object groups 376uniform fills

about 628creating 181defined 177editing 181properties 630

uninstalling Autodesk Impression 35units of measurement

canvas units 82, 546, 570default settings 388–389drawing units 42, 82effects of conversion 65levels of precision 516scale and 82setting for imported content 574sketch settings 82, 516, 546

unlocking 109aspect ratio 608, 769block size 609layers 535scale 84shortcuts 109

unused appearance styles 135unused block definitions 343, 346Update CAD Geometry dialog box

about 772CAD Update Report 775

updatingappearance styles 156, 688block styles 361CAD objects 217CAD update process 215, 772CAD Update Report 226–227, 775Communication Center

content 506drawings with source changes 215,

220, 223, 772modified CAD objects 217object types and 217re-importing geometry 215, 772selecting viewports during 584

upside-down text 69, 302user interface

assigning keyboard shortcuts 596

Index | 837

assigning sticky keys 597illustrated 2options 586

V

variance percentagesblock insertions 477dashed strokes 656outline strokes 661stroked fills 637

vector geometryblocks as 335copying and pasting 329defined 791drawing 758searching for blocks 482

vector segments 111objects 111rollover highlighting 114, 588strokes and 162visual extents and 316, 446

vellum 655versioning 71vertical image tiling 636vertical object alignment 315, 444vertical object distribution 318, 445vertical object size 769vertical offset 768vertical text

effects of conversion 69rotating 297, 300, 721

video card system requirements 14viewports 50

CAD update process and 219–220converting to sketches 41, 76effects of conversion 58, 65, 69importing 50listing 584nonrectangular 223opening 568positioning 37scale and 81selecting for updated files 584updating geometry from 220, 772

views (drawings)3D views 45CAD update process and 221converting to sketches 41defined 791effects of conversion 65magnifying 764model space 50named 50saving in other formats and 384scale of 81sketches 81updating geometry from source

drawings 221zooming 120

views (folder contents) 550virtual pen numbers 66, 572visibility

objects on layers 439visual extents 316, 446

W

warning messagesrestoring 400–401, 589

watercolor styles 182, 629, 643Web browser system requirements 14Web file formats 385Web sites, Autodesk Impression 18weekly notifications 508weight of strokes

outline strokes 659stroke properties 170–171, 649

What to Open (DWG ImportWizard) 567

white backgrounds 616width 127

as properties 608block size 477, 490, 609canvas 516, 546, 570characters 68, 721effects of conversion 65rectangles 757texture images 636

wiggling lines 663

838 | Index

wild-card characters 791searching layers 534

Window optionarea fill objects 276, 729

Window option (crossing)area fill objects 270

Window option (enclosure)area fill objects 270

window selection 112, 738, 745Windows Character map dialog box 721windows, zooming 120, 764wipeout

adjusting after import 57effects of conversion 57, 62

wireframe objects 45CAD update process and 221contour lines 577importing 45

workflow process 41workspace

Block Editor 355defined 792standard 789

X

xclipping 53, 70xlines 69xrefs (external references) 50

CAD update process and 221effects of conversion 59, 70importing drawings with 50paths to 51

Z

Zoom tool 119, 764zooming in or out

CAD update process and 220keyboard shortcuts 764magnifying view 120saving settings 122settings 120, 123Zoom level controls 2

Index | 839

manual autodesk impression 3

Documents

autodesk inventor

autodesk streamline

autodesk mapguide

autodesk intent

autodesk technology

autodesk impression

trademarks of autodesk

mpi designlogo